Manual Hr15 Nissan

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
B ENGINE

SECTION EC EC
E
CONTENTS
APPLICATION NOTICE ............................................ 21 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 48 F
How to Check Vehicle Type ................................... 21 Malfunction Indicator (MI) ....................................... 58
OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 61
CR (WITH EURO-OBD) BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................... 66 G
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 66
INDEX FOR DTC ...................................................... 22 Idle Speed Check ................................................... 69
DTC No. Index ....................................................... 22 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 69
H
Alphabetical Index .................................................. 24 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................. 69
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 26 Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 69
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 71
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 74 I
SIONER” ................................................................ 26 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 74
Maintenance Information ........................................ 26 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 80
PrecautionsforProcedureswithoutCowlTopCover... 26 Fail-Safe Chart ....................................................... 81 J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine ...... 26 Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 82
Precaution .............................................................. 27 Engine Control Component Parts Location ............ 86
PREPARATION ......................................................... 31 Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................... 92
K
Special Service Tools ............................................. 31 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 93
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 32 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............. 95
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 33 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ..................... 95
System Diagram ..................................................... 33 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 102 L
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 34 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ........................111
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 36 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine . 112 M
Speed) .................................................................... 36 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ..................... 38 Mode ..................................................................... 115
Input/Output Signal Chart ....................................... 38 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 117
CAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 39 Description ............................................................ 117
System Description ................................................ 39 Testing Condition .................................................. 117
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ....................... 40 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 117
Description ............................................................. 40 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 118
Component Inspection ........................................... 43 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM) .................. 44 DENT ....................................................................... 127
Description ............................................................. 44 Description ............................................................ 127
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ................. 45 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 127
Description ............................................................. 45 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 128
Component Inspection ........................................... 45 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 128
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 47 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 129
Introduction ............................................................ 47 Ground Inspection ................................................ 133
Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 47
EC-1
DTC U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 134 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 166
Description ............................................................ 134 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 167
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 134 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 168
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 134 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 169
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 135 Component Inspection ..........................................170
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 136 Removal and Installation ....................................... 170
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ..................... 137 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 171
Description ............................................................ 137 Component Description ........................................ 171
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 137 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 137 .171
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 138 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 171
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ..................................... 139 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 172
Description ............................................................ 139 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 173
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 174
. 139 Component Inspection ..........................................177
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 140 Removal and Installation ....................................... 177
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 140 DTC P0132 HO2S1 ................................................. 178
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 141 Component Description ........................................ 178
Component Inspection .......................................... 142 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Removal and Installation ...................................... 142 .178
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER ..................... 143 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 178
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 180
. 143 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 181
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 143 Component Inspection ..........................................183
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 144 Removal and Installation ....................................... 184
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 145 DTC P0133 HO2S1 ................................................. 185
Removal and Installation ...................................... 148 .185
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ..................... 149 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 185
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Overall Function Check ......................................... 187
. 149 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 188
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 149 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 189
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 149 Component Inspection ..........................................193
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 151 Removal and Installation ....................................... 194
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 152 DTC P0134 HO2S1 ................................................. 195
Component Inspection .......................................... 154 Component Description ........................................ 195
Removal and Installation ...................................... 154 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES- .195
SURE SENSOR ....................................................... 155 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 195
Component Description ........................................ 155 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 196
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 155 Overall Function Check ......................................... 197
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 155 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 198
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 156 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 199
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 157 Component Inspection ..........................................201
Component Inspection .......................................... 159 Removal and Installation ....................................... 202
Removal and Installation ...................................... 160 DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 203
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 161 Component Description ........................................ 203
Component Description ........................................ 161 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 161 .203
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 162 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 203
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 163 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 204
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 164 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 205
Component Inspection .......................................... 165 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 206
Removal and Installation ...................................... 165 Component Inspection ..........................................208
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 166 Removal and Installation ....................................... 209
Component Description ........................................ 166
EC-2
DTC P0139 HO2S2 ................................................. 210 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 260
Component Description ........................................ 210 Component Inspection .......................................... 263 A
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Removal and Installation ...................................... 263
. 210 DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION. 264
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 210 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 264 EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................211 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 264
Overall Function Check ........................................ 212 Overall Function Check ........................................ 265
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 213 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 266
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 214 DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME C
Component Inspection ......................................... 216 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 270
Removal and Installation ...................................... 217 Description ............................................................ 270
DTCP0171FUELINJECTIONSYSTEMFUNCTION. 218 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode D
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 218 . 270
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 220 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 271 E
DTCP0172FUELINJECTIONSYSTEMFUNCTION. 226 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 274
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 226 Component Inspection .......................................... 275
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 226 Removal and Installation ...................................... 276 F
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 228 DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 277
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 230 Description ............................................................ 277
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 277 G
Component Description ........................................ 233 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 277
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Overall Function Check ........................................ 278
. 233 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 278 H
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 233 DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 279
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 234 Component Description ........................................ 279
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 235 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 279
I
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 236 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 279
Component Inspection ......................................... 239 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 280
Removal and Installation ...................................... 239 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ....................... 282
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS- Component Description ........................................ 282 J
FIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 240 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 282
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 240 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 282
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 240 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 283 K
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 241 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 284
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 246 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..... 286
Component Description ........................................ 246 Component Description ........................................ 286 L
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 246 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 246 . 286
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 247 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 286
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 248 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 286 M
Component Inspection ......................................... 249 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 287
Removal and Installation ...................................... 249 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 289
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 250 Component Inspection .......................................... 290
Component Description ........................................ 250 Removal and Installation ...................................... 290
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
. 250 ACTUATOR ............................................................. 291
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 250 Component Description ........................................ 291
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 252 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 291
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 254 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 292
Component Inspection ......................................... 256 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Removal and Installation ...................................... 256 FUNCTION .............................................................. 293
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 257 Description ............................................................ 293
Component Description ........................................ 257 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 293
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 259 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 295
EC-3
Component Inspection .......................................... 298 Component Inspection ..........................................336
Removal and Installation ...................................... 298 Removal and Installation ....................................... 337
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR .................................. 338
RELAY ..................................................................... 299 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 338
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 299 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .......................... 343
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 299 Description ............................................................ 343
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 301 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 343
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 302 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 343
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 305 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 343
Component Description ........................................ 305 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............. 344
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 305 Description ............................................................ 344
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 307 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 344
Component Inspection .......................................... 308 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 345
Removal and Installation ...................................... 309 System Description ............................................... 345
DTC P1143 HO2S1 ................................................. 310 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Component Description ........................................ 310 .346
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 346
. 310 Overall Function Check ......................................... 347
Overall Function Check ........................................ 312 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 357
Component Inspection .......................................... 314 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 359
Removal and Installation ...................................... 315 Component Description ........................................ 359
DTC P1144 HO2S1 ................................................. 316 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 359
. 316 Removal and Installation ....................................... 360
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 316 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 361
Overall Function Check ........................................ 318 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 361
DTC P1146 HO2S2 ................................................. 322 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 363
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 363
. 322 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 364
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 322 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ....................................... 371
Overall Function Check ........................................ 324 Component Description ........................................ 371
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 325 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 326 .371
Component Inspection .......................................... 328 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 371
Removal and Installation ...................................... 329 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 371
DTC P1147 HO2S2 ................................................. 330 Overall Function Check ......................................... 372
Component Description ........................................ 330 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 373
. 330 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 377
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 330 Description ............................................................ 377
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 331 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Overall Function Check ........................................ 332 .377
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 333 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 377
EC-4
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 379 . 427
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 380 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 428 A
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ........................ 383 Component Inspection .......................................... 431
Component Description ........................................ 383 Removal and Installation ...................................... 432 EC
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 433
. 383 Component Description ........................................ 433
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 383 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 434
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 384 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 437 C
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 385 Component Inspection .......................................... 441
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 388 Removal and Installation ...................................... 442
Component Inspection ......................................... 390 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................. 443 D
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................ 392 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 444
Component Description ........................................ 392 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 445 E
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Removal and Installation ...................................... 447
. 392 MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ........................... 448
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 392 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 448
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 393 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 449 F
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 394 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 449
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 397 Idle Speed ............................................................ 449
Component Inspection ......................................... 400 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 449 G
Removal and Installation ...................................... 401 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor ..................... 449
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 402 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 449
Component Description ........................................ 402 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 449 H
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Knock Sensor ....................................................... 449
. 402 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 449
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 402 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 449
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 403 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ......................... 449
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 404 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ......................... 449
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 405 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve ......... 449
Component Inspection ......................................... 408 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 450 J
Removal and Installation ...................................... 408 Fuel Injector .......................................................... 450
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ..................................... 409 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 450
Component Description ........................................ 409 K
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)
. 409
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 409 INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 451
L
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 410 DTC No. Index ...................................................... 451
Wiring Diagram .....................................................411 Alphabetical Index ................................................ 453
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 414 PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 455
Component Inspection ......................................... 418 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System M
Removal and Installation ...................................... 418 (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 419 SIONER” ............................................................... 455
Description ........................................................... 419 Maintenance Information ...................................... 455
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Precautions forProcedureswithoutCowlTopCover. 455
. 419 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine .... 455
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 419 Precaution ............................................................ 456
FUEL INJECTOR .................................................... 421 PREPARATION ....................................................... 460
Component Description ........................................ 421 Special Service Tools ........................................... 460
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Commercial Service Tools .................................... 461
. 421 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 462
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 422 System Diagram ................................................... 462
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 423 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 463
Component Inspection ......................................... 426 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................. 465
Removal and Installation ...................................... 426 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
FUEL PUMP ........................................................... 427 Speed) .................................................................. 465
Description ........................................................... 427 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .................... 467
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Input/Output Signal Chart ..................................... 467
EC-5
CAN COMMUNICATION ......................................... 468 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 552
System Description ............................................... 468 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 553
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 469 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ..................................... 554
Description ............................................................ 469 Description ............................................................ 554
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM) ................ 473 .554
Description ............................................................ 473 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 555
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 474 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 555
Description ............................................................ 474 Overall Function Check ......................................... 556
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 476 Component Inspection ..........................................557
Introduction ........................................................... 476 Removal and Installation ....................................... 558
Two Trip Detection Logic ...................................... 476 DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 476 SURE SENSOR ....................................................... 559
Malfunction Indicator (MI) ..................................... 479 Component Description ........................................ 559
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 483 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 559
Basic Inspection ................................................... 483 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 559
Idle Speed Check ................................................. 486 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 560
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .... 486 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 561
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 486 Component Inspection ..........................................563
Idle Air Volume Learning ...................................... 486 Removal and Installation ....................................... 564
Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 488 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 565
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 491 Component Description ........................................ 565
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 491 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 565
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 497 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 566
Fail-Safe Chart ..................................................... 498 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 567
Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 499 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 568
Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 503 Component Inspection ..........................................569
Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 509 Removal and Installation ....................................... 569
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 510 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 570
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 512 Component Description ........................................ 570
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 512 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 519 .570
. 527 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 571
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 572
Mode ..................................................................... 530 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 573
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 532 Component Inspection ..........................................576
Description ............................................................ 532 Removal and Installation ....................................... 576
Testing Condition .................................................. 532 DTC P0132 HO2S1 ................................................. 577
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 532 Component Description ........................................ 577
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 533 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- .577
DENT ....................................................................... 542 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 577
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 543 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 580
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 543 Component Inspection ..........................................582
Ground Inspection ................................................ 548 DTC P0134 HO2S1 ................................................. 584
DTC U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 549 Component Description ........................................ 584
Description ............................................................ 549 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 550 Overall Function Check ......................................... 585
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ..................... 552 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 587
Description ............................................................ 552 Component Inspection ..........................................589
EC-6
DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 591 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Component Description ........................................ 591 . 630 A
. 591 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 630
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 591 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 631 EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 591 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 633
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 594 Removal and Installation ...................................... 634
Component Inspection ......................................... 596 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL C
Removal and Installation ...................................... 597 ACTUATOR ............................................................. 635
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 598 Component Description ........................................ 635
Component Description ........................................ 598 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 635 D
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 635
. 598 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 636
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 598 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL E
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 598 FUNCTION .............................................................. 637
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 600 Description ............................................................ 637
Component Inspection ......................................... 604 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 637 F
Removal and Installation ...................................... 604 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 638
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 605 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 639
Component Description ........................................ 605 Component Inspection .......................................... 642 G
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 605 Removal and Installation ...................................... 642
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 605 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 606 RELAY ..................................................................... 643 H
Component Inspection ......................................... 608 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Removal and Installation ...................................... 608 . 643
I
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 609 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 643
Component Description ........................................ 609 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 643
. 609 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 646 J
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 609 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 649
Wiring Diagram .....................................................611 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 649 K
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 613 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 649
Component Inspection ......................................... 615 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 650
Removal and Installation ...................................... 615 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 651 L
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 616 Component Inspection .......................................... 652
Component Description ........................................ 616 Removal and Installation ...................................... 653
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 616 DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR .................................. 654
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 616 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 654 M
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 618 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 654
Removal and Installation ...................................... 622 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .......................... 660
DTC P0605 ECM .................................................... 623 Description ............................................................ 660
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 625 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 661
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ....................... 626 Description ............................................................ 661
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 627 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 662
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 628 System Description ............................................... 662
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .... 630 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Component Description ........................................ 630 . 663
EC-7
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 663 Component Inspection ..........................................716
Overall Function Check ........................................ 664 Removal and Installation ....................................... 717
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 666 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 718
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 674 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Component Inspection .......................................... 675 .718
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 676 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 718
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 678 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 725
Component Description ........................................ 678 Component Description ........................................ 725
Removal and Installation ...................................... 679 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 726
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 680 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 727
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 681 Removal and Installation ....................................... 734
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 685 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 735
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ...................................... 688 Description ............................................................ 735
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .735
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 688 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL
Overall Function Check ........................................ 688 SOLENOID VALVE .................................................. 737
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 689 Description ............................................................ 737
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 693 .737
Description ............................................................ 693 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 738
. 693 Component Inspection ..........................................743
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 693 FUEL INJECTOR ..................................................... 744
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 695 Component Description ........................................ 744
Component Inspection .......................................... 698 .744
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 699 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 745
Component Description ........................................ 699 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 746
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Inspection ..........................................749
. 699 Removal and Installation ....................................... 749
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 699 FUEL PUMP ............................................................ 750
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 699 Description ............................................................ 750
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 701 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Component Inspection .......................................... 706 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 751
Removal and Installation ...................................... 707 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 752
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 708 Component Inspection ..........................................754
Component Description ........................................ 708 Removal and Installation ....................................... 755
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode HO2S1 ..................................................................... 756
. 708 Component Description ........................................ 756
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 710 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 757
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 713 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 759
EC-8
Component Inspection ......................................... 760 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve ......... 801
Removal and Installation ...................................... 762 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 801 A
HO2S1 HEATER ..................................................... 763 Fuel Injector .......................................................... 801
Description ........................................................... 763 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 802
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode EC
. 763 HR (WITH EURO-OBD)
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 764
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 765 INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 803
Component Inspection ......................................... 767 DTC No. Index ...................................................... 803 C
Removal and Installation ...................................... 767 Alphabetical Index ................................................ 806
HO2S2 .................................................................... 768 PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 809
Component Description ........................................ 768 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System D
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
. 768 SIONER” ............................................................... 809
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 769 Maintenance Information ...................................... 809 E
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 770 Precautions forProcedureswithoutCowlTopCover. 809
Component Inspection ......................................... 772 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
Removal and Installation ...................................... 773 A/T ........................................................................ 809
HO2S2 HEATER ..................................................... 774 Precaution ............................................................ 810 F
Description ........................................................... 774 PREPARATION ....................................................... 814
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Special Service Tools ........................................... 814
. 774 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 815 G
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 775 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 816
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 776 System Diagram ................................................... 816
Component Inspection ......................................... 778 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 817 H
Removal and Installation ...................................... 778 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................. 819
IAT SENSOR ........................................................... 779 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Component Description ........................................ 779 Speed) .................................................................. 820
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .................... 821 I
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 780
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 781 Input/Output Signal Chart ..................................... 821
Component Inspection ......................................... 783 System Description ............................................... 821
Removal and Installation ...................................... 783 CAN COMMUNICATION ......................................... 822 J
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 784 System Description ............................................... 822
Component Description ........................................ 784 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 823
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 785 Description ............................................................ 823 K
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 788 Component Inspection .......................................... 826
Component Inspection ......................................... 792 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM) ................ 827
Removal and Installation ...................................... 793 Description ............................................................ 827
L
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 794 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 828
Component Description ........................................ 794 Description ............................................................ 828
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 796 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 830 M
Removal and Installation ...................................... 798 Introduction ........................................................... 830
VSS ......................................................................... 799 Two Trip Detection Logic ...................................... 830
Description ........................................................... 799 Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 831
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 799 Malfunction Indicator (MI) ..................................... 843
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS .......................... 800 OBD System Operation Chart .............................. 846
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 800 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 851
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 801 Basic Inspection ................................................... 851
Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 801 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................. 856
Idle Speed ............................................................ 801 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .... 857
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor ..................... 801 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 857
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 801 Idle Air Volume Learning ...................................... 858
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 801 Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 860
Knock Sensor ....................................................... 801 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 863
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 801 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 863
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 801 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 869
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ......................... 801 Fail-Safe Chart ..................................................... 870
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ......................... 801 Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 871
EC-9
Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 875 Component Inspection ..........................................946
Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 880 Removal and Installation ....................................... 946
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 881 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 947
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 883 Component Description ........................................ 947
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 883 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 947
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 891 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 948
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 900 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 949
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 902 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 950
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Component Inspection ..........................................951
Mode ..................................................................... 905 Removal and Installation ....................................... 952
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 907 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 953
Description ............................................................ 907 Component Description ........................................ 953
Testing Condition .................................................. 907 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 907 .953
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 954
DENT ....................................................................... 917 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 955
Description ............................................................ 917 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 956
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 918 Removal and Installation ....................................... 958
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 918 DTC P0132 HO2S1 ................................................. 959
Ground Inspection ................................................ 924 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 925 .959
Description ............................................................ 925 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 959
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 925 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 960
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ..................... 928 Removal and Installation ....................................... 966
Description ............................................................ 928 DTC P0133 HO2S1 ................................................. 967
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 928 Component Description ........................................ 967
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 928 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ..................................... 930 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 967
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Overall Function Check ......................................... 969
. 930 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 970
Component Inspection .......................................... 933 DTC P0134 HO2S1 ................................................. 977
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 935 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Component Description ........................................ 935 .977
. 935 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 978
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 935 Overall Function Check ......................................... 979
Component Inspection .......................................... 940 Removal and Installation ....................................... 984
Removal and Installation ...................................... 941 DTC P0135 HO2S1 HEATER .................................. 985
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 942 Description ............................................................ 985
EC-10
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 988 DTC P0327, P0328 KS ..........................................1038
Component Inspection ......................................... 990 Component Description .......................................1038 A
Removal and Installation ...................................... 990 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1038
DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................. 991 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1038
Component Description ........................................ 991 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1039 EC
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1040
. 991 Component Inspection .........................................1041
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 991 Removal and Installation .....................................1041
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 992 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .........................1042 C
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 993 Component Description .......................................1042
Component Inspection ......................................... 995 1042 D
Removal and Installation ...................................... 997 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1042
DTC P0139 HO2S2 ................................................. 998 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1043
Component Description ........................................ 998 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1044 E
. 998 Component Inspection .........................................1048
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 998 Removal and Installation .....................................1048
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 999 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ....................1049 F
Overall Function Check .......................................1000 Component Description .......................................1049
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1001 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1049
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1002 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1050 G
Component Inspection ........................................1004 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1051
Removal and Installation .....................................1005 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1052
DTC P0141 HO2S2 HEATER ................................1006 Component Inspection .........................................1054 H
Description ..........................................................1006 Removal and Installation .....................................1055
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION1056
1006 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1056
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1006 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1056
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1007 Overall Function Check .......................................1057
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1008 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1059
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1009 DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME J
Component Inspection ........................................1011 CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..............................1063
Removal and Installation .....................................1011 Description ...........................................................1063
DTCP0171FUELINJECTIONSYSTEMFUNCTION1012 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode K
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1012 1063
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1012 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1063
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1014 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1064 L
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1016 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1065
DTCP0172FUELINJECTIONSYSTEMFUNCTION1019 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1067
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1019 Component Inspection .........................................1068
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1019 Removal and Installation .....................................1069 M
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1021 DTC P0500 VSS .....................................................1070
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1023 Description ...........................................................1070
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ..........................1026 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1070
Component Description .......................................1026 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1070
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Overall Function Check .......................................1071
1026 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1071
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1026 DTC P0605 ECM ....................................................1072
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1027 Component Description .......................................1072
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1029 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1072
Component Inspection ........................................1031 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1073
Removal and Installation .....................................1031 DTC P1065 ECM ....................................................1075
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS- Component Description .......................................1075
FIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE ....................1032 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1075
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1032 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1075
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1033 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1076
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1033
EC-11
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....1077 Overall Function Check ........................................1109
Component Description .......................................1077 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1109
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Inspection .........................................1111
1077 Removal and Installation ......................................1112
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1077 DTC P1146 HO2S2 .................................................1113
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1078 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1080 1113
Component Inspection .........................................1081 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1113
Removal and Installation .....................................1081 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1114
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Overall Function Check ........................................1115
ACTUATOR ............................................................1082 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1116
Component Description .......................................1082 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1117
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1082 Component Inspection .........................................1119
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1082 Removal and Installation ......................................1120
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1083 DTC P1147 HO2S2 .................................................1121
Removal and Installation .....................................1083 Component Description .......................................1121
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
FUNCTION .............................................................1084 1121
Description ...........................................................1084 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1121
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1084 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1122
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1084 Overall Function Check ........................................1123
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1085 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1124
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1086 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1125
Component Inspection .........................................1089 Component Inspection .........................................1127
Removal and Installation .....................................1089 Removal and Installation ......................................1128
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............1129
RELAY ....................................................................1090 Description ...........................................................1129
Component Description .......................................1090 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1129
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1129
1090 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1129
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1090 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE .......1130
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1090 System Description ..............................................1130
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........1096 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1131
Component Description .......................................1096 Overall Function Check ........................................1132
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1096 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1135
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1096 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1137
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1097 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ..........................1144
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1098 Component Inspection .........................................1145
Component Inspection .........................................1100 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................1146
DTC P1143 HO2S1 ................................................1101 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1146
Component Description .......................................1101 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1146
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1147
1101 Removal and Installation ......................................1147
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1101 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................1148
Overall Function Check .......................................1103 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1148
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1103 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1148
Component Inspection .........................................1105 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1149
Removal and Installation .....................................1106 Removal and Installation ......................................1149
DTC P1144 HO2S1 ................................................1107 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ...............1150
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................1150
1107 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1151
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1107 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................1155
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1108
EC-12
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH .....................................1158 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ...............................1207
Component Description .......................................1158 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode A
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode 1207
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1158 FUEL INJECTOR ...................................................1209 EC
Overall Function Check .......................................1159 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1160 1209
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1163 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1210 C
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ...............................1167 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1211
Description ..........................................................1167 Component Inspection .........................................1214
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Removal and Installation .....................................1214 D
1167 FUEL PUMP ...........................................................1215
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1167 Description ...........................................................1215
FAIL-SAFE MODE ..............................................1167 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode E
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1167 1215
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1168 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1216
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1169 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1217
Component Inspection ........................................1171 Component Inspection .........................................1220 F
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .......................1172 Removal and Installation .....................................1220
Component Description .......................................1172 IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................1221
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Description .......................................1221 G
1172 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1222
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1172 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1225
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1173 Component Inspection .........................................1229 H
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1174 Removal and Installation .....................................1230
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1177 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................1231
Component Inspection ........................................1180 Component Description .......................................1231
I
Removal and Installation .....................................1180 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1232
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .......................1181 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1233
Component Description .......................................1181 Removal and Installation .....................................1235
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ..........................1236 J
1181 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1236
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1181 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...1237
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1182 Fuel Pressure ......................................................1237 K
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1183 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................1237
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1187 Calculated Load Value .........................................1237
Component Inspection ........................................1190 Mass Air Flow Sensor ..........................................1237 L
Removal and Installation .....................................1190 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................1237
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................1191 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ..................1237
Component Description .......................................1191 Knock Sensor ......................................................1237
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ........................1237 M
1191 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .........................1237
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1191 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ......................1238
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1192 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ...................1238
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1193 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve ........1238
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1194 Throttle Control Motor ..........................................1238
Component Inspection ........................................1196 Fuel Injector .........................................................1238
Removal and Installation .....................................1196 Fuel Pump ...........................................................1238
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ....................................1197
Component Description .......................................1197 HR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
1197 INDEX FOR DTC ....................................................1239
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1197 DTC No. Index .....................................................1239
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1198 Alphabetical Index ...............................................1241
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1199 PRECAUTIONS .....................................................1243
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1203 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
Component Inspection ........................................1206 (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Removal and Installation .....................................1206 SIONER” ..............................................................1243
EC-13
Maintenance Information .....................................1243 DENT ......................................................................1336
Precautions for ProcedureswithoutCowlTopCover1243 Description ........................................................... 1336
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine ...1243 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1336
Precaution ...........................................................1244 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..........1337
PREPARATION ......................................................1248 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1337
Special Service Tools ..........................................1248 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1338
Commercial Service Tools ...................................1249 Ground Inspection ................................................ 1342
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ...............................1250 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE1344
System Diagram ..................................................1250 Description ........................................................... 1344
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ..................1251 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1344
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................1253 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1344
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Wiring Diagram ....................................................1345
Speed) .................................................................1254 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1346
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ...................1255 DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ....................1347
Input/Output Signal Chart ....................................1255 Description ........................................................... 1347
System Description ..............................................1255 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1347
CAN COMMUNICATION ........................................1256 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1347
System Description ..............................................1256 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1348
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ....................1257 DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL ....................................1349
Description ...........................................................1257 Description ........................................................... 1349
Component Inspection .........................................1260 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM) ...............1261 1349
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ..............1262 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1350
Description ...........................................................1262 Overall Function Check ........................................ 1351
Component Inspection .........................................1262 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1352
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .........1264 Component Inspection ......................................... 1353
Introduction ..........................................................1264 Removal and Installation ......................................1353
Two Trip Detection Logic .....................................1264 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ........................ 1354
Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............1264 Component Description ....................................... 1354
Malfunction Indicator (MI) ....................................1268 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................1272 1354
Basic Inspection ..................................................1272 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1354
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................1277 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1355
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...1278 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1356
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ..............1279 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1357
Idle Air Volume Learning .....................................1279 Component Inspection ......................................... 1359
Fuel Pressure Check ...........................................1281 Removal and Installation ......................................1360
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .........................................1284 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ......................... 1361
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................1284 Component Description ....................................... 1361
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..............................1290 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1361
Fail-Safe Chart ....................................................1291 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1362
Symptom Matrix Chart .........................................1292 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1363
Engine Control Component Parts Location .........1296 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1364
Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................1301 Component Inspection ......................................... 1365
Circuit Diagram ....................................................1302 Removal and Installation ......................................1366
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..........1304 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ........................... 1367
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ..................1304 Component Description ....................................... 1367
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .........................1312 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ....1321 1367
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1367
Mode ....................................................................1324 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1368
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE1326 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1369
Description ...........................................................1326 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1370
Testing Condition .................................................1326 Component Inspection ......................................... 1372
Inspection Procedure ...........................................1326 Removal and Installation ......................................1372
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1327 DTC P0132 HO2S1 ................................................ 1373
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- Component Description ....................................... 1373
EC-14
1373 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1415
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1373 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1416 A
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1374 Component Inspection .........................................1418
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1376 DTC P0605 ECM ....................................................1420 EC
Removal and Installation .....................................1380 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1420
DTC P0134 HO2S1 ................................................1381 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1420
Component Description .......................................1381 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1422 C
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC P1065 ECM ....................................................1423
1381 Component Description .......................................1423
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1381 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1423 D
Overall Function Check .......................................1382 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1423
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1384 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....1425 E
Removal and Installation .....................................1387 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P0138 HO2S2 ................................................1388 1425
Component Description .......................................1388 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1425 F
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1425
1388 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1426
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1388 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1428 G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1389 Component Inspection .........................................1429
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1391 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL H
Component Inspection ........................................1392 ACTUATOR ............................................................1430
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ..........................1395 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1430
I
1395 Removal and Installation .....................................1432
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1395 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL J
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1396 FUNCTION .............................................................1433
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1397 Description ...........................................................1433
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1398 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1433 K
Component Inspection ........................................1400 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1433
Removal and Installation .....................................1400 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1434
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ..........................................1401 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1435 L
Component Description .......................................1401 Component Inspection .........................................1438
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1401 Removal and Installation .....................................1438
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1401 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1402 RELAY ....................................................................1439 M
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1403 Component Description .......................................1439
Component Inspection ........................................1404 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Removal and Installation .....................................1404 1439
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .........................1405 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1439
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Wiring Diagram ....................................................1441
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1405 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........1445
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1409 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1445
Component Inspection ........................................1412 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1446
Removal and Installation .....................................1412 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1447
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ....................1413 Component Inspection .........................................1449
Component Description .......................................1413 Removal and Installation .....................................1449
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1413 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ...........1450
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1414 Description ...........................................................1450
EC-15
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1450 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................ 1501
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1450 Component Description ....................................... 1501
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1450 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE .......1451 1501
System Description ..............................................1451 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1501
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1502
1452 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1503
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1452 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1507
Overall Function Check .......................................1453 Component Inspection ......................................... 1509
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1456 Removal and Installation ......................................1510
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1458 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................1511
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ..........................1465 Component Description .......................................1511
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................1467 1511
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1467 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1512
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1467 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1513
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1468 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1514
Removal and Installation .....................................1468 Component Inspection ......................................... 1516
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................1469 Removal and Installation ......................................1516
Component Description .......................................1469 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR .....................................1517
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1469 Component Description ....................................... 1517
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1469 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ...............1471 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 1518
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1471 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1523
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1472 Component Inspection ......................................... 1527
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1476 Removal and Installation ......................................1527
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH .....................................1479 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ............................... 1528
Component Description .......................................1479 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode 1528
1479 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1528
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1479 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL
Overall Function Check .......................................1479 SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 1530
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1480 Description ...........................................................
1530
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................1487 1530
Description ...........................................................1487 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1531
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1533
1487 Component Inspection ......................................... 1536
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1487 Removal and Installation ......................................1536
FAIL-SAFE MODE ...............................................1487 FUEL INJECTOR ....................................................1537
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1487 Component Description ....................................... 1537
Component Inspection .........................................1491 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1538
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ........................1492 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1539
Component Description .......................................1492 Component Inspection ......................................... 1542
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Removal and Installation ......................................1542
1492 FUEL PUMP ........................................................... 1543
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1492 Description ...........................................................
1543
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..............................1493 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1494 1543
Component Inspection .........................................1499 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1545
Removal and Installation ......................................1548
EC-16
HO2S1 ...................................................................1549 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ..................1597
Component Description .......................................1549 Knock Sensor ......................................................1597 A
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ........................1597
1549 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .........................1597
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1550 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ......................1597 EC
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1552 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ...................1597
Component Inspection ........................................1555 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve ........1597
Removal and Installation .....................................1556 Throttle Control Motor ..........................................1598
HO2S1 HEATER ....................................................1557 Fuel Injector .........................................................1598 C
Description ..........................................................1557 Fuel Pump ...........................................................1598
1557 K9K D
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1558
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1560 INDEX FOR DTC ....................................................1599
Component Inspection ........................................1562 DTC No. Index .....................................................1599 E
Removal and Installation .....................................1562 Alphabetical Index ...............................................1601
HO2S2 ...................................................................1563 PRECAUTIONS .....................................................1603
Component Description .......................................1563 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- F
1563 SIONER” ..............................................................1603
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1564 Maintenance Information .....................................1603
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1565 Precautions forProcedureswithoutCowlTopCover1603 G
Component Inspection ........................................1567 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine ...1603
Removal and Installation .....................................1568 Precautions ..........................................................1604
HO2S2 HEATER ....................................................1569 Cleanliness ..........................................................1606 H
Description ..........................................................1569 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ...............................1609
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode System Diagram ..................................................1609
1569 Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................1611
System Overview .................................................1612 I
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1570
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1572 Fuel Injection Control ...........................................1612
Component Inspection ........................................1574 Functions Performed ...........................................1613
Removal and Installation .....................................1574 Idle Speed Control ...............................................1616 J
IAT SENSOR ..........................................................1575 Air Conditioning Control .......................................1618
Component Description .......................................1575 Pre/Postheating (Glow Plug) Control ...................1619
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1576 Glow Plugs ..........................................................1620 K
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1577 Cooling Fan Control .............................................1620
Component Inspection ........................................1579 Oil Vapour Rebreathing .......................................1622
Removal and Installation .....................................1579 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) .......................1622
L
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................1580 CAN Communication ...........................................1624
Component Description .......................................1580 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................1625
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1581 Fuel Filter .............................................................1625
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1584 Injector Adjustment Value Registration ................1625 M
Component Inspection ........................................1588 Tightening The High Pressure Pipes ...................1626
Removal and Installation .....................................1589 Checking Sealing After Repair ............................1626
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................1590 Replacing ECM ....................................................1626
Component Description .......................................1590 Replacing Fuel Injectors ......................................1627
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1591 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .........1628
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1592 Introduction ..........................................................1628
Removal and Installation .....................................1594 How to Erase DTC ...............................................1628
VSS ........................................................................1595 NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) .......................1629
Description ..........................................................1595 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .........................................1630
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1595 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................1630
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS .........................1596 Trouble Diagnosis - Symptom .............................1634
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1596 Trouble Diagnosis - Basic Test Procedure ..........1660
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...1597 Engine Control Component Parts Location .........1668
Fuel Pressure ......................................................1597 Wiring Diagram — ECM — ..................................1671
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................1597 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ..........1673
Mass Air Flow Sensor .........................................1597 ECM Terminals And Reference Value .................1673
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ...........................1597
EC-17
Conformity Check ................................................1680 VALUE ....................................................................1731
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1731
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- DTCP0180FUELPUMPTEMPERATURESENSOR
DENT ......................................................................1697 1732
Description ...........................................................1697 Description ...........................................................1732
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..........1698 1732
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1698 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1732
Ground Inspection ...............................................1703 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1734
DTC PC001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ..........1705 Component Inspection ......................................... 1735
Description ...........................................................1705 Removal and Installation ......................................1735
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1705 DTC P0190 FRP SENSOR .....................................1736
DTC P0016 CKP - CMP CORRELATION ..............1708 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1736
DTC P0045 TC BOOST CONTROL SORENOID Component Inspection ......................................... 1739
VALVE ....................................................................1710 Removal and Installation ......................................1739
Description ...........................................................1710 DTC P0200 FUEL INJECTOR ................................1740
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1710 Component Description ....................................... 1740
Component Inspection .........................................1714 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1740
DTC P0070 IAT SENSOR ......................................1715 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1741
Component Description .......................................1715 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1743
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1715 Removal and Installation ......................................1744
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1716 DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR .................. 1745
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1717 Component Description ....................................... 1745
Removal and Installation .....................................1718 1745
DTC P0087 FUEL SYSTEM ...................................1719 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1745
DTC P0089 FUEL PUMP .......................................1721 Removal and Installation ......................................1750
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1721 DTC P0225 APP SENSOR .....................................1751
DTC P0100 MAF SENSOR ....................................1722 1751
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1722 Component Inspection ......................................... 1757
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1724 DTC P0231 FUEL PUMP .......................................1759
Component Inspection .........................................1726 Description ...........................................................1759
DTC P0115 ECT SENSOR .....................................1727 1759
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1728 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1761
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1729 Component Inspection ......................................... 1762
Component Inspection .........................................1730 Removal and Installation ......................................1762
Removal and Installation .....................................1730 DTC P0235 TC BOOST SENSOR .........................1763
DTC P0170 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT Component Description ....................................... 1763
EC-18
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1763 Component Inspection .........................................1804 A
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1765 DTC P0487EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CON-
Removal and Installation .....................................1767 TROL POSITION SENSOR ...................................1805 EC
DTC P0263, P0266, P0269, P0272 NO.1 - 4 CYL- CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
INDER MISFIRE ....................................................1768 1805
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1768 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1805
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1769 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1806 C
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) ......................1770 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1808
Component Description .......................................1770 Component Inspection .........................................1809
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1770 Removal and Installation .....................................1809 D
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1771 DTC P0500 VSS .....................................................1810
Removal and Installation .....................................1773 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1810 E
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR ....................................1774 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1810
Description ..........................................................1774 DTC P0530 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR1811
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Description .......................................1811
1774 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode F
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1774 1811
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1776 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1812 G
Component Inspection ........................................1777 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1813
Removal and Installation .....................................1777 Removal and Installation .....................................1815
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR ...................................1778 DTC P0560 BATTERY VOLTAGE .........................1816 H
Description ..........................................................1778 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1816
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1778 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1817
I
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1780 DTC P0571 BRAKE SWITCH ................................1820
Component Inspection ........................................1783 Description ...........................................................1820
DTC P0380 GLOW CONTROL UNIT ....................1784 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1821 J
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1784 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1822
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1785 Component Inspection .........................................1824
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1786 DTC P0604 ECM ....................................................1825 K
DTC P0382 GLOW CONTROL UNIT ....................1788 Description ...........................................................1825
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1788 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1825
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1789 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1825 L
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1790 DTC P0606 ECM ....................................................1826
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION ................................1791 Description ...........................................................1826
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1826
1791 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1826 M
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1791 DTC P062F ECM ....................................................1828
Wiring Diagram ...................................................1792 Description ...........................................................1828
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1794 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1828
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE ....1795 Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1828
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC P0641 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ...............1830
1795 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1830
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1795 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1831
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1798 DTC P0651 APP SENSOR ....................................1837
Component Inspection ........................................1799 Description ...........................................................1837
DTC P0409 EGRVOLUME CONTROL VALVE CON- 1837
TROL POSITION SENSOR ...................................1800 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1837
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................1800 Component Inspection .........................................1843
EC-19
DTC P0685 ECM RELAY .......................................1845 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1859
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1845 Component Inspection ......................................... 1861
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1847 DTC P2226 BARO SENSOR ................................. 1863
DTC P0703 BRAKE SWITCH ................................1850 Description ........................................................... 1863
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1850 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1863
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1851 COOLING FAN .......................................................1864
Diagnostic Procedure ..........................................1852 System Description .............................................. 1864
Component Inspection .........................................1854 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1866
DTC P2120 APP SENSOR ....................................1855 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 1867
Description ...........................................................1855 Component Inspection ......................................... 1868
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ..........................1869
1855 Wiring Diagram ....................................................1869
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................1855 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ... 1870
Wiring Diagram ....................................................1856 .............................................................................1870
EC-20
APPLICATION NOTICE
APPLICATION NOTICE PFP:00000

A
How to Check Vehicle Type BBS002T8
CR ENGINE AND HR ENGINE

Check the Euro-OBD (E-OBD) discrimination of the vehicle (refer to GI-45, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMA- EC
TION" ) to confirm the service information in EC section.
K9K ENGINE
Confirm K9K engine type with “Model” written on the “IDENTIFICATION PLATE” (Refe to GI-45, "IDENTIFICA- C
TION INFORMATION" ), then refer to service information in EC section.
Vehicle type Engine type
xTKxxxxE11xxE 50kw D
xTKxxxxE11xxA 63kw
EC-21
INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITH EURO-OBD)] PFP:00024
DTC No. Index BBS002TA
NOTE:
● If DTC U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1001. Refer
to EC-134, "DTC U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
to EC-137, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
DTC*1
Items
CONSULT-II Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
2 ECM*3
GST*
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*4 FURTHER TESTING EC-59
MAY BE REQUIRED.
U1001 1001*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-134
U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) EC-137
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-139
P0031 0031 HO2S1 HTR (B1) EC-143
P0032 0032 HO2S1 HTR (B1) EC-143
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-149
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-149
P0107 0107 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC EC-155
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-161
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-166
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-171
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-171
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-178
P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1) EC-185
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-195
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-203
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-210
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-218
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-226
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-233
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-233
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-240
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-240
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-246
EC-22
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items A
3 (CONSULT-II screen terms)
ECM*
GST*2
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-250 EC
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-257
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-264
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-270 C
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC EC-277
P0605 0605 ECM EC-279
D
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-282
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-286
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR EC-291 E
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-293
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR EC-299
F
P1128 1128 ETC MOT EC-305
P1143 1143 HO2S1 (B1) EC-310 G
P1144 1144 HO2S1 (B1) EC-316
P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) EC-322
H
P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) EC-330
P1171 1171 INTAKE ERROR EC-338
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-343 I
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-344
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-345
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING EC-359 J
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING EC-361
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-363
K
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-44
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-371
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-377 L
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-383
M
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-402
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-409
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
EC-23
INDEX FOR DTC
Alphabetical Index BBS002T9
NOTE:
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0107 0107 EC-155
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-383
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-409
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-377
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 EC-134
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-250
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 EC-257
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 EC-137
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 EC-359
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 EC-240
ECM P0605 0605 EC-279
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 EC-282
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 EC-166
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-345
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 EC-291
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 EC-293
ETC MOT P1128 1128 EC-305
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 EC-299
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 EC-218
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 EC-226
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-178
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 EC-185
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 EC-195
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 EC-310
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 EC-316
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 EC-143
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 EC-143
EC-24
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items A
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3
ECM*
GST*2
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-203 EC
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-210
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 EC-322
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 EC-330 C
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 EC-149
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 EC-149
D
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 EC-161
INTAKE ERROR P1171 1171 EC-338 E
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 EC-139
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 EC-286
F
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-246
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-240 G
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EC-44
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*4 EC-59 H
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — I
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 EC-371
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 EC-270 J
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 EC-363
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 EC-343
K
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 EC-344
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-233
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-233 L
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-171
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-171
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-402
M
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 EC-264
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 EC-277
EC-25
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” BBS003ZU
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
Maintenance Information BBS005AP
If any of following part is replaced, always replace with new* one.

If it's not (or fail to do so), the electrical system may not be operated properly.
*: New one means a virgin control unit that has never been energized on-board.
RHD MODELS
● BCM (Models without Intelligent Key system)
● Intelligent Key unit (Models with Intelligent Key system)
● ECM
● IPDM E/R
● Combination meter
● EPS control unit
LHD MODELS
● ECM
Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover BBS003ZV
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine BBS002TD
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MI) to warn the driver of
a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MI to light up.
EC-26
PRECAUTIONS
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, A
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-88, "HAR- EC
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to the short circuit.
C
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MI to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM D
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution BBS002TE
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. E

● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con- F
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition G
switch is turned off.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect negative battery cable. H
SEF289H
● Do not disassemble ECM.

I
● If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is dis- J
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
● If the battery is disconnected, the following emission K
related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
PBIB1164E
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes L
– Freeze frame data
– 1st freeze frame data
– System readiness test (SRT) codes M
– Test values
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

securely with levers as far as they will go as shown in the
figure.
PBIB1512E
EC-27
PRECAUTIONS
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
● Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly. Refer to EC-95, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" .
● Handle manifold absolute pressure sensor carefully to
avoid damage.
● Do not clean air clear element with any type of detergent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents.
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), MEF040D
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SAT652J
EC-28
PRECAUTIONS
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, connect
a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between A
the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact. EC
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
C
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
D
G
SEF348N
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. H

● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
MBIB0291E
K
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces- L
sarily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
M
SEF709Y
EC-29
PRECAUTIONS
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure
to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
EC-30
PREPARATION
PREPARATION PFP:00002
A
Special Service Tools BBS002TG
Tool number
Description
Tool name EC
EG17650301
Radiator cap tester Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and
adapter radiator filler neck C
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in) D
S-NT564
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

Heated oxygen with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut E
sensor wrench
S-NT379
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors G

Heated oxygen a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
sensor wrench
S-NT636
I
KV109E0010 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester
Break-out box
NT825 K
Y-cable adapter
L
M
NT826
EC-31
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools BBS002TH
Tool name Description
Quick connector Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine

release room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG:
Part No. 16441 6N210)
PBIC0198E
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
S-NT653
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant

temperature sensor
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads

cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with
anti-seize lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for
Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for
Titania Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-
907)
S-NT779
EC-32
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
A
System Diagram BBS002TI
EC
MBIB1551E
EC-33
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System BBS002TL
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Manifold absolute pressure sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Fuel injection &
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position mixture ratio Fuel injector
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Battery Battery voltage*3
EPS control unit Power steering operation*2
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air volume) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft
position sensor (PHASE) and the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up
● When starting the engine
● During acceleration
● Hot-engine operation
● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB2938E
EC-34
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses A
heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The
ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about
heated oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-178 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric
EC
(ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal C
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. D
Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
E
● Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
F
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● When starting the engine G
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to H
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., manifold absolute pressure sensor silicon diaphragm)
and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. I
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim J
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared K
to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an
increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
L
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING M
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
EC-35
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or
operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System BBS002TM

Ignition timing
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Power transistor
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Comput-
ing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
● At starting
● During warm-up
● At idle
● At low battery voltage
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) BBS002TO

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Fuel cut control Fuel injector
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*
EC-36
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm with no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 2,500 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed. EC
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-34, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System" . C
EC-37
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL PFP:23710
Input/Output Signal Chart BBS003ZD

Air conditioner switch 1
Air conditioner ON signal*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
EC-38
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
A
System Description BBS003ZE
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C
Refer to LAN-21, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail.
EC-39
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
Description BBS00343
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB0491E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
EC-40
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
A
EC
MBIB0544E
EC-41
MBIB1450E
: Vehicle front : To previous page

1. EVAP canister
EC-42
Component Inspection BBS00344
EVAP CANISTER A
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port (B).
EC
2. Blow air into port (A) and check that it flows freely out of port (C).
3. Release blocked port (B).
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port (B) and check that vacuum pres-
C
sure exists at the ports (A) and (C).
5. Block port (A) and (B).
6. Apply pressure to port (C) and check that there is no leakage. D
PBIB2961E
FUEL CHECK VALVE E

1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side.
A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow
should be directed toward the EVAP canister side.
F
2. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side.
Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not properly functioning in
steps 1 and 2 above, replace it. G
H
SEF552Y
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing. I
SEF989X
L
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pres- 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar, M
sure: 0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.4 kPa (−0.060 to −0.034 bar,
−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.49 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
SEF943S
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-275, "Component Inspection" .
EC-43
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM) PFP:25386
Description BBS003ZF
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-215, "NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)" .
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode
with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and reg-
istration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried out
with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. SEF515Y
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.

Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and all NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to
CONSULT-II Operation Manual, NATS.
EC-44
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB0492E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake H
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold I
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not J
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
K
PBIB1588E M
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
PBIB1589E
EC-45
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
EC-46
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
A
Introduction BBS002TV
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: EC
Emission-related diagnostic information ISO Standard
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of ISO 15031-5
C
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of ISO 15031-5

1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of ISO 15031-5 D
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Service $09 of ISO 15031-5 E
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
F
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × × × —
G
GST × × × — × ×
ECM × ×* — — — —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. H
The malfunction indicator (MI) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two
consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-81 .)
I
Two Trip Detection Logic BBS002TW
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MI will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> J
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MI lights up. The MI lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip>
The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during K
vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MI, and store
DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
L
MI DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying M
up up ing
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst

damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0304 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses (Refer
— × — — × — — —
to EC-48 )
Except above — — — × — × × —
When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting up MI when there is a
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has malfunction and MI circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
EC-47
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MI circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information BBS002TX
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

1
DTC* Test Valve/
Items MI lighting Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test Limit Trip
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up page
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 — — 2 — EC-134
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 — — 2 — EC-137
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — 2 — EC-139
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 × × 2 × EC-143
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 × × 2 × EC-143
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × 2 × EC-149
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × 2 × EC-149
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0107 0107 — — 2 × EC-155
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0108 0108 — — 2 × EC-155
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — 2 × EC-161
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-166
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-166
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-171
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-171
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 × × 2 × EC-178
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 × × 2 × EC-185
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 × × 2 × EC-195
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × × 2 × EC-203
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-210
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — 2 × EC-218
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — 2 × EC-226
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-233
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-233
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 2 × EC-240
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 2 × EC-240
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — 2 × EC-240
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 2 × EC-240
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — 2 × EC-240
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — 2 — EC-246
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-250
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-257
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × 2 × EC-264
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — 2 × EC-270
EC-48
DTC*1 Test Valve/
Items MI lighting Reference A
CONSULT-II SRT code Test Limit Trip
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 up page
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-277 EC
ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-279
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 — — 2 × EC-282
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — 2 × EC-286 C
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — 1 × EC-291
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — 1 × EC-293
D
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — 1 × EC-299
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — 1 × EC-299
ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — 1 × EC-305 E
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 × × 2 × EC-310
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 × × 2 × EC-316
F
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × 2 × EC-322
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × 2 × EC-330
INTAKE ERROR P1171 1171 — — 1 × EC-338 G
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — 2 — EC-343
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — 2 — EC-344
H
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-345
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-359
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-361 I
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — 1 × EC-363
P1610 -
NATS MALFUNCTION 1610 - 1615 — — 2 — EC-44
P1615 J
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — 2 × EC-371
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-377
K
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-383
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-383
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-392 L
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-392
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-402
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-409 M
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MI will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MI during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
EC-49
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-57, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-48, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the
MI and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent
the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-75, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confir-
mation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0112, P1217, P1805, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MI in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0112, 1217, 1805 etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-104, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MI on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
EC-50
Priority Items
A
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
2 Except the above items
EC
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated C
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st D
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem- E
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-57, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE F
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com- G
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. H
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's I
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem- J
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the K
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MI is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and L
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item M
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item
Performance
(CONSULT-II Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
Priority*
indication)
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420
HO2S 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0132
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0133
EC-51
SRT item
Performance
(CONSULT-II Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
Priority*
indication)
HO2S HTR 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater P0031, P0032
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II.
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MI “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC (s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
EC-52
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review A
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
EC
SEF573XB
*1 EC-50 *2 EC-54 *3 EC-54
EC-53
How to Display SRT Code
WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode
with CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) PBIB0666E
How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-51 .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
EC-54
Driving Pattern
A
EC
PBIB2451E
EC-55
● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
● Sea level
● Flat road
● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 72 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 72 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
Pattern 2:
● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of ISO 15031-5.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
Test value
SRT item Self-diagnostic test item DTC (GST display) Test limit
TID CID
P0420 01H 01H Max.
CATALYST Three way catalyst function
P0420 02H 81H Min.
P0133 09H 04H Max.
P1143 0AH 84H Min.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1144 0BH 04H Max.
P0132 0CH 04H Max.
HO2S P0134 0DH 04H Max.
P0139 19H 86H Min.
P1147 1AH 86H Min.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
P1146 1BH 06H Max.
P0138 1CH 06H Max.
P0032 29H 08H Max.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
P0031 2AH 88H Min.
HO2S HTR
P0038 2DH 0AH Max.
P0037 2EH 8AH Min.
EC-56
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC A
With CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. EC
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Touch “ENGINE”. C
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
D
MBIB1303E
J
With GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. K
2. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
L
2. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to M
EC-59, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
– 1st trip freeze frame data
– System readiness test (SRT) codes
– Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
EC-57
Malfunction Indicator (MI) BBS002TZ
DESCRIPTION
The MI is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MI will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MI does not light up, refer to DI-32, "WARNING LAMPS"
or see EC-448 .
2. When the engine is started, the MI should go off.
If the MI remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SAT652J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MI bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
If the MI does not come on, check MI circuit.
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MI will light up to inform the driver that
a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MI in
the 1st trip.
● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
● One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or
MONITOR rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.
When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting up MI when there is
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MI circuit is open by
driver to repair the a malfunction.
EC-58
MI Flashing without DTC
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MI may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag- A
nostic test mode. EC-59, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later, EC-
59, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . EC
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes C
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes D
● Test values
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE E
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit F
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) G
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. H
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MI starts
blinking. I
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
J
PBIB0092E
M
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)

1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-59, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-59, "How to Erase Diagnostic
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-32,
"WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-448 .
EC-59
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MI Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
● These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MI as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MI does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode
I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MI illumi-
nates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are dis-
played, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified
codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a
code.
PBIA3905E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-22, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
59, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR
In this mode, the MI displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1.
MI Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air-fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
EC-60
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.
A
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load conditions. Then make sure that the MI
comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no load. EC
OBD System Operation Chart BBS002U0
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
C
● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MI will come on. For details, refer to EC-47, "Two Trip Detection D
Logic" .
● The MI will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction E
occurs while counting, the counter will reset.
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and F
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
G
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
H
MI (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)

DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) I
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data J
(clear) *1 , *2 *1 , *2 1 (pattern B)
For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-63 .
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-65 . K
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
EC-61
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE”
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
SEF392SA
*1: When the same malfunction is *2: MI will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, MI times (pattern B) without any mal- detected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
freeze frame data will be cleared. without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
EC-62
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-
TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. EC
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART) C
<Driving Pattern C>

Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: D
1. The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%] E
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal F
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
G
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F) H
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. I
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
J
EC-63
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
PBIB2551E
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
EC-64
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
<Driving Pattern A>
EC
G
AEC574
● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. H
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
I
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
J
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
K
EC-65
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
Basic Inspection BBS002U4
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U
– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3
EC-66
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED A
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
EC
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
E
PBIA8513J
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

Refer to EC-69, "IDLE SPEED" . F
650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
SEF058Y
I
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about J
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-69, "IDLE SPEED" .
K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END L
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING M

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-69, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-69, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
EC-67
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-69, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Refer to EC-69, "IDLE SPEED" .
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-257 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-250 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-218, "ECM
Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
EC-68
Idle Speed Check BBS002TQ
IDLE SPEED A
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC
SEF058Y
E
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning BBS002TR
F
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time G
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
H
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning BBS002TS
J
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of K
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
L
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
M
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning BBS002TT
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
● Idle speed is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
EC-69
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light
only small lamps.
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up
– Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform EC-69, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF217Z
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
SEF454Y
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If

“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed is within the specification.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
MBIB0238E
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
EC-70
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. A
EC
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. C
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MI stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MI turned ON. D
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
E
PBIB0665E H
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed is within the specification.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
I
13. If idle speed is not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In
this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below. J
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
K
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. L
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-117, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
M
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check BBS002TU
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-II
EC-71
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pres-
sure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
SEF214Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
sure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
MBIB0277E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
● Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
● The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for
other purposes.
● Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside.
● When installing fuel hose quick connector, refer to EM-18, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because E11 models do not have fuel return system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-71, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Prepare fuel hose and fuel hose clamp for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-18, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.
EC-72
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure.
● Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist- A
ened with gasoline.
● Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube
and No.1 spool. EC
● Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the
No.1 spool on fuel tube.
● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 C
N4710 or 16439 40U00).
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. PBIB0669E
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for D
damage and abnormality.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 E

in).
– A: Fuel pressure gauge
F
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m,
9 - 13 in-lb)
● Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. G
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off. H
MBIB1495E
6. Turn ignition switch ON, and check for fuel leakage.
7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. I
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. J
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. K
10. Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
L
● Fuel filter for clogging
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging M

If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
EC-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction BBS002U1
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-75 .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on EC-79 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.
EC-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence A
EC
PBIB2267E
EC-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Detailed Flow
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-78, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1 .
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
– Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.)
– Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-57, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION"
.)
– Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-82, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MI ON).
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode and check real time diagnosis
results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
results.
>> GO TO 6.
EC-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A
1 1
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC* , and then make sure that DTC* is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA EC
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-80, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order. C
NOTE:
● Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This D
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure. E
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
F
No >> Check according to EC-127, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION

G
Perform EC-66, "Basic Inspection" .
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. H
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE I

With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within
the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. J
Refer to EC-118, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Are they within the SP value?
Yes >> GO TO 9. K
No >> GO TO 8.
SEF601Z
M
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-117, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Is malfunctioning part detected?
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-82, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.
EC-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-
25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-II. Refer to EC-95, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" , EC-112, "CONSULT-II Refer-
ence Value in Data Monitor Mode" .
11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART

1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-57, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK

When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10.
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM.
(Refer to EC-57, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC-
55, "Driving Pattern" .
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MI to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L
EC-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Worksheet Sample
A
EC
MTBL0017
EC-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart BBS002U2
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 ● U1001 CAN communication line
● U1010 CAN communication
● P0107 P0108 Manifold absolute pressure sensor
● P0112 P0113 Intake air temperature sensor
● P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
● P0605 ECM
● P1171 Intake error
● P1229 Sensor power supply
● P1610-P1615 NATS
● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 ● P0031 P0032 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
● P0037 P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● P0132 P0133 P0134 P1143 P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1
● P0138 P0139 P1146 P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P0444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
● P1065 ECM power supply
● P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
● P1122 Electric throttle control function
● P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay
● P1128 Throttle control mother
● P1805 Brake switch
3 ● P0011 Intake valve timing control
● P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
● P0300 - P0304 Misfire
● P0420 Three way catalyst function
● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1211 ESP control unit
● P1212 ESP communication line
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
EC-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Fail-Safe Chart BBS002U3
A
When the DTC listed bellow is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0117 Engine coolant temperature Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning EC
P0118 sensor circuit ignition switch ON or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition C
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or START
D
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
E
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cool-
ing fan operates while engine is running.
F
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0123 in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the nor-
P0223 mal condition. G
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1121 Electric throttle control (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
actuator spring malfunction:)
H
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening
around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to I
20 degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, J
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in Neutral position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.
K
P1122 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1126 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. L
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
When accelerator pedal is depressed, engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm
M
P1171 Intake air system
due to fuel cut.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P2123 sensor in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2128 mal condition.
● When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting up MI when there
is a malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses is continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MI circuit is
open by means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MI circuit are detected and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.
EC-81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart BBS002U5
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-427
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-72
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-421
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-40
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-45
tem
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-66
EC-291,
EC-293 ,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-299 ,
EC-305
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-66
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-433
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-128
Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-155
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 EC-166
EC-171,
EC-233 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-359 ,
EC-361 ,
EC-402
EC-363,
EC-383 ,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 2 2
EC-392 ,
EC-409
EC-178,
EC-185 ,
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-195 ,
EC-310 ,
EC-316
Knock sensor circuit 2 2 3 EC-246
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-250
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 2 2 EC-257
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-277
EC-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL E

EC-279, F
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-282
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-286
cuit G
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-371
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 4 EC-443
H
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-419
ATC-26,
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
MTC-23
I
BRC-8 or
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4
BRC-49
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. J
(continued on next page)
EC-83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel tank FL-8
5 FL-3, EM-
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
32
Vapor lock 5 —
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
line, Low octane)
Air Air duct
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct EM-18
(Manifold absolute pressure sen-
sor —electric throttle control 5 5 5 5 5 5
actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-22
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit SC-15
Starter circuit 3 SC-45
Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM-74
AT-109,
PNP switch 4
MT-16
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-60
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-74
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
EC-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL E

Valve Timing chain EM-50 F
mecha-
Camshaft EM-38
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-50
G
Intake valve
3 EM-60
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ H
Gasket EM-24, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- EM-26, LU- I
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion 9 , LU-10 ,
filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 LU-5
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-6 J
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-12
Thermostat 5 CO-19
K
Water pump CO-17
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 5 CO-7
Cooling fan 5 CO-12 L
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
CO-8
coolant
BL-215 or M
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) 1 1
EC-44
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
EC-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location BBS002U6
MBIB1491E
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Fuel injector 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor
valve
4. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 5. Heated oxygen sensor 1 6. Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
and spark plug
7. Cooling fan motor 8. IPDM E/R 9. ECM
10. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 11. EVAP canister purge volume con- 12. Engine coolant temperature sensor
trol solenoid valve
13. Manifold absolute pressure sensor 14. Knock sensor 15. Electric throttle control actuator
(with intake air temperature sensor)
EC-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
MBIB1498E
: Vehicle front
1. Manifold absolute pressure sensor 2. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 3. Engine coolant temperature sensor
4. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 5. Battery 6. IPDM E/R
7. Fuel injector 8. Ignition coil
(with power transistor)
EC-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MBIB1499E
1. Condenser 2. Oil filter 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor

4. Intake manifold 5. Knock sensor 6. Electric throttle control actuator
7. ECM 8. Battery 9. Data link connector
EC-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
F
MBIB0320E
MBIB1460E
: Vehicle front
1. Exhaust manifold cover 2. Heated oxygen sensor 1 3. Heated oxygen sensor 1 harness
connector
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 harness 5. Heated oxygen sensor 2 6. Oil pan
connector
EC-89
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MBIB1500E
: Vehicle front
1. Park/neutral position switch 2. Cooling fan motor 3. IPDM E/R
4. Fuel pump fuse (15A) 5. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 6. Fuel level sensor unit
harness connector
7. Fuel pump and fuel filter 8. Fuel pressure regulator 9. Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
10. EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve
EC-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
MBIB1501E
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor 2. Accelerator pedal 3. Stop lamp switch F

4. Brake pedal
EC-91
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vacuum Hose Drawing BBS002TJ
MBIB1440E
: Vehicle front
1. EVAP canister purge volume control 2. Intake manifold
solenoid valve
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.
Refer to EC-33, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.
EC-92
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram BBS002U7
EC
MBWA1500E
EC-93
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MBWA1501E
EC-94
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout BBS002U8
EC
MBIB0045E D
ECM Terminals and Reference Value BBS002U9
PREPARATION E
1. ECM is located left hand side of the engine room.
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
F
H
MBIB0274E
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with

levers as far as they will go as shown at right. I
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
J
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
PBIB1512E
L
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. M
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 B ECM ground Body ground
● Idle speed
EC-95
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Below 3,800 rpm after the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
2 GR
heater minute under no load.
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed: Above 3,800 rpm
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 LG [Ignition switch: ON]
relay power supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V

Throttle control motor ● Engine stopped
4 L
(Close) ● Shift lever position: 1st
● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
PBIB0534E
0 - 14V

5 P
(Open) ● Shift lever position: 1st
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
PBIB0533E
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle.
PBIB0527E
Crankshaft position
13 Y
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
PBIB0528E
EC-96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running] EC
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
at idle.
PBIB0525E
Camshaft position sen-
14 R D
sor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running] E
F
PBIB0526E
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed G
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000rpm
quickly after the following conditions are H
met.
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - Approximately 1.0V
– Engine: After warming up
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 I
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
J
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
K
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge L

PBIB0050E
19 LG volume control solenoid
valve
Approximately 10V
M
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
EC-97
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle.
22 O Fuel injector No. 3
PBIB0529E
23 L Fuel injector No. 1
41 R Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
42 GR Fuel injector No. 2
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIB0530E
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
24 Y ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
heater
PBIB0519E
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm (11 - 14V)
Sensor ground [Engine is running]

29 B (Camshaft position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed

30 L (Crankshaft position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature
34 O [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sensor
air temperature.
[Engine is running]
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
45 L Sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
Sensor power supply
46 W (Refrigerant pressure [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
Sensor power supply
47 L (Throttle position sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sor)
EC-98
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped EC
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position: 1st
Throttle position ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
49 Y C
sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
D
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.5V
E
Manifold absolute pres- ● Idle speed
51 W
sure sensor [Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.2V F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground G
54 — ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed

H
56 B (Manifold absolute pres- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sure sensor) ● Idle speed

I
57 Y (Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
0 - 0.1V J
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
K
NOTE:
60 Y Ignition signal No. 3 at idle.
61 V Ignition signal No. 1 PBIB0521E L
79 G Ignition signal No. 4
0 - 0.2V
80 BR Ignition signal No. 2
[Engine is running] M
PBIB0522E
EC-99
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
Approximately 4V - BATTERY
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
Intake valve timing
62 LG
control solenoid valve [Engine is running]
PBIB1790E

66 B (Throttle position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
68 R
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition
69 BR 1.0 - 4.0V
sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
Engine coolant tempera-
72 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
ture sensor
coolant temperature.

73 B (Engine coolant temper- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ature sensor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
74 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
85 LG DATA link connector
● CONSULT-II or GST: Disconnected (11 - 14V)
86 Y CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] 1.0 - 2.5V

Sensor power supply
90 O [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
EC-100
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] 2.5 - 4.0V
[Ignition switch: ON] EC
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
98 G C
position sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
D
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Fully released
101 R Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE E
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V)

Approximately 0V
● Gear position: Neutral F
102 GR PNP switch
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)
G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle control motor [Ignition switch: OFF]
104 G (11 - 14V)
relay
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
H
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
106 W I
tion sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed J
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
109 O Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) K
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition L
ECM relay switch OFF
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds passed after turn- (11 - 14V)
M
ing ignition switch OFF
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
113 R Fuel pump relay
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ON
115 B [Engine is running]

ECM ground Body ground
116 B ● Idle speed
119 G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 G (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 BR [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) BBS002UA
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, A/F feedback control value and the other data
Data monitor (SPEC)
monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
monitor
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values
EC-102
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT

RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA EC
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC*1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT C
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
Manifold absolute pressure sensor × × ×
D
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × × ×

Heated oxygen sensor 1 × × × × × E
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×

Wheel sensor × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × × F
Throttle position sensor × × ×
Intake air temperature sensor × × × ×
INPUT
G
Knock sensor ×
Refrigerant pressure sensor × ×
Closed throttle position switch H
(accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
signal)
Air conditioner switch × × I
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × ×
Stop lamp switch × × ×
EPS control unit × ×
J
Battery voltage × ×
Electrical load signal × ×
K
Fuel injector × × ×
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × ×
Throttle control motor relay × × × L

Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume con-
× × × × M
trol solenoid valve
OUTPUT
Air conditioner relay × ×

Fuel pump relay × × × ×
Cooling fan relay × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater × × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × × ×
valve
Calculated load value × × ×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-50 .
EC-103
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-48, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION ITEMS" .
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
CODE
EC-22, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX]
● Fuel injection system status at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
FUEL SYS-B1 Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
EC-104
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item A
×: Applicable
ECM
MAIN
INPUT EC
Monitored item [Unit] SIG- Description Remarks
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine
● Indicates the engine speed computed from C
speed drops below the idle rpm.
the signals of the crankshaft position sen-
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the
sor (POS) and camshaft position sensor
(PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated. D
● When the engine coolant tempera-
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- ture sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S
× × mined by the signal voltage of the engine ECM enters fail-safe mode. The E
[°C] or [°F]
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. engine coolant temperature deter-
mined by the ECM is displayed.
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen F
HO2S1 (B1) [V] × ×
sensor 1 is displayed.
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
HO2S2 (B1) [V] ×
G
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal
during air-fuel ratio feedback control: ● After turning ON the ignition switch,
RICH: means the mixture became “rich”, “RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mix-
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) and control is being affected toward a ture ratio feedback control begins. H
× ×
[RICH/LEAN] leaner mixture. ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
LEAN: means the mixture became “lean”, clamped, the value just before the
and control is being affected toward a rich clamping is displayed continuously. I
mixture.
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● When the engine is stopped, a cer- J
× three way catalyst is relatively small.
[RICH/LEAN] tain value is indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively large.
● When the engine is stopped, a cer- K
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- tain value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] ×
back correction factor per cycle is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control. L
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehi-
× ×
[km/h] or [mph] cle speed signal is displayed.
● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis- M
BATTERY VOLT [V] × ×
played.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board correc-
tion.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
● The accelerator pedal position sensor sig-
ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × nal voltage is displayed.
ECM terminal voltage signal.
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by
● The throttle position sensor signal voltage
THRTL SEN 2 [V] × is displayed.
● The intake air temperature (determined by
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
× × the signal voltage of the intake air tempera-
or [°F]
ture sensor) is indicated.
TURBO BST SEN ● The signal voltage of the manifold absolute
×
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
EC-105
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] com- ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
START SIGNAL
× × puted by the ECM according to the signals played regardless of the starter sig-
[ON/OFF]
of engine speed and battery voltage. nal.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed
CLSD THL POS
× × by the ECM according to the accelerator
[ON/OFF]
pedal position sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air con-
AIR COND SIG [ON/
× × ditioner switch as determined by the air
OFF]
conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/
× ×
[ON/OFF] neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
PW/ST SIGNAL
× × system (determined by the signal sent from
[ON/OFF]
EPS control unit) is indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the elec-
trical load signal.
LOAD SIGNAL [ON/ ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON
× ×
OFF] and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch
and lighting switch are OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
×
[ON/OFF] switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop
×
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
INJ PULSE-B1 ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
× width compensated by ECM according to
[msec] tain computed value is indicated.
the input signals.
● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
IGN TIMING [BTDC] ×
ECM according to the input signals. tain value is indicated.
● “Calculated load value” indicates the value
CAL/LD VALUE [%] of the current airflow divided by peak air-
flow.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve control value com-
puted by the ECM according to the input
PURG VOL C/V [%] signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA]
advanced angle.
● The control value of the intake valve timing
control solenoid valve (determined by ECM
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] according to the input signals) is indicated.
● The advance angle becomes larger as the
value increases.
● The air conditioner relay control condition
AIR COND RLY [ON/
× (determined by ECM according to the input
OFF]
signals) is indicated.
EC-106
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
MAIN
INPUT A
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condi- EC
FUEL PUMP RLY
× tion determined by ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
input signals.
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY [ON/ C
× control condition determined by the ECM
OFF]
according to the input signals.
● Indicates the condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the input D
COOLING FAN signals).
×
[HI/LOW/OFF] HI: High speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation E
OFF: Stop
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
oxygen sensor 1 heater determined by
[ON/OFF] F
ECM according to the input signals.
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] G
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle air volume learning has not been H
[YET/CMPLT] performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
I
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MI is activated.
[km] or [mile]
● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1 J
O2 SEN HTR DTY
heater control valve computed by the ECM
[%]
● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
AC PRESS SEN [V] × K
pressure sensor is displayed.
Voltage [V]
Frequency ● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable L
[msec], [Hz] or [%] to be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ● Figures with “#”s are temporary
width measured by the probe. ones. They are the same figures as
DUTY-LOW M
an actual piece of data which was
PLS WIDTH-HI just previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
EC-107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored Item
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signal of the crankshaft position
ENG SPEED [rpm] ×
sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × back correction factor per cycle is indi-
cated. ● This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injector
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Engine: Return to the original

trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Timing light: Set ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
● Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
● Engine: After warming up, idle ● Harness and connectors

the engine. ● Compression
POWER BAL- ● A/C switch: OFF ● Fuel injector
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Shift lever: Neutral ● Power transistor
● Cut off each fuel injector signal ● Spark plug
one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coil
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors

COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “LOW” Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan relay
and “OFF” with CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor

ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel injector
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay ON and ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay
OFF using CONSULT-II and lis-
ten to operating sound.
EC-108
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve EC
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
● Harness and connectors
C
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II. D
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

E
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-51, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT Work Support Mode F
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC Work Support Mode
G
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-185
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-195 H
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 EC-310
Refer to corresponding
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 trouble diagnosis for EC-316
DTC. I
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-210
HO2S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-322
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-330 J
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description
K
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
L
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. M
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data ... xx%” as shown in the figure, and the data after the
malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
MBIB0295E
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
EC-109
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN-
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to Incident Simulation Tests in GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diag-
nosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
PBIB0197E
EC-110
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function BBS002UB
DESCRIPTION A
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with ISO 15031 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol. EC
The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual.
D
SEF139P
FUNCTION E
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information. F
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-50, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND
1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
G
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This H
includes:
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO I
● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
● Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
● Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01) J
● Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and Service $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. K
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
L
Service $08 — This diagnostic service is not applicable on this vehicle.
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
M
2. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under driv-
ers side dash panel near the fuse box cover.
MBIB0275E
EC-111
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-

dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
SEF416S
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002UC
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED
tion. tachometer indication.
B/FUEL SCHDL ● See EC-117, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B1 ● See EC-117, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi-
tions are met.
HO2S2 (B1) – Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no load.
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.
tions are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) – Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication.
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V

ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V
EC-112
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
ACCEL SEN 2*1
● Ignition switch: ON EC
THRTL SEN 1 Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
1
THRTL SEN 2*
● Shift lever: 1st Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approximately 1.5V C
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
TURBO BST SEN
● Shift lever: Neutral 2,500 rpm Approximately 1.2V
● No load D
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS E
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON F
the engine ON
Shift lever: Neutral ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF G
● Engine: After warming up, idle Steering wheel: Not being turned. OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
the engine Steering wheel: Being turned. ON
H
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
OFF I
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan: Operating. ON J

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON K
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
● Shift lever: Neutral
INJ PULSE-B1 L
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0° - 10° BTDC M
IGN TIMING
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
PURG VOL C/V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 20 - 30%
● No load
EC-113
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA
● No load
INT/V SOL (B1)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
● No load
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates)
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
Engine coolant temperature: 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less
the engine Engine coolant temperature: Between
COOLING FAN
95°C (203°F) and 104°C (210°F) LOW*2
(212°F) or more HIGH*2
● Engine: After warming up

ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
● Engine speed: Below 3,800 rpm after the following conditions are met.
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
Vehicle has traveled after MI has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C
O2SEN HTR DTY (176°F) Approx. 50%
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
● Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
*1 : Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
*2: Models without air conditioner, cooling fan operates only ON and OFF operation, but CONSULT-II display will change OFF, LOW and
HI depends on engine coolant temperature.
EC-114
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode BBS002UD
A
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with shift lever in 1st position.
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
C
F
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” G
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
H
MBIB0545E K
EC-115
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB0668E
EC-116
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
A
Description BBS002UE
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- EC
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C
MI.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
E
Testing Condition BBS002UF
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)

● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi) F
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
G
● Engine speed: Idle
– After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes. H
● Electrical load: Not applied
– Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead. I
Inspection Procedure BBS002UG
NOTE:
J
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-66, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
K
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” and “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. L
5. If NG, go to EC-118, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
SEF601Z
EC-117
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002UH
OVERALL SEQUENCE
PBIB2384E
EC-118
EC
MBIB1447E
EC-119
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-117, "Testing Condition" .
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode,
and make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because
they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is out of the SP value
even a little.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
PBIB2369E
2. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2332E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
PBIB2332E

1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-120
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL A
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE: EC
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con- C
dition.
>> INSPECTION END D
6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-71, "Fuel Pressure Check" .) E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-71, "Fuel Pressure Check" . F
GO TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
G
H
– Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
– Clogged fuel filter
– Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-427, "FUEL PUMP" .) I
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-71, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
J
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” K

1. Start engine.
the SP value. L
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9. M
9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST

1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
EC-121
– Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-433, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .)
– Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-421, "FUEL INJECTOR" .)
– Intake air leakage
– Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-60, "COMPRESSION PRESSURE INSPECTION" .)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”, in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no load (The engine is
warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
1 time : RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times : RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
SEF820Y
13. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT

Check heated oxygen sensor 1 and its circuit. Refer to EC-178, "DTC P0132 HO2S1" .
>> GO TO 14.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
EC-122
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR A
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
EC
>> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” C
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within D
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END E
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-82, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
17. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” F

OK or NG G
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27. H
I
PBIB2332E
18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
– Engine oil level too high K
– Engine oil viscosity
– Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
– Noise from engine L
– Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
– Valve clearance malfunction M
– Intake valve timing control function malfunction
– Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 32.
19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check for the cause of unsteady air flow passing through throttle body. Refer to the following.
● Crushed air ducts
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
● Improper specification of intake air system part
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
EC-123
20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the
indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR HARNESS
CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connec-
tor for damage and then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor circuit and repair it.
Refer to EC-155, "DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR" .
2. GO TO 26.
NG >> GO TO 23.
23. CHECK “TURBO BST SEN”

Select “TURBO BST SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make
sure that the indication is within the specified value as described
below.
Idle: Approximately 1.5V
2,500 rpm: Approximately 1.2V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25.
NG (More than the specified value)>>Replace manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor, and then GO TO 24.
MBIB1448E
EC-124
24. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A
Check for the cause of air suction at downstream of throttle body. Refer to the following.
● Disconnection looseness, or cracks of air duct
● Looseness of oil filler cap EC
● Disconnection of oil level gauge
● Open sticking, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of blow-by gas control valve
C
● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP canister purge hose, open sticking of EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol valve
● Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
D
● Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system
parts.
● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc. E
>> GO TO 31.
F
25. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. G
Refer to BL-218, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
4. Perform EC-69, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . H
5. Perform EC-69, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
I
>> GO TO 31.

J
below. K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 31.
pressure (MAP) sensor, and then GO TO 32. M
MBIB1448E

Check for the cause of uneven air flow passing through throttle body. Refer to the following.
● Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 29.
EC-125
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG

below.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 30.
NG (Less than the specified value)>>Replace manifold absolute
MBIB1448E
30. REPLACE ECM

1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs.
>> GO TO 32.
31. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”

OK or NG

Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
OK or NG
EC-126
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
A
Description BBS002UI
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent
incident occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. C
Common Intermittent Incident Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation
D
2 The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
3 or 4 The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. E
10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002UJ

F
1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-57, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" . G
>> GO TO 2. H
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. I
Refer to EC-133, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. J
NG >> Repair or replace.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT K

Perform GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
L
EC-127
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:24110
Wiring Diagram BBS002UK
MBWA1502E
EC-128
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
1 B [Engine is running] C

D
(11 - 14V)
0 - 1.0V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay OFF
111 P
(Self shut-off) F
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds passed after turning (11 - 14V)
ignition switch OFF
G
119 G Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
120 G ECM (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002UL H

1. INSPECTION START
Start engine. I
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8. J
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. L
Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E

● Harness connectors M1, E101
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M7
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
EC-129
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS-I
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-133, "Ground Inspection" .
MBIB1502E
1. Body ground E44 2. Body ground E45 3. Body ground E28
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness connectors F1, E48
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E7 termi-
nal 33 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-433, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 8.
MBIB1441E
EC-130
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A
1. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester. EC
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery

voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
C
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. D
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
11. PBIB1630E
E
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. H
NG >> GO TO 11.
I
PBIB1191E
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI J

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
K
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 32.
Continuity should exist. L
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. M
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VII

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 29.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
EC-131
12. CHECK 20A FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace 20A fuse.
13. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS-II

1. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body.
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.

16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-127, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE
ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-132
Ground Inspection BBS002UM
A
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti- EC
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: C
● Remove the ground bolt or screw.
● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
● Clean as required to assure good contact. D
● Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the E
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-38, "Ground Distribution" . F
PBIB1870E L
EC-133
DTC U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
Description BBS002UN
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002UO
The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● ECM cannot communicate to other control
units. ● Harness or connectors
U1001
CAN communication line (CAN communication line is open or
1001 ● ECM cannot communicate for more than the shorted.)
specified time.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002UP

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected, go to EC-136, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-134
Wiring Diagram BBS002UQ
EC
MBWA1503E
EC-135
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002UR
Go to LAN-3, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" .
EC-136
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION PFP:23710
A
Description BBS003ZI
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS003ZJ
The MI will not light up for this diagnosis. D
U1010 Initializing CAN communication bus is mal- E
CAN communication bus ● ECM
1010 functioning.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS003ZK
WITH CONSULT-II F
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-138, "Diagnostic Procedure" G
.
SEF058Y
J
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
K
EC-137
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003ZL
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-137, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
5. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again?
With GST
2. Select “Service $04” with GST.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-138
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL
DTC P0011 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796
A
Description BBS002US
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve C
D
PBIB0540E
J
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid K
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
L
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002UT
Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION M
INT/V TIM (B1)
● No load
INT/V SOL (B1)
● No load
EC-139
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002UU

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Detecting condition Possible cause
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● Intake valve control solenoid valve
P0011 Intake valve timing control There is a gap between angle of target and ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-
0011 performance phase-control angle degree. up portion of the camshaft
● Timing chain installation
● Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for
intake valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002UV
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC-
286 .
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Maintain the following conditions from at least 6 consecutive
seconds
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLAN TEMP/S 60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F)
PBIB0164E
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3 msec
Shift lever Neutral position
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
5. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-141, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (176 - 194°F)
Shift lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
EC-140
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-141, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
A
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002UW EC
1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1. Start engine. C
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
KG >> Go to LU-6, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" .
E
F
PBIA8559J
2. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE G

OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) I

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
K
4. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
M
5. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
PBIB0565E
EC-141
6. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-50, "TIMING CHAIN" .
No >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT

Refer to EM-47, "Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.

For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-252 for CKP sensor (POS), EC-259 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS002UX
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. MBIB0027E
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed. PBIB2388E
Removal and Installation BBS002UY

Refer to EM-35, "ROCKER COVER" .
EC-142
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER PFP:22690
A
Description BBS002UZ
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1
heater control heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature C
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine
is started. D
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater E
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 after warming up ON
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002V0

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION G
ON
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002V1

I
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors

P0031 Heated oxygen sensor 1 sor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater J
0031 heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.) ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors K

P0032 Heated oxygen sensor 1 sor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
0032 heater control circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.)
L
EC-143
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002V2
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-146, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
EC-144
Wiring Diagram BBS002V3
EC
MBWA1504E
EC-145
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition.
heater
PBIB0519E

[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002V4
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-146
2. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
EC
D
MBIB1073E
3. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIA9576J
H

I
● Harness connectors E48, F1
● IPDM E/R connector E10 J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse
K
4. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 24 and HO2S1 terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.
EC-147
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS002V5
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner and
approved anti-seize lubricant.
MBIB1306E
Removal and Installation BBS002V6
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-24, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
EC-148
DTC P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
A
Description BBS002V7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 2 Heated oxygen sensor 2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control heater C
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor Amount of intake air
OPERATION D
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,800 OFF
E
Below 3,800 rpm after the following conditions are met.
ON
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
F
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
Specification data are reference values. G

● Engine speed: Below 3,800 rpm after the following conditions are met. H
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed at between 3,500 to 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no load
I

J
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors

P0037 Heated oxygen sensor 2 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater K
0037 heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors L

P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
0038 heater control circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.)
M
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002VA
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
EC-149
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
. SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-150
Wiring Diagram BBS002VB
EC
MBWA1505E
EC-151
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Below 3,800 rpm after the follow-
ing conditions are met.
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
Heated oxygen sensor 2 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
2 GR
heater under no load.
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000rpm quickly
after the following conditions are met.
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002VC

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-152
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector (1).
– : Vehicle front
EC
– Heated oxygen sensor 2 (2)
– Oil pan (3)
C
D
MBIB1459E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
MBIB1442E
H

I
● 10A fuse
K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-153
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS002VD

2 and 3 8.0 - 10.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω

CAUTION:
SEF249Y
Removal and Installation BBS002VE

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" .
EC-154
DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365
A
Component Description BBS002VF
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor is placed intake man-

ifold corrector. It detects intake manifold pressure and sends the EC
voltage signal to the ECM, ECM uses the signal to compute intake
air volume value.
The sensor uses a silicon diaphragm which is sensitive to the
change in pressure. As the pressure increase, the voltage rises. C
MBIB0278E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002VG
If DTC P0107 or P0108 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229.
Refer to EC-363, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" . F
● Harness or connectors
P0107 Manifold absolute pressure An excessively low voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0107 sensor circuit low input is sent to ECM.
G
● Manifold absolute pressure sensor
P0108 Manifold absolute pressure An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) H
0108 sensor circuit high input is sent to ECM. ● Manifold absolute pressure sensor
● Intake air leaks
I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
J
Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002VH K

NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
WITH CONSULT-II
M
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-155
Wiring Diagram BBS002VI
MBWA1506E
EC-156
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply C
45 L (Manifold absolute [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
D
51 W
sure sensor [Engine is running] E
Sensor ground [Engine is running] F

56 B (Manifold absolute ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
pressure sensor) ● Idle speed
G
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002VJ
1. INSPECTION START
H
Which malfunction (P0107 or P0108) is duplicated?
P0107 or P0108
P0107 >> GO TO 3. I
P0108 >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM J

Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses K
● Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
EC-157
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK MAP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor harness
connector.
MBIB0276E
3. Check voltage between MAP sensor terminal 2 and ground with

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
MBIB0602E
EC-158
5. CHECK MAP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56 EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
6. CHECK MAP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
1. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
H
7. CHECK MAP SENSOR
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace manifold absolute pressure sensor.
J
Refer to EC-127, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K
>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection BBS002VK
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
M
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 5 seconds and then turn ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (manifold absolute
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
NOTE:
● To avoid the affection of intake manifold vacuum, check the
voltage 1 or more minutes past after engine is stopped.
● Because the sensor is absolute pressure sensor, output value
may differ depends on atmospheric pressure and altitude.
5. Measure the atmospheric pressure.
NOTE:
As atmospheric pressure describe on synoptic chart is value at SEF006P
sea level, please compensate the actual pressure with the fol-
lowing chart.
EC-159
Altitude Compensated pressure

0m 0hPa
200m -24hPa
400m -47hPa
600m -70hPa
800m -92hPa
1,000m -114hPa
1,500m -168hPa
2,000m -218hPa
6. Check the manifold absolute pressure sensor value corresponds to the atmospheric pressure.
Atmospheric pressure Voltage
800hPa 3.2 - 3.6V
850hPa 3.4 - 3.8V
900hPa 3.7 - 4.1V
960hPa 3.9 - 4.3V
1,000hPa 4.1 - 4.5V
1,050hPa 4.3 - 4.7V
7. Start engine and let it idle. MBIB0655E
8. Check the voltage between ECM terminal 51 and ground at

idling and confirm the voltage difference between engine is
stopped and at idling is within following chart.
Intake manifold vacuum Voltage difference
-40kPa (-300mmHg) 1.6 - 2.0V
-53.3kPa (-400mmHg) 2.2 - 2.6V
-66.7kPa (-500mm) 2.8 - 3.2V
-80kPa (-600mmHg) 3.4 - 3.8V
SEF487R
Removal and Installation BBS002VL

Refer to EM-18, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
EC-160
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description BBS002VM
The intake air temperature sensor is built into manifold absolute

pressure sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and EC
transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C
MBIB0276E
E
<Reference data>
Intake air
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ F
temperature °C (°F)
25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1
80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 G
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: H
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. I
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002VN
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
P0112 Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0112 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0113 Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is K
● Intake air temperature sensor
0113 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
Intake air temperature sensor circuit Intake air temperature is determined as 30°C (86°F). M
EC-161
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002VO
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-162
Wiring Diagram BBS002VP
EC
MBWA1507E
EC-163
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002VQ

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (with
intake air temperature sensor) harness connector.
MBIB0276E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0300E
EC-164
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace manifold absolute pressure sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G

H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS002VR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR I

1. Check resistance between manifold absolute pressure sensor
terminals 3 and 4 under the following conditions.
J
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
2. If NG, replace manifold absolute pressure sensor (with intake air K

temperature sensor).
L
MBIB0276E
SEF012P
Removal and Installation BBS002VS

EC-165
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description BBS002VT
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 72 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P
CAUTION:
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002VU
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P0117 Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor
P0118 Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
0118 sensor circuit high input is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
Engine coolant temper-
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.
EC-166
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002VV
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-169, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
SEF058Y
F
WITH GST
G
EC-167
Wiring Diagram BBS002VW
MBWA1508E
EC-168
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002VX
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS A

2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. EC
MBIB1502E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. I
K
MBIB0279E
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with L

Voltage: Approximately 5V M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB0080E
EC-169
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 73.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS002VY
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
Removal and Installation BBS002VZ

Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT" .
EC-170
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description BBS002W0
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002W1

F
● Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2* G
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002W2

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
P0122 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 ● Harness or connectors
0122 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.) J
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 ● Electric throttle control actuator
0123 circuit high input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2) K
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode M
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
EC-171
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002W3
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-172
Wiring Diagram BBS002W4
EC
MBWA1509E
EC-173
CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensor power supply
47 L [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
49 Y Throttle position sensor 1
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
68 R Throttle position sensor 2
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002W5

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-174
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
EC
D
MBIB0308E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0082E H
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit.
L
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
M
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram
47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-173
91 APP sensor terminal 5 EC-394
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-175
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-176
Component Inspection BBS002W6
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR A

3. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
4. Set shift lever to 1st position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 49 (TP sensor 1 signal),
68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi- C
tions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage D
49 Fully released More than 0.36V
(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
Fully released Less than 4.75V E
68
(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next MBIB1443E
F
step.
8. Perform EC-69, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G
Removal and Installation BBS002W7
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-18, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . H
EC-177
DTC P0132 HO2S1
DTC P0132 HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description BBS002W8
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002W9

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002WA
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.
SEF301UA
P0132 Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0132 circuit high voltage is sent to ECM.
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
EC-178
DTC P0132 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002WB
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. D
.
E
SEF174Y
WITH GST G
H
EC-179
DTC P0132 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS002WC
MBWA1510E
EC-180
DTC P0132 HO2S1
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running] D
heater
E
PBIB0519E

● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm (11 - 14V) F
[Engine is running]
(Periodically change) G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor) H
● Idle speed
I
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002WD

J
K
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-181
DTC P0132 HO2S1
2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1 (2).
● : Vehicle front
● Exhaust manifold cover (1)
Tightening torque: 50 N·m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB1493E
3. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S1
terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. MBIB1494E
4. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 4 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER

Check connectors for water
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-182
DTC P0132 HO2S1
6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. EC
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS002WE
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 E

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT- F
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow- G
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
H
MBIB0301E
J
● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 sec- K
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown in the figure.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. L
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

M
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
EC-183
DTC P0132 HO2S1
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V MBIB0018E
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS002WF

EC-184
DTC P0133 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS002WG

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the EC
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts C
D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002WH I

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J
HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Changes more than 5 times dur- K
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002WI

L
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis
measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The time
is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback
control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index. M
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
PBIB2991E
EC-185
DTC P0133 HO2S1
P0133 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The response of the voltage signal from the ● Fuel pressure
0133 circuit slow response sensor takes more than the specified time. ● Fuel injector
● Intake air leak
● Exhaust gas leak
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002WJ
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
● Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4. Touch “START”.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
SEF338Z
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-

played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take approximately 40 to 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 2,400 - 3,800 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE More than 80 km/h (50 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.8 - 7.0 msec
Shift lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from SEF339Z
step 2.
EC-186
DTC P0133 HO2S1
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-189, "Diagnostic A
Procedure" .
EC
SEF658Y
D
Overall Function Check BBS002WK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed. E
WITH GST
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and ground. F
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more G
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V H
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V
4. If NG, go to EC-189, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I
MBIB0018E
EC-187
DTC P0133 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS002WL
MBWA1510E
EC-188
DTC P0133 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 7.0V
heater
E
PBIB0519E

[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
I
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002WM

J
K
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-189
DTC P0133 HO2S1
● : Vehicle front
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB1493E
3. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
MBIB0649E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-190
DTC P0133 HO2S1
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
C
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II F
G
3. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec-
tor, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle
speed.
H
4. Stop engine and reconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor
harness connector.
5. Make sure that DTC P0107 is displayed.
I
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-57, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
J
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. MBIB0276E
K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or DTC P0172 (Refer to EC-218 or EC-226 ).
No >> GO TO 6.
L
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power MBIB1494E
EC-191
DTC P0133 HO2S1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK PCV VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace PCV valve.
10. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-192
DTC P0133 HO2S1
Component Inspection BBS002WN
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 A

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT- EC
II.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow- C
ing steps.
D
MBIB0301E
F
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 sec- G
onds.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. H

I
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
M
CAUTION:
EC-193
DTC P0133 HO2S1
Without CONSULT-II
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V MBIB0018E
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS002WO

EC-194
DTC P0134 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS002WP

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002WQ I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Changes more than 5 times dur- K
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002WR

L
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is
not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately
0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is
within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks M
that this time is not inordinately long.
SEF237U
P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0134 circuit no activity detected approx. 0.3V.
EC-195
DTC P0134 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002WS
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0134” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
PBIB0544E

If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from PBIB0545E
step 2.
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-199, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
SEC750C
EC-196
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Overall Function Check BBS002WT
A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST EC
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- C
● The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V.
4. If NG, go to EC-199, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D
MBIB0018E F
EC-197
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS002WU
MBWA1510E
EC-198
DTC P0134 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 7.0V
heater
E
PBIB0519E

● Engine speed Above 3,600 rpm (11 - 14V) F
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
I
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002WV

J
K
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-199
DTC P0134 HO2S1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-200
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Component Inspection BBS002WW

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
D
MBIB0301E
F
onds.

I
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
M
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
EC-201
DTC P0134 HO2S1
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V MBIB0018E
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS002WX

EC-202
DTC P0138 HO2S2
DTC P0138 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
A
Component Description BBS002WY
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas. EC
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
engine control operation.
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002WZ

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
HO2S2 (B1) ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi- 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
tions are met.
– Engine: After warming up G
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) LEAN ←→ RICH
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load.
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002X0
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen I
storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. J
SEF305UA
● Harness or connectors M
EC-203
DTC P0138 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002X1
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
5. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
. SEF189Y
WITH GST
EC-204
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS002X2
EC
MBWA1511E
EC-205
DTC P0138 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
2 GR
[Ignition switch ON]
[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002X3

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-206
DTC P0138 HO2S2
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
– : Vehicle front
EC
– Oil pan (3)
C
terminal 4.
D
Continuity should exist. MBIB1459E

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 3.
F
G
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. H
Continuity should not exist. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. J
4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER K

Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-207
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Component Inspection BBS002X4

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2(B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
SEF662Y
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
MBIB1402E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.61V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.52V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
EC-208
DTC P0138 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times. A
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.61V at least once during this
procedure.
EC
If the voltage is above 0.61V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear C
position.
The voltage should be below 0.52V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure. D
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant. F
Removal and Installation BBS002X5

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . G
EC-209
DTC P0139 HO2S2
Component Description BBS002X6

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002X7

tions are met.
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002X8

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condi-
tion such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 It takes more time for the sensor to respond ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
0139 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
● Intake air leak
EC-210
DTC P0139 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002X9
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and EC
“COND3” are completed.
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. C
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry this procedure from step 2 in
Procedure for COND1. D
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
E
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°(32 to 86°F).
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
4. Let engine idle 1 minute.
5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. G
7. Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
H
8. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step.
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II I
screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 60 seconds.)
J
ENG SPEED More than 1,500 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 1.0 msec
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105 °C (158 - 221°F) K
Shift level Suitable position
PBIB0552E
NOTE:
● If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2 in Procedure for COND1.
● If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen before Procedure for

COND2 is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in Procedure for COND2.
EC-211
DTC P0139 HO2S2
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completely from the
above condition [step 9] until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
NOTE:
If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II
screen before Procedure for COND3 is conducted, it is unnec-
essary to conduct step 1 in Procedure for COND3.
PBIB0553E
Procedure for COND3

1. Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take a
maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-214, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the follow-
ing.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place
(soak the vehicle).
b. Turn ignition switch ON and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA SEF668Y
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

c. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II.
d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°(158°F), go to procedure for COND1 step 3.
Overall Function Check BBS002XA
WITH GST
3. Start engine and keep the engine between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
at least 10 times.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd
gear position.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec- MBIB0020E
EC-212
DTC P0139 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS002XB
EC
MBWA1511E
EC-213
DTC P0139 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
2 GR
[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002XC

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-214
DTC P0139 HO2S2
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. F
G
speed.
harness connector. H
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . I
J
Yes or No
K
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-218 or EC-226 .
No >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector (1). M
– : Vehicle front
– Oil pan (3)
terminal 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-215
DTC P0139 HO2S2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS002XD

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
SEF662Y
EC-216
DTC P0139 HO2S2
A
EC
MBIB1402E D
CAUTION: E
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. G
H
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load I
at least 10 times.
procedure. J
sary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check K
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear
position.
The voltage should be below 0.52V at least once during this MBIB0020E L
procedure.
CAUTION: M
Removal and Installation BBS002XE

EC-217
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002XF
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MI (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Fuel injector

P0171 Fuel injection system too ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leak
0171 lean large. ● Incorrect fuel pressure
(The mixture ratio is too lean.) ● Lack of fuel
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002XG
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, perform-
ing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to SEF215Z
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table
below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
EC-218
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
Engine coolant temperature T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). A
(T) condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. EC
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
C
WITH GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. D
tor.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. E
harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0107 is F
detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0107.
8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. G
9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be MBIB0276E
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-

222, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min-
utes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. J
K
L
Engine coolant temperature T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). M
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-222, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-219
Wiring Diagram BBS002XH
MBWA1512E
EC-220
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at E
idle.
PBIB0529E
41 R Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE F
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
G
H
PBIB0530E
Approximately 7.0V
I
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 1 J
heater
PBIB0519E
K
[Engine is running] L
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
EC-221
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002XI
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
MBIB0649E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Listen for an intake air leak after the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connec-
tor (1).
terminal 4.
5. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1
terminal 4 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. MBIB1494E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-222
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE A
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-72, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. C
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D

● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-427, "FUEL PUMP" .) E
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-71, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
● Fuel lines (Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .)
● Fuel filter for clogging F
>> Repair or replace.

G
6. CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSUR SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
H
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal with CONSULT-II.
Approximately 1.5V: at idling I
Approximately 1.2V: at 2,500 rpm
With GST J
2. Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
K
Approximately 1.5V: at idling
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the manifold absolute pressure
sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-155, "DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES- M
SURE SENSOR" .
EC-223
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each fuel circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
MBIB0302E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, EC-421, "FUEL INJECTOR" .
8. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
The fuel injector harness connectors should remain connected.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays
out from fuel injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
PBIB1726E
EC-224
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A
>> INSPECTION END EC
EC-225
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002XJ
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
P0172 Fuel injection system too ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leak
0172 rich large.
(The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Incorrect fuel pressure
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002XK
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SULT-II.
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-230, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to SEF215Z
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time. Refer to the table
below.
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
EC-226
If engine starts, go to EC-230, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and
check for fouling, etc. A
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
tor. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle C
speed.
harness connector. D
5. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0107 is
detected.
6. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0107. E
8. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be MBIB0276E
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- F
230, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. G
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below. H
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con- I
J
K
L
If engine starts, go to EC-230, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
M
EC-227
Wiring Diagram BBS002XL
MBWA1512E
EC-228
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at E
idle.
PBIB0529E
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
G
H
PBIB0530E
Approximately 7.0V
I
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 1 J
heater
PBIB0519E
K
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
EC-229
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002XM

MBIB0649E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connec-
tor (1).
terminal 4.
terminal 4 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. MBIB1494E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

At idling: 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-230
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-427, "FUEL PUMP" .)
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-71, "Fuel Pressure Check" .) EC
C
6. CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSUR SENSOR D
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts. E
2. Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal with CONSULT-II.
Approximately 1.5V: at idling F
With GST
G
2. Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
Approximately 1.5V: at idling H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 7.
sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-155, "DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
SURE SENSOR" . J
EC-231
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
MBIB0302E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to EC-421, "FUEL INJECTOR" .

1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
3. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-232
A
Component Description BBS002XN

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002XO

F
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2* G
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002XP

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
0222 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) J
● Electric throttle control actuator
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor (TP sensor 1)
0223 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM.
● Accelerator pedal position sensor K
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
M
degrees.
EC-233
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002XQ
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-234
Wiring Diagram BBS002XR
EC
MBWA1513E
EC-235
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002XS
1. RETIGHTEN GROUND CONNECTIONS

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-236
EC
D
MBIB0308E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
PBIB0082E H


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-237
>> INSPECTION END
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-238
Component Inspection BBS002XT
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR A

68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi- C
tions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage D
Fully released Less than 4.75V E
68
F
step.
8. Perform EC-69, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G
Removal and Installation BBS002XU

Refer to EM-18, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . H
EC-239
DTC P0300 - P0304 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 4 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
FIRE PFP:00000
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002XV
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MI will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revo-
lutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MI will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MI will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MI will only light
when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor
signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire ● Improper spark plug
Multiple cylinder misfire.
0300 detected ● Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire ● Incorrect fuel pressure
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 detected
● The fuel injector circuit is open or
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire shorted
0302 detected
● Fuel injector
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire ● Intake air leak
0303 detected
● The ignition signal circuit is open or
shorted
● Lack of fuel
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire
No. 4 cylinder misfires. ● Drive plate or flywheel
0304 detected
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002XW
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE:
EC-240
FIRE
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode A
with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. EC
4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
. C
NOTE:
ing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E
D
time. Refer to the table below. E
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con- F
G
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the feaze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
H
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. I
Engine speed Time

Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes J
Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
K
WITH GST
L
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002XX

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. M
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING

Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-241
FIRE
With CONSULT-II
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
MBIB0302E
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each fuel injector harness connector (1) one at
a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
● : Vehicle front
MBIB1458E
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 9.

Does each fuel injector make an operating sound at idle?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Check fuel injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-421,
"FUEL INJECTOR" .
PBIB1986E
EC-242
FIRE
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I A
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustibles.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres- C
sure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel D
pressure.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri- E
cal discharge from the ignition coils. MBIB0277E
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be

checked. F
8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm G
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark H
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.
Spark should be generated. I
CAUTION:
● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock J
PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage
becomes 20kV or more.
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. K
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
M
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug
and the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits, Refer to EC-433, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
EC-243
FIRE
7. CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to MA-36, "Changing Spark Plugs"
.
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 8.
SEF156I
8. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
and the grounded portion.
OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-36, "Changing
Spark Plugs" .
9. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-60, "COMPRESSION PRESSURE INSPECTION" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-71, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
EC-244
FIRE
12. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. EC
13. CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSUR SENSOR C
With CONSULT-II
Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
D
With GST E
Check manifold absolute pressure sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. G
sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-155, "DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
SURE SENSOR" . H
14. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-82, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or replace. J
15. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC

K
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-57, "HOW TO ERASE
L
>> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M
>> INSPECTION END
EC-245
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
Component Description BBS002XY
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
MBIB0306E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002XZ
The MI will not light up for these self-diagnoses.

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0327 input sent to ECM.
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
● Knock sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002Y0
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-246
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Wiring Diagram BBS002Y1
EC
MBWA0571E
EC-247
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002Y2
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0306E
3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.
EC-248
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
EC
MBIB1502E E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 54 and knock sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. H
Continuity should exist
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J

>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection BBS002Y3
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. M
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
PBIB0253E
Removal and Installation BBS002Y4
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-74, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
EC-249
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
Component Description BBS002Y5
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev-
olution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
PBIB0562E
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
PBIB2382E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002Y6

ENG SPEED
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002Y7
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of
engine cranking.
(The sensor circuit is open or
P0335 Crankshaft position ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position shorted.)
0335 sensor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is
running.
● Signal plate
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in
the normal pattern during engine running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002Y8
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
EC-250
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with A
CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed. EC
.
C
SEF058Y
D
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. E
EC-251
Wiring Diagram BBS002Y9
MBWA1515E
EC-252
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle. E
PBIB0527E
Crankshaft position
13 Y
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V
F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm G
PBIB0528E
H
I
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay J
111 P OFF
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds passed after turning (11 - 14V) K
ignition switch OFF
120 G ECM (11 - 14V)
L
EC-253
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002YA

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
MBIB1078E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SEF479Y

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-254
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 30 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. D
5. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 6.
H
6. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
J
7. CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace the signal plate. L

Refer to EC-127, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
>> INSPECTION END
EC-255
Component Inspection BBS002YB
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 (+) - 1 (-)
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 1 (-)
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MBIB0024E
Removal and Installation BBS002YC

EC-256
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
A
Component Description BBS002YD
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of

camshaft (intake) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft posi- EC
tion sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification C
signals.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause D
the gap with the sensor to change.
PBIB0562E
change.
E
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
PBIB2382E
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002YE
J
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0340 Camshaft position sensor
K
● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM ● Camshaft (Intake)
0340 (PHASE) circuit
during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-45 .)
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-45 .) L
pattern during engine running.
● Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002YF

M
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
EC-257
onds at idle speed.
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 sec-
onds.
. SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-258
Wiring Diagram BBS002YG
EC
MBWA1516E
EC-259
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
PBIB0525E
Camshaft position
14 R
sensor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0526E

29 B (Camshaft position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ignition switch OFF
120 G ECM (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002YH
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-45, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
EC-260
Refer to EC-133, "Ground Inspection" . EC
E
MBIB1502E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. G
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness H
connector.
I
MBIB0279E
K
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF479Y

● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
EC-261
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
PBIB0565E

>> INSPECTION END
EC-262
Component Inspection BBS002YI
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) A

2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor. EC
PBIB0563E
F
3 (+) - 1 (-) G
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 1 (-)
H
I
MBIB0024E
Removal and Installation BBS002YJ
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) J

Refer to EM-38, "CAMSHAFT" .
EC-263
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002YK
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen

sensors 1 and 2.
A three way catalyst (Manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2
approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (Manifold)
malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YF
● Three way catalyst (Manifold)
● Exhaust tube
● Three way catalyst (Manifold) does not operate ● Intake air leak
P0420 Catalyst system efficiency properly.
● Fuel injector
0420 below threshold ● Three way catalyst (Manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity. ● Fuel injector leak
● Spark plug
● Improper ignition timing
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002YL
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
● Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
5. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step 10
7. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
PBIB0566E
EC-264
8. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take A
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158 °F) and then retest from step 1.
EC
PBIB0567E
D
(soak the vehicle)
b. Turn ignition switch ON and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA E
c. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/
S” indication on CONSULT-II. F
d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°(158°F), go
to step 3.
G
SEF013Y
9. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. H

10. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" . I
SEF535Z K
Overall Function Check BBS002YM
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a 1st L
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. M
5. Open engine hood.
6. Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 sig-
nal) and ground, and ECM terminal 16 (HO2S2 signal) and
ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
MBIB0018E
EC-265
8. Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminal 16 and ground is very less than that of
ECM terminal 35 and ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst
(manifold) does not operate properly. Go to EC-266, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
NOTE: MBIB0124E
If the voltage at terminal 35 does not switch periodically more than 5
times within 10 seconds at step 8, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0133 first. (See EC-189 .)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002YN
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (Manifold).
MBIB0649E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-266
4. CHECK FUEL INJECTORS A
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Refer to Wiring Diagram for FUEL INJECTOR, EC-422 .
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42 and EC
Voltage : Battery voltage
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Perform EC-423, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D
E
MBIB0030E
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

F
CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustibles.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres- H
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel I
pressure.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri- J

checked. K
8. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm L
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark M
portion.
CAUTION:
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-267
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits, Refer to EC-433, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
7. CHECK SPARK PLUGS

OK or NG
spark plug type, refer to MA-36, "Changing Spark Plugs"
.
2. GO TO 8.
SEF156I

OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-36, "Changing
Spark Plugs" .

2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
Refer to EM-32, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
3. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
OK or NG
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
EC-268
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END EC

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (Manifold).
EC-269
DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
PFP:14920
Description BBS002YO
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Battery Battery voltage*1 EVAP canister EVAP canister purge volume
Throttle position sensor Throttle position purge flow control control solenoid valve

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002YP

PURG VOL C/V
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002YQ
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent shorted.)
control solenoid valve circuit
0444 to ECM through the valve
open ● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
EC-270
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002YR
A
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: EC
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
D
.
E
SEF058Y
G
WITH GST
H
EC-271
Wiring Diagram BBS002YS
MBWA1517E
EC-272
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
E
EVAP canister purge
PBIB0050E
valve
Approximately 10V F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm G
(More than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition switch I
ECM relay OFF
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds passed after turning J
(11 - 14V)
ignition switch OFF
120 G (11 - 14V) K
EC-273
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002YT
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
MBIB1076E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0148E

● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 19 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-274
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A
With CONSULT-II
EC
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D
PBIB0569E
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
H
I
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS002YU J
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control K
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
L
100% Yes
0% No
M
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between termi-
Yes
nals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB0150E
EC-275
Removal and Installation BBS002YV

EC-276
DTC P0500 VSS
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
A
Description BBS002YW
NOTE:
● If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1001. EC
Refer to EC-134, "DTC U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
● If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.
Refer to EC-137, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . C
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” through CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN
communication line.
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002YX
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
(The CAN communication line is open or
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from shorted.)
P0500 F
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
0500
even when vehicle is being driven.
● Wheel sensor
● Combination meter G
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002YY
CAUTION: H
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. J
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
K
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-
II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-278, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step. L
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec- M
onds.
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF SEF196Y
EC-277
DTC P0500 VSS
Overall Function Check BBS002YZ
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002Z0
1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (models without ESP) or BRC-49, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS"
(models with ESP).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-278
DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
A
Component Description BBS002Z1
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC
PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002Z2
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605 G
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE H
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
I
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A
degrees) by the return spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002Z3 J

Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCE-
DURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, per-
form PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. K
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. M
.
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-279
DTC P0605 ECM
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
ON.
.
SEF058Y
With GST
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
ON.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
.
SEF058Y
With GST
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
2. Select Service $04 with GST.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
EC-280
DTC P0605 ECM
2. REPLACE ECM A
1. Replace ECM.
Re-communicating Function" . EC
5. Perform EC-69, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . C
>> INSPECTION END

D
EC-281
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
Component Description BBS002Z5
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002Z6
P1065 ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
ECM power supply circuit open or shorted.]
1065 properly.
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002Z7
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
ON.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-282
Wiring Diagram BBS002Z8
EC
MBWA1518E
EC-283
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0026E

● 20A fuse
● IPDM E/R harness connector E7
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-284
With CONSULT-II
EC
C
With GST D
3. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. E
Yes or No F
Yes >> GO TO 5.
G
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
H
I
J
>> INSPECTION END
EC-285
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796
Component Description BBS002ZA
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002ZB

INT/V SOL (B1)
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002ZC
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P1111 Intake valve timing control
through intake valve timing control solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
1111 solenoid valve circuit
valve.
● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002ZD
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-286
Wiring Diagram BBS002ZE
EC
MBWA1519E
EC-287
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
Intake valve timing
62 LG
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ignition switch OFF
120 G (11 - 14V)
EC-288
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002ZF
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness EC
connector.
C
MBIB0284E
E
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
PBIB0285E
I
2. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
Check the following. J
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
K
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR L
OPEN AND SHORT
M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve termi-
nal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-289
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS002ZG

valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground


CAUTION:
NOTE:
Removal and Installation BBS002ZH

EC-290
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description BBS002ZI
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002ZJ
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. D
Electric throttle control actuator does not function E
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
P1121 Electric throttle control
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is ● Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator B)
not in specified range.
F
C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
FAIL-SAFE MODE G
H
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
I
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in Neutral position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002ZK J

NOTE:
● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. K
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B L
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition witch ON and wait at least 1 second.
M
3. Set shift lever to 1st position and wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Set shift lever to Neutral position.
ON.
SEF058Y
EC-291
With GST
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
With GST
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002ZL
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
MBIB0307E

>> INSPECTION END
EC-292
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
A
Description BBS002ZM
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or P1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 EC
or P1126. Refer to EC-291 or EC-299 .
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- C
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002ZN
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

E
P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
1122 performance operate properly. shorted.) F
FAIL-SAFE MODE G
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
H
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002ZO I

NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine
is running. K
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-293
Wiring Diagram BBS002ZP
MBWA1520E
EC-294
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE
power supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V D
4 L E
PBIB0534E F
0 - 14V

G
5 P
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed H
PBIB0533E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 G Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF] I
(11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) J
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002ZQ
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS K

Refer to EC-133, "Ground Inspection" . L
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-295
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1171E
4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E5.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 70.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
EC-296
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 28. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. D
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E

F
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
Refer to EC-127, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" . I
9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT J
K
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
L
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist M
3
4 Should exist
5 Should exist MBIB0308E
6
4 Should not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
EC-297
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
MBIB0307E
11. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS002ZR
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB0095E
Removal and Installation BBS002ZS

EC-298
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
A
Component Description BBS002ZT
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends EC
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS002ZU

D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS002ZV

E

P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted.)
1124 relay circuit short is stuck ON.
● Throttle control motor relay G
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open.)
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low.
● Throttle control motor relay H
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up. I

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return J
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS002ZW

K
NOTE:
L
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V. M
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
With GST
EC-299
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
With GST
EC-300
Wiring Diagram BBS002ZX
EC
MBWA1521E
EC-301
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

4 L
PBIB0534E
0 - 14V

5 P
PBIB0533E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 G Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF]
(11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS002ZY

Voltage: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1171E
EC-302
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 70. EC

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
3. CHECK FUSE
E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 7.
4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I G
1. Reconnect all disconnected connectors.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the H
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
I
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
K
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

L
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E7. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-303
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-304
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description BBS002ZZ
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS00300 C
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator E
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE F
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return G
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS00301

H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. J
K
SEF058Y
M
WITH GST
EC-305
Wiring Diagram BBS00302
MBWA1522E
EC-306
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V D
4 L E
PBIB0534E F
0 - 14V

G
5 P
PBIB0533E

104 G [Ignition switch: OFF] I
relay (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS00303

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-307
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
actuator terminal
4 Should exist
3
5 Should not exist
4 Should not exist MBIB0308E
6
5 Should exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END


step.
PBIB0095E
EC-308
Removal and Installation BBS00305
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A

EC
EC-309
DTC P1143 HO2S1
Component Description BBS00306

SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS00307

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm Changes more than 5 times dur-
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS00308
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor
1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently
high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected.
SEF300U
● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
P1143 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltage from the
● Fuel pressure
1143 lean shift monitoring sensor are not reached to the specified voltages.
● Fuel injector
● Intake air leak
EC-310
DTC P1143 HO2S1
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
TESTING CONDITION:
C
● Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II D
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1143” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode E
with CONSULT-II.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. F
NOTE:
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. G
PBIB0546E
I
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will J
take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
K
VHCL SPEED SE 50 - 100 km/h (31 - 62 MPH)
Shift lever Suitable position L
step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG M
Procedure" .
SEC769C
EC-311
DTC P1143 HO2S1
Overall Function Check BBS0030A
WITH GST
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load.
● The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
MBIB0018E
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0030B

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

● : Vehicle front
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB1493E
EC-312
DTC P1143 HO2S1
3. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. EC
4. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA C
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. D
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. E
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected?
F
SEF215Z
H
Without CONSULT-II
speed. J
harness connector.
5. Make sure that DTC P0107 is displayed. K
7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed. L
Is it difficult to start engine? M
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-218 .
No >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
EC-313
DTC P1143 HO2S1
For circuit, refer to EC-180, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0030C

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps.
MBIB0301E

from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
EC-314
DTC P1143 HO2S1
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
stant under no load. EC
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. C

D
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V MBIB0018E
E
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS0030D
G
H
EC-315
DTC P1144 HO2S1
Component Description BBS0030E

SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0030F

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0030G
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected.
SEF299U
P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltages from the ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
1144 rich shift monitoring sensor are beyond the specified voltages. ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
EC-316
DTC P1144 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0030H
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
C
WITH CONSULT-II D
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1144” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode E
with CONSULT-II.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes. F
NOTE:
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5. G
PBIB0548E
I
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will J
K
VHCL SPEED SE 50 - 100 km/h (31 - 62 MPH)
Shift lever Suitable position L
step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG M
Procedure" .
SEC772C
EC-317
DTC P1144 HO2S1
Overall Function Check BBS0030I
WITH GST
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
● The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
MBIB0018E
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0030J

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

● : Vehicle front
>> GO TO 3.
MBIB1493E
EC-318
DTC P1144 HO2S1
With CONSULT-II
EC
C
SEF215Z
G
speed.
H
harness connector.
I
J
K
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.
L
3. Check connectors for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
MBIB1494E
EC-319
DTC P1144 HO2S1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0030K

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
MBIB0301E

onds.
SEF217YA
EC-320
DTC P1144 HO2S1
EC
SEF648Y
CAUTION: D
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread E
Without CONSULT-II
F
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- G
H
● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. I

1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V MBIB0018E
J
CAUTION:
K
Removal and Installation BBS0030L L
M
EC-321
DTC P1146 HO2S2
Component Description BBS0030M

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
tions.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0030N

tions are met.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0030O

storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is
sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB1201E
P1146 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The minimum voltage from the sensor is not ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
1146 minimum voltage monitoring reached to the specified voltage.
● Fuel pressure
● Fuel Injector
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0030P
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and
● If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from step 2 in Pro-
cedure for COND1.
EC-322
DTC P1146 HO2S2
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1 A
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C(32 to 86°F).
EC
4. Let engine idle 1 minute. C
7. Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. D
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in Procedure for COND3”.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. E
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II
approximately 60 seconds.) F
G
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C
PBIB0555E
K
NOTE:

L
Procedure for COND2
M
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed from the
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED” (It will take
NOTE:
If “COMPLETE” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-
II screen before Procedure for COND3 is conducted, it is
unnecessary to conduct step 1 in Procedure for COND3.
PBIB0556E
EC-323
DTC P1146 HO2S2
Procedure for COND3
RESULTS”.
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, performed the fol-
lowing.
(soak the vehicle).
b. Turn ignition switch ON and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA SEC775C

d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C(158°F), go to procedure for COND1 step 3.
Overall Function Check BBS0030Q
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the operating temperature.
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be below 0.52V at least once during this
procedure.
essary.
gear position.
procedure.
EC-324
DTC P1146 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS0030R
EC
MBWA1511E
EC-325
DTC P1146 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
2 GR
[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0030S

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-326
DTC P1146 HO2S2
With CONSULT-II
EC
with CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
G
speed.
J
Yes or No
K
No >> GO TO 3.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. M
terminal 4.
OK or NG
EC-327
DTC P1146 HO2S2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0030T

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

SEF662Y
EC-328
DTC P1146 HO2S2
A
EC
MBIB1402E D
CAUTION: E
Without CONSULT-II
H
at least 10 times.
procedure. J
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or K
gear position.
procedure.
CAUTION: M
Removal and Installation BBS0030U

EC-329
DTC P1147 HO2S2
Component Description BBS0030V

tions.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0030W

tions are met.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0030X

sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-
cut.
SEF560Z
(The sensor circuit open or shorted.)
P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The maximum voltage from the sensor is ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
1147 maximum voltage monitoring not reached to the specified voltage. ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
● Intake air leak
EC-330
DTC P1147 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0030Y
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
cedure for COND1. D
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
E
H
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in Procedure for COND3.
J
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C K
PBIB0557E
NOTE:

EC-331
DTC P1147 HO2S2
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed from the
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED” (It will take
NOTE:
PBIB0558E
Procedure for COND3

RESULTS”.
ing.
(soak the vehicle).

d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C(158°F), go to procedure for COND1 step 3.
Overall Function Check BBS0030Z
WITH GST
at least 10 times.
procedure.
essary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
gear position.
The voltage should be above 0.61V at least once during this MBIB0020E
procedure.
EC-332
DTC P1147 HO2S2
EC
MBWA1511E
EC-333
DTC P1147 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
2 GR
[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-334
DTC P1147 HO2S2
With CONSULT-II
EC
with CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
G
speed.
J
Yes or No
K
No >> GO TO 3.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. M
terminal 4.
OK or NG
EC-335
DTC P1147 HO2S2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

SEF662Y
EC-336
DTC P1147 HO2S2
A
EC
MBIB1402E D
CAUTION: E
Without CONSULT-II
H
at least 10 times.
procedure. J
sary.
position.
procedure.
CAUTION: M

EC-337
DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR
DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR PFP:22365
NOTE:
● If DTC P1171 is displayed with DTC P0108, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0108.
Refer to EC-155, "DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR"
Refer to EC-363, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
ECM computes two intake air volume values.
1: Computed from manifold absolute pressure signal and intake air temperature signal.
2: Computed from engine revolution signal and throttle position signal.
In normal condition, value 1 is used for engine control.

If intake air leak occurred between throttle valve and intake air port, manifold absolute pressure sensor signal
might increase, and then ECM increases amount of fuel injected. In this case, ECM uses value 2 for engine
control instead of value1.
ECM monitors the difference between value 1 and value 2. If the difference is extremely large, ECM judges
intake air leak occurs and light up the MI
This diagnosis has one trip detection logic.

(The manifold absolute pressure sensor
circuit is open or shorted.)
P1171 A high voltage from the sensor is sent to
Intake error ● Manifold absolute pressure
1171 ECM under light load driving condition.
● Vacuum hoses
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and MI lights up.
Intake air system
due to fuel cut.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-338
EC
MBWA1506E
EC-339
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
51 W


Listen for an intake air leak after the air cleaner element.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

1. Check intake manifold vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-92, "Vacuum Hose Draw-
ing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-340
E
MBIB1502E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
1. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure sensor harness connec- H
tor.
I
MBIB0276E
K
3. Check voltage between manifold absolute pressure sensor ter-

minal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
MBIB0602E
EC-341
5. CHECK MAP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between manifold absolute pressure sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK MAP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK MAP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-342
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT PFP:47850
A
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM. EC
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS00319 C
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
D
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control
P1211 ECM receives a malfunction information from unit)
TCS control unit E
1211 “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
● TCS related parts
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0031A

F
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II G
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. H
.
I
SEF058Y
K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L
Go to BRC-49, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

M
EC-343
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:47850
Description BBS0031C
NOTE:
Refer to EC-137, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" .
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0031D

ECM can not receive the information from (The CAN communication line is open or
P1212 TCS communication shorted.)
“ABS actuator and electric unit (control
1212 line
unit)” continuously. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0031E
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0031F
Refer to BRC-49, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
EC-344
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
A
System Description BBS0031G
NOTE:
COOLING FAN CONTROL
D

E
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed* 2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
control (Cooling fan relay)
F
Air conditioner switch*3 Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor*3 Refrigerant pressure

*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. G
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: Models with air conditioner.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant H
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF] (models with
A/C) or 2 step control [ON/OFF] (models without A/C).
The ECM controls cooling fan relays through CAN communication line. I
OPERATION
Models with A/C
J
MBIB0650E
EC-345
Models without A/C
MBIB0656E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0031H

AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
OFF
(201°F) or less
COOLING FAN LOW*
95°C (203°F) and 104°C (210°F)
HI*
(212°F) or more
*: Models without air conditioner, cooling fan operates only ON and OFF operation, but CONSULT-II display will change OFF, LOW and
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0031I
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction
is indicated.
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Cooling fan
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- ● IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay)
heat).
● Radiator hose
● Cooling fan system does not operate prop-
● Radiator
P1217 Engine over tempera- erly (Overheat).
1217 ture (Overheat) ● Reservoir tank cap
● Engine coolant was not added to the system
(Models with A/C)
using the proper filling method.
● Radiator cap
● Engine coolant is not within the specified
(Models without A/C)
range.
● Water pump
● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-357,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-9, "Changing Engine
coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-7, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-26, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
EC-346
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
A
Overall Function Check BBS0031J
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed. EC
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap (Models without A/C) or reservoir tank cap (Models with A/C) when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator (Mod-
C
els without A/C) or reservoir tank (Models with A/C).
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
D
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below E
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-351,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer F
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-351,
3. Turn ignition switch ON. G
SEF621W
H
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-351, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I
K
SEF784Z
WITH GST
Models with Air Conditioner L
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below M
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
3. Start engine.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine. SEF621W
4. Set temperature control lever to full cold position.

5. Turn air conditioner switch ON.
6. Turn blower fan switch ON.
7. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
EC-347
8. Make sure that cooling fans operates at low speed.
If OK, go to the following step.
10. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
11. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
12. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
MBIB0651E
13. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed.
CAUTION:
SEF023R
Models without Air Conditioner

If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
tor.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor SEF621W
harness connector.
5. Start engine and make that cooling fan operates. Be careful not
to overheat engine.
SEF023R
EC-348
Wiring Diagram BBS0031K
MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER A
EC
MBWA1523E
EC-349
MODELS WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONER
MBWA1524E
EC-350
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0031L
PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER A
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II? EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4. C
2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION

D
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- E
SULT-II and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-II screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
353, "Procedure A" .) G
SEF784Z
H
3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

I
With CONSULT-II
1. Touch “HIGH” on the CONSULT-II screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fan operate at higher speed than low J
speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. K
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
354, "Procedure B" .)
L
SEF785Z
M
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
353, "Procedure A" .)
MBIB0651E
EC-351
Without CONSULT-II
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operate at higher
speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
SEF023R
6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Refer to CO-8, "ENGINE COOLANT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

Check the following for leak.
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump (Refer to CO-17, "WATER PUMP" .)
8. CHECK RESERVOIR TANK CAP

Refer to CO-16, "Checking Reservoir Tank Cap (Models with A/C)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace reservoir tank cap.
9. CHECK COMPONENT PARTS

● Thermostat. Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT" .
● Engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to EC-170, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
10. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-357, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-352
Procedure A
A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E6. EC
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground with
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. D
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1307E
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F

● 40A fusible link G
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT

I
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 1
and IPDM E/R terminal 10, cooling fan motor terminal 2 and
J
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. L
MBIB1074E

M
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground
● Harness for open or short between resistor and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between resistor and cooling fan motor
● Resistor E62
5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
EC-353
Perform EC-127, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Procedure B
4. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 12 and
cooling fan motor terminal 1, cooling fan motor terminal 2 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1074E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-354
PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONER
A
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
C
2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
With CONSULT-II D
SULT-II and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-II screen. E
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO4. F
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-356, "Proce-
dure A" .)
G
SEF784Z
H
Without CONSULT-II I
3. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. J
4. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates.
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 4.
dure A" .)
L
M
SEF023R

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-355
● Hose
● Radiator
6. CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Refer to CO-15, "Checking Radiator Cap (Models without A/C)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
7. CHECK THERMOSTAT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END

Procedure A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1307E

● 40A fusible link
EC-356
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT A
and IPDM E/R terminal 10, cooling fan motor terminal 2 and EC
ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist. C

OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 5.
MBIB1074E
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and IPDM E/R F

H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. I
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J

OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD- K
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
L
Main 12 Causes of Overheating BBS0031M
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking — M
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-26, "Engine
Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level See CO-8, "LEVEL
in reservoir tank and radi- CHECK" .
ator filler neck
4*5 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See CO-15, "Checking

(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Radiator Cap (Models
kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) without A/C)" .
88 kPa (0.88 bar, 0.90 kg/ See CO-16, "Checking

4*6 ● Reservoir tank cap ● Pressure tester 2 Reservoir Tank Cap
cm , 12.8psi) (Models with A/C)" .
EC-357
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See CO-8, "LEAK

CHECK" .
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See CO-19, "THERMO-
lower radiator hoses STAT" , and CO-12,
"RADIATOR" .
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-351 ).
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving See CO-9, "Changing
reservoir tank and idling Engine coolant" .
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See CO-8, "LEVEL
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank CHECK" .
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-60, "CYLINDER
gauge mum distortion (warping) HEAD" .
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-74, "CYLINDER
tons walls or piston BLOCK" .
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
*5: Models without A/C.
*6: Models with A/C.
For more information, refer to CO-5, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Component Inspection BBS0031N
COOLING FAN MOTOR

2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Terminals
(+) (-)
Cooling fan motor 1 2
MBIB0607E
EC-358
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description BBS0031O

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0031P

F
P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is excessively ● Electric throttle control actuator
1225 learning performance low. (TP sensor 1 and 2) G
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0031Q
NOTE: H
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. I
WITH CONSULT-II
J
4. Turn ignition switch ON. K
.
L
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-359
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0031R

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0307E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation BBS0031S

EC-360
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
A
Component Description BBS0031T

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0031U

F
P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not performed ● Electric throttle control actuator
1226 learning performance successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2) G
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0031V
NOTE: H
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
J
. L
M
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-361
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0031W

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0307E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation BBS0031X

EC-362
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:16119
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0031Y

EC
(Manifold absolute pressure sensor is C
shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
P1229 Sensor power supply circuit ECM detects a voltage of power source
shorted.) D
1229 short for sensor is excessively low or high.
(APP sensor 1)
● Manifold absolute pressure sensor E
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE F
G
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0031Z H

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II J
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. K
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-363
LHD MODELS
MBWA1525E
EC-364
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
45 L (Manifold absolute pres- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
D
sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground E
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground F
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply G
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
H
Accelerator pedal ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released I
98 G
K
Accelerator pedal posi-
106 W
L
EC-365
RHD MODELS
MBWA1526E
EC-366
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
D
sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground E
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground F
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
H
Accelerator pedal ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released I
98 G
K
Accelerator pedal posi-
106 W
L
EC-367

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position sensor (APP) sensor har-
ness connector.
MBIB0285E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0304E
EC-368
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 90. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG (LHD models)>>Repair open circuit. D
NG (RHD models)>>GO TO 4.

● Harness connectors M201, M8
● Harness connectors M1, E101 F
● Harness for open or short between APP sensor and ECM
G
>> Repair open circuit.
5. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals
I
45 Manifold absolute pressure sensor terminal 2 EC-156
46 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-444 J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
6. CHECK COMPONENTS
L
● Manifold absolute pressure sensor (Refer to EC-159, "Component Inspection" .)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-85, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" or MTC-51, "COMPO- M
NENT INSPECTION" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
7. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-369
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-370
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH PFP:32006
A
When the shift lever position is Neutral, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. EC

C
Shift lever: Except above OFF D
E
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
P1706
Park/neutral position switch switch is not changed in the process of circuit is open or shorted.]
F
1706
engine starting and driving.
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS00325 G

CAUTION:
NOTE: H
WITH CONSULT-II I
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
J
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow-
ing conditions.
Position (Shift lever) Known-good signal K
Neutral position ON
Except the above position OFF
L
If OK, go to following step.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF212Y
M
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds.
. SEF213Y
EC-371
Overall Function Check BBS00326
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known-good data)
Neutral position Approx. 0
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except the above position
(11 - 14V)
MBIB0029E
EC-372
EC
MBWA1527E
EC-373
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
● Shift lever position: Neutral
102 GR PNP switch
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 31 and ground under
following condition.
Shift lever position Voltage
Neutral Battery voltage (11- 14V)
Except above position Approximately 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0652E
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB1444E
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

● 10A fuse
● IPDM E/R connector E7
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and fuse
EC-374
4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUTY BETWEEN PNP SWITCH AND IPDM E/R A
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 31 and PNP switch terminal 3. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PARTS E

F
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and IPDM E/R
6. CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to MT-16, "Park/Neutral Position Switch" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace PNP switch. I

J
>> INSPECTION END K

8. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E11 and E12.
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3, 54 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
EC-375
9. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E5
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-376
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
A
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp
switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used EC
mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
MBIB0286E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0032A

Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0032B

H
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ● Harness or connectors

P1805 (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is driv- I
1805
ing. ● Stop lamp switch
FAIL-SAFE MODE J
Engine operation condition in fail-fail safe mode
K
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.Therefore,acceleration will be
poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
L
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
M
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0032D
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
.
SEF058Y
EC-377
WITH GST
EC-378
Wiring Diagram BBS0032E
EC
MBWA1528E
EC-379
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
MBIB0286E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0117E
EC-380
● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M7 EC
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (LHD models)
● Harness connectors M8, M201 (RHD models)
C
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. F

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG (LHD models)>>Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
K
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. M
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-381
Component Inspection BBS0032G
STOP LAMP SWITCH

MBIB0286E
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2

under the following conditions.
Conditions Continuity
Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist.
If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE

PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.
PBIB0118E
EC-382
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description BBS0032H
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0032I
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V H

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF I
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0032J J

NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. K
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause L
P2122 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors
2122 sensor 1 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 M
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(APP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-383
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0032K
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-384
Wiring Diagram BBS0032L
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1529E
EC-385
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released
98 G
106 W
EC-386
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1530E
EC-387
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
106 W
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0032M

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-388
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
D
MBIB0285E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with E

F
MBIB0304E H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
NG (LHD models)>>Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

● Harness connectors M1, E101 K
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
L
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-389
6. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

1. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

EC-390
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following A
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
EC
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V
98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.6V C

MBIB0023E
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next D

step.
6. Perform EC-69, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . E
Removal and Installation BBS0032O
F
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
G
EC-391
Component Description BBS0032P

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0032Q


ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0032R

shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
EC-392
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0032S
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G
EC-393
Wiring Diagram BBS0032T
LHD MODELS
MBWA1531E
EC-394
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
47 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
82 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V D
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground E
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) F
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON] G
98 G
sensor 2
H
I
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released J
106 W
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed K
EC-395
RHD MODELS
MBWA1532E
EC-396
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground E
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) F
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
sensor 2
H
I
106 W
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0032U
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L

M
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-397
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
connector.
MBIB0285E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0309E
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 5 and ECM terminal 91.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG (LHD models)>>Repair open circuit.

● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM
EC-398
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 7.
F
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. G
H
>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. J
Continuity should exist. K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 10.
M
EC-399
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.

12. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0032V

EC-400
conditions.
EC

MBIB0023E

step.
Removal and Installation BBS0032W
F
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
G
EC-401
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Description BBS0032X

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0032Y

(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2*
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0032Z

● Harness or connector
(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P2135 Throttle position sensor
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135 circuit range/performance ● Electric throttle control actuator
and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-402
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G
EC-403
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
MBWA1533E
EC-404
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
CAUTION: A
TERMI- WIRE EC
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor) C
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position: 1st D
E
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
G
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever position: 1st H
● Engine stopped I
More than 0.36V
J
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS00332 K

M
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-405
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MBIB0308E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-406
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A
3. Perform EC-69, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . EC
C
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5. E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 68 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
Refer to EC-408, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10. M

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-407
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.

68 Fully released Less than 4.75V

step.

EC-408
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A

signals.
PBIB1741E
E
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS00337 J

NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. K
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
or shorted.)
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
M
P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
compared with the signals from APP sensor
2138 circuit range/performance ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
1 and APP sensor 2.
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-409
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-410
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1534E
EC-411
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
106 W
EC-412
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1535E
EC-413
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
106 W
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0033A

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-414
connector.
D
MBIB0285E

F
MBIB0304E H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I

L
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I M
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 5 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 5.
MBIB0309E
EC-415
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-416
10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 2, ECM terminal 83 and EC
APP sensor terminal 1.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG (RHD models)>>GO TO 11. E
Check the following. F
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor G
H
12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and I
Continuity should exist. J
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 14.
L
Check the following. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
EC-417
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0033B

nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.

MBIB0023E
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next

step.
Removal and Installation BBS0033C
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-418
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
A
Description BBS0033Y
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from IPDM E/R to ECM. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0033Z

C
Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
ON
lighting switch is 2nd. D
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and light-
OFF
ing switch is OFF.
● Engine: After warm- Heater fan: Operating ON E
HEATER FAN SW ing up, idle the
engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
Diagnostic Procedure BBS00340 F

1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
2. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following
conditions. H
Condition Indication
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON I
Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. J
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E
K
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions. L
Lighting switch: 2nd position ON
M
Lighting switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0103E
EC-419
3. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
Condition HEATER FAN SW
Heater fan control switch: ON ON
Heater fan control switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1995E
4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Refer to GW-12, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
>> INSPECTION END
5. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Refer to LT-7, "HEADLAMP -CONVENTIONAL TYPE-" or LT-35, "HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
".
>> INSPECTION END
6. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM

Refer to ATC-26, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or MTC-23, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-420
FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR PFP:16600
A
Component Description BBS0033I
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec- EC
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains C
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
D
SEF375Z
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0033J

G
INJ PULSE-B1
● No load
H
EC-421
FUEL INJECTOR
MBWA1538E
EC-422
FUEL INJECTOR
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on E
rpm at idle.
PBIB0529E
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
G
H
PBIB0530E
I
1. INSPECTION START
J
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No K
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
L
EC-423
FUEL INJECTOR
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
MBIB0302E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-424
FUEL INJECTOR
3. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector (1).
EC
– : Vehicle front
C
MBIB1458E
E
4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with
Voltage: Battery voltage F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0582E

J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
K
5. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L
M
3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel injector.
EC-425
FUEL INJECTOR
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0033M
FUEL INJECTOR
1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 10.4 - 15.3Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation BBS0033N
FUEL INJECTOR
EC-426
FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP PFP:17042
A
Description BBS0033O
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage* C
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
D
startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and cam-
shaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel E
pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. F
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
G
Except as shown above Stops.
H
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
K
MBIB0291E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0033P
Specification data are reference values. L

ON M
EC-427
FUEL PUMP
Wiring Diagram BBS0033Q
MBWA1539E
EC-428
FUEL PUMP
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON] C
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON] D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
ON
E

1. Turn ignition switch ON. F
2. Pinch fuel feed hose (1) with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel hose for 1
second after ignition switch is turned ON. G
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. H
MBIB1496E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
4. Check voltage between ECM terminals 113 and ground with

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E
EC-429
FUEL PUMP
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 69 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 11.
MBIB1445E

Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

3. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
MBIB0288E
5. Check voltage between “Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 second
after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
MBIB1446E
6. CHECK 15A FUSE

3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse.
EC-430
FUEL PUMP
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 20 and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” termi-
nal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 8. D

Check the following. E
● Harness connectors E101, M1
● Harness connectors M72, B21
F
● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and IPDM E/R
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 10.
K
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
M
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS0033S
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
EC-431
FUEL PUMP
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
MBIB0311E
Removal and Installation BBS0033T
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
EC-432
IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
A
Component Description BBS0033D
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the EC
power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition
coil primary circuit. This ON-OFF operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
C
MBIB0272E
E
EC-433
IGNITION SIGNAL
MBWA1536E
EC-434
IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
0 - 1.0V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
111 P D
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
E
120 G (11 - 14V)
EC-435
IGNITION SIGNAL
MBWA1537E
EC-436
IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
60 Y Ignition signal No. 3 at idle. E
PBIB0521E
61 V Ignition signal No. 1
0 - 0.2V
F
[Engine is running]
PBIB0522E
H
I
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF and restart engine.
Is engine running? J
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. K
No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION L

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
M
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
MBIB0302E
EC-437
IGNITION SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 79, 80
and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown in the figure.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
MBIB0033E
PBIB0521E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-128, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
MBIB0034E
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
EC-438
IGNITION SIGNAL
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A
3. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 1 and IPDM terminal 33. EC
C
4. Also check harness for short to power and short to ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. D
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART E

F
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
K
9. CHECK CONDENSER
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser.
M
EC-439
IGNITION SIGNAL
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
MBIB0272E
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
SEF107S

Check harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F1.
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 79, 80 and ignition coil terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
EC-440
IGNITION SIGNAL
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. EC
NG >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.

OK or NG
D
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace
E
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

CAUTION: F
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. G
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
H
2 and 3 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 2
Except 0
1 and 3 I
4. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. MBIB0032E

K
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres-
L
8. Start engine.
9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
M
11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. MBIB0277E

checked.
13. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
EC-441
IGNITION SIGNAL
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
16. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
CAUTION:
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage PBIB2325E
● If might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
CONDENSER
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
MBIB0031E
Removal and Installation BBS0033H

Refer to EM-29, "IGNITION COIL" .
EC-442
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
A
Component Description BBS0033U
The refrigerant pressure sensor (1) is installed at the condenser of

the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume EC
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
C
MBIB1492E
H
PBIB2657E
EC-443
Wiring Diagram BBS0033V
MBWA1540E
EC-444
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
46 W [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
57 Y ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V D
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition E
69 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON.
F
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0033W
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

G
2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 69 and ground with CON- H
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
I
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
J
MBIB0035E K

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF. L
Refer to EC-133, "Ground Inspection" . M
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-445
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor (1) harness connector.
MBIB1492E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3

and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF479Y

● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 57 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-446
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
D
● Harness connectors E48, F1 E
F

G
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. H
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR I

Refer to ATC-142, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" (Models with A/C) or MTC-88,
"Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" (Models without A/C).
J
EC-447
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS
MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS PFP:24814
MBWA1541E
EC-448
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
A
Fuel Pressure BBS00347
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.5bar, 3.57kg/cm2 , 51psi)

EC
Idle Speed BBS00348
Target idle speed No load* (in Neutral position) 650 ± 50 rpm

C
Air conditioner: ON In Neutral position 900 rpm or more
*: Under the following conditions:
● Air conditioner switch: OFF D
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value BBS00349

E
Condition Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

At idle 10 – 35 F
At 2,500 rpm 10 – 35
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor BBS0034A

G
Supply voltage Approximately 5.0V
Output voltage at idle 1.4 – 1.5 V*
H
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor BBS00487
I
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.9 – 2.1
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor BBS00488

J

20 (68) 2.1 – 2.9 K
50 (122) 0.68 – 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 – 0.260
L
Knock Sensor BBS00489
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Approximately 530 – 590kΩ

M
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) BBS0034F

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) BBS0034G

Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater BBS0034D
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.4 – 4.4Ω
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater BBS0034E
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve BBS0048A
EC-449
Throttle Control Motor BBS0034H
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 – 15Ω
Fuel Injector BBS0034I
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 10.4 – 15.3Ω
Fuel Pump BBS0034J
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 0.2 – 5.0Ω
EC-450
INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
INDEX FOR DTC
[CR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)] PFP:00024
A
DTC No. Index BBS0034L
NOTE:
● If DTC U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1001. Refer EC
to EC-552, "DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION" . C
DTC*1 Items
Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*2
D
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*3 FURTHER TESTING EC-480
MAY BE REQUIRED.
E
NO DTC IS DETECTED. F
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-554 G
H

P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-570
I
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-570
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-577
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-584 J
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-591
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-598
K
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-598
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-605 L
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-609
M
P0605 0605 ECM EC-623
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-626
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR EC-635
P1128 1128 ETC MOT EC-649
P1171 1171 INTAKE ERROR EC-654
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNTN EC-660
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-661
EC-451
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1 Items
Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*2
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-473
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-693
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-718
EC-452
INDEX FOR DTC
Alphabetical Index BBS0034K
A
NOTE:
Items DTC*1 C
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 2
ECM*
D
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 EC-699 E
F
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 4 EC-549
1001* G
H
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 EC-678 I
ECM P0605 0605 EC-623
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 EC-626
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 EC-565 J
K
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 EC-635
ETC MOT P1128 1128 EC-649 L
M
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-577
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 EC-584
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-591
INTAKE ERROR P1171 1171 EC-654
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EC-473
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*3 EC-480
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
EC-453
INDEX FOR DTC
Items DTC*1
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II ECM*2
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 EC-660
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 EC-661
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-598
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-598
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-570
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-570
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-718
EC-454
PRECAUTIONS
A
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” BBS0047X
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along EC
this Service Manual. C
WARNING:
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. D
Bag Module, see the SRS section. E
harness connectors. F
Maintenance Information BBS005AR
If any of following part is replaced, always replace with new* one. G

RHD MODELS H
● ECM I
● IPDM E/R
J
LHD MODELS
● BCM (Models without Intelligent Key system) K
● ECM
L
Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover BBS0047Y
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. M
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine BBS0034O
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MI to light up.
EC-455
PRECAUTIONS
cause the MI to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-88, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM.
Precaution BBS0034P
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
disconnect negative battery cable.
SEF289H

● If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is dis-
● If the battery is disconnected, the following emission
PBIB1164E
– 1st freeze frame data
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

securely with levers as far as they will go as shown in the
figure.
PBIB1512E
EC-456
PRECAUTIONS
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or A
break).
EC
damage to ICs. C
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded D

● Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Refer- E
erly. Refer to EC-512, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value"
. F
● Handle manifold absolute pressure sensor carefully to
avoid damage.
● Do not clean air clear element with any type of detergent. G
ous incidents. MEF040D
H
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC I
J
SAT652J L
EC-457
PRECAUTIONS
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, connect
a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between
the ECM and ECM harness connector.
allow the two tester probes to contact.
the ground.
SEF348N
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

MBIB0291E

● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
SEF709Y
EC-458
PRECAUTIONS
to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec- A
control units. EC
C
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. D
EC-459
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools BBS0034R
Tool number
Description
Tool name
EG17650301
Radiator cap tester Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and
adapter radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564

Heated oxygen with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
sensor wrench
S-NT379

sensor wrench
S-NT636

Break-out box
NT825

Y-cable adapter
NT826
EC-460
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools BBS0034S
A

release room EC
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG:
Part No. 16441 6N210)
PBIC0198E
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening D
pressure
S-NT653
F
temperature sensor
S-NT705 H
anti-seize lubricant shown below. I
Titania Oxygen Sensor J
AEM488

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads. K
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
907) L
S-NT779
EC-461
System Diagram BBS0034T
MBIB1551E
EC-462
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System BBS0034W
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3 EC
D
Fuel injection
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position & mixture ratio Fuel injector
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition E
F

G
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of I
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air volume) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft
position sensor (PHASE) and the manifold absolute pressure sensor. J

In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat- K
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up L
● Hot-engine operation M
<Fuel decrease>
PBIB2938E
EC-463
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
heated oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-577 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric
(ideal air-fuel mixture).
characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● During warm-up
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., manifold absolute pressure sensor silicon diaphragm)
and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF337W

Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
EC-464
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of A
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. EC
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or
operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds. C
Electronic Ignition (EI) System BBS0034X

D
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position E
F
Ignition timing
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Power transistor
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking G
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
H
I
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the J
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Comput-
ing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. K
the ECM.
● At starting
L
● During warm-up
● At idle
● At low battery voltage M
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) BBS0034Z

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Fuel cut con-
Fuel injector
trol
Engine speed
EC-465
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm with no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 2,500 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-463, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System"
.
EC-466
A
Input/Output Signal Chart BBS003ZG

Air conditioner switch 1 EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C

cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure D
Wheel sensor 1
Vehicle speed*
E
Battery 2
Battery voltage*
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. F
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. G
● When cranking the engine. H
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. I
J
EC-467
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description BBS003ZH
EC-468
A
Description BBS003DD
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB0491E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. H
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the I
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and J
idling.
EC-469
MBIB0544E
EC-470
EC
MBIB1450E
I
: Vehicle front : To previous page
1. EVAP canister
EC-471
Component Inspection BBS003DE
EVAP CANISTER
1. Block port (B).
6. Apply pressure to port (C) and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB2961E
FUEL CHECK VALVE

1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side.
A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow
should be directed toward the EVAP canister side.
2. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side.
Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not properly functioning in
steps 1 and 2 above, replace it.
SEF552Y
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF989X

Pres- 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar,
sure: 0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.49 psi)
SEF943S

EC-472
A

the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on EC
C
with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and reg- D
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. E

CONSULT-II Operation Manual, NATS.
F
EC-473
Description BBS003DF
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB0492E

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
tions.
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection BBS003DG

PBIB1589E
EC-474
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. A
EC
S-ET277
D
EC-475
Introduction BBS00356
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Freeze Frame data
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
1st trip Freeze Frame
DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data
data
CONSULT-II × × × ×
ECM × ×* — —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-498 .)
Two Trip Detection Logic BBS00357
ECM memory. The MI will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during
vehicle operation.
When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting up MI when there is a
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has malfunction and MI circuit is open by
Emission-related Diagnostic Information BBS00358

Items DTC*1
Trip MI lighting up Reference page
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*3 2 — EC-549
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 2 — EC-552
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 2 — EC-554
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0107 0107 2 × EC-559
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0108 0108 2 × EC-559
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 2 × EC-565
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 2 × EC-565
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 × EC-570
EC-476
Items DTC*1
Trip MI lighting up Reference page A
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 × EC-570
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 2 × EC-577 EC
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 2 × EC-584
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 × EC-591
C
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-598
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-598
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-605 D
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-605
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-609
E
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-616
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-623
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 2 × EC-626 F
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 × EC-630
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 × EC-635
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-637 G
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-643
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-643
H
ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-649
INTAKE ERROR P1171 1171 1 × EC-654
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 2 — EC-660 I
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 2 — EC-661
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-662
J
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-676
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-680 K
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — BL-215
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 × EC-688
L
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 1 × EC-693
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 × EC-699
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 × EC-699 M
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-708
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 × EC-708
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 × EC-718
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 × EC-725

EC-477
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored.
For fail-safe items, DTC is stored in the ECM memory even in the 1st trip.
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION"
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-492, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Con-
firmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SEFL-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: P0117, P0340, P1065, etc.
Without CONSULT-II
Example: 0107, 0340, 1065 etc.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate
whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
PBIB0911E

The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. For
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. Both 1st trip freeze
frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Proce-
dures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-478, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION" .
How to Erase DTC
With CONSULT-II
EC-478
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. A
2. Touch “ENGINE”. EC
C
MBIB1303E
J
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
hours. K
L
– 1st trip freeze frame data M
Malfunction Indicator (MI) BBS0035A
DESCRIPTION
If the MI does not light up, refer to DI-32, "WARNING LAMPS"
or see EC-800 .
SAT652J
EC-479
Mode Status
Engine stopped

One trip detection diagnosis will light up or blink the MI in
the 1st trip.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting up MI when there is
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MI circuit is open by
driver to repair the a malfunction.
MI Flashing without DTC

If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MI may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode. EC-480, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later, EC-
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
has a malfunction.
EC-480
A
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
EC
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MI starts C
blinking.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). D
G
PBIB0092E

1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-481, "How to Set Diagnostic H
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). I
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-481, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . J
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. K

In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-32, L
"WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-800 .
MI Condition M
OFF No malfunction.
● These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

EC-481
codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code.
PBIA3905E
oxygen sensor 1.
MI Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air-fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no load.
EC-482
A
Basic Inspection BBS0035E
1. INSPECTION START
EC
C
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections D
– Gasket E
– Air conditioner switch is OFF. F

G
H
J
SEF976U

load. K
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
M
SEF977U
>> GO TO 3
EC-483
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
PBIA8513J

SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 5.

>> GO TO 6.
EC-484
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 7.
2. GO TO 4. C

D
With CONSULT-II
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
F
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-486, "IDLE SPEED" . G
OK or NG
H
NG >> GO TO 8.

● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-616 . J
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-609 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. K
2. GO TO 4.
L
M
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-473,
"Description" .
>> GO TO 4.
EC-485
Idle Speed Check BBS00351
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check idle speed by installing the pulse type tachometer clamp on the loop wire or on suitable high-tension
wire which installed between No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning BBS00352
DESCRIPTION
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning BBS00353
DESCRIPTION
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Idle Air Volume Learning BBS00354
DESCRIPTION
● Idle speed is out of specification.
PREPARATION
● PNP switch: ON
EC-486
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light A
only small lamps.
● Vehicle speed: Stopped EC
– Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
C
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-486, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . D
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. E
H
SEF217Z
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. I
SEF454Y
L

“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be M
dent by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
speed is within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
MBIB0238E
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
has a malfunction.
EC-487
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MI turned ON.
PBIB0665E
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed is within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
13. If idle speed is not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In
this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
It is useful to perform EC-532, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check BBS00355

With CONSULT-II
EC-488
mode with CONSULT-II. A
3. Start engine.
pressure. EC
SEF214Y
D
Without CONSULT-II
2. Start engine. E
pressure.
MBIB0277E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK H

CAUTION:
● The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for I
other purposes.
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside. J
● When installing fuel hose quick connector, refer to EM-18, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres- K
2. Prepare fuel hose and fuel hose clamp for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. L
● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it. M
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-18, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.
EC-489
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure.
● Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist-
ened with gasoline.
and No.1 spool.
● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439
N4710 or 16439 40U00).
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. PBIB0669E
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08

in).
– A: Fuel pressure gauge
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m,

9 - 13 in-lb)
● Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
tube does not come off.
MBIB1495E
6. Turn ignition switch ON, and check for fuel leakage.
8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.

9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging

EC-490
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction BBS0035B
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con- EC
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac- C
MEF036D
E

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are F
ment of good parts.
G
SEF233G
I
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-492 . J
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under K
on EC-496 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. L
SEF234G
M
EC-491
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence
PBIB2267E
EC-492
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Detailed Flow
A
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-495, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . EC
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1 . D
– Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II.)
E
– Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-478, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .)
– Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus- F
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? G
H

I
J
results.
K
>> GO TO 5.

L
M
results.
>> GO TO 6.
EC-493
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1 , and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
tion Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.

With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within
the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode.
Refer to EC-533, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8.
SEF601Z

Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-532, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.

Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-499, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symp-
tom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 10.
EC-494
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection EC
Is malfunctioning part detected? C
Yes >> GO TO 11.
SULT-II. Refer to EC-512, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" , EC-527, "CONSULT-II Refer- D
ence Value in Data Monitor Mode" .

E
ment. F
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-478, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
G
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK H

When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure I
OK or NG
J
(Refer to EC-478, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .) K
2. INSPECTION END
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data. L
Description M
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
tomer complaint.
SEF907L
EC-495
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017
EC-496
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart BBS0035C
A
chart.
NOTE:

1 ● U1001 CAN communication line D
● P0107 P0108 Manifold absolute pressure sensor
● P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor E
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) F
● P0605 ECM
● P1171 Intake error G
● P1610-P1615 NATS
H
2 ● P0132 P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 I
● P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P1065 ECM power supply
● P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve J
● P1128 Throttle control mother K
L
● P1211 ESP control unit
M
EC-497
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Fail-Safe Chart BBS0035D
When the DTC listed bellow is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
P1121 Electric throttle control (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
actuator spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening
around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to
20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in Neutral position and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.
P1122 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
tion fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1126 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1171 When accelerator pedal is depressed, engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm
Intake air system
due to fuel cut.
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
● When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting up MI when there
is a malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses is continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has a malfunction and MI circuit is
open by means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MI circuit are detected and demands
EC-498
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart BBS0035F
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A

SYMPTOM

EC



C

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
D
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL E
F
G
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-469 H
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-474
tem
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-483 I
EC-635,
EC-637 ,
EC-643 , J
EC-649
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-784 K
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-543
Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-559
L
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 EC-565
EC-570,
EC-598 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-676 , M
EC-678 ,
EC-718
EC-680,
EC-699 ,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 2 2
EC-708 ,
EC-725
EC-577,
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-584 ,
EC-756
Knock sensor circuit 2 2 3 EC-605
EC-623,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-626
EC-499
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-554
cuit
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-688
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 4 EC-794
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-735
ATC-26 or
MTC-23
BRC-8 or
BRC-49

SYMPTOM


Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel tank FL-8
5 FL-3, EM-
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
32
Vapor lock 5 —
Valve deposit —
—
line, Low octane)
EC-500
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL E

Air Air duct F
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct EM-18 G
(Manifold absolute pressure sen-
sor —electric throttle control 5 5 5 5 5 5
actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator H
EM-22
Collector/Gasket
I
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit SC-15
Starter circuit 3 SC-45 J
Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM-74
AT-293,
PNP switch 4
MT-16 K
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-60
L
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring M
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-74
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain EM-50
mecha-
Camshaft EM-38
nism
Intake valve
3 EM-60
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-24, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
Three way catalyst
EC-501
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Lubrica- EM-26, LU-
tion 9 , LU-10 ,
filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 LU-5
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-6
Thermostat 5 CO-19
Water pump CO-17
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 5 CO-7
Cooling fan 5 CO-12
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
CO-8
coolant
EC-473 or
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) 1 1
BL-215
EC-502
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location BBS0035G
EC
MBIB1491E
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Fuel injector 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor
valve
4. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 5. Heated oxygen sensor 1 6. Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
and spark plug
7. Cooling fan motor 8. IPDM E/R 9. ECM
10. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 11. EVAP canister purge volume con- 12. Engine coolant temperature sensor
trol solenoid valve
13. Manifold absolute pressure sensor 14. Knock sensor 15. Electric throttle control actuator
EC-503
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MBIB1498E
: Vehicle front
1. Manifold absolute pressure sensor 2. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 3. Engine coolant temperature sensor
4. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 5. Battery 6. IPDM E/R
7. Fuel injector 8. Ignition coil
(with power transistor)
EC-504
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
MBIB1499E
1. Condenser 2. Oil filter 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor

4. Intake manifold 5. Knock sensor 6. Electric throttle control actuator
7. ECM 8. Battery 9. Data link connector
EC-505
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MBIB0320E
MBIB1460E
: Vehicle front
1. Exhaust manifold cover 2. Heated oxygen sensor 1 3. Heated oxygen sensor 1 harness
connector
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 harness 5. Heated oxygen sensor 2 6. Oil pan
connector
EC-506
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
MBIB1500E
: Vehicle front
1. Park/neutral position switch 2. Cooling fan motor 3. IPDM E/R
4. Fuel pump fuse (15A) 5. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 6. Fuel level sensor unit
harness connector
7. Fuel pump and fuel filter 8. Fuel pressure regulator 9. Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
10. EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve
EC-507
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MBIB1501E
1. Accelerator pedal position sensor 2. Accelerator pedal 3. Stop lamp switch

4. Brake pedal
EC-508
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vacuum Hose Drawing BBS0034U
EC
MBIB1440E
: Vehicle front
1. EVAP canister purge volume control 2. Intake manifold
solenoid valve
NOTE:
EC-509
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram BBS0035H
MBWA1500E
EC-510
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
MBWA1501E
EC-511
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout BBS0035I
MBIB0045E
ECM Terminals and Reference Value BBS0035J
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located left hand side of the engine room.
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
MBIB0274E
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with

levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
PBIB1512E

CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EC-512
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Below 3,800 rpm after the fol- EC
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 C
2 GR
heater minute under no load.
● Engine speed: Above 3,800 rpm E
0 - 14V F

4 L G
PBIB0534E
H
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON] I

5 P
PBIB0533E
Approximately 3.0V K
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
L
NOTE:
at idle.
Crankshaft position PBIB0527E M
13 Y
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0528E
EC-513
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle.
PBIB0525E
Camshaft position sen-
14 R
sor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0526E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - Approximately 1.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge

PBIB0050E
valve
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0520E
EC-514
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V) EC
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
at idle.
23 L Fuel injector No. 1 PBIB0529E D
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
F
PBIB0530E
G
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
H
heater
I
PBIB0519E

J
29 B (Camshaft position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed K
sensor) ● Idle speed L
34 O [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
sensor
intake air temperature. M
[Engine is running]
45 L Sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
Sensor power supply
sensor)
Sensor power supply
47 L (Throttle position sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sor)
EC-515
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
49 Y
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
51 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed

56 B (Manifold absolute pres- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sure sensor) ● Idle speed

57 Y (Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
PBIB0521E
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0522E
EC-516
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Warm-up condition EC
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C
Intake valve timing
62 LG
PBIB1790E
E

66 B (Throttle position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) F
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V G
68 R
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON] H
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed I
[Engine is running]
Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition
69 BR 1.0 - 4.0V J
sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
Engine coolant tempera- K
72 P [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
ture sensor
engine coolant temperature.

L
73 B (Engine coolant temper- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ature sensor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground M
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
85 LG DATA link connector
● CONSULT-II: Disconnected (11 - 14V)
86 Y CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] 1.0 - 2.5V

Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
EC-517
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] 2.5 - 4.0V
98 G
Approximately 0V

Approximately 0V
● Gear position: Neutral
102 GR PNP switch
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle control motor [Ignition switch: OFF]
104 G (11 - 14V)
relay
106 W
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON

120 G (11 - 14V)
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
EC-518
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) BBS0035K
FUNCTION A
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit. EC
C
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, A/F feedback control value and the other data
Data monitor (SPEC)
monitor items can be read.
D
monitor
Active test
E
F
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes G
H
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC I
RESULTS DATA
Item WORK SUP- DATA ACTIVE
FREEZE MONITOR
PORT MONITOR TEST
DTC*1 FRAME (SPEC)
J
DATA*2
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × K
Manifold absolute pressure sensor × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 × × ×
L

Wheel sensor × × ×
M
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × ×
Intake air temperature sensor × × ×
INPUT
Knock sensor ×
Closed throttle position switch
signal)
Air conditioner switch × ×
Electrical load signal × ×
EC-519
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
Item WORK SUP- DATA ACTIVE
FREEZE MONITOR
PORT MONITOR TEST
DTC*1 FRAME (SPEC)
DATA*2

Throttle control motor relay × × ×
× × ×
trol solenoid valve
OUTPUT

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × ×
× × × ×
valve
X: Applicable
EC-520
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . A
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item EC
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING START DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
ING IDLING. from fuel line C
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN D
ECM.
E
FICIENT.
ing
F
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE G

TION ITEMS" . H

Freeze frame data I
Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
EC-451, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) J
[PXXXX]
● Fuel injection system status at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
K
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop L
COOLANT TEMP
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. M
[°C] or [°F]
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
[km/h] or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
EC-521
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
×: Applicable
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the engine speed computed from speed drops below the idle rpm.
the signals of the crankshaft position sen-
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the
sor (POS) and camshaft position sensor
(PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
● When the engine coolant tempera-
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- ture sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S
× × mined by the signal voltage of the engine ECM enters fail-safe mode. The
[°C] or [°F]
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. engine coolant temperature deter-
mined by the ECM is displayed.
HO2S1 (B1) [V] × ×
HO2S2 (B1) [V] ×
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal
during air-fuel ratio feedback control: ● After turning ON the ignition switch,
RICH: means the mixture became “rich”, “RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mix-
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) and control is being affected toward a ture ratio feedback control begins.
× ×
[RICH/LEAN] leaner mixture. ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
LEAN: means the mixture became “lean”, clamped, the value just before the
and control is being affected toward a rich clamping is displayed continuously.
mixture.
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
× three way catalyst is relatively small.
[RICH/LEAN] tain value is indicated.
● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- tain value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] ×
back correction factor per cycle is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehi-
× ×
[km/h] or [mph] cle speed signal is displayed.
● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
played.
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board correc-
tion.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
● The accelerator pedal position sensor sig-
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × nal voltage is displayed.
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by
● The throttle position sensor signal voltage
THRTL SEN 2 [V] × is displayed.
● The intake air temperature (determined by
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
× × the signal voltage of the intake air tempera-
or [°F]
ture sensor) is indicated.
TURBO BST SEN ● The signal voltage of the manifold absolute
×
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
EC-522
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
MAIN
INPUT A
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] com- ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis- EC
START SIGNAL
× × puted by the ECM according to the signals played regardless of the starter sig-
[ON/OFF]
of engine speed and battery voltage. nal.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed
CLSD THL POS C
× × by the ECM according to the accelerator
[ON/OFF]
pedal position sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air con-
AIR COND SIG [ON/ D
× × ditioner switch as determined by the air
OFF]
conditioner signal.
× × E
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
PW/ST SIGNAL
× × system (determined by the signal sent from
[ON/OFF]
EPS control unit) is indicated. F
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the elec-
trical load signal.
LOAD SIGNAL [ON/ ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON G
× ×
OFF] and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch
and lighting switch are OFF.
H
×
[ON/OFF] switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
× I
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
×
J
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
INJ PULSE-B1 ● When the engine is stopped, a cer-
× width compensated by ECM according to
[msec] tain computed value is indicated.
the input signals.
● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ● When the engine is stopped, a cer- K
ECM according to the input signals. tain value is indicated.
control solenoid valve control value com- L
puted by the ECM according to the input
PURG VOL C/V [%] signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the value M
increases.
● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA]
advanced angle.
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] according to the input signals) is indicated.
value increases.
AIR COND RLY [ON/
OFF]
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condi-
FUEL PUMP RLY
× tion determined by ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
input signals.
EC-523
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY [ON/
× control condition determined by the ECM
OFF]
(determined by ECM according to the input
×
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle air volume learning has not been
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MI is activated.
[km] or [mile]
● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1
O2 SEN HTR DTY
heater control valve computed by the ECM
[%]
● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
AC PRESS SEN [V] ×
pressure sensor is displayed.
Voltage [V]
Frequency ● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable
[msec], [Hz] or [%] to be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ● Figures with “#”s are temporary
width measured by the probe. ones. They are the same figures as
DUTY-LOW
an actual piece of data which was
PLS WIDTH-HI just previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
EC-524
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitored Item A
ECM
MAIN
INPUT
SIG- EC
NALS
NALS
from the signal of the crankshaft position C
ENG SPEED [rpm] ×
sensor (PHASE).
D
rection.
E
air-fuel ratio learning control. F
NOTE:
G
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) H
● Fuel injector
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM. I
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1

trouble condition J
ING CHECK ITEM.
CONSULT-II.
K
the engine. ● Compression
POWER BAL- ● A/C switch: OFF ● Fuel injector L
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Shift lever: Neutral ● Power transistor
● Cut off each fuel injector signal ● Spark plug
one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coil M
COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “LOW” Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan relay
and “OFF” with CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor

stopped)
EC-525
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
SULT-II.
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.

Description
mode.
in real time.
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
Data ... xx%” as shown in the figure, and the data after the
malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
MBIB0295E
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
UAL.
SEF707X
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to Incident Simulation Tests in GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diag-
nosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
EC-526
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
PBIB0197E
I
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0035L
Remarks:
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. J
ENG SPEED K
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-EC-532, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-EC-532, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . L
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm M
tions are met.
HO2S2 (B1) – Engine: After warning up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.
tions are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) – Engine: After warning up LEAN ←→ RICH
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication.
EC-527
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*1
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2*1
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approximately 1.5V
TURBO BST SEN
● Shift lever: Neutral 2,500 rpm Approximately 1.2V
● No load

CLSD THL POS
the engine ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan: Operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
INJ PULSE-B1
● Shift lever: Neutral 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0° - 10° BTDC
IGN TIMING
● Shift lever: Neutral 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● No load
PURG VOL C/V
● No load
INT/V TIM (B1)
● Shift lever: Neutral 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 20°CA
● No load
EC-528
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
INT/V SOL (B1)
● Shift lever: Neutral 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
EC
● No load
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON C
the engine ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking D
E
OFF
(201°F) or less
COOLING FAN
95°C (203°F) and 104°C (210°F) LOW*2 F
● Engine: After warming up G

ON
H
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed at between 3,500 to 4,000 rpm for 1 minute I
Vehicle has traveled after MI has 0 - 65,535 km J
● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C
O2SEN HTR DTY (176°F) Approx. 50% K
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V
AC PRESS SEN ● Engine: Idle L
1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal. M
EC-529
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode BBS0035M
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera-
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with shift lever in 1st position.
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
MBIB0545E
EC-530
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
PBIB0668E
EC-531
Description BBS0035N
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MI.
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
Testing Condition BBS0035O

● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
– After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
ahead.
Inspection Procedure BBS0035P
NOTE:
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” and “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
SEF601Z
EC-532
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0035Q
OVERALL SEQUENCE A
EC
PBIB2384E
EC-533
MBIB1447E
EC-534
DETAILED PROCEDURE
A
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-532, "Testing Condition" . EC
and make sure that the indication is within the SP value.
NOTE: C
even a little. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. E
PBIB2369E

make sure that the indication is within the SP value. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19. H
PBIB2332E
J
make sure that the indication is within the SP value. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6. L
PBIB2332E

1. Stop the engine.
3. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-535
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
NOTE:
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
dition.
>> INSPECTION END

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-488, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-488, "Fuel Pressure Check" .
GO TO 8.

– Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-750, "FUEL PUMP" .)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-488, "Fuel Pressure Check" .)
>> GO TO 8.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.

speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
EC-536
– Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-744, "FUEL INJECTOR" .) EC
– Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-60, "COMPRESSION PRESSURE INSPECTION" .)
C
D
>> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” E

1. Start engine.
the SP value. F
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12. G

H
I
during 10 seconds.
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
SEF820Y
L
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 and its circuit. Refer to EC-577, "DTC P0132 HO2S1" . M
>> GO TO 14.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
EC-537
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
>> GO TO 16.

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
OK or NG

OK or NG
PBIB2332E

– Engine oil level too high
– Noise from engine
– Valve clearance malfunction

Check for the cause of unsteady air flow passing through throttle body. Refer to the following.
● Improper specification of intake air system part
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
EC-538
20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” A
OK or NG EC
C
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR HARNESS
CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine. D
2. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connec-
tor for damage and then reconnect it again.
E
>> GO TO 22.
22. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” F
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within G
the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor circuit and repair it. H
2. GO TO 26.
NG >> GO TO 23. I

Select “TURBO BST SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make J
below.
Idle: Approximately 1.5V K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 25.
pressure (MAP) sensor, and then GO TO 24. M
MBIB1448E
EC-539
Check for the cause of air suction at downstream of throttle body. Refer to the following.
● Disconnection looseness, or cracks of air duct
● Looseness of oil filler cap
● Open sticking, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of blow-by gas control valve
● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP canister purge hose, open sticking of EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol valve
● Malfunctioning sealing of rocker cover gasket
parts.
● Malfunctioning sealing of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 31.
25. REPLACE ECM

1. Replace ECM.
>> GO TO 31.

below.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 31.
MBIB1448E

Check for the cause of uneven air flow passing through throttle body. Refer to the following.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 29.
EC-540
28. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” A
SP value.
OK or NG EC
C

sure that the indication is within the specified value as described D
below.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 30. F
NG (Less than the specified value)>>Replace manifold absolute
MBIB1448E
G
30. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. H
3. Perform EC-486, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . I
J
>> GO TO 32.
31. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” K
L
OK or NG
M
the SP value.
OK or NG
EC-541
Description BBS0035R
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
incident occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incident Report Situations
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
1. INSPECTION START
TION" .
>> GO TO 2.

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to EC-EC-548, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT

Perform GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
EC-542
A
Wiring Diagram BBS0035T
EC
MBWA1502E
EC-543
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ignition switch OFF
120 G ECM (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0035U
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E

● 10A fuse
EC-544
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS-I A
EC
MBIB1502E
E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 5.
G
H
Continuity should exist. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. J
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

L
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. M

3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E7 termi-
nal 33 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.
MBIB1441E
EC-545
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
11. PBIB1630E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB1191E
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VII

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
EC-546
12. CHECK 20A FUSE A
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 16.
C
D
G
MBIB1502E

H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
I
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M


OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE
ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-547
Ground Inspection BBS0035V
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
● Clean as required to assure good contact.
● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-38, "Ground Distribution" .
PBIB1870E
EC-548
DTC U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
A
Description BBS0035W
The MI will not light up for these self-diagnoses. D
● ECM cannot communicate to other control E
units. ● Harness or connectors
U1001
CAN communication line (CAN communication line is open or
1001 ● ECM cannot communicate for more than the shorted.)
specified time.
F

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. G
H
EC-549
Wiring Diagram BBS0035Z
MBWA1503E
EC-550
A
EC
EC-551
Description BBS003ZM
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS003ZN
The MI will not light up for this diagnosis.

U1010 Initializing CAN communication bus is mal-
1010 functioning.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS003ZO
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
3. Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) with ECM.
EC-552
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003ZP
1. INSPECTION START A
With CONSULT-II
C
D
Without CONSULT-II
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to EC-481, "DIAGNOSTIC E
TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .
See EC-552, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . F
4. Is the DTC 1010 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. G
2. REPLACE ECM H
1. Replace ECM.
Re-communicating Function" . I
J
>> INSPECTION END K
EC-553
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve

PBIB0540E
valve.
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid

INT/V TIM (B1)
● No load
INT/V SOL (B1)
● No load
EC-554
A
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC
● Intake valve control solenoid valve
P0011 Intake valve timing control There is a gap between angle of target and ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-
C
0011 performance phase-control angle degree. up portion of the camshaft
D
FAIL-SAFE MODE E
F
G
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC- H
630 .
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
TESTING CONDITION:
idle. J
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II. K
ture.
3. Maintain the following conditions from at least 6 consecutive L
seconds
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible
M
COOLAN TEMP/S 60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F)
PBIB0164E
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3 msec
Shift lever Neutral position
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (176 - 194°F)
EC-555
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the intake valve timing control system. During this check, a
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
4. Set the tester probe between ECM terminal 62 (IVT control solenoid valve signal) and ground.
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
Conditions Voltage
BATTERY VOLTAGE
At idle
(11 - 14V)
Approximately 4V - BATTERY VOLTAGE(11 - 14V)
2,000 rpm
SEF955V
PBIB1790E

1. Start engine.
nated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIA8559J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-556
3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. EC
4. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) C

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) E

● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. G
H
PBIB0565E I

J
Yes or No
K
No >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 8.

For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-611 for CKP sensor (POS), EC-618 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END


EC-557
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground


CAUTION:
NOTE:

EC-558
DTC P0107, P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365
A
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor is placed intake man-

ifold corrector. It detects intake manifold pressure and sends the EC
voltage signal to the ECM, ECM uses the signal to compute intake
air volume value.
The sensor uses a silicon diaphragm which is sensitive to the
change in pressure. As the pressure increase, the voltage rises. C
MBIB0278E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0036A
Refer to EC-680, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" . F
P0107 Manifold absolute pressure An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0107 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
G
P0108 Manifold absolute pressure An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) H
0108 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM. ● Manifold absolute pressure sensor
I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
J
Manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0036B K

NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
M
.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-559
Wiring Diagram BBS0036C
MBWA1506E
EC-560
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
45 L Sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V C
[Engine is running]
Manifold absolute pres- ● Idle speed D
51 W
E

pressure sensor) F
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0036D
1. INSPECTION START G

P0107 or P0108 H
P0107 >> GO TO 3.
P0108 >> GO TO 2.
I
J
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts. L
EC-561
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

1. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor harness
connector.
MBIB0276E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
MBIB0602E
EC-562
3. Check harness continuity between MAP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56 EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
Refer to Wiring Diagram
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
H
7. CHECK MAP SENSOR
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
J
>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection BBS0036E

M
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (manifold absolute
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
NOTE:
● To avoid the affection of intake manifold vacuum, check the
voltage 1 or more minutes past after engine is stopped.
● Because the sensor is absolute pressure sensor, output value
may differ depends on atmospheric pressure and altitude.
5. Measure the atmospheric pressure.
NOTE:
As atmospheric pressure describe on synoptic chart is value at SEF006P
sea level, please compensate the actual pressure with the fol-
lowing chart.
EC-563
Altitude Compensated pressure

0m 0hPa
200m -24hPa
400m -47hPa
600m -70hPa
800m -92hPa
1,000m -114hPa
1,500m -168hPa
2,000m -218hPa
6. Check the manifold absolute pressure sensor value corresponds to the atmospheric pressure.
Atmospheric pressure Voltage
800hPa 3.2 - 3.6V
850hPa 3.4 - 3.8V
900hPa 3.7 - 4.1V
960hPa 3.9 - 4.3V
1,000hPa 4.1 - 4.5V
1,050hPa 4.3 - 4.7V
7. Start engine and let it idle. MBIB0655E
8. Check the voltage between ECM terminal 51 and ground at

idling and confirm the voltage difference between engine is
stopped and at idling is within following chart.
Intake manifold vacuum Voltage difference
-40kPa (-300mmHg) 1.6 - 2.0V
-53.3kPa (-400mmHg) 2.2 - 2.6V
-66.7kPa (-500mm) 2.8 - 3.2V
-80kPa (-600mmHg) 3.4 - 3.8V
SEF487R
Removal and Installation BBS0036F

EC-564
A
Component Description BBS0036G

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the EC
mistor decreases as temperature increases. C
SEF594K
E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 G
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 72 (Engine H
CAUTION:
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0036H
J
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P0117 Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor
● Harness or connectors K
P0118 Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
0118 sensor circuit high input is sent to ECM.
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
M
or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
Engine coolant temper-
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
EC-565
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0036I
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-566
Wiring Diagram BBS0036J
EC
MBWA1508E
EC-567
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0036K

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
MBIB0279E
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0080E
EC-568
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 73. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 5.

H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS0036L
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I

J
L
PBIB2005E
M
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
Removal and Installation BBS0036M

EC-569
Component Description BBS0036N

PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0036O

(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2*

0122 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 ● Electric throttle control actuator
0123 circuit high input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-570
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0036Q
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II G
3. Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) with ECM. H
EC-571
MBWA1509E
EC-572
CAUTION: A
TERMI- WIRE EC
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
E
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
G
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
More than 0.36V
J
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0036S K

M
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-573
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
MBIB0308E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-574
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
M
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-575
Component Inspection BBS0036T

tions.


step.
Removal and Installation BBS0036U

EC-576
DTC P0132 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS0036V

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0036W I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Changes more than 5 times during K
10 seconds.
L
SEF301UA
EC-577
DTC P0132 HO2S1
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
.
SEF174Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-578
DTC P0132 HO2S1
EC
MBWA1510E
EC-579
DTC P0132 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
heater
PBIB0519E

[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-580
DTC P0132 HO2S1
2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 A
● : Vehicle front
EC
C
>> GO TO 3.
E
MBIB1493E

F
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S1 G
terminal 1.
Continuity should exist. H

OK or NG I
J
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 4. K
L
Continuity should not exist. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

Check connectors for water
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-581
DTC P0132 HO2S1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
MBIB0301E

onds.
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
EC-582
DTC P0132 HO2S1
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant. A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
C
D
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V E

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V MBIB0018E
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 F
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant. G
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 H

EC-583
DTC P0134 HO2S1

SEF463R
SEF288D

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
ing 10 seconds.

within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks
SEF237U
EC-584
DTC P0134 HO2S1
A
WITH CONSULT-II EC
2. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)”. C
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load.
4. Make sure that the indications do not remain in the range
between 0.2V to 0.4V. D
SEF646Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II F
G
● The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
H
J
MBIB0018E
EC-585
DTC P0134 HO2S1
MBWA1510E
EC-586
DTC P0134 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 7.0V
heater
E
PBIB0519E

● Engine speed Above 3,600 rpm (11 - 14V) F
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
I

J
K
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-587
DTC P0134 HO2S1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-588
DTC P0134 HO2S1

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
D
MBIB0301E
F
onds.

I
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
M
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
EC-589
DTC P0134 HO2S1
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V MBIB0018E
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS0037A

EC-590
DTC P0138 HO2S2
A
Component Description BBS0037B

tions.
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0037C

tions are met.
– Engine: After warning up G
H

SEF305UA
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0037E
NOTE:
EC-591
DTC P0138 HO2S2
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
. SEF189Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
EC-592
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS0037F
EC
MBWA1511E
EC-593
DTC P0138 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
2 GR
[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0037G

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-594
DTC P0138 HO2S2
– : Vehicle front
EC
– Oil pan (3)
C
terminal 4.
D

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 3.
F
G
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 or HO2S2 terminal 1 and ground. H
Continuity should not exist. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. J
4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER K

Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-595
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Component Inspection BBS0037H

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

“HO2S2(B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
SEF662Y
MBIB1402E
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
EC-596
DTC P0138 HO2S2
at least 10 times. A
procedure.
EC
sary.
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear C
position.
procedure. D
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E
Cleaner and approved anti-seize lubricant. F
Removal and Installation BBS0037I

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . G
EC-597
Component Description BBS0037J

throttle position sensor, etc. the throttle position sensor responds to
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0037K

(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2*
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0037L

0222 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor (TP sensor 1)
0223 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM.
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0037M
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-598
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. A
EC
D
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II E
3. Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) with ECM. F
EC-599
Wiring Diagram BBS0037N
MBWA1513E
EC-600
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped D
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON] E
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor) G
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped H
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
91 BR [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
K
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0037O
1. RETIGHTEN GROUND CONNECTIONS

L
M
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-601
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
MBIB0308E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-602
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
M
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-603
Component Inspection BBS0037P

tions.


step.
Removal and Installation BBS0037Q

EC-604
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
A
Component Description BBS0037R
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from EC
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
C
MBIB0306E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0037S

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause F
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is G
● Knock sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0037T

H
NOTE:
I
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II J
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. K
.
L
M
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-605
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Wiring Diagram BBS0037U
MBWA0571E
EC-606
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground D
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0037V

E
F
NOTE: G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
NG >> GO TO 2.

J
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
sensor terminal 2. K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. M
MBIB0306E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-607
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0037W
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground.
NOTE:
than 10 MΩ.
CAUTION:
PBIB0253E
KNOCK SENSOR
EC-608
A
Component Description BBS0037Y

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at EC
olution.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
change. D
changes.
PBIB0562E
E
PBIB2382E
I

ENG SPEED
K
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of
engine cranking.
(The sensor circuit is open or M
P0335 Crankshaft position ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position shorted.)
0335 sensor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is
running.
● Signal plate
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
EC-609
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
onds at idle speed.
.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
EC-610
EC
MBWA1515E
EC-611
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
PBIB0527E
Crankshaft position
13 Y
sensor (POS)
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0528E

[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ignition switch OFF
120 G ECM (11 - 14V)
EC-612

MBIB1502E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H

1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
K
MBIB1078E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and L

Voltage: Battery voltage M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SEF479Y

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
EC-613
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-614
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A

3. Remove the sensor. EC
PBIB0563E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. F

3 (+) - 1 (-) G
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 1 (-)
H
MBIB0024E
I
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) J

EC-615
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction with

camshaft (intake) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
PBIB0562E
change.
PBIB2382E
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0340 Camshaft position sensor ● Camshaft (Intake)
● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM
during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-45 .)
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-45 .)
pattern during engine running.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
EC-616
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec- A
onds at idle speed.
. EC
onds. C
. SEF058Y
D
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. E
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. F
6. Start engine and maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
7. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. G
H
EC-617
MBWA1516E
EC-618
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
idle. E
PBIB0525E
Camshaft position
14 R
sensor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
F
[Engine is running]
PBIB0526E
H
29 B (Camshaft position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
I
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay J
111 P OFF
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds passed after turning (11 - 14V) K
ignition switch OFF
120 G ECM (11 - 14V)
L

M
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
EC-619
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
MBIB0279E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF479Y

● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
EC-620
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
6. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
J
Check the following. K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
rear end or replace camshaft. M
PBIB0565E

>> INSPECTION END
EC-621
Component Inspection BBS0038B
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

PBIB0563E

3 (+) - 1 (-)
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 1 (-)
MBIB0024E

EC-622
DTC P0605 ECM
A
Component Description BBS0038D

PBIB1164E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0038E

P0605
0605 G
FAIL-SAFE MODE H
I
Malfunction A
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0038F J

Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCE-
DURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, per-
form PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. K
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
3. If 1st DTC is detected, go to EC-625, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-623
DTC P0605 ECM
With CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
With CONSULT-II
ON.
.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-624
DTC P0605 ECM
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0038G
With CONSULT-II
C
D
Without CONSULT-II
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to EC-478, "HOW TO ERASE E
See EC-623, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . F
4. Is the 1st trip DTC 0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. G
2. REPLACE ECM H
1. Replace ECM.
Re-communicating Function" . I
J
>> INSPECTION END K
EC-625
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
PBIB1164E
P1065 ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
ECM power supply circuit open or shorted.]
1065 properly.
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0038J
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
ON.
.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-626
EC
MBWA1518E
EC-627
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0026E

● 20A fuse

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-628
With CONSULT-II
EC
C
Without CONSULT-II D
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to EC-478, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . E
4. Is the 1st trip DTC 1065 displayed again? F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> INSPECTION END G
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. H
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-473,
"Description" .
3. Perform EC-486, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . I
J
>> INSPECTION END

K
EC-629
Component Description BBS0038M

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0038N

INT/V SOL (B1)
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0038O
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P1111 Intake valve timing control
through intake valve timing control solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
valve.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0038P
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-630
Wiring Diagram BBS0038Q
EC
MBWA1519E
EC-631
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
Intake valve timing
62 LG
PBIB1790E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ignition switch OFF
120 G (11 - 14V)
EC-632
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness EC
connector.
C
MBIB0284E
E

valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
PBIB0285E
I
K
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR L
OPEN AND SHORT
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-633
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0038S

valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground


CAUTION:
NOTE:
Removal and Installation BBS0038T

EC-634
A
Component Description BBS0038U
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
angle properly in response to driving condition. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0038V
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. D
Electric throttle control actuator does not function E
A)
1121 actuator B)
F
FAIL-SAFE MODE G
H
Malfunction A
I
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in Neutral position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0038W J

NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. K
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B L
With CONSULT-II
M
ON.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-635
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
4. Start engine and let it idle for the 3 seconds.
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0038X

2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0307E

>> INSPECTION END
EC-636
A
NOTE:
or P1126. Refer to EC-635 or EC-643 .
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- C
D

E
P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
1122 performance operate properly. shorted.) F
FAIL-SAFE MODE G
H
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS00390 I

NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
TESTING CONDITION:
is running. K
WITH CONSULT-II
M
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-637
MBWA1520E
EC-638
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V D
4 L E
PBIB0534E F
0 - 14V

G
5 P
PBIB0533E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 G Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF] I
(11 - 14V)

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-639
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1171E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
EC-640
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. D
NG >> GO TO 7.

F
OK or NG
K
L
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist M
3
4 Should exist
5 Should exist MBIB0308E
6
4 Should not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
EC-641
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
MBIB0307E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

>> INSPECTION END


step.
PBIB0095E

EC-642
A
C

D

E

P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted.)
1124 relay circuit short is stuck ON.
● Throttle control motor relay G
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open.)
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low.
● Throttle control motor relay H
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up. I

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return J
spring.

K
NOTE:
L
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V. M
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
EC-643
Without CONSULT-II
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-644
EC
MBWA1521E
EC-645
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

4 L
PBIB0534E
0 - 14V

5 P
PBIB0533E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 G Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF]
(11 - 14V)

Voltage: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1171E
EC-646

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUSE
E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 7.
4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I G
1. Reconnect all disconnected connectors.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the H
I
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
K

L
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E7. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-647
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-648
A
Component Description BBS0039B
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0039C C
FAIL-SAFE MODE F
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0039D

H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
K
SEF058Y
M
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-649
MBWA1522E
EC-650
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V D
4 L E
PBIB0534E F
0 - 14V

G
5 P
PBIB0533E

104 G [Ignition switch: OFF] I
relay (11 - 14V)

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-651
actuator terminal
4 Should exist
3
5 Should not exist
4 Should not exist MBIB0308E
6
5 Should exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END


step.
PBIB0095E
EC-652
Removal and Installation BBS0039H
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A

EC
EC-653
DTC P1171 INTAKE ERROR PFP:22365
NOTE:
ECM computes two intake air volume values.
1: Computed from manifold absolute pressure signal and intake air temperature signal.
2: Computed from engine revolution signal and throttle position signal.
In normal condition, value 1 is used for engine control.

If intake air leak occurred between throttle valve and intake air port, manifold absolute pressure sensor signal
might increase, and then ECM increases amount of fuel injected. In this case, ECM uses value 2 for engine
control instead of value1.
ECM monitors the difference between value 1 and value 2. If the difference is extremely large, ECM judges
intake air leak occurs and light up the MI
This diagnosis has one trip detection logic.

(The manifold absolute pressure sensor
circuit is open or shorted.)
P1171 A high voltage from the sensor is sent to
Intake error ● Manifold absolute pressure
1171 ECM under light load driving condition.
● Vacuum hoses
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and MI lights up.
Intake air system
due to fuel cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0039J
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
EC-654
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. A
EC
EC-655
MBWA1506E
EC-656
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
D
51 W
sure sensor [Engine is running] E
Sensor ground [Engine is running] F

G

H
Listen for an intake air leak after the air cleaner element.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. I
2. CHECK VACUUM HOSE J

1. Check intake manifold vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-509, "Vacuum Hose
Drawing" .
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
L
EC-657
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

tor.
MBIB0276E
3. Check voltage between manifold absolute pressure sensor ter-

minal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
MBIB0602E
EC-658
3. Check harness continuity between manifold absolute pressure sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 56. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
H
7. CHECK MAP SENSOR
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
J
>> INSPECTION END

L
EC-659
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT PFP:47850
Description BBS003ZQ
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS003ZR
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MI will not light up for this self-
diagnosis.
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control
P1211 ECM receives a malfunction information from unit)
TCS control unit
1211 “ABS actuator and electric unit (Control unit)”.
● TCS related parts
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS003ZS
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and turn ON.
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003ZT
Go to BRC-49, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
EC-660
A
Description BBS0039M
NOTE:
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0039N
The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis. E

F
ECM can not receive the information from (The CAN communication line is open or
“ABS actuator and electric unit (control
1212 line
unit)” continuously.
G
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS0039O H

TESTING CONDITION:
I
WITH CONSULT-II
. K
SEF058Y M
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0039P
EC-661
System Description BBS0047Z
NOTE:
COOLING FAN CONTROL

Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
control (Cooling fan relay)
Air conditioner switch*3 Air conditioner ON signal*2

*3: Models with air conditioner.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF] (models with
A/C) or 2 step control [ON/OFF] (models without A/C).
The ECM controls cooling fan relays through CAN communication line.
OPERATION
Models with A/C
MBIB0650E
EC-662
Models without A/C
A
EC
MBIB0656E D
Specification data are reference values. E

AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON F
the engine ON
OFF
(201°F) or less G
COOLING FAN LOW*
95°C (203°F) and 104°C (210°F)
Engine coolant temperature: 105°C H
HI*
(212°F) or more
HI depends on engine coolant temperature. I
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will J
is indicated.
K
(The cooling fan circuit is open or L
shorted.)
● Cooling fan
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- ● IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay) M
heat).
● Radiator hose
● Cooling fan system does not operate prop-
● Radiator
P1217 Engine over tempera- erly (Overheat).
1217 ture (Overheat) ● Reservoir tank cap
● Engine coolant was not added to the system
(Models with A/C)
using the proper filling method.
● Radiator cap
● Engine coolant is not within the specified
(Models without A/C)
range.
● Water pump
● Thermostat
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-9, "Changing Engine
coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-7, "Changing Engine Oil" .
EC-663
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap (Models without A/C) or reservoir tank cap (Models with A/C) when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator (Mod-
els without A/C) or reservoir tank (Models with A/C).
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF621W

SULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-668, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF784Z
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Models with Air Conditioner
3. Start engine.
CAUTION:
4. Set temperature control lever to full cold position.

CAUTION:
EC-664
If NG, go to EC-668, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A
10. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. EC
tor.
12. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor C
harness connector.
MBIB0651E
D
CAUTION: E
F
G
SEF023R
Models without Air Conditioner H

the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-668, I
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-668, J
tor. K
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor SEF621W
harness connector.
5. Start engine and make that cooling fan operates. Be careful not L
to overheat engine.
M
SEF023R
EC-665
MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER
MBWA1523E
EC-666
A
EC
MBWA1524E
EC-667
PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER

1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
SEF784Z

With CONSULT-II
2. Make sure that cooling fan operate at higher speed than low
speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
SEF785Z

Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
MBIB0651E
EC-668
5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
C
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operate at higher
speed than low speed.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 6.
E
F
SEF023R
6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK G

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. H
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Hose J
● Radiator
K
8. CHECK RESERVOIR TANK CAP L

Refer to CO-16, "Checking Reservoir Tank Cap (Models with A/C)" .
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace reservoir tank cap.
9. CHECK COMPONENT PARTS

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-669
Procedure A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1307E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
MBIB1074E

● Resistor E62

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-670
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-18, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD- EC
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
Procedure B C

D
3. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. E
cooling fan motor terminal 1, cooling fan motor terminal 2 and
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1074E
H
Check the following. I
J
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
M
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-671
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO4.
dure A" .)
SEF784Z

Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
dure A" .)
SEF023R

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-672
● Hose
● Radiator EC
C

D
Refer to CO-15, "Checking Radiator Cap (Models without A/C)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. E
7. CHECK THERMOSTAT F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. H

I
>> INSPECTION END J
Procedure A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E6. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1307E

EC-673
ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
MBIB1074E
NG >> GO TO 4.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
Main 12 Causes of Overheating BBS00485

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked bumper
ator filler neck

(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Radiator Cap (Models
kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) without A/C)" .

4*6 ● Reservoir tank cap ● Pressure tester 2 Reservoir Tank Cap
cm , 12.8psi) (Models with A/C)" .
EC-674
A
CHECK" .
lower radiator hoses STAT" , and CO-12, EC
"RADIATOR" .

DTC P1217 (EC-662 ). C
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 — D

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving See CO-9, "Changing
reservoir tank and idling Engine coolant" . E
tor F
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-60, "CYLINDER
gauge mum distortion (warping) HEAD" .
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-74, "CYLINDER G
tons walls or piston BLOCK" .
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. H
*5: Models without A/C.
*6: Models with A/C. I

J
COOLING FAN MOTOR
check operation. K
Terminals
(+) (-) L
M
MBIB0607E
EC-675
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
tion.

P1225 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning value is ● Electric throttle control actuator
1225 performance excessively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS003A0
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-676
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003A1
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A

2. Remove the intake air duct. EC
the housing.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 2.
control actuator inside. D
E
MBIB0307E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

2. Perform EC-486, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . G
>> INSPECTION END H
Removal and Installation BBS003A2

I
EC-677
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description BBS003A3

PBIB0145E
tion.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS003A4

P1226 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning is not ● Electric throttle control actuator
1226 performance performed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-678
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR

the housing.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 2.
E
MBIB0307E

>> INSPECTION END H
Removal and Installation BBS003A7

I
EC-679

(Manifold absolute pressure sensor is
shorted.)
P1229 Sensor power supply circuit ECM detects a voltage of power source
shorted.)
1229 short for sensor is excessively low or high.
(APP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-680
Wiring Diagram BBS003AA
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1525E
EC-681
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
106 W
EC-682
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1526E
EC-683
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
106 W
EC-684
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003AB

MBIB1502E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I H

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position sensor (APP) sensor har-
ness connector.
K
MBIB0285E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0304E
EC-685
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals
45 Manifold absolute pressure sensor terminal 2 EC-560
46 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-795
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK COMPONENTS
● Manifold absolute pressure sensor (Refer to EC-563, "Component Inspection" .)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-85, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" or MTC-51, "COMPO-
NENT INSPECTION" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
7. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-686
C
>> INSPECTION END

D
>> INSPECTION END E
EC-687
Component Description BBS003AC
When the shift lever position is Neutral, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003AD

On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS003AE
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
P1706
Park/neutral position switch switch is not changed in the process of circuit is open or shorted.]
1706
Overall Function Check BBS003AF
WITH CONSULT-II
ing conditions.
Position (Shift lever) Known-good signal
Neutral position ON
Except the above position OFF
SEF212Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
and ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known-good data)
Neutral position Approx. 0
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except the above position
(11 - 14V)
MBIB0043E
EC-688
Wiring Diagram BBS003AG
EC
MBWA1527E
EC-689
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
● Shift lever position: Neutral
102 GR PNP switch
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003AH

Shift lever position Voltage
Neutral Battery voltage (11- 14V)
Except above position Approximately 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0652E

4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB1444E

● 10A fuse
EC-690
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 31 and PNP switch terminal 3. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PARTS E

F
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and IPDM E/R
6. CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to MT-16, "Park/Neutral Position Switch" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace PNP switch. I

J
>> INSPECTION END K

3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3, 54 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
EC-691
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-692
A
Description BBS003AI
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp
switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used EC
mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
MBIB0286E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003AJ

G
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS003AK

H
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ● Harness or connectors

Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is driv- I
1805
FAIL-SAFE MODE J
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI light up.
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. K
L
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS003AM M

WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
EC-693
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Fully depress the brake pedal at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to EC-478 .
EC-694
Wiring Diagram BBS003AN
EC
MBWA1528E
EC-695
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003AO
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

MBIB0286E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0117E
EC-696
● 10A fuse
C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. F

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG (LHD models)>>Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H

J
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
K
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. M

>> INSPECTION END
EC-697
Component Inspection BBS003AP
STOP LAMP SWITCH

MBIB0286E

Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist.
If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE

PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.
PBIB0118E
EC-698
A
Component Description BBS003AQ

signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003AR
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS003AS J

NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. K
shorted.)
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 M
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(APP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS003AT
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-699
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-700
Wiring Diagram BBS003AU
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1529E
EC-701
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
106 W
EC-702
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1530E
EC-703
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
106 W
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003AV

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-704
connector.
D
MBIB0285E

F
MBIB0304E H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I

L
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-705
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS003AW

EC-706
conditions.
EC

MBIB0023E

step.
Removal and Installation BBS003AX
F
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
G
EC-707
Component Description BBS003AY

signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003AZ


ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS003B0

shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 2)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS003B1
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-708
WITH CONSULT-II
EC
D
SEF058Y
EC-709
Wiring Diagram BBS003B2
LHD MODELS
MBWA1531E
EC-710
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground E
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) F
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
sensor 2
H
I
106 W
EC-711
RHD MODELS
MBWA1532E
EC-712
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground E
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) F
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
sensor 2
H
I
106 W
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003B3

M
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-713
connector.
MBIB0285E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0309E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

EC-714
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
D
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 7.
F
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. G
H
>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I


OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 10.
M
EC-715
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS003B4

EC-716
conditions.
EC

MBIB0023E

step.
Removal and Installation BBS003B5
F
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
G
EC-717
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Description BBS003B6

PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003B7

(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2*

(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
P2135 Throttle position sensor
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135 circuit range/performance ● Electric throttle control actuator
and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-718
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
WITH CONSULT-II
EC
D
SEF058Y
EC-719
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram BBS003BA
MBWA1533E
EC-720
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
CAUTION: A
TERMI- WIRE EC
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
E
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
F
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
G
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
More than 0.36V
J
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003BB K

M
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-721
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MBIB0308E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-722
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 68 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10. M

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-723
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection BBS003BC

tions.


step.
Removal and Installation BBS003BD

EC-724
A
Component Description BBS003BE

signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003BF
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS003BG J

NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC- K
680, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
or shorted.)
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
M
P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
compared with the signals from APP sensor
2138 circuit range/performance ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
1 and APP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-725
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS003BH
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-726
Wiring Diagram BBS003BI
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1534E
EC-727
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
106 W
EC-728
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1535E
EC-729
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
98 G
106 W
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003BJ

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-730
connector.
D
MBIB0285E

F
MBIB0304E H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I

L
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I M
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 5 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 5.
MBIB0309E
EC-731
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-732
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG (RHD models)>>GO TO 11. E
Check the following. F
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor G
H
12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and I
Continuity should exist. J
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 14.
L
Check the following. M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
EC-733
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS003BK

conditions.

MBIB0023E
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next

step.
Removal and Installation BBS003BL
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-734
A
Description BBS003D8
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from IPDM E/R to ECM. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003D9

C
Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
ON
lighting switch is 2nd. D
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and light-
OFF
ing switch is OFF.
● Engine: After warm- Heater fan: Operating ON E
HEATER FAN SW ing up, idle the
engine Heater fan: Not operating OFF
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003DA F

1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following
conditions. H
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. J
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E
K
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions. L
Lighting switch: 2nd position ON
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0103E
EC-735
With CONSULT-II
Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1995E

>> INSPECTION END

".
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to ATC-26, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or MTC-23, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-736
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920
A
Description BBS003CK
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Manifold absolute pressure sensor Amount of intake air C

D
Heated oxygen sensors 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas E
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP G
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor H
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ I
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, J
L
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003CL
Specification data are reference values. M

PURG VOL C/V
● No load
EC-737
Wiring Diagram BBS003CM
MBWA1545E
EC-738
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
D
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
E
EVAP canister purge
PBIB0050E
valve
Approximately 10V F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm G
(More than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition switch I
ECM relay OFF
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds passed after turning J
(11 - 14V)
ignition switch OFF
120 G (11 - 14V) K
EC-739
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003CN

With CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister.
3. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
PBIB0569E
5. Change the valve opening percentage with touching “Qu” or

“Qd” on CONSULT-II screen, and check for vacuum existence at
the EVAP purge hose (2) under the following conditions.
– : Vehicle front
– EVAP canister (1)
Conditions
Vacuum
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
0% Should not exist
100% Should exist
MBIB1497E
Without CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister.
4. Check for vacuum existence at the EVAP purge hose (2) under
the following conditions.
– : Vehicle front
– EVAP canister (1)
Conditions Vacuum
At idle Should not exist
Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm Should exist
OK or NG
MBIB1497E
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

OK or NG
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
EC-740
3. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE A
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-469, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" .
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
C
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. E
G
MBIB1076E
H
Voltage: Battery voltage I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. J
K
PBIB0148E

L
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R M
EC-741
OK or NG
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB0569E
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-742
Component Inspection BBS003CO
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

With CONSULT-II
solenoid valve under the following conditions. EC

C
100% Yes
0% No
D
PBIB0149E
E
Without CONSULT-II
solenoid valve under the following conditions. F
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between termi- G
Yes
nals 1 and 2
No supply No
H
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation BBS003CP

I
J
EC-743
FUEL INJECTOR
Component Description BBS003CS
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
engine fuel needs.
SEF375Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003CT

INJ PULSE-B1
● No load
EC-744
FUEL INJECTOR
Wiring Diagram BBS003CU
EC
MBWA1538E
EC-745
FUEL INJECTOR
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on
rpm at idle.
PBIB0529E
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIB0530E
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003CV
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
EC-746
FUEL INJECTOR
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
EC
CONSULT-II.
speed drop. C
E
MBIB0302E
1. Start engine.
Clicking noise should be heard. G
PBIB1986E
J
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
K
EC-747
FUEL INJECTOR
3. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector (1).
– : Vehicle front
MBIB1458E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0582E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
5. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
EC-748
FUEL INJECTOR
Component Inspection BBS003CW
FUEL INJECTOR C
Resistance: 10.4 - 15.3Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] D
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation BBS003CX

G
FUEL INJECTOR
H
EC-749
FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP PFP:17042
Description BBS003CY
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed*
Battery Battery voltage*
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
MBIB0291E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003CZ

ON
EC-750
FUEL PUMP
Wiring Diagram BBS003D0
EC
MBWA1539E
EC-751
FUEL PUMP
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
ON
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003D1

Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel hose for 1
second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1496E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4. Check voltage between ECM terminals 113 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1187E
EC-752
FUEL PUMP
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A
Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 69 and ground with
Voltage: Battery voltage EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
C
NG >> GO TO 11.
D
MBIB1445E
Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
F
5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I G

3. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con- H
nector.
I
MBIB0288E
K
5. Check voltage between “Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L

after ignition switch is turned ON. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
MBIB1446E
6. CHECK 15A FUSE

3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse.
EC-753
FUEL PUMP
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 8.

● Harness connectors E101, M1
● Harness connectors M72, B21
● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and IPDM E/R
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS003D2
FUEL PUMP
EC-754
FUEL PUMP
terminals 1 and 3. A
EC
MBIB0311E
D
Removal and Installation BBS003D3
FUEL PUMP
E
EC-755
HO2S1
HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description BBS003C3

SEF463R
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003C4

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
EC-756
HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS003C5
EC
MBWA1542E
EC-757
HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
heater
PBIB0519E

[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
EC-758
HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003C6
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make
sure that the monitors fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more C
than 5 times in 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH D
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN →RICH
SEF820Y
F
Without CONSULT-II
G
3. Set ECM in Diagnostic test mode - II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
Refer to EC-480, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . H
sure that the MI comes ON more than 5 times in 10 seconds.
OK or NG I
NG >> GO TO 2.
J
K
SAT652J

MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-759
HO2S1
terminal 1.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS003C7

With CONSULT-II
II.
EC-760
HO2S1
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow- A
ing steps.
EC
MBIB0301E
D
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 sec- E
onds.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. F

G
SEF217YA
SEF648Y K
CAUTION:
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. L
Without CONSULT-II M
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and ground.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V MBIB0018E
CAUTION:
EC-761
HO2S1
Removal and Installation BBS003C8

EC-762
HO2S1 HEATER
HO2S1 HEATER PFP:22690
A
Description BBS003BM
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1
heater control heater
speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine
is started. D
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater E
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 after warming up ON
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003BN

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION G
ON
H
EC-763
HO2S1 HEATER
Wiring Diagram BBS003BO
MBWA1542E
EC-764
HO2S1 HEATER
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 7.0V
Heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 heater
E
PBIB0519E

[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sen- 0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 BR ● Warm-up condition
sor 1 (Periodically change) G

74 B (Heated oxygen sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
H
sor) ● Idle speed
I
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003BP

J
4. Set tester prove between ECM terminal 24 (HO2S1 heater signal) and ground.
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions. L
Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal waves as
shown below.
Conditions Voltage M
Approximately 7.0V
At idle
MBIB0038E
PBIB0519E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
EC-765
HO2S1 HEATER
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

MBIB1494E
3. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIA9576J

● 10A fuse
EC-766
HO2S1 HEATER
5. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 24 and HO2S1 terminal 3. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 7.

H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS003BQ
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER I

Terminal No. Resistance J
2 and 3 3.3 - 4.4 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist) K

CAUTION: L
M
MBIB1306E
Removal and Installation BBS003BR

EC-767
HO2S2
HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description BBS003C9

shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
tions.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003CA

tions are met.
– Engine: After warning up
EC-768
HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS003CB
EC
MBWA1543E
EC-769
HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
2 GR
[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003CC
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

6. Check the voltage while revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times. (Depress and release the accelerator pedal as
quickly as possible.)
The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0020E
EC-770
HO2S2
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A
Keep engine at idle for 10 minutes, then check the voltage between ECM terminal 16 and ground, or check
voltage when coasting 80 km/h (50 MPH) in 3rd gear position.
The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V EC
OK or NG
C
NG >> GO TO 3.

D
Refer to EC-548, "Ground Inspection" . E
H
MBIB1502E

I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
J
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector (1). K
– : Vehicle front
– Oil pan (3) L
M
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. MBIB1459E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-771
HO2S2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS003CD

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
SEF174Y

SEF662Y
EC-772
HO2S2
A
EC
MBIB1402E D
CAUTION: E
Without CONSULT-II
H
at least 10 times.
procedure. J
sary.
position.
procedure.
CAUTION: M
Removal and Installation BBS003CE

EC-773
HO2S2 HEATER
HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
Description BBS003BS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 2 Heated oxygen sensor 2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control heater
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor Amount of intake air
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,800 OFF
● Below 3,800 rpm after the following conditions are met.
ON
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS003BT

ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed at between 3,500 to 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
EC-774
HO2S2 HEATER
Wiring Diagram BBS003BU
EC
MBWA1543E
EC-775
HO2S2 HEATER
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Below 3,800 rpm after the follow-
ing conditions are met.
2 GR
[Engine is running]
under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003BV

5. Set voltmeter proves between ECM terminal 2 (HO2S2 heater signal) and ground.
Conditions Voltage
At idle 0 - 1V
Engine speed: Above 3,800 rpm Battery voltage
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0673E
EC-776
HO2S2 HEATER
E
MBIB1502E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector (1). H
– : Vehicle front
I
– Oil pan (3)
J
MBIB1459E
K


OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
MBIB1442E

● 10A fuse
EC-777
HO2S2 HEATER
5. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS003BW

2 and 3 8.0 - 10.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω

CAUTION:
SEF249Y
Removal and Installation BBS003BX

EC-778
IAT SENSOR
IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description BBS003BY
The intake air temperature sensor is built into manifold absolute

pressure sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and EC
transmits a signal to the ECM.
MBIB0276E
E
<Reference data>
Intake air
25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1
80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 G
CAUTION: H
EC-779
IAT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram BBS003BZ
MBWA1544E
EC-780
IAT SENSOR

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 34 and ground with CON- EC
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 0 - 4.8V
C
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. D
MBIB0041E
E

F
G
J
MBIB1502E
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
L
EC-781
IAT SENSOR
1. Disconnect manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (with
intake air temperature sensor) harness connector.
MBIB0276E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
MBIB0300E
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace manifold absolute pressure sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

>> INSPECTION END
EC-782
IAT SENSOR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

1. Check resistance between manifold absolute pressure sensor
terminals 3 and 4 under the following conditions.
EC
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
2. If NG, replace manifold absolute pressure sensor (with intake air C
temperature sensor).
D
MBIB0276E
SEF012P
H
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR I

EC-783
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description BBS003CF

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
coil primary circuit. This ON-OFF operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
MBIB0272E
EC-784
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram BBS003CG
EC
MBWA1536E
EC-785
IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
111 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
120 G (11 - 14V)
EC-786
IGNITION SIGNAL
EC
MBWA1537E
EC-787
IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
PBIB0521E
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0522E
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003CH

Turn ignition switch OFF and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
MBIB0302E
EC-788
IGNITION SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
EC
shown in the figure. C
NOTE:
D
E
MBIB0033E
PBIB0521E
OK or NG F
NG >> GO TO 10.
G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-543, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- J
CUIT" .
K
MBIB0034E
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
EC-789
IGNITION SIGNAL
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
3. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 1 and IPDM terminal 33.
4. Also check harness for short to power and short to ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 7.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
9. CHECK CONDENSER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
EC-790
IGNITION SIGNAL
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V A
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. EC
E
MBIB0272E

CONSULT-II or tester. F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
H
SEF107S
I
Check harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F1.
J
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K

2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground. L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
EC-791
IGNITION SIGNAL
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
Component Inspection BBS003CI

CAUTION:
Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2
Except 0
1 and 3

NOTE:
8. Start engine.
pressure.
11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. MBIB0277E

checked.
EC-792
IGNITION SIGNAL
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion A
16. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded part. EC
CAUTION:
● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil C
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage PBIB2325E
becomes 20kV or more. D
● If might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. E
CONDENSER
G
MBIB0031E
J
Removal and Installation BBS003CJ

Refer to EM-29, "IGNITION COIL" . K
EC-793
Component Description BBS003D4

the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
MBIB1492E
PBIB2657E
EC-794
EC
MBWA1540E
EC-795
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
57 Y ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON.

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 69 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0035E

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
MBIB1502E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-796
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
D
MBIB1492E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. G
SEF479Y
H

I
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor J

K
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-797
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.


OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

Refer to ATC-142, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" (Models with A/C) or MTC-88,
"Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
EC-798
VSS
VSS PFP:32702
A
Description BBS003CQ
unit)” through CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN EC
communication line.
Diagnostic Procedure BBS003CR
1. INSPECTION START C

Yes or No D
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
E
2. CHECK OVERRALL FUNCTION
F
2. Lift up the vehicle.
3. Start engine and let it idle
4. Select “VHCL SPEED SE” in“DATA MONITOR” mode with G
CONSULT-II.
5. Select “VHCL SPEED SE” indication when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position. H
“VHCL SPEED SE” indication should
exceed 10km/h (6MPH).
OK or NG I
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0164E J
3. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (models without ESP) or BRC-49, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" K
(models with ESP).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. L
4. CHECK COMBINATION METER M

>> INSPECTION END
EC-799
Wiring Diagram BBS003DB
MBWA1541E
EC-800
A
Fuel Pressure BBS0048B
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.5bar, 3.57kg/cm2 , 51psi)

EC
Idle Speed BBS0048C
Target idle speed No load* (in Neutral position) 650 ± 50 rpm

C
Air conditioner: ON In Neutral position 900 rpm or more
● Air conditioner switch: OFF D
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor BBS0048E

E
Supply voltage Approximately 5.0V

Output voltage at idle 1.4 – 1.5 V* F
Intake Air Temperature Sensor BBS0048F

G
25 (77) 1.9 – 2.1
H
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor BBS0048G

I
20 (68) 2.1 – 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 – 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 – 0.260 J
Knock Sensor BBS0048H
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Approximately 530 – 590kΩ K

Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) BBS0048I

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) BBS0048J

M
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater BBS0048K
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater BBS0048L
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve BBS0048M
Throttle Control Motor BBS0048N
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 – 15Ω
Fuel Injector BBS0048O
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 10.4 – 15.3Ω
EC-801
Fuel Pump BBS0048P
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 0.2 – 5.0Ω
EC-802
INDEX FOR DTC
[HR (WITH EURO-OBD)]
INDEX FOR DTC
[HR (WITH EURO-OBD)] PFP:00024
A
DTC No. Index BBS0048Q
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-925, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3 D
GST*
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-925 E

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 Flashing*5 FURTHER TESTING EC-844 F
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — G
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-935 H
P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-935
I
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-947 J
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-953
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-953
K
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-959
P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1) EC-967
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-977 L
P0135 0135 HO2S1 HTR (B1) EC-985
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-991
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-998
M
P0141 0141 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-1006
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-1012
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-1019
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1026
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1026
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-1032
EC-803
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*
GST*
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-1056
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-1063
P0500 0500 6 EC-1070
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*
P0605 0605 ECM EC-1072
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-105
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-110
P0720 0720 6 AT-115
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*
P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-121
P0731 0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-125
P0732 0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-129
P0733 0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-132
P0734 0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-136
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-142
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-147
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-153
P0750 0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC AT-159
P0755 0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC AT-164
P1065 1065 *7 EC-1075
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR EC-1082
P1128 1128 ETC MOT EC-1096
P1143 1143 HO2S1 (B1) EC-1101
P1144 1144 HO2S1 (B1) EC-1107
P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) EC-1113
P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) EC-1121
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-1129
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION BL-215
P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-169
P1760 1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-171
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1172
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1172
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1181
EC-804
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*
GST*2
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1181 EC
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-1191
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. C
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. D
*5: When engine is running, MI may flash. For details, refer to EC-844, "MI Flashing Without DTC" .
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MI illuminates.
*7:This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
E
EC-805
INDEX FOR DTC
Alphabetical Index BBS0048R
NOTE:
● If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 AT-125
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 AT-129
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 AT-132
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 AT-136
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 AT-147
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-1172
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 EC-1172
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 EC-1181
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 EC-1181
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 AT-110
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 4 EC-925
1000*
ECM P0605 0605 EC-1072
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*7 P1065 1065 EC-1075

ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 AT-121
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 EC-1082
ETC MOT P1128 1128 EC-1096
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 EC-1012
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 EC-1019
EC-806
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items A
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3
ECM*
GST*2
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-959 EC
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 EC-967
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 EC-977
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 EC-1101 C
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 EC-1107
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 0135 EC-985
D
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-991
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-998
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 EC-1113 E
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 EC-1121
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 0141 EC-1006
F
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 EC-930 G
H
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 AT-153
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 EC-935 I
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 EC-935
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-1032
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 BL-215 J
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
MAY BE REQUIRED. K
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
MAY BE REQUIRED. L
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 AT-171
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 AT-105
M
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 EC-1063
SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 AT-159
SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 AT-164
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 AT-142
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 EC-1129
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-1026
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-1026
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-953
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-953
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-1191
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 AT-169
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 EC-1056
EC-807
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6 P0720 0720 AT-115
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 EC-1070

*6: When the fail-safe operation for both self-diagnoses occur, the MI illuminates.
EC-808
PRECAUTIONS
A
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” BBS0048S
WARNING:
Maintenance Information BBS005AS

RHD MODELS H
● ECM I
● IPDM E/R
J
LHD MODELS
● ECM
L
Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover BBS00583
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T BBS0048U
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MI to light up.
EC-809
PRECAUTIONS
NESS CONNECTOR" .
may cause the MI to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution BBS0048V

running.
switch is turned OFF.
SEF289H

● If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
● If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-
PBIA9222J
– Test values
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (B) it
securely with a lever (1) as far as it will go as shown in the
figure.
– ECM (2)
– Loosen (A)
PBIB2947E
EC-810
PRECAUTIONS
break).
EC
damage to ICs. C

erly. Refer to EC-883, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value"
. F
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent. G
H
J
SAT652J L
EC-811
PRECAUTIONS
the ground.
SEF348N

MBIB0291E

sarily.
SEF709Y

control units.
SEF708Y
EC-812
PRECAUTIONS
A
EC
EC-813
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools BBS0048W
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor

sensor wrench
S-NT379

sensor wrench
S-NT636
EG17650301 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and

Radiator cap tester radiator filler neck
adapter a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
EG17550000 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester

Break-out box
ZZA1194D

Y-cable adapter
PBIA9379J
KV10118400 Measuring fuel pressure

Fuel tube adapter
PBIB3043E
EC-814
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools BBS0048X
A

release room EC
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: Part
No. 16441 6N210)
PBIC0198E
pressure
S-NT653
F
temperature sensor
S-NT705 H
AEM488

133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
907) L
S-NT779
EC-815
System Diagram BBS0048Y
MBIB1449E
EC-816
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System BBS0048Z

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection
control
Battery Battery voltage*3 E
F

G
H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
J
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
<Fuel increase>
● When shift lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
<Fuel decrease>
EC-817
PBIB2953E
heated oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-967, "DTC P0133 HO2S1" . This maintains the mixture ratio within the
range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
Open Loop Control
● During warm-up
● After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
the two ratios.
EC-818
A
EC
SEF337W D
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used E
F
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. G
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper- H
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System BBS00490
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART I

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 J

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature K
Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control
L
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position M
Wheel sensor 1
Vehicle speed*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
the ECM.
● At starting
● During warm-up
● At idle
EC-819
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) BBS00491

Fuel injector
trol
Engine speed
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm under no load (for example, the shift lever position is neutral and
engine speed is over 2,500 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off var-
ies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-817, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System"
.
EC-820
A
Input/Output Signal Chart BBS00492


cut control
Battery Battery voltage*2 D
E
Wheel sensor 1
Vehicle speed*
System Description BBS00493
J
EC-821
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description BBS00494
EC-822
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB3039E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel H
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. I
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. J
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.
EC-823
PBIB2946E
: Vehicle front : From next page

1. Intake manifold 2. EVAP canister purge volume control 3. EVAP purge resonator
solenoid valve
NOTE:
EC-824
EC
MBIB1450E
: Vehicle front : To previous page I
1. EVAP canister
EC-825
EVAP CANISTER
1. Block port (B).
PBIB2961E
SEF989X

Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar,
0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.49 psi)
SEF943S

Refer to EC-1063, "DTC P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" .
EC-826
A

C
with CONSULT-II.

CONSULT-II operation manual, NATS.
F
EC-827
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB2962E

manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes
through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
tions.
PBIB1588E

PBIB1589E
EC-828
EC
S-ET277
D
EC-829
Introduction BBS0049A
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of ISO 15031-5
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of ISO 15031-5
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × × × —
GST × × × — × ×
ECM × ×* — — — —
consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-870, "Fail-
Safe Chart" .)
Two Trip Detection Logic BBS0049B
vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MI, and store
DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MI DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing
Misfire (Possible three way cata-

lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - × — — — — — × —
P0304 is being detected
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - — — × — — × — —
P0304 is being detected
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-831, "EMISSION-
— × — — × — — —
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
MATION ITEMS" .)
Except above — — — × — × × —
When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MI when there is
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MI circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
EC-830
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MI circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction. A
Emission-related Diagnostic Information BBS0049C

EC
×:Applicable —: Not applicable
1
DTC* Test value/
Items Reference C
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit Trip MI
(CONSULT-II screen terms) page
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 — — 1 × EC-925 D
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 4 — — 2 — EC-925
1001*
1 (A/T) × (A/T)
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 — — EC-928 E
2 (M/T) — (M/T)
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — Flashing*5 EC-844
MAY BE REQUIRED. F
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — 2 — EC-930
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — 1 × EC-935
G
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — 1 × EC-935
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — 2 × EC-942 H
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-947
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-947
I
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-953
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-953
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 — × 2 × EC-959 J
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 × × 2 × EC-967
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 — × 2 × EC-977
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 0135 × × 2 × EC-985
K
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — × 2 × EC-991
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-998 L
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 0141 × × 2 × EC-1006
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — 2 × EC-1012
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — 2 × EC-1019 M
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-1026
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-1026
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 2 × EC-1032
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 2 × EC-1032
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — 2 × EC-1032
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 2 × EC-1032
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — 2 × EC-1032
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-1042
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-1049
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × 2 × EC-1056
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — 2 × EC-1063
EC-831
DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit Trip MI
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 page
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-1070

ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-1072
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — 2 × AT-105
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — 2 × AT-110
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6 P0720 0720 — — 2 × AT-115

ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 — — 2 × AT-121
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 — — 2 × AT-125
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 — — 2 × AT-129
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 — — 2 × AT-132
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 — — 2 × AT-136
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — 2 × AT-142
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — 2 × AT-147
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — 2 × AT-153
SHIFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 0750 — — 1 × AT-159
SHIFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 0755 — — 1 × AT-164
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*7 P1065 1065 — — 2 × EC-1075

INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — 2 × EC-1077
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — 1 × EC-1082
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — 1 × EC-1084
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — 1 × EC-1090
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — 1 × EC-1090
ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — 1 × EC-1096
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 × × 2 × EC-1101
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 × × 2 × EC-1107
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × 2 × EC-1113
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × 2 × EC-1121
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — 2 — EC-1129
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-1130
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-1146
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-1148
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — 1 × EC-1150
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 — — 2 — BL-215
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 — — 1 × AT-169
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — 2 × EC-1158
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1760 — — 2 × AT-171
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-1167
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-1172
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-1172
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-1181
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-1181
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-1191
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-1197
EC-832
*2: This number is prescribed by ISO 15031-5. A
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MI illuminates. EC

C
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MI will not D
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up. In other words, E
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. F
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-831, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC G
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the
MI and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent H
the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-864, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Con- I
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC J
With CONSULT-II
With GST K
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0740, P1217, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) L
No Tools
Example: 0340, 0740, 1217, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. M
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
EC-833
PBIB0911E

The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0304
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
EC-834
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the A
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MI is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even EC
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item C
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Performance Corresponding
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
(CONSULT-II indication) Priority* DTC No. D
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420
HO2S 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0133
E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139 F
HO2S HTR 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater P0135 G
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0141
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for H
models with CONSULT-II.
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is I
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example J
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) K
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
L
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) M
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MI ON)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
EC-835
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
EC-836
EC
SEF573XB
*1 EC-833, "How to Read DTC and 1st *2 EC-837, "How to Display SRT Code" *3 EC-838, "How to Set SRT Code"
Trip DTC"
How to Display SRT Code

WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode
with CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown in the fig-
ure.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
PBIB0666E
EC-837
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-835, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
EC-838
Driving Pattern
A
EC
PBIB2451E
EC-839
● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
● Sea level
● Flat road
● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 38 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 38 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
Pattern 2:
● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position

Set the shift lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON.
EC-840
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of ISO 15031-5. A
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. EC
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
Test value C
SRT item Self-diagnostic test item DTC (GST display) Test limit
TID CID
P0420 01H 01H Max. D
CATALYST Three way catalyst function
P0420 02H 81H Min.
P0133 09H 04H Max.
E
P1143 0AH 84H Min.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1144 0BH 04H Max.
P0132 0CH 04H Max. F
HO2S P0134 0DH 04H Max.
P0139 19H 86H Min.
P1147 1AH 86H Min. G
P1146 1BH 06H Max.
P0138 1CH 06H Max.
H
29H 08H Max.
2AH 88H Min.
HO2S HTR
2DH 0AH Max. I
2EH 8AH Min.
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION J

How to Erase DTC
WITH CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF- K
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individu-
ally from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). L
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-803, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 M
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
EC-841
SCIA5680E
WITH GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-803, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
2. Perform AT-98, "OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased)
3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-803, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
2. Perform AT-98, "OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
hours.
EC-842
– Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all A
Malfunction Indicator (MI) BBS0049D
EC
DESCRIPTION
C
If the MI does not light up, check MI circuit. Refer to DI-32,
"WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-1236, "MI & DATA LINK CON-
NECTORS" . D
detected an engine system malfunction. E
SAT652J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION F

Mode Status G
If the MI does not come on, check MI circuit. H
Engine stopped
I

J
K
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MI in
the 1st trip.
● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
L
● One trip detection diagnoses
ON position RESULTS
M
Engine stopped
EC-843
MI Flashing Without DTC

If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MI may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode. How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are
described later. Refer to EC-1269, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● Test values
NOTE:
has a malfunction.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MI starts
blinking.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
PBIB0092E

1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
Refer to EC-1269, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Start Engine.
EC-844
A
In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check MI circuit. Refer to DI-
32, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-1236, "MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS" .
EC
MI Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected. C
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
D
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MI does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode E
codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a F
code.
L
PBIA3905E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated M
function. (See EC-803, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
1269, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
oxygen sensor 1.
EC-845
MI Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
OBD System Operation Chart BBS0049E
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MI will come on. For details, refer to EC-830, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .
● The MI will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction
occurs while counting, the counter will reset.
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MI (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-848, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PAT-
TERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see EC-850, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
EC-846
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
EC
SEF392SA
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
freeze frame data will be cleared. without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
EC-847
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-
TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EC-848
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
EC
PBIB2551E
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
EC-849
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern A>
AEC574
● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
EC-850
A
Basic Inspection BBS0049F
1. INSPECTION START
EC
C
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections D
– Gasket E
– Air conditioner switch is OFF. F

G
H
J
SEF976U

load. K
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
M
SEF977U
>> GO TO 3
EC-851
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
PBIA8513J

A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 5.

>> GO TO 6.
EC-852
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 7.
2. GO TO 4. C

D
With CONSULT-II
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. G
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF174Y H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
J
Check the Following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-1049, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR K
(PHASE)" .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-1042, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR
(POS)" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace. M
2. GO TO 4.

>> GO TO 4.
EC-853
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Refer to EC-856, "IGNITION TIMING" .
– Timing indicator (1)
A/T: 6 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 6 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.
MBIB1331E

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.

>> GO TO 13.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
2. GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF174Y

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
EC-854
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN A
Refer to EC-856, "IGNITION TIMING" . EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END D
NG >> GO TO 16.
MBIB1331E
E
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-142, "TIMING CHAIN" .
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. G
2. GO TO 4.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H

● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-1049, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR
(PHASE)" . I
(POS)" .
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 18.
2. GO TO 4. K

L
Re-communicating Function" . M
>> GO TO 4.
EC-855
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check BBS0049G
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1. Attach timing light A to loop wire (1) as shown.
● : Vehicle front
PBIB2955E
2. Check ignition timing.

● Timing indicator (1)
MBIB1331E
Method B
1. Remove ignition coil No. 4 (1).
● : Vehicle front
MBIB1457E
EC-856
2. Connect ignition coil No. 4 (1) and spark plug No. 4 with suitable
high-tension wire A as shown, and attach timing light clamp B to A
this wire.
EC
MBIB1541E
G
SEF166Y
3. Check ignition timing. H

MBIB1331E K
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning BBS0049H
DESCRIPTION
L
M
OPERATION PROCEDURE
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning BBS0049I
DESCRIPTION
OPERATION PROCEDURE
EC-857
Idle Air Volume Learning BBS0049J
DESCRIPTION
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
● PNP switch: ON
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light
only small lamps.
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
– A/T models
• With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi-
cates less than 0.9V.
• Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
– M/T models
• Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
SEF217Z
EC-858
A
EC
SEF454Y
D
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci- E
dent by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. F
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position) G
Ignition timing A/T: 6 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) MBIB0238E

H
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. I
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-857, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . J
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. K
L
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. M
PBIB0665E
EC-859
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Ignition timing A/T: 6 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
It is useful to perform EC-1237, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check BBS0049K

With CONSULT-II
3. Start engine.
pressure.
SEF214Y
Without CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
sure.
MBIB0277E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
other purposes.
EC-860
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside. A
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/
C, etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes
in manifold vacuum. EC
NOTE:
C
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check B and fuel tube
adapter (KV10118400) D, then connect fuel pressure gauge A. D
● : To quick connector
● : To fuel tube (engine side)
● C: Clamp E
● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NIS-
SAN fuel hose without quick connector).
● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moder- F
ately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
PBIB2982E
● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with dam-
age or cracks on it. G
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-120, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

H
4. Connect fuel hose for fuel pressure check (1) to fuel tube
(engine side) with clamp (2) as shown in the figure.
I
● No.2 spool (5)
ened with gasoline.
J
(3) and No.1 spool (4).
No.1 spool on fuel tube. K
● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 PBIB2983E
N4710 or 16439 40U00).
L
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in).

M
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13 in-lb)
5. Connect fuel tube adapter to quick connector.

● A: Fuel pressure gauge
● B: Fuel hose for fuel pressure check
7. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating.
PBIB2984E
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.

EC-861

● Fuel pump

EC-862
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction BBS0049L
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con- EC
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac- C
MEF036D
E

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are F
ment of good parts.
G
SEF233G
I
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-864, "WORK FLOW" . J
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under K
on EC-868, "Worksheet Sample" should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. L
SEF234G
M
EC-863
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence
PBIB2267E
EC-864
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Detailed Flow
A
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-867, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . EC
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1 . D
– Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.)
E
TION" .)
– Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus- F
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? G
H

I
J
results.
K
>> GO TO 5.

L
M
results.
>> GO TO 6.
EC-865
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1 , and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this
check.
tion Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.

7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F
ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MON-
ITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-907, "Inspection Procedure" .
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8.
SEF601Z

Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-908, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.

>> GO TO 10.
EC-866
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection EC
Is malfunctioning part detected? C
Yes >> GO TO 11.
SULT-II. Refer to EC-883, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" , EC-902, "CONSULT-II Refer- D
ence Value in Data Monitor" .

E
ment. F
G
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK H

When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure I
OK or NG
J
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-841, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION- K
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-98, "OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)"
.)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC- L
839, "Driving Pattern" .
3. INSPECTION END
*1: Include 1st trip DTC. M
Description
tomer complaint.
Some conditions may cause the MI to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L
EC-867
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017
EC-868
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart BBS0049M
A
chart.
NOTE:

1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line D
● P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0112 P0113 Intake air temperature sensor E
● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor F
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor G
● P0605 ECM
H
● P1610 - P1615 NATS
I
2 ● P0132 P0133 P0134 P1143 P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1
● P0135 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater J
● P0138 P0139 P1146 P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P0141 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● P0444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve K
● P0710 P0720 P0725 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0740 P0744 P0745 P0750 P0755 P1705 P1760 A/T related sen-
sors, solenoid valves and switches
● P1065 ECM L
● P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay M
● P1128 Throttle control motor
● P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
● P0300 - P0304 Misfire
● P0420 Three way catalyst function
EC-869
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Fail-Safe Chart BBS0049N
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch ON or START.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-
Condition
II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or START
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cool-
ing fan operates while engine is running.
P1121 Electric throttle control actu- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
ator spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
20 degrees or less.
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P (A/T), Neutral (M/T) position, and engine speed will
not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
P1124 Throttle control relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
● When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MI when there
is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MI circuit is open by
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MI circuit are detected and demands
EC-870
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart BBS0049O
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM A

SYMPTOM

EC



C

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
D
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL E
F
G
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-823 H
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-828
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-851 I
EC-1082,
EC-1084
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-851 J
K
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2 EC-935
1
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3 EC-947
EC-959, L
3 EC-967 ,
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit EC-977 ,
1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-1101 ,
EC-1107 M
EC-953,
EC-1026 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-1146 ,
EC-1148 ,
2 2 EC-1191
EC-1150,
EC-1172 ,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-1181 ,
EC-1197
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-1038
EC-1072,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-1075
EC-871
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-1077
cuit
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-1158
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-1231
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-1207
ATC-20,
MTC-20
BRC-8 or
BRC-49

SYMPTOM


Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel tank FL-19
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-14
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
—
line, Low octane)
EC-872
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL E

Air Air duct EM-118 F
Air cleaner EM-118
Air leakage from air duct
G
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-118
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-120
H
EM-120
Collector/Gasket
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I
Generator circuit SC-15
1 J
Signal plate 6 EM-189
AT-105,
PNP switch 4 MT-16 ,
MT-46 K
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-173
L
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring M
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-189
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
mecha-
Camshaft EM-151
nism
Intake valve
3 EM-173
Exhaust valve
Gasket EM-124,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
EX-3
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil EM-127,
tion filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-19
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-16
EC-873
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Thermostat 5 CO-38
Water pump CO-36
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 CO-26
Cooling fan CO-33
Coolant level (Low)/Contami- 5
CO-27
nated coolant
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) 1 1 BL-215
EC-874
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location BBS0049P
EC
J
MBIB1542E
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor
and spark plug valve K
4. Knock sensor 5. Fuel injector 6. Cooling fan motor
7. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 8. IPDM E/R 9. ECM
10. Mass air flow sensor 11. Engine coolant temperature sensor 12. Electric throttle control actuator L
(with intake air temperature sensor) (with built-in throttle position sensor,
throttle control motor)
13. EVAP canister purge volume control
M
solenoid valve
EC-875
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB2940E
: Vehicle front
1. Mass air flow sensor 2. Engine coolant temperature sensor 3. Electric throttle control actuator
4. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 5. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 6. Fuel injector
solenoid valve
EC-876
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
MBIB1543E
: Vehicle front
1. ECM harness connectors 2. ECM 3. IPDM E/R
4. Fuel pump fuse (15A) 5. Intake valve timing control solenoid 6. Knock sensor
valve
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor 8. PCV valve
EC-877
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB2942E
PBIB2943E
: Vehicle front
1. Exhaust manifold 2. Heated oxygen sensor 1 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 harness
connector
EC-878
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
MBIB1544E
1. Cooling fan motor 2. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 3. Stop lamp switch
4. Brake pedal 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Accelerator pedal position sensor
harness connector
7. Accelerator pedal 8. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 9. Fuel pump and fuel filter
harness connector
10. Fuel pressure regulator 11. Fuel level sensor unit
EC-879
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vacuum Hose Drawing BBS0049Q
PBIB2946E
: Vehicle front : To EVAP canister

solenoid valve
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge hoses.
EC-880
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram BBS0049R
EC
MBWA1453E
EC-881
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MBWA1454E
EC-882
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout BBS0049S
EC
PBIA9221J D
ECM Terminals and Reference Value BBS0049T
PREPARATION E
1. ECM (1) is located in the engine room left side near battery.
● : Vehicle front
F
H
PBIB2959E

I
● When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen (A) it
with levers (1) as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
– ECM (2)
J
– Fasten (B)

K

PBIB2947E
L
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. M
CAUTION:
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3.2V

1 P
(Open) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
PBIA8150J
Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE

supply (11 - 14V)
EC-883
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
3 Y
heater
PBIA8148J

Approximately 1.8V

4 L
(Close) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
PBIA8149J
[Engine is running] Approximately 10V

● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
– Keeping the engine speed between
Heated oxygen sensor 2 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
5 GR
heater idle for 1 minute under no load. PBIA8148J

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge vol-

9 LG PBIB0050E
ume control solenoid valve
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
11 B/W ● Idle speed
EC-884
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
3 - 5V
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
rpm at idle.
PBIA8164J
13 L Tachometer signal D
3 - 5V
[Engine is running]
E
F
PBIA8165J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
15 G Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
G
0 - 0.3V
[Engine is running]
H
● Idle speed
NOTE: I
17 V Ignition signal No. 1 rpm at idle.
PBIA9265J
21 G Ignition signal No. 4 J
0.2 - 0.5V
22 Y Ignition signal No. 3
[Engine is running]
K
L
PBIA9266J

● For 1 second after turning ignition switch M
0 - 1.0V
ON
23 R Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON
EC-885
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
25 R Fuel injector No. 4
PBIB0529E
30 GR Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIA4943J
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning (11 - 14V)
ignition switch OFF
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
36 BR ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
EC-886
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
40 — ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V EC
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition C
41 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: 1.0 - 4.0V
ON
(Compressor operates.) D
44 B (Engine coolant temperature ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed E
Approximately 0.4V
● Engine stopped
F
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.0 - 1.3V
45 G Mass air flow sensor ● Idle speed
G
[Engine is running] 1.0 - 1.3 to Approximately 2.4V
● Warm-up condition (Check for linear voltage rise in
● Engine is revving from idle to about 4,000 response to engine being H
rpm increased to about 4,000 rpm.)
46 V [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake I
sensor
air temperature.

48 Y (Refrigerant pressure sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V J
sor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
K
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm L
met.
50 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - Approximately 1.0V
– Engine: After warming up M
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
52 LG ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Mass air flow sensor)
● Idle speed

55 O (Intake air temperature sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
56 R ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor 1)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
EC-887
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
MBIB1453E
Crankshaft position sensor
61 Y
(POS)
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1454E

62 W [Crankshaft position sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(POS)] ● Idle speed

63 B [Camshaft position sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
(PHASE)] ● Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
MBIB1455E
Camshaft position sensor
65 R
(PHASE)
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1456E

● Shift lever: P or N (A/T models) Approximately 0V
Park/Neutral position (PNP)
70 GR ● Shift lever: Neutral (M/T models)
switch
● Except above position (11 - 14V)
Sensor power supply

EC-888
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Warm-up condition EC
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 10V
Intake valve timing control
C
73 LG
solenoid valve [Engine is running]
D
PBIA4937J
E
Sensor power supply
sensor)
Sensor power supply
F
75 G [Crankshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(POS)]
78 O [Camshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(PHASE)]
83 Y CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.7 - 2.3V H
84 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V
88 LG DATA link connector Approximately 2.7V I
● CONSULT-II or GST: Disconnected.
[Ignition switch: ON] J
(11 - 14V)
Approximately 0V
99 R Stop lamp switch K
Sensor power supply L

102 BR (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON] M
103 G

104 B (Accelerator pedal position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor 2) ● Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
105 G Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
(11 - 14V)
Sensor power supply
106 O (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EC-889
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
110 W

EC-890
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) BBS0049U
FUNCTION A
Work support
EC
C
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
Data monitor (SPEC)
other data monitor items can be read.
D
monitor
Active test
E
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
F
● Diagnostic trouble codes G
● 1st trip freeze frame data H
● Test values
I
EC-891
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SELF-DIAGNOS- DTC & SRT
TIC RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- DTC*1 FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2
PORT
× × × ×
(PHASE)
Mass air flow sensor × × ×
Engine coolant temperature sen-
× × × × ×
sor
× × × × ×

Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×
INPUT

Knock sensor ×
Closed throttle position switch
signal)
Load signal × ×

× × × × ×
trol solenoid valve
OUTPUT

× × × ×
valve
Calculated load value × × ×
X: Applicable
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-834, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME
DATA" .
EC-892
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Refer to GI-36, "CONSULT-II Start Procedure" . A
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item EC
ING IDLING. from fuel line C
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN D
ECM.
E
FICIENT.
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim- F
ing
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE G

TION ITEMS" . H

Freeze frame data I
Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
EC-803, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) J
[PXXXX]
● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
K
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop L
COOLANT TEMP
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. M
[°C] or [°F]
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
[km/h] or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
EC-893
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
×: Applicable
ECM MAIN
Monitored item
INPUT SIG- Description Remarks
[Unit]
SIGNALS NALS
● Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × signals of the crankshaft position sensor ● If the signal is interrupted while
(POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). the engine is running, an abnor-
mal value may be indicated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor ● When the engine is stopped, a
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × ×
is displayed. certain value is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injec-
B/FUEL SCHDL
× tion pulse width programmed into ECM, prior
[msec]
to any learned on board correction.
● When the engine is stopped, a
certain value is indicated.
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × ● This data also includes the data
correction factor per cycle is indicated.
for the air-fuel ratio learning con-
trol.
● When the engine coolant temper-
ature sensor is open or short-
● The engine coolant temperature (determined
COOLAN TEMP/S circuited, ECM enters fail-safe
× × by the signal voltage of the engine coolant
[°C] or [°F] mode. The engine coolant tem-
temperature sensor) is displayed.
perature determined by the ECM
is displayed.
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sen-
HO2S1 (B1) [V] × ×
sor 1 is displayed.
HO2S2 (B1) [V] ×
sor 2 is displayed.
● After turning ON the ignition
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal dur- switch, “RICH” is displayed until
ing air-fuel ratio feedback control: air-fuel mixture ratio feedback
RICH: means the mixture became “rich”, and control begins.
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
× × control is being affected toward a leaner mix-
[RICH/LEAN] ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback
ture.
LEAN: means the mixture became “lean”, and is clamped, the value just before
control is being affected toward a rich mixture. the clamping is displayed contin-
uously.
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● When the engine is stopped, a
× way catalyst is relatively small.
[RICH/LEAN] certain value is indicated.
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
× ×
[km/h] or [mph] speed signal is displayed.
played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● ACCEL SEN 2 signal is con-
● The accelerator pedal position sensor signal verted by ECM internally. Thus, it
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × voltage is displayed. differs from ECM terminal voltage
signal.
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● THRTL SEN 2 signal is con-
● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is verted by ECM internally. Thus, it
THRTL SEN 2 [V] × displayed. differs from ECM terminal voltage
signal.
EC-894
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM MAIN
Monitored item
INPUT SIG- Description Remarks A
[Unit]
SIGNALS NALS
● The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE
× × signal voltage of the intake air temperature EC
[°C] or [°F]
sensor) is indicated.
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] com- ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is
START SIGNAL
× × puted by the ECM according to the signals of displayed regardless of the
[ON/OFF] C
engine speed and battery voltage. starter signal.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS
× × the ECM according to the accelerator pedal
[ON/OFF] D
position sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condi-
AIR COND SIG
× × tioner switch as determined by the air condi-
[ON/OFF] E
tioner signal.
× ×
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering sys- F
PW/ST SIGNAL
× × tem (determined by the signal sent from EPS
[ON/OFF]
control unit) is indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electri- G
cal load signal.
LOAD SIGNAL ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/
× ×
[ON/OFF] or lighting switch is in 2nd position. H
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and
lighting switch are OFF.
× I
[ON/OFF] switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater
×
[ON/OFF] fan switch signal.
J
×
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width ● When the engine is stopped, a
INJ PULSE-B1
× compensated by ECM according to the input certain computed value is indi-
K
[msec]
signals. cated.
● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM ● When the engine is stopped, a
IGN TIMING [BTDC] × L
according to the input signals. certain value is indicated.
● “Calculated load value” indicates the value of
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
the current airflow divided by peak airflow.
● Indicates the mass airflow computed by ECM
M
MASS AIRFLOW
according to the signal voltage of the mass air
[g·m/s]
flow sensor.
control solenoid valve control value computed
PURG VOL C/V [%] by the ECM according to the input signals.
increases.
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced
[°CA] angle.
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] according to the input signal) is indicated.
value increases
EC-895
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM MAIN
Monitored item
[Unit]
SIGNALS NALS
AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF]
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY
× determined by ECM according to the input sig-
[ON/OFF]
nals.
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay con-
THRTL RELAY
× trol condition determined by the ECM accord-
[ON/OFF]
ing to the input signals.
OFF: Stop
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxy-
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
gen sensor 1 heater determined by ECM
[ON/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
● Display the condition of idle air volume learn-
ing
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already
been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
[km] or [mile]
● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
O2SEN HTR DTY
control value computed by the ECM according
[%]
to the input signals.
I/P PULLY SPD ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the
×
[km/h] or [MPH] turbine revolution sensor signal.
● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pres-
AC PRESS SEN [V] ×
sure sensor is displayed.
Voltage [V]
Frequency ● Only “#” is displayed if item is
[msec], [Hz] or [%] unable to be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width ● Figures with “#”s are temporary
measured by the probe. ones. They are the same figures
DUTY-LOW
as an actual piece of data which
PLS WIDTH-HI was just previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
EC-896
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitored Item A
ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals EC
ENG SPEED [rpm] × ×
sensor (POS) and camshaft position C
sensor (PHASE).
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated. D
×
E
rection.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × back correction factor per cycle is indi- F
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. G
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item H
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see I
● Fuel injector
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● Engine: Return to the original J

trouble condition
ING CHECK ITEM.
● Retard the ignition timing using K
CONSULT-II.
the engine.
● Compression
L
● A/C switch OFF
POWER BAL- ● Fuel injector
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Power transistor
(M/T) M
● Spark plug
● Cut off each fuel injector signal

COOLING FAN*1, ● Turn the cooling fan “LOW”,
*2, *3
Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan relay
“MID”, “HI” and “OFF” with CON-
SULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor

stopped)
EC-897
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SULT-II.
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
*1: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
*2: With A/C: “OFF”, “LOW”, “MID” or “HI” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. But cooling fan operates at the same speed when “MID”
or “HI” is displayed.
*3:Without A/C: “OFF”, “LOW”, “MID” or “HI” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. But cooling fan operates at the same speed when an
item other than “OFF” is displayed.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-834, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-967, "DTC P0133 HO2S1"
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-977, "DTC P0134 HO2S1"
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 EC-1101, "DTC P1143 HO2S1"
Refer to corresponding
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 trouble diagnosis for EC-1107, "DTC P1144 HO2S1"
DTC.
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-998, "DTC P0139 HO2S2"
HO2S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-1113, "DTC P1146 HO2S2"
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-1121, "DTC P1147 HO2S2"

Description
mode.
in real time.
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... PBIB1593E
EC-898
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and A
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): EC
C
SEF707X
D
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure
E
to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent. F
nents and harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/
1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS” in GI-25, "How to Perform G
Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU H
I
PBIB0197E
EC-899
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function BBS0049V
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with ISO 15031-4
has 8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic service Function
This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-834, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND
1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This
includes:
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
● Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
● Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
● Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
Service $08 — This diagnostic service is not applicable on this vehicle.
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
2. Connect GST to data link connector (1), which is located under
LH dash panel.
PBIB2951E
EC-900
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in A
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.) EC
SEF398S
D
5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service pro-
cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
E
the tool maker.
G
SEF416S
EC-901
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor BBS0049W
Remarks:
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as
ENG SPEED
tion. the tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-907, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-907, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-907, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm
1.0V
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1) – Engine: After warming up
1.0V
– Keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and idle for 1 minute under no load
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) – Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. the speedometer indication.

ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*1
(Engine stopped)
1
THRTL SEN 2*
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
CLSD THL POS ● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
the engine ON
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON
PW/ST SIGNAL
EC-902
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or ON
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON Lighting switch: 2nd
Rear window defogger switch and EC
OFF
lighting switch: OFF
Heater fan: Operating. ON C
HEATER FAN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Heater fan: Not operating OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON D
● Air conditioner switch: OFF E
INJ PULSE-B1 ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
(M/T)
● No load F
IGN TIMING ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral G
2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
(M/T)
● No load
H
CAL/LD VALUE ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
2,500 rpm 10% - 35% I
(M/T)
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
J
MASS AIRFLOW ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
2,500 rpm 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
(M/T)
K
● No load
● Air conditioner switch: OFF L
PURG VOL C/V ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
2,000 rpm 0 - 50%
(M/T)
● No load M
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
2,500 rpm Approx. 0° - 40°CA
(M/T)
● No load
INT/V SOL (B1) ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
2,500 rpm Approx. 0% - 90%
(M/T)
● No load
the engine ON
EC-903
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less
the engine Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN LOW*2
95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F)

ON
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
Almost the same speed as
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
the tachometer indication
Vehicle has traveled after MI has 0 - 65,535 km
● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C (176°F)
O2SEN HTR DTY Approx. 30%
● Engine speed: below 3,600 rpm
● Engine: Idle
● Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates)
EC-904
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode BBS0049X
A
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with shift lever in D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
C
F
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” G
H
PBIB2445E
EC-905
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB0668E
EC-906
A
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- EC
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C
MI.
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D
rection)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) E
Testing Condition BBS0049Z
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles) F

2
● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
G
● Transmission: Warmed-up H
– A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
– M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes. I
ahead. J
Inspection Procedure BBS004A0
NOTE:
K
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. L
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-
B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. M
SEF601Z
EC-907
OVERALL SEQUENCE
PBIB2384E
EC-908
EC
PBIB3213E
EC-909
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-907, "Testing Condition" .
and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
NOTE:
even a little.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
PBIB2369E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2332E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
PBIB2332E

1. Stop the engine.
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is
within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-910
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL A
1. Stop the engine.
NOTE: EC
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con- C
dition.
>> INSPECTION END D

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-860, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-860, "FUEL PRESSURE F
CHECK" . GO TO 8.
G
H
– Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-1215, "FUEL PUMP" .) I
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-860, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
J
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” K

1. Start engine.
within the SP value. L
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9. M

speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
EC-911
– Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-1209, "FUEL INJECTOR" .)
– Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-173, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .)
>> GO TO 11.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.

during 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
SEF820Y

Check heated oxygen sensor 1 and its circuit. Refer to EC-977, "DTC P0134 HO2S1" .
>> GO TO 14.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
EC-912
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR A
1. Stop the engine.
EC
>> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” C
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END E

OK or NG G
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. H
I
PBIB2332E
– Engine oil level is too high K
– Noise from engine L
– Valve clearance malfunction M

Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
EC-913
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-935, "DTC
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.
23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”

Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 29.
PBIB2370E
24. REPLACE ECM

1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-215,
"NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)" .
>> GO TO 29.
EC-914
25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.
D
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the E
SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END F
27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 30. I
J
PBIB2370E
28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM K
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
● Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct L
● Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve M
● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
parts
● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.

OK or NG
EC-915
the SP value.
OK or NG
EC-916
A
Description BBS004A2
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. C
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations

STEP in Work Flow Situation D
E
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004A3 F

1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-841, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA- G
TION" .
>> GO TO 2. H

I
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT K
Perform GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”. L
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace. M
EC-917
Wiring Diagram BBS004A4
MBWA1455E
EC-918
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
10 B [Engine is running] C
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF] D
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF] E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V F
(11 - 14V)
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE G
105 G [Ignition switch: ON]
ECM (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed H
1. INSPECTION START I
Start engine.
Is engine running?
J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. L
SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9561J
EC-919
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1.
● 10A fuse
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS-1

MBIB1550E
1. IPDM E/R 2. Body ground 3. Body ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-920
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 33 and ground with EC
C
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8. D
E
MBIB1353E

F
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 105 and ground with G
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 14.
11. PBIB3037E J

K
SULT-II or tester.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. M
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIA9562J
EC-921
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

● Harness or connectors E59, F1
13. CHECK 20A FUSE

2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
EC-922
14. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS-II A
EC
MBIB1550E E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II G

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 10, 11, 108 and ground. H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. J
NG >> GO TO 16.
16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

● Harness or connectors F1, E59
L
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. M

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)"
EC-923
Ground Inspection BBS004A6
PBIB1870E
EC-924
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
A
Description BBS004A7
D
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
U1000*1 ● ECM cannot communicate to other control E

1000*1 units. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
line ECM cannot communicate for more than the
U1001*2 ●
shorted.)
specified time.
1001*2 F
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
G

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H
EC-925
Wiring Diagram BBS004AA
MBWA1456E
EC-926
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004AB
A
EC
EC-927
Description BBS004AC
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004AD
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic (A/T).

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis (M/T).
U1010 Initializing CAN communication bus is mal-
1010 functioning.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004AE
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-928
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004AF
With CONSULT-II
C
5. Is the 1st trip DTC U1010 displayed again?
D
With GST
2. Select Service $04 with GST. E
4. Is the 1st trip DTC U1010 displayed again? F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END G
2. REPLACE ECM
H
1. Replace ECM.
I
5. Perform EC-858, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J
>> INSPECTION END

K
EC-929
Description BBS004AG
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve
MBIB1560E
valve.
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004AH

2,500 rpm Approx. 0° - 40°CA
(M/T)
● No load
2,500 rpm Approx. 0% - 90%
(M/T)
● No load
EC-930
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004AI
A
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC
P0011 Intake valve timing control There is a gap between angle of target and ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
C
0011 performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
D
FAIL-SAFE MODE E
ECM enters in fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004AJ
G
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC- H
1077, "DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" .
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
TESTING CONDITION:
idle. J
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II. K
ture.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive sec- L
onds.
M
COOLAN TEMP/S 60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F)
SEF174Y
A/T: P or N position
Shift lever
M/T: Neutral position

COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
EC-931
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004AK

1. Start engine.
nated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIA8559J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-932
5. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE) A
● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft (1) rear
end EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. C
D
PBIA9557J
6. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION E
F
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 7.
G
7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-166, "Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line. I

Refer to EC-917, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-1044, "Wiring Diagram" for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-1051, "Wiring Dia-
gram" for CMP sensor (PHASE).
K
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS004AL
L
M
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground

3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0193E
EC-933
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Removal and Installation BBS004AM

Refer to EM-142, "TIMING CHAIN" .
EC-934
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
A
Component Description BBS004AN
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire EC
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss. C
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. D
PBIA9559J
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004AO

G
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
CAL/LD VALUE (M/T)
2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
H
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 4.0 g·m/s
I
MASS AIRFLOW (M/T)
2,500 rpm 2.0 - 10.0 g·m/s
● No load
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004AP

K
Trouble diagnosis
name
L
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 circuit low input sent to ECM. ● Intake air leaks
● Mass air flow sensor
M
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
EC-935
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004AQ
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
With GST
With CONSULT-II
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
SEF058Y
With GST
EC-936
Wiring Diagram BBS004AR
EC
MBWA1457E
EC-937
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
Approximately 0.4V
● Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
● Engine is revving from idle to about 4,000 response to engine being
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004AS
1. INSPECTION START
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.

● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-938
E
MBIB1550E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor (1) harness connector. H
PBIB2948E
K
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with

OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E

● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R
EC-939
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 52.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004AT
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the follow-
ing conditions.
Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.0 - 1.3
operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
PBIB2371E
5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
EC-940
● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element A
● Improper specification of intake air system parts

EC
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
C
7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again.
9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. D
Without CONSULT-II
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. E
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 45 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
F
Condition Voltage V
1.0 - 1.3
G
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about H
4,000 rpm.
PBIA9564J
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. I

J
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. K

6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. L
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.
8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
M
Removal and Installation BBS004AU

EC-941
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description BBS004AV
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
CAUTION:
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004AW
Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake air tempera-
P0112 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
ture sensor circuit
0112 sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
low input
Intake air tempera-
P0113 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Intake air temperature sensor
ture sensor circuit
0113 sent to ECM.
high input
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004AX
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
EC-942
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. A
EC
EC-943
Wiring Diagram BBS004AY
MBWA1458E
EC-944
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004AZ

MBIB1550E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H

1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
is built-into) (1) harness connector.
K
PBIB2948E
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and L

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1169E
EC-945
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 55.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5
and 6 under the following conditions.
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIA9559J
SEF012P

EC-946
A

SEF594K
E
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 G
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
CAUTION:
I
J
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name K
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor cir-
cuit low input L
Engine coolant tem-
P0118 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
or START.
Condition
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
EC-947
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-948
Wiring Diagram BBS004B5
EC
MBWA1459E
EC-949
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004B6

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (1) har-
ness connector.
– : Vehicle front
PBIB2964E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0080E
EC-950
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44, TCM terminal 42 and ECT sensor terminal 2.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
E
F
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ECT sensor
● Harness for open or short between TCM and ECT sensor G
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 6.
J
>> INSPECTION END

L

terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. M
PBIB2005E
EC-951
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P

Refer to EM-173, "CYLINDER HEAD" .
EC-952
A

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004BA

F
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
THRTL SEN 1 (Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004BB

H

NOTE: I
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor ● Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen- ● Electric throttle control actuator K
0123 2 circuit high input sor 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
M
degrees.
EC-953
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004BC
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-954
Wiring Diagram BBS004BD
EC
MBWA1460E
EC-955
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004BE

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-956
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator (1) harness connec-
tor.
– : Vehicle front EC
D
PBIB2965E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
in harness or connectors. G
PBIA9580J H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-957
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004BF

4. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T).
tions.


6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next PBIB3038E
step.
Removal and Installation BBS004BG

Refer to EM-120, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
EC-958
DTC P0132 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS004BH

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004BI I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm. LEAN ←→ RICH
10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004BJ
L
PBIB1848E
EC-959
DTC P0132 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004BK
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
EC-960
DTC P0132 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS004BL
EC
MBWA1461E
EC-961
DTC P0132 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
3 Y
heater
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]

56 R Approximately 0V
(Heated oxygen sensor 1) ● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004BM

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-962
DTC P0132 HO2S1
● : Vehicle front
EC
● Exhaust manifold (2)
C
>> GO TO 3.
D
PBIB2966E
3. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E

– : Vehicle front F
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 1 and ECM
terminal 56. G
H
OK or NG PBIB2967E
OK >> GO TO 4. I

J
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 49.
L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.

Check heated oxygen sensor 1 connector for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-963
DTC P0132 HO2S1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-964
DTC P0132 HO2S1
Component Inspection BBS004BN

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
D
SEF646Y
F
onds.

I
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
M
CAUTION:
Cleaner tool and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
EC-965
DTC P0132 HO2S1
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least 1 time.
● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least 1 time.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V PBIA9566J
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS004BO

Refer to EM-124, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD" .
EC-966
DTC P0133 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS004BP

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004BQ I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm. Changes more than 5 times dur- K
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004BR
L
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis
measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The time
is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback
control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index. M
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
PBIB2991E
EC-967
DTC P0133 HO2S1
● Fuel pressure
P0133 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The response of the voltage signal from the ● Fuel injector
0133 circuit slow response sensor takes more than the specified time.
● Exhaust gas leaks
● PCV valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004BS
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
SEF338Z

ENG SPEED A/T: 1,900 - 3,300 rpm
M/T: 2,400 - 3,950 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL A/T: 3.5 - 11.2 msec
M/T: 2.8 - 10.2 msec
Shift lever Suitable position SEF339Z
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
EC-968
DTC P0133 HO2S1
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-971, "Diagnostic A
Procedure" .
EC
SEF658Y
D
Overall Function Check BBS004BT
trip DTC might not be confirmed. E
WITH GST
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 49 (HO2S1 signal) and ground. F
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more G
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V H
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V
4. If NG, go to EC-971, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I
PBIA9566J
EC-969
DTC P0133 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS004BU
MBWA1461E
EC-970
DTC P0133 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 10V
3 Y E
heater
PBIA8148J

● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE F
[Engine is running]
G
H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
I
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004BV

J
K
L
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-971
DTC P0133 HO2S1
● : Vehicle front
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB2966E
3. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK

SEC502D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-972
DTC P0133 HO2S1
With CONSULT-II
EC
C
SEF215Z
G
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector, and
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- H
nector.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-841, "HOW TO ERASE I
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. J
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? PBIB2948E
Yes or No
K
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or DTC P0172 (Refer to EC-1012, "DTC P0171 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-1019, "DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION" ).
No >> GO TO 6. L

M
– : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. PBIB2967E

EC-973
DTC P0133 HO2S1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK PCV VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-974
DTC P0133 HO2S1
Component Inspection BBS004BW

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
D
SEF646Y
F
onds.

I
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
M
CAUTION:
EC-975
DTC P0133 HO2S1
Without CONSULT-II
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V PBIA9566J
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS004BX

EC-976
DTC P0134 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS004BY

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004BZ I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004C0
L
SEF237U
EC-977
DTC P0134 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004C1
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
PBIB0544E

M/T: 1,800 - 4,250 rpm
M/T: 2.0 - 10.2 msec
Shift lever Suitable position PBIB0545E

Procedure" .
SEC750C
EC-978
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Overall Function Check BBS004C2
A
WITH GST EC
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con- C
PBIA9566J F
EC-979
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS004C3
MBWA1461E
EC-980
DTC P0134 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 10V
3 Y E
heater
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
G
H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
I

J
K
L
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-981
DTC P0134 HO2S1
– : Vehicle front
terminal 56.
OK or NG PBIB2967E
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-982
DTC P0134 HO2S1

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
D
SEF646Y
F
onds.

I
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
M
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
EC-983
DTC P0134 HO2S1
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V PBIA9566J
CAUTION:

EC-984
DTC P0135 HO2S1 HEATER
DTC P0135 HO2S1 HEATER PFP:23710
A
Description BBS004C7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 1
Engine coolant tempera- heater control C
Engine coolant temperature sensor
ture
speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine D
is started.
OPERATION
E
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after warming up ON F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004C8

ON H
O2SEN HTR DTY Approx. 30% I
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004C9

J
Trouble diagnosis
name
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors K

Heated oxygen (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit
P0135 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
sensor 1 heater is open or shorted.)
0135 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
control circuit
L
EC-985
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004CA
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-986
Wiring Diagram BBS004CB
EC
MBWA1462E
EC-987
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
3 Y
heater
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]

Diagnostic Procedure BBS004CC

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-988
– : Vehicle front
EC
D
PBIB2967E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
PBIA9576J
H

I
● 10A fuse
K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-989
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004CD

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω

CAUTION:
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool and
PBIA9577J
Removal and Installation BBS004CE

EC-990
DTC P0138 HO2S2
A
Component Description BBS004CF

tions.
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004CG

tions are met.
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004CH

PBIB1848E
EC-991
DTC P0138 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004CI
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
.
SEF174Y
WITH GST
EC-992
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS004CJ
EC
MBWA1463E
EC-993
DTC P0138 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

● Below 3,600 rpm after the following condi-
tions are met.
5 GR
heater minute under no load PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly
50 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004CK

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-994
DTC P0138 HO2S2
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
terminal 59.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. C

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. D
OK or NG PBIB2949E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. E

1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 ECM terminal 50. F
Continuity should exist. G
Continuity should not exist. H

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5.
L
M
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004CL

With CONSULT-II
EC-995
DTC P0138 HO2S2
SEF662Y
PBIB0551E
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position
with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.50V at least once during this PBIB2996E
procedure.
CAUTION:
EC-996
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Removal and Installation BBS004CM

EC
EC-997
DTC P0139 HO2S2
Component Description BBS004CN

tions.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004CO

tions are met.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004CP

sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condi-
tion such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 It takes more time for the sensor to respond ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
0139 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
EC-998
DTC P0139 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004CQ
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry this procedure from step 2 in
Procedure for COND1. D
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
E
For the best results, perform DTC WORK SUPPORT at a temperature of 0 to 30°(32 to 86°F).
H
8. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm two or three times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in Procedure for COND3.
J
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 119 °C (158 - 246°F) K
Shift level Suitable position
PBIB0552E
NOTE:
EC-999
DTC P0139 HO2S2
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completely with “OD”
OFF (A/T) from the above condition [step 9] until “INCOM-
PLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen has turned to
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 4 seconds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II
screen before Procedure for COND3 is conducted, it is unnec-
essary to conduct step 1 in Procedure for COND3.
PBIB0553E
Procedure for COND3

RESULTS”.
ing.
(soak the vehicle).
b. Turn ignition switch ON and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA SEF668Y

d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°(158°F), go to Procedure for COND1 step 3.
Overall Function Check BBS004CR
WITH GST
3. Start engine and keep the engine between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
at least 10 times.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
essary.
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T).
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec- PBIB2996E
EC-1000
DTC P0139 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS004CS
EC
MBWA1463E
EC-1001
DTC P0139 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

tions are met.
5 GR

[Engine is running]
50 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004CT

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1002
DTC P0139 HO2S2
With CONSULT-II
EC
with CONSULT-II.
C
D
E
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
G
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
H
I
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? PBIB2948E
J
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-1012, "DTC P0171 FUEL
K
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-1019, "DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 3.
L
M
4. Check harness continuity between and HO2S2 terminal 1 and
ECM terminal 59.
OK or NG PBIB2949E
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1003
DTC P0139 HO2S2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004CU

With CONSULT-II
SEF662Y
EC-1004
DTC P0139 HO2S2
A
EC
PBIB0551E D
CAUTION: E
Without CONSULT-II
H
at least 10 times.
procedure. J
sary.
The voltage should be below 0.50V at least once during this PBIB2996E L
procedure.
CAUTION: M
Removal and Installation BBS004CV

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM"
EC-1005
DTC P0141 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:23710
Description BBS004CW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Engine coolant tempera- Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor heater control
ture
OPERATION
Above 3,600 rpm OFF
ON
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004CX

HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Engine: After warming up
ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004CY
Trouble diagnosis
name
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor ● Harness or connectors

Heated oxygen (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit
P0141 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
sensor 2 heater is open or shorted.)
0141 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
control circuit
EC-1006
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004CZ
A
NOTE:
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II C
D
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1009, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
E
SEF058Y
G
WITH GST
H
EC-1007
MBWA1464E
EC-1008
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
tions are met. D
5 GR E

[Engine is running]
G
50 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up 0 - Approximately 1.0V H
minute under no load. I
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed J

K
M
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1009
PBIB2949E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9576J

● 10A fuse
4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-1010
Component Inspection BBS004D2
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER C

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
D
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
E
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped F
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system G
H
PBIA9577J
J

Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . K
EC-1011
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004D4
With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1. The
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
Trouble diagnosis
name

P0171 Fuel injection system ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks
0171 too lean large. ● Incorrect fuel pressure
(The mixture ratio is too lean.) ● Lack of fuel
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004D5
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SULT-II.
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-1016, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
NOTE:
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF215Z
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
EC-1012
Engine coolant temperature T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). A
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. EC
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-1016, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
C
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (1) harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- E
nector.
detected. F
9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be G
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- PBIB2948E

NOTE: H
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min- I
J
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm K
L
M
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-1016, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
EC-1013
MBWA1465E
EC-1014
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 10V
3 Y E
heater
PBIA8148J

BATTERY VOLTAGE
G
H
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle I
PBIB0529E
31 L Fuel injector No. 1 J
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition K
L
PBIA4943J
[Engine is running]
49 BR Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition M

EC-1015

SEC502D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

– : Vehicle front
terminal 49.
terminal 4 and ground. PBIB2967E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1016
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE A
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. C
NG >> Follow the construction of EC-860, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
5. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR D
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts. E
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec: at idling
F
2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts. G
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
H
2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. I
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-935, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
J
EC-1017
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1209, "FUEL INJEC-
TOR" .
PBIB1986E

3. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-135, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
The fuel injector harness connectors should remain connected.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays
out from fuel injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
PBIB1726E

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1018
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004D8
With the Air-Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The EC
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MI (2 trip detection logic). C

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas D
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
name
P0172 Fuel injection system ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too F
● Exhaust gas leaks
0172 too rich large.
(The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Incorrect fuel pressure
● Mass air flow sensor G
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004D9
NOTE: H
WITH CONSULT-II I
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- J
SULT-II.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. K
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-1023, "Diagnostic Procedure" L
.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, perform- M
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF215Z
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to
(1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below.
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
EC-1019
If engine starts, go to EC-1023, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs
and check for fouling, etc.
WITH GST
4. Restart engine and let idle for at least 5 seconds.
nector.
detected.
9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be
detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- PBIB2948E

NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min-
If engine starts, go to EC-1023, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs
and check for fouling, etc.
EC-1020
Wiring Diagram BBS004DA
EC
MBWA1465E
EC-1021
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
3 Y
heater
PBIA8148J

BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
PBIB0529E
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIA4943J
[Engine is running]

EC-1022
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004DB
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK A

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC
E
SEC502D
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector (1). J
– : Vehicle front
K
terminal 49.
L
terminal 4 and ground. PBIB2967E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1023
At idling: 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the construction of EC-860, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .

With CONSULT-II
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
ground. Refer to EC-935, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" .
EC-1024
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTORS A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
EC
CONSULT-II.
speed drop. C
E
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. F
Clicking noise should be heard. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-1209, "FUEL INJEC- H
TOR" .
PBIB1986E
7. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR J
1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-135, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube. K
3. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. L
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector. M
OK or NG
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1025
Component Description BBS004DC

PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004DD

THRTL SEN 2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004DE

NOTE:
P0222 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors
0222 1 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor ● Electric throttle control actuator
0223 1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-1026
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004DF
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G
EC-1027
Wiring Diagram BBS004DG
MBWA1466E
EC-1028
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully released D
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V E
F
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
34 R Throttle position sensor 2 G
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground I
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
72 L [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V J
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004DH

2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. L
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1029
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
tor.
– : Vehicle front
PBIB2965E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9580J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-1030
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR A
3. Perform EC-858, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC
>> INSPECTION END

C
Refer to EC-917, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D
>> INSPECTION END

E
Component Inspection BBS004DI

F
4. Set shift lever to D (A/T), 1st (M/T) position. G
tions.
H

I

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V J
step.
7. Perform EC-857, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . K
Removal and Installation BBS004DJ
L
M
EC-1031
FIRE
FIRE PFP:00000
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004DK
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MI will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (POS) signal every 200 engine revo-
lutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MI will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MI will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MI will only light
when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor
signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire ● Improper spark plug
Multiple cylinder misfire.
0300 detected ● Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire ● Incorrect fuel pressure
0301 detected
● Fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire Fuel injector
No. 2 cylinder misfires. ●
0302 detected
● Intake air leak
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire
No. 3 cylinder misfires. ● The ignition signal circuit is open or
0303 detected
shorted
● Lack of fuel
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire ● Drive plate or flywheel
0304 detected
EC-1032
FIRE
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004DL
A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE: EC
C
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
D
4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. E
dure" .
NOTE: F
ing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E

G
time. Refer to table below.
H
dition should be satisfied at the same time:
I
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F) J
(T) condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F)
K
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Refer to the following table.
Engine speed Time L
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes M
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004DM

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1033
FIRE
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each fuel injector (2) harness connector one at
a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
● Ignition coil (1)
PBIB2968E
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 9.

Does each fuel injector make an operating sound at idle?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Check fuel injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-1209,
"FUEL INJECTOR" .
PBIB1986E
EC-1034
FIRE
5. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres- C
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel D
pressure.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri- E

checked. F
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm G
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark H
portion.
Spark should be generated. I
CAUTION:
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock J
PBIB2325E
● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. K
NOTE:
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1221, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
EC-1035
FIRE
7. CHECK SPARK PLUG
OK or NG
spark plug type, refer to EM-133, "SPARK PLUG (PLAT-
INUM-TIPPED TYPE)" .
2. GO TO 8.
SEF156I

OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-133, "SPARK
PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" .

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-173, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-860, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
● Fuel lines
EC-1036
FIRE
12. CHECK IGNITION TIMING A
Check the following items. Refer to EC-851, "Basic Inspection" .
Items Specifications
EC
A/T models 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Target idle speed
M/T models 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T models 6 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) C
Ignition timing
M/T models 6 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Follow the EC-851, "Basic Inspection" .
13. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 14.
G
With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H

2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm I
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec: at idling J
2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 15.
ground. Refer to EC-935, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . L
15. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-871, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
16. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC

Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-841, "HOW TO ERASE
>> GO TO 17.

>> INSPECTION END

EC-1037
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
Component Description BBS004DN
The knock sensor (1) is attached to the cylinder block. It senses

engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pres-
sure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
● : Vehicle front
PBIB2969E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004DO

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
● Knock sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004DP
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1038
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Wiring Diagram BBS004DQ
EC
MBWA1467E
EC-1039
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004DR

NOTE:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

1. Disconnect knock sensor (1) harness connector.
– : Vehicle front
sensor terminal 1.
OK or NG


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-1040
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body.
EC
MBIB1550E E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 5.
G
1. Reconnect knock sensor harness connector.
H
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J

K
>> INSPECTION END L

Component Inspection BBS004DS
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. M
NOTE:
than 10 MΩ.
CAUTION:
SEF227W
Removal and Installation BBS004DT
KNOCK SENSOR
EC-1041
Component Description BBS004DU

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
olution.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
change.
changes.
PBIA9209J
PBIB2382E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004DV

ENG SPEED
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004DW
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not circuit is open or shorted.]
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of (Accelerator pedal position sensor
engine cranking. circuit is shorted.)
P0335 Crankshaft position ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
0335 sensor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is is shorted.)
running. ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
● Refrigerant position sensor
● Signal plate
EC-1042
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004DX
A
NOTE:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II C
CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec- D
onds at idle speed.
dure" . E
F
SEF058Y
WITH GST G
EC-1043
Wiring Diagram BBS004DY
MBWA1468E
EC-1044
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle E
MBIB1453E
Crankshaft position
61 Y
sensor (POS)
0 - 1.0V
F
[Engine is running]
MBIB1454E
H
I
Sensor power supply
74 W (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sor)
J
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply K
(APP sensor 2)
L
EC-1045
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004DZ

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) (1) harness
connector.
PBIB2970E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2609E
EC-1046
3. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
3. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ECM terminal 75. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit. D
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. E

74 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-1232, "Wiring Diagram" F
75 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminal 1 EC-1044, "Wiring Diagram"
102 APP sensor terminal 5 EC-1183, "Wiring Diagram"
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
H
5. CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following. I
● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Refer to EC-1190, "Component Inspection" .)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-85, "Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .)
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 10.
K
L
3. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2 and ECM terminal 62.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
EC-1047
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004E0

PBIA9210J

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIA9584J
Removal and Installation BBS004E1

EC-1048
A
Component Description BBS004E2
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of

camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position EC
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
signals.
PBIA9209J
change.
E
PBIB2382E
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004E3
NOTE:
If DTC P0340 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to J
EC-1150, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
K
for the first few seconds during engine ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
L
cranking. ● Camshaft (Intake)
● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-45, "START-
during engine running. ING SYSTEM" .)
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal M
● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-45,
pattern during engine running. "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
EC-1049
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004E4
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
onds at idle speed.
dure" .
onds.
dure" . SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1050
Wiring Diagram BBS004E5
EC
MBWA1469E
EC-1051
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
MBIB1455E
65 R
(PHASE)
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1456E
Sensor power supply

(PHASE)]
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004E6

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
EC-1052
E
MBIB1550E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) (1) har- H
ness connector.
– : Vehicle front
PBIB2971E
K


OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2609E
EC-1053
3. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2 and ECM terminal 63.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
PBIA9557J

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004E7

EC-1054
A
EC
PBIA9210J
D
E
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-) F
G
PBIA9584J
Removal and Installation BBS004E8
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) H

EC-1055
DTC P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004E9
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen

sensors 1 and 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2
approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold)
malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YF
● Three way catalyst (manifold)
● Exhaust tube
● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate ● Intake air leaks
P0420 Catalyst system efficiency properly.
● Fuel injector
0420 below threshold ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity. ● Fuel injector leaks
● Spark plug
● Improper ignition timing
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004EA
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedure.
● Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
5. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine.
7. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step 10
8. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
PBIB0566E
EC-1056
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take A
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
EC
PBIB0567E
D
(soak the vehicle)
b. Turn ignition switch ON and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA E
c. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/
S” indication on CONSULT-II. F
d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°(158°F), go
to step 3.
G
SEF013Y
10. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. H

11. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1059, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure" . I
SEF535Z K
Overall Function Check BBS004EB
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st L
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. M
5. Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminal 49 (HO2S1 sig-
nal) and ground, and ECM terminal 50 (HO2S2 signal) and
ground.
6. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
PBIA9566J
EC-1057
7. Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminal 50 and ground is very less than that of
ECM terminal 49 and ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst
does not operate properly. Go to EC-1059, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
NOTE: PBIB3000E
If the voltage at terminal 49 does not switch periodically more than 5
times within 10 seconds at step 7, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0133 first. (See EC-967, "DTC P0133
HO2S1" .)
EC-1058
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004EC
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM A
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
C
D
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
SEC502D
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-851, "Basic Inspection" .
L
Items Specifications
A/T models 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Target idle speed M
M/T models 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
A/T models 6 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
M/T models 6 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the EC-851, "Basic Inspection" .
EC-1059
5. CHECK FUEL INJECTORS
1. Refer to Wiring Diagram for fuel injectors, EC-1210, "Wiring Diagram" .
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 25, 29, 30, 31 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-1211, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB3001E
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Start engine.
pressure.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri-

checked.
11. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
portion.
CAUTION:
●Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.
EC-1060
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II A
3. Crank engine for about three seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-1221, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . D
8. CHECK SPARK PLUG

Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. E
OK or NG
spark plug type, refer to EM-133, "SPARK PLUG (PLAT- F
INUM-TIPPED TYPE)" .
2. GO TO 9. G
H
SEF156I

I
and the grounded portion. J
OK or NG
K
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-133, "SPARK
PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" .
L
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
OK or NG
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
EC-1061
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst (manifold).
EC-1062
PFP:14920 A
Description BBS004ED
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
C
Battery Battery voltage*1 EVAP canister EVAP canister purge volume D

E
F
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas- G
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is H
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION I
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is J
K
L
PBIA9215J
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004EE

M
PURG VOL C/V (M/T)
2,000 rpm 0 - 50%
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004EF
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent shorted.)
control solenoid valve circuit
0444 to ECM through the valve
open ● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
EC-1063
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004EG
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1064
Wiring Diagram BBS004EH
EC
MBWA1470E
EC-1065
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge vol- PBIB0050E

9 LG
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0520E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-1066
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004EI
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A
CUIT
(1) harness connector.
– : Vehicle front C
E
PBIB2972E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control F

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H
PBIB0148E
I

J
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M
OK or NG
EC-1067
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0569E
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004EJ

With CONSULT-II
100% Yes
0% No
PBIA9668J
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
between A and B
Yes
nals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIA9560J
EC-1068
Removal and Installation BBS004EK
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

EC
EC-1069
DTC P0500 VSS
Description BBS004EL
NOTE:
● If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”
through CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN com-
munication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004EM
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from ● Harness or connectors
P0500
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM (Wheel sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0500
even when vehicle is being driven.
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
● Wheel sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004EN
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-
II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If OK, go to following step.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
onds.
ENG SPEED A/T: More than 1,900 rpm
M/T: More than 2,500 rpm
A/T: 4.8 - 31.8 msec
B/FUEL SCHDL
M/T: 3.8 - 31.8 msec
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
SEF196Y

dure" .
EC-1070
DTC P0500 VSS
Overall Function Check BBS004EO
A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST EC
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed signal in Service $01 with GST. C
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004EP
1. CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” E
Refer to BRC-49, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (models with ESP) or BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (models
without ESP).
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 2.
G
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . H
>> INSPECTION END

I
EC-1071
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description BBS004EQ

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIA9222J
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004ER

P0605
0605
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Malfunction A
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004ES
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
With GST
EC-1072
DTC P0605 ECM
With CONSULT-II A
EC
ON.
dure" . C
SEF058Y
E
With GST
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C F
With CONSULT-II
G
ON.
H
dure" .
I
J
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. K
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004ET
1. INSPECTION START L
With CONSULT-II
M
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
EC-1073
DTC P0605 ECM
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1074
DTC P1065 ECM
A
Component Description BBS004EU
ECM has the memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio
feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Volume Learning EC
value memory, etc. even when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
PBIA9222J
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004EV
F
P1065* ECM back-up RAM system does not function
Engine control module ● ECM
1065 properly.
*: This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004EW
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. I
J
ON.
K
dure" .
L
SEF058Y
WITH GST M
EC-1075
DTC P1065 ECM
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004EX
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1076
A
Component Description BBS004EY

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. EC
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle. C
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control D
position.
PBIB1842E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004EZ

INT/V SOL (B1) ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral G
2,500 rpm Approx. 0% - 90%
(M/T)
● No load
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004F0
I
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM ● Harness or connectors
P1111 Intake valve timing control (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
through intake valve timing control solenoid
valve. ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004F1
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and K
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II L
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. M
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-1077
Wiring Diagram BBS004F2
MBWA1471E
EC-1078
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
D
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V) E
switch OFF
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) F
● Idle speed
7 - 10V
Intake valve timing control G
73 LG
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm H
PBIA4937J
BATTERY VOLTAGE I
(11 - 14V)
J
EC-1079
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004F3
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve (1) har-
ness connector.
MBIB1546E

valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0192E

3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-1080
Component Inspection BBS004F4
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C

valve as follows. D
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
E
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. F

G
CAUTION: H
timing control solenoid valve. I
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control J
Removal and Installation BBS004F5
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE K

EC-1081
Component Description BBS004F6
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004F7

Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
1121 actuator B)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Malfunction A
Malfunction C The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T), and engine speed will not exceed
1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004F8
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
3. Set shift lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T) and wait at
least 3 seconds.
4. Set shift lever to P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T).
least 3 seconds.
9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn SEF058Y
ON.
EC-1082
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. A

With CONSULT-II EC
3. Set shift lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T) and wait at C
least 3 seconds.
5. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. D
SEF058Y
With GST F
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004F9
G
1. Remove the intake air duct. H
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing.
– : Vehicle front I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle J
K
PBIB2974E
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR L

M
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation BBS004FA
EC-1083
Description BBS004FB
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or P1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121
or P1126. Refer to EC-1082, "DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR" or EC-1090,
"DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY" .
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004FC

P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
1122 performance ate properly. shorted)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004FD
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
is running.
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1084
Wiring Diagram BBS004FE
EC
MBWA1472E
EC-1085
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

1 P
PBIB1105E

0 - 14V

4 L
● Accelerator pedal: Released
PBIB1104E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004FF

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1086
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I A
EC
Battery voltage C
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. D
NG >> GO TO 3. PBIA9568J
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I E

F
SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIA9569J
I
Refer to Wiring Diagram. K

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. M

6. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
EC-1087
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.


OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
tor.
– : Vehicle front
actuator terminal
1 Should not exist
5 PBIB2965E
4 Should exist
1 Should exist
6
4 Should not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
EC-1088
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing. EC
– : Vehicle front
– Illustration shows the view with intake air duct removed.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
PBIB2974E
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I

J
3. Perform EC-858, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . K
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004FG
L
2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6. M

step.
PBIB2909E
Removal and Installation BBS004FH

EC-1089
Component Description BBS004FI
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004FJ

On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004FK

P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1124 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
● Throttle control motor relay
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004FL
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
With GST
EC-1090
TESTING CONDITION: A
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II
EC
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. C
SEF058Y
With GST F
EC-1091
Wiring Diagram BBS004FM
MBWA1473E
EC-1092
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V

Throttle control motor
1 P
E
PBIB1105E

power supply (11 - 14V) F
0 - 14V

G
4 L
● Accelerator pedal: Released H
PBIB1104E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF] I
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004FN
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K

SULT-II or tester. L

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9569J
EC-1093
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

4. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 2 and ground under the
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
EC-1094
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R EC
C
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" . E
EC-1095
Component Description BBS004FO
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004FP

1128 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004FQ
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1096
Wiring Diagram BBS004FR
EC
MBWA1474E
EC-1097
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

1 P
PBIB1105E

0 - 14V

4 L
PBIB1104E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004FS

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1098
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
tor.

actuator terminal
D
1 Should not exist
5 PBIB2965E
4 Should exist
1 Should exist E
6
4 Should not exist

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
G
Refer to EC-1100, "Component Inspection" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5. I

Refer to EC-917, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
K

L
3. Perform EC-858, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . M
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1099
Component Inspection BBS004FT

step.
PBIB2909E
Removal and Installation BBS004FU

EC-1100
DTC P1143 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS004FV

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004FW I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm Changes more than 5 times dur- K
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004FX
L
outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected. M
SEF300U
● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
P1143 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltage from the
● Fuel pressure
1143 lean shift monitoring sensor are not reached to the specified voltages.
● Fuel injector
EC-1101
DTC P1143 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004FY
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
PBIB0546E

M/T: 1,500 - 3,600 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
M/T: 2.0 - 11.2 msec

Procedure" .
SEC769C
EC-1102
DTC P1143 HO2S1
Overall Function Check BBS004FZ
A
WITH GST EC
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm C
● The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least 1 time. D
PBIA9566J F
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004G0
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G

Refer to EC-924, "Ground Inspection" . H
K
MBIB1550E
1. IPDM E/R 2. Body ground 3. Body ground L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. M

● : Vehicle front
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB2966E
EC-1103
DTC P1143 HO2S1
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? PBIB2948E
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-1012, "DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION
SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

EC-1104
DTC P1143 HO2S1
Component Inspection BBS004G1

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
D
SEF646Y
F
onds.

I
SEF217YA
SEF648Y M
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
EC-1105
DTC P1143 HO2S1
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V PBIA9566J
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS004G2

EC-1106
DTC P1144 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS004G3

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004G4 I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm Changes more than 5 times dur- K
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004G5
L
high and “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are
shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected. M
SEF299U
P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltages from the ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
1144 rich shift monitoring sensor are beyond the specified voltages. ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
EC-1107
DTC P1144 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004G6
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
PBIB0548E

M/T: 1,500 - 3,600 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
M/T: 2.0 - 11.2 msec

Procedure" .
SEC772C
EC-1108
DTC P1144 HO2S1
Overall Function Check BBS004G7
A
WITH GST EC
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm C
● The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least 1 time.
● The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least 1 time. D
PBIA9566J F
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004G8
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G

Refer to EC-924, "Ground Inspection" . H
K
MBIB1550E
1. IPDM E/R 2. Body ground 3. Body ground L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. M

● : Vehicle front
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB2966E
EC-1109
DTC P1144 HO2S1
With CONSULT-II
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Yes or No
SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 4.

– : Vehicle front
3. Check connectors for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
PBIB2967E
EC-1110
DTC P1144 HO2S1
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. EC
6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 C

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

For circuit, refer to EC-970, "Wiring Diagram" . F
>> INSPECTION END

G
Component Inspection BBS004G9

With CONSULT-II
H
II.
I
ing steps.
J
L
SEF646Y

M
onds.
SEF217YA
EC-1111
DTC P1144 HO2S1
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V PBIA9566J
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS004GA

EC-1112
DTC P1146 HO2S2
A
Component Description BBS004GB

tions.
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004GC

tions are met.
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004GD

sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is
sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. J
PBIB0554E
P1146 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The minimum voltage from the sensor is not ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
1146 minimum voltage monitoring reached to the specified voltage.
● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
EC-1113
DTC P1146 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004GE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
cedure for COND1
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in Procedure for COND3”.
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 119°C (158 - 246°F)
PBIB0555E
NOTE:
EC-1114
DTC P1146 HO2S2
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed with “OD” A
“COMPLETED” (It will take approximately 4 seconds.) EC
NOTE:
C
PBIB0556E
D
Procedure for COND3

E
RESULTS”. F
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, performed the fol-
lowing. G
(soak the vehicle).
H
d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C(158°F), go to Procedure for COND1 step 3. I
Overall Function Check BBS004GF
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st J
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the operating temperature. K
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. L
at least 10 times. M
The voltage should be below 0.50V at least once during this
procedure.
essary.
procedure.
EC-1115
DTC P1146 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS004GG
MBWA1463E
EC-1116
DTC P1146 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
tions are met. D
5 GR E

[Engine is running]
G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed J
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004GH

K
M
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1117
DTC P1146 HO2S2
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Yes or No
SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 3.

terminal 59.
OK or NG PBIB2949E
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1118
DTC P1146 HO2S2
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
E
Refer to EC-1119, "Component Inspection" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. G

>> INSPECTION END

I
Component Inspection BBS004GI

With CONSULT-II J
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. K
“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. L
SEF662Y
EC-1119
DTC P1146 HO2S2
PBIB0551E
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
procedure.
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS004GJ

EC-1120
DTC P1147 HO2S2
A
Component Description BBS004GK

tions.
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004GL

tions are met.
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004GM

sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel- J
cut.
SEF259VA
(The sensor circuit open or shorted.)
P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The maximum voltage from the sensor is ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
1147 maximum voltage monitoring not reached to the specified voltage. ● Fuel pressure
● Fuel injector
EC-1121
DTC P1147 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004GN
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from step 2 in “Pro-
cedure for COND1”
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at COND1” on the CONSULT-II
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 119°C (158 - 246°F)
PBIB0557E
NOTE:
EC-1122
DTC P1147 HO2S2
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed with “OD” A
“COMPLETED” (It will take approximately 4 seconds.) EC
NOTE:
C
unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.
PBIB0558E
D
Procedure for COND3

E
RESULTS”. F
ing. G
(soak the vehicle).
H
d. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C(158°F), go to Procedure for COND1 step 3. I
Overall Function Check BBS004GO
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st J
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. K
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. L
at least 10 times. M
procedure.
essary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this PBIB2996E
procedure.
EC-1123
DTC P1147 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS004GP
MBWA1463E
EC-1124
DTC P1147 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
tions are met. D
5 GR E

[Engine is running]
G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed J
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004GQ

K
M
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1125
DTC P1147 HO2S2
With CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
nector.
Yes or No
SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 3.

terminal 59.
OK or NG PBIB2949E
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1126
DTC P1147 HO2S2
EC
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

I
Component Inspection BBS004GR

With CONSULT-II J
SEF662Y
EC-1127
DTC P1147 HO2S2
PBIB0551E
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
procedure.
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS004GS

EC-1128
A
Description BBS004GX
NOTE:
● If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC EC
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004GY

F
ECM can not receive the information (The CAN communication line is open or
from “ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
1212 line
trol unit)” continuously.
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004GZ H

TESTING CONDITION:
I
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" . K
SEF058Y M
WITH GST
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004H0
BRC-49, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS"
EC-1129
System Description BBS004V3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
Cooling Fan Control

control (Cooling fan relays)
3
Air conditioner switch* Air conditioner ON signal*2

*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*3: Models with air conditioner
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF] (Models with
A/C) or 2-step control [ON/OFF] (Models without A/C).
Cooling Fan Operation
Models with A/C
MBIB1451E
EC-1130
Models without A/C
A
EC
MBIB1393E D
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
E
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
LO HI
F
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF
High (HI) OFF ON G
Specification data are reference values. H

AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON I
the engine ON
OFF
(207°F) or less J
● Engine: After warming up, idle Engine coolant temperature is
COOLING FAN the engine between 98°C (208°F) and 99°C LOW*
● Air conditioner switch: OFF (210°F) or more K
HIGH*
(212°F) or more
*: Models without air conditioner, cooling fan operates only ON and OFF operation, but CONSULT-II display will change OFF, LOW and L

M
is indicated.
EC-1131
shorted.)
● Cooling fan
● IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
heat). ● Radiator hose
● Cooling fan system does not operate properly ● Radiator
P1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat). ● Reservoir tank (M/T models with A/C)
1217 (Overheat) ● Engine coolant was not added to the system ● Reservoir tank cap (M/T models with
using the proper filling method. A/C)
● Engine coolant is not within the specified ● Radiator cap (M/T models without A/C
range. and A/T models)
● Water pump
● Thermostat
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-39, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-45, "Changing Engine Oil" .
Overall Function Check BBS004V6
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the reservoir tank cap (M/T models with A/C) or the radiator cap (M/T models without A/
C and A/T models) when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid
escaping from the reservoir tank or the radiator.
WITH CONSULT-II
"PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER" or
EC-1141, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CON-
DITIONER" .
EC-1141, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CON- SEF621W
DITIONER" .
EC-1132
SULT-II. A
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-1137, "PROCEDURE FOR MOD-
ELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER" or EC-1141, "PROCEDURE
FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONER" . EC
SEF646X
D
WITH GST
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. E
"PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER" . F
"PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER" . G
3. Start engine.
CAUTION:
H
4. Set temperature control switch to full cold position.
6. Turn blower fan switch ON. I
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine. J
If NG, go to EC-1137, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR
CONDITIONER" or . K
10. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. L
tor.
12. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor M
harness connector. MBIB0651E
CAUTION:
14. If NG, go to EC-1137, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR
CONDITIONER" .
SEF023R
EC-1133
"PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONER"
.
.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec- SEF621W
tor.
5. Start engine and make that cooling fan operates. Be careful not
to overheat engine.
6. If NG, go to EC-1141, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT
AIR CONDITIONER" .
SEF023R
EC-1134
Wiring Diagram BBS004V7
MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER A
EC
MBWA1475E
EC-1135
MBWA1476E
EC-1136
PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER A
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II? EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4. C

D
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-1139,
"PROCEDURE A" .) G
SEF784Z
H

I
With CONSULT-II
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low J
speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. K
"PROCEDURE A" .)
L
SEF785Z
EC-1137
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
1139, "PROCEDURE A" .)
MBIB0651E

Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
SEF023R

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Hose
● Radiator
● Reservoir tank
EC-1138
8. CHECK RESERVOIR TANK CAP (M/T MODELS) OR RADIATOR CAP (A/T MODELS) A
Refer to CO-35, "Checking Reservoir Tank Cap (M/T with A/C Models)" or CO-34, "Checking Radiator Cap
(All Models Except M/T with A/C)" .
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace reservoir tank cap (M/T models) or radiator cap (A/T models).
C
9. CHECK THERMOSTAT

D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace thermostat.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. G
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-1144, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . H
>> INSPECTION END

I
PROCEDURE A
J
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground with K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. M
MBIB1307E

EC-1139
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector (1).
– : Vehicle front
ground.

cooling fan motor terminal 1.
7. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 3, 53 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Resistor E62

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-1140
A
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
C
With CONSULT-II D
SULT-II and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-II screen. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO4. F
"PROCEDURE B" .)
G
SEF784Z
H
3. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> Check cooling fan speed control circuit. (Go to EC-1142,
"PROCEDURE B" .)
L
M
SEF023R

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-1141
● Hose
● Radiator

Refer to CO-34, "Checking Radiator Cap (All Models Except M/T with A/C)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK THERMOSTAT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

PROCEDURE B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1307E
EC-1142
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery EC
C
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector (1). D
– : Vehicle front
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 1 E
ground.
Refer to wiring diagram. F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. MBIB1549E G
5. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 3, 53
and ground.
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
J
Check the following. K
L
5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-1143
Main 12 Causes of Overheating BBS004V9

● Blocked bumper
ator filler neck

(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Radiator Cap (All Models
kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) Except M/T with A/C)" .

4*6 ● Reservoir tank cap ● Pressure tester Reservoir Tank Cap (M/T
cm2 , 12.8psi) with A/C Models)" .

CHECK" .
"RADIATOR" .

DTC P1217 (EC-1137,
"Diagnostic Procedure" ).

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving See MA-39, "Changing
reservoir tank and idling Engine Coolant" .
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-173, "CYLIN-
gauge mum distortion (warping) DER HEAD" .
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-189, "CYLIN-
tons walls or piston DER BLOCK" .
*5: M/T models without A/C and A/T models.
*6: M/T models with A/C.
EC-1144
Component Inspection BBS004VA
COOLING FAN MOTOR A

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
check operation. EC
Terminals
(+) (-) C
D
MBIB0607E
EC-1145
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Component Description BBS004H9

PBIB0145E
tion.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004HA

P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- ● Electric throttle control actuator
1225 learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004HB
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1146
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004HC

and the housing.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 2.
E
PBIB2974E

>> INSPECTION END H
Removal and Installation BBS004HD

I
EC-1147
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description BBS004HE

PBIB0145E
tion.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004HF

P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- ● Electric throttle control actuator
1226 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004HG
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1148
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004HH

and the housing.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 2.
E
PBIB2974E

>> INSPECTION END H
Removal and Installation BBS004HI

I
EC-1149
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004HJ

Trouble diagnosis
name
(Throttle position sensor circuit is shorted.)
[Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source for
1229 circuit short sensor is excessively low or high. shorted.]
● Throttle position sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004HK
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1150
Wiring Diagram BBS004HL
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1477E
EC-1151
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
(PHASE)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1152
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1478E
EC-1153
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
(PHASE)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1154
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004HM

MBIB1550E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H

connector (1).
– Accelerator pedal position sensor (2) I
– Accelerator pedal (3)
J
K
PBIB2975E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J
EC-1155
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models)
5. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS

72 Throttle position sensor terminal 1 EC-1193, "Wiring Diagram"
78 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 EC-1051, "Wiring Diagram"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK COMPONENTS
● Throttle position sensor (Refer to EC-1196, "Component Inspection" .)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Refer to EC-1054, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-1156
C
>> INSPECTION END

D
>> INSPECTION END E
EC-1157
Component Description BBS004HN
When the shift lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004HO

On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004HP
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) ● Harness or connectors

P1706 (PNP switch circuit is open or shorted.)
Park/neutral position switch switch is not changed in the process of
1706
engine starting and driving. ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004HQ
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
ing conditions.
N or P position (A/T)
ON
Neutral position (M/T)
Except above position OFF

If OK, go to following step. SEF212Y
onds.
M/T: 1,925 - 6,375 rpm
M/T: 2.5 - 31.8 msec
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64km/h (29 MPH)
SEF213Y

dure" .
EC-1158
Overall Function Check BBS004HR
A
WITH GST EC
and ground under the following conditions. C
Condition (Shift lever) Voltage V (Known-good data)
P or N position (A/T)
Approx. 0 D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except above position
(11 - 14V)
E
MBIB1397E
EC-1159
Wiring Diagram BBS004HS
A/T MODELS
MBWA1479E
EC-1160
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Park/Neutral position
(PNP) switch
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE D
EC-1161
M/T MODELS
MBWA1480E
EC-1162
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(PNP) switch
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004HT

E
F
Shift lever position Voltage G
P or N (A/T models)
Battery voltage (11- 14V)
Neutral (M/T models)
Except above position Approximately 0V H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
I
EC-1163
4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 1 (A/T models), 2
(M/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MBIB0654E
MBIB0653E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● 10A fuse
EC-1164
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 31 and PNP switch terminal 2 (A/T models), 3 (M/T EC
models).Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
NG >> GO TO 5.

F
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and PNP switch
6. CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to AT-109, "Component Inspection" (A/T models) or MT-16, "Park/Neutral Position Switch" (M/T mod- H
els).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. I
NG >> Replace PNP switch.

K
>> INSPECTION END

L
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3, 54 and ground. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
EC-1165
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-1166
A
Description BBS004HU
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004HV

C
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004HW
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ● Harness or connectors F

Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is driv-
1805
FAIL-SAFE MODE BBS004HX

G
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode.

Engine operation condition in fail-fail safe mode H
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Vehicle condition Driving condition I
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004HY
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
M
PBIB1952E
WITH GST
EC-1167
Wiring Diagram BBS004HZ
MBWA1481E
EC-1168
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF] C
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V) D
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004I0
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT E

F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch (1) harness connector.
– Brake pedal (2)
J
L
PBIB2976E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M
PBIB2284E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-1169
● 10A fuse
– Brake pedal (2)
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminal 2
and ECM terminal 99.
OK or NG PBIB2976E
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1170
Component Inspection BBS004I1
STOP LAMP SWITCH A

3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. EC
E
PBIB2285E
Condition Continuity F
Brake pedal: Fully released. Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist.
G
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
EC-1171
Component Description BBS004I2

signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004I3


ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004I4

NOTE:
P2122 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
2122 sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
(APP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-1172
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004I5
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITH GST G
EC-1173
Wiring Diagram BBS004I6
LHD MODELS
MBWA1482E
EC-1174
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(APP sensor 2)
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6V D
103 G
● Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4V E
[Engine is running]
104 B
Sensor ground
● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V F
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
106 O
(APP sensor 1)
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V G
H
110 W
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V I
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground J
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1175
RHD MODELS
MBWA1483E
EC-1176
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
104 B
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
106 O
(APP sensor 1)
H
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground J
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004I7

K
M
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1177
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
connector (1).
– Accelerator pedal position sensor (2)
PBIB2975E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J

4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC-1178
6. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
● Harness connectors M201, M8 (RHD models) E
F
8. CHECK APP SENSOR G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
I
J
>> INSPECTION END

L
M
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1179
Component Inspection BBS004I8

conditions.

PBIA9572J
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

Removal and Installation BBS004I9
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-1180
A
Component Description BBS004IA

signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004IB
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004IC J

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
2127 sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit L
is shorted.]
shorted.)
● Accelerator pedal position sensor M
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-1181
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004ID
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1182
Wiring Diagram BBS004IE
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1484E
EC-1183
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
102 B [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1184
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1485E
EC-1185
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
102 B [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1186
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004IF

MBIB1550E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I H

connector (1).
J
K
PBIB2975E

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9607J
EC-1187
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

>> Repair open circuit in harness or connectors.

74 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-1232, "Wiring Diagram"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK COMPONENTS
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-1048, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-1188
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models) EC
C
D
Continuity should exist. E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G

● Harness connectors M201, M8 (RHD models) H
I
11. CHECK APP SENSOR J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
L
2. Perform EC-857, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . M
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1189
Component Inspection BBS004IG

conditions.

PBIA9572J

Removal and Installation BBS004IH
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-1190
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
A
Component Description BBS004II

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004IJ

F
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2* G
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004IK

NOTE: I
If DTC P2135 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P2135 Throttle position sensor shorted.)
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 K
2135 circuit range/performance
and TP sensor 2. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
M
degrees.
EC-1191
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004IL
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1192
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram BBS004IM
EC
MBWA1486E
EC-1193
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004IN

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1194
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
tor.
: Vehicle front EC
D
PBIB2965E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9580J H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 33, elec-
tric throttle control actuator terminal 3 and ECM terminal 34.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-1195
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004IO

tions.


step.
Removal and Installation BBS004IP

EC-1196
A
Component Description BBS004IQ

signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004IR
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004IS J

NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to K
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
M
is shorted.]
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2138 (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
tion sensor circuit compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
2138 shorted.)
range/performance and APP sensor 2.
EC-1197
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004IT
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-1198
Wiring Diagram BBS004IU
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1487E
EC-1199
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1200
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1488E
EC-1201
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1202
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004IV

MBIB1550E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H

connector (1).
J
K
PBIB2975E

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J

EC-1203
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIA9607J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open between APP sensor and ECM

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK COMPONENTS
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
EC-1204
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
E
● Harness connectors M201, M8 (RHD models) F
G
11. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 110 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 103 and
APP sensor terminal 6. I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. K
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L

● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models) M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
EC-1205
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004IW

conditions.

PBIA9572J

Removal and Installation BBS004IX
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-1206
A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004J1

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION EC
Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting
ON
switch is in 2nd position.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON C
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch
OFF
is OFF.
Heater fan is operating. ON
HEATER FAN SW ● Ignition switch: ON D
Heater fan is not operating. OFF
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004J2
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCITION-I E

2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON- F
SULT-II under the following conditions.
Condition LOAD SIGNAL
G
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E I

J
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II under the following conditions.
Condition LOAD SIGNAL K
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
M
PBIB0103E

Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1995E
EC-1207
".
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Refer to ATC-26, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (models with automatic air conditioner), MTC-23, "TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS" (models with manual air conditioner).
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1208
FUEL INJECTOR
A
Component Description BBS004J3
engine fuel needs.
D
SEF375Z
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004J4

G
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
(M/T)
H
● No load
EC-1209
FUEL INJECTOR
Wiring Diagram BBS004J5
MBWA1489E
EC-1210
FUEL INJECTOR
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm E
at idle
PBIB0529E
30 GR Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE F
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
G
H
PBIA4943J
I
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004J6
1. INSPECTION START
J
Yes or No K
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
L
EC-1211
FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-1212
FUEL INJECTOR
2. Disconnect fuel injector (2) harness connector.
– Ignition coil (1) EC
PBIB2968E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0582E

J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse K
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
EC-1213
FUEL INJECTOR
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004J7
FUEL INJECTOR
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation BBS004J8
FUEL INJECTOR
EC-1214
FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP PFP:17042
A
Description BBS004J9
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed*
D
Ignition switch is turned to ON Operates for 1 second F
Engine running and cranking Operates
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds
G
Except as shown above Stops
H
K
MBIB0291E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004JA

ON M
EC-1215
FUEL PUMP
Wiring Diagram BBS004JB
MBWA1490E
EC-1216
FUEL PUMP
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON
E
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004JC

G
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel
feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned
ON. H
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. I
PBIB2978E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I J


OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9573J
EC-1217
FUEL PUMP
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

nector.
MBIB0288E
5. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB3004E
EC-1218
FUEL PUMP
6. CHECK 15A FUSE A
3. Check 15A fuse. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse. C
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

D
nal 1. E
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 8. G

H
● Harness or connectors M1, E101
● Harness or connectors M72, B21 I
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair harness or connectors. J
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT

K
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)"
EC-1219
FUEL PUMP
Component Inspection BBS004JD
FUEL PUMP
terminals 1 and 3.
MBIB0311E
Removal and Installation BBS004JE
FUEL PUMP
EC-1220
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
Component Description BBS004JF

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the EC
coil (1) primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper
high voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
● Fuel injector (2) C
PBIB2968E
E
EC-1221
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram BBS004JG
MBWA1491E
EC-1222
IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 1.0V
32 P D
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-1223
IGNITION SIGNAL
MBWA1492E
EC-1224
IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 0.3V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
17 V Ignition signal No. 1 at idle E
PBIA9265J
0.2 - 0.5V
F
[Engine is running]
PBIA9266J
H
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004JH
I
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Yes or No
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. K
No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION L

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II. M
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
EC-1225
IGNITION SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
shown below.
NOTE:
PBIA9567J
PBIA9265J
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-918, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
PBIA9575J
EC-1226
IGNITION SIGNAL
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
2. Disconnect condenser (1) harness connector.
EC
– : Vehicle front
C
MBIB1548E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
NG >> GO TO 6.
H
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III I

J
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 33 and condenser terminal 1.
OK or NG
L
OK >> Go to EC-918, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
NG >> GO TO 7.

EC-1227
IGNITION SIGNAL
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-1229, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

3. Disconnect ignition coil (1) harness connector.
– Fuel injector (2)
PBIB2968E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
SEF107S

● Harness connector F1
● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F1
EC-1228
IGNITION SIGNAL
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 14.
H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
J
>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection BBS004JI

CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. M
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
EC-1229
IGNITION SIGNAL
NOTE:
8. Start engine.
pressure.

checked.
portion.
CAUTION:
●Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
NOTE:
CONDENSER
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation BBS004JJ

EC-1230
A
Component Description BBS004JK

● : Vehicle front C
PBIB2980E
H
PBIB2657E
EC-1231
Wiring Diagram BBS004JL
MBWA1493E
EC-1232
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON
(Compressor operates) D
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed E
Sensor power supply
F
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004JM

G
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 41 and ground with CON- H
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
I
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
J
PBIA9574J K

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF. L
2. Stop engine.
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-1233
– : Vehicle front
PBIB2980E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF479Y

● Harness for open or short between refrigerant pressure sensor and ECM
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 48.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-1234
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
D
F

G
OK or NG
Removal and Installation BBS004JN

Refer to ATC-135, "REFRIGERANT LINES" or MTC-81, "REFRIGERANT LINES" .
J
EC-1235
Wiring Diagram BBS004JO
MBWA1494E
EC-1236
A
Fuel Pressure BBS004JP
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing BBS004JQ
A/T No load* (in P or N position) 700 ± 50 rpm

Target idle speed C
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T In P or N position 700 rpm or more
Air conditioner: ON
M/T In Neutral position 750 rpm or more D
A/T In P or N position
Ignition timing 6 ± 5° BTDC
M/T In Neutral position
E
F
Calculated Load Value BBS004JR
G
Calculated load value% (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
At idle 10 - 35
At 2,500 rpm 10 - 35 H
Mass Air Flow Sensor BBS004JS
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V) I

Output voltage at idle 1.0 - 1.3*V
1.0 - 4.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
2.0 - 10.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm* J
Intake Air Temperature Sensor BBS004JT

K
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
L
80 (176) 0.283 - 0.359
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor BBS004JU
M
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Approximately 530 – 590kΩ
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater BBS004JV
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.4 - 4.4Ω
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater BBS004JW
EC-1237
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) BBS004JX

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) BBS004JY

Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve BBS00585
Throttle Control Motor BBS004JZ
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Fuel Injector BBS004K0
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.5Ω
Fuel Pump BBS004K1
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω
EC-1238
INDEX FOR DTC
[HR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)]
INDEX FOR DTC
[HR (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)] PFP:00024
A
DTC No. Index BBS004K2
NOTE:
DTC*1 Items
Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*2
D

E
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 Flashing*4 FURTHER TESTING EC-1269
MAY BE REQUIRED. F
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
MAY BE REQUIRED. G
H
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-1361 I
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1367
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1367
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) EC-1373
J
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) EC-1381

P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-1388
K
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1395
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1395
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-1401 L
M
P0605 0605 ECM EC-1420
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*5 EC-1423
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR EC-1430
P1128 1128 ETC MOT EC-1445
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-1450
EC-1239
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1 Items
Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*2
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION BL-215
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1492
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-1492
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1501
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-1501
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-1511
*2: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
*5: This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
EC-1240
INDEX FOR DTC
Alphabetical Index BBS004K3
A
NOTE:
Items DTC*1 C
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 2
ECM*
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-1492
D
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 EC-1492
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 EC-1501
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 EC-1501 E
3 F
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000* EC-1344

CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 EC-1347 G
H
ECM P0605 0605 EC-1420 I
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*5 P1065 1065 EC-1423
J
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 EC-1430 K
ETC MOT P1128 1128 EC-1445
L
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 EC-1373 M
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 EC-1381
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-1388
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 BL-215
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
MAY BE REQUIRED.
EC-1241
INDEX FOR DTC
Items DTC*1
Reference page
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
MAY BE REQUIRED.
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 EC-1450
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-1395
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-1395
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-1367
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-1367
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-1511
*2: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
EC-1242
PRECAUTIONS
A
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” BBS004K4
WARNING:
Maintenance Information BBS005AT

RHD MODELS H
● ECM I
● IPDM E/R
J
LHD MODELS
● ECM
L
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine BBS004K6
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
EC-1243
PRECAUTIONS
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM
Precaution BBS004K7

running.
SEF289H

● If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
● If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-
PBIA9222J
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (B) it
securely with a lever (1) as far as it will go as shown in the
figure.
– ECM (2)
– Loosen (A)
PBIB2947E
EC-1244
PRECAUTIONS
break).
EC
damage to ICs. C

erly. Refer to EC-1304, "ECM Terminals and Reference
Value" . F
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent. G
H
J
SAT652J L
EC-1245
PRECAUTIONS
the ground.
SEF348N

MBIB0291E

sarily.
SEF709Y

control units.
SEF708Y
EC-1246
PRECAUTIONS
A
EC
EC-1247
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools BBS004K8
Tool number
Description
Tool name

sensor wrench
S-NT379

sensor wrench
S-NT636
EG17650301 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and

Radiator cap tester radiator filler neck
adapter a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564

Break-out box
ZZA1194D

Y-cable adapter
PBIA9379J
KV10118400 Measuring fuel pressure

Fuel tube adapter
PBIB3043E
EC-1248
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools BBS004K9
A

release room EC
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: Part
No. 16441 6N210)
PBIC0198E
pressure
S-NT653
F
temperature sensor
S-NT705 H
AEM488

133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
907) L
S-NT779
EC-1249
System Diagram BBS004KA
MBIB1449E
EC-1250
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System BBS004KB


D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection
control
F

G
H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
J
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
<Fuel increase>
● When shift lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
<Fuel decrease>
EC-1251
PBIB2953E
heated oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-1373, "DTC P0132 HO2S1" . This maintains the mixture ratio within the
range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
Open Loop Control
● During warm-up
● After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
the two ratios.
EC-1252
A
EC
SEF337W D
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used E
F
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. G
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper- H
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System BBS004KC
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART I

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 J

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature K
Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control
L
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position M
Wheel sensor 1
Vehicle speed*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
the ECM.
● At starting
● During warm-up
● At idle
EC-1253
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) BBS004KD

Fuel injector
trol
Engine speed
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm under no load (for example, the shift lever position is neutral and
engine speed is over 2,500 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off var-
ies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-1251, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) Sys-
tem" .
EC-1254
A
Input/Output Signal Chart BBS004KE


cut control
Battery Battery voltage*2 D
E
Wheel sensor 1
Vehicle speed*
System Description BBS004KF
J
EC-1255
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description BBS004KG
EC-1256
A
Description BBS004KH
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB3039E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel H
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. I
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. J
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating.
EC-1257
PBIB2946E
: Vehicle front : From next page

solenoid valve
NOTE:
EC-1258
EC
MBIB1450E
: Vehicle front : To previous page I
1. EVAP canister
EC-1259
Component Inspection BBS004KI
EVAP CANISTER
1. Block port (B).
PBIB2961E
SEF989X

Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar,
0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
−0.061 to −0.035 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.49 psi)
SEF943S

Refer to EC-1530, "EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" .
EC-1260
A
Description BBS004KJ

C
with CONSULT-II.

F
EC-1261
Description BBS004KK
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB2962E

manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes
through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
tions.
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection BBS004KL

PBIB1589E
EC-1262
EC
S-ET277
D
EC-1263
Introduction BBS004KM
Emission-related diagnostic information
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Freeze Frame data
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
1st trip Freeze Frame
DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data
data
CONSULT-II × × × ×
ECM × ×* — —
consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-1291, "Fail-
Safe Chart" .)
Two Trip Detection Logic BBS004KN
vehicle operation.
Emission-related Diagnostic Information BBS004KO

×:Applicable —: Not applicable
Items DTC*1 Reference

Trip MI
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II 2 page
ECM*

CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 2 — EC-1347
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — Flashing*4 EC-1269
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 2 — EC-1349
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 1 × EC-1354
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 1 × EC-1354
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 2 × EC-1361
EC-1264
Items DTC*1 Reference

Trip MI A
(CONSULT-II screen terms) page
CONSULT-II ECM*2
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 2 × EC-1361
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 × EC-1367 EC
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 × EC-1367
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 2 × EC-1373
C
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 2 × EC-1381
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 × EC-1388
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-1395 D
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-1395
E
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-1405
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-1413 F
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-1420
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*5 P1065 1065 2 × EC-1423

G
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 × EC-1425
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 × EC-1430
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-1433 H
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-1439
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-1439
ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-1445 I
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 2 — EC-1450
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-1451 J
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-1471 K
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — BL-215
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 × EC-1479
L
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 1 × EC-1487
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 × EC-1492
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 × EC-1492 M
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-1501
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 × EC-1501
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 × EC-1511
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 × EC-1517

EC-1265
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-1285, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Con-
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: P0117, P0340, P1217, etc.
Without CONSULT-II
Example: 0117, 0340, 1217, etc.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate
whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
PBIB0911E

The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. For
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
EC-1266
How to Erase DTC A
WITH CONSULT-II
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. EC
2. Touch “ENGINE”. C
D
PBIB2454E
J
Without CONSULT-II
K
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 L
hours.
– Diagnostic trouble codes M
EC-1267
Malfunction Indicator (MI) BBS004KP
DESCRIPTION
If the MI does not light up, refer to DI-32, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-1596, "MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS" .
SAT652J

Mode Status
Engine stopped

One trip detection diagnoses will light up the MI in the 1st
trip.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
EC-1268
MI Flashing Without DTC
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MI may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag- A
nostic test mode. Refer to EC-1269, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later.
Refer to EC-1269, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . EC
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes C
D
NOTE:
E
has a malfunction.
F
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. G
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MI starts H
blinking.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). I
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
J
PBIB0092E M
1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
Refer to EC-1269, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Start Engine.
In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-32,
"WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-1596, "MI & DATA LINK CONNECTORS" .
EC-1269
MI Condition
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

codes can be identified by using CONSULT-II. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code.
PBIA3905E
1269, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
EC-1270
In this mode, the MI displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated A
oxygen sensor 1.
MI Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
EC
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system C
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge. D
E
EC-1271
Basic Inspection BBS004KQ
1. INSPECTION START
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Gasket
– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

SEF976U

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
>> GO TO 3
EC-1272
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED A
With CONSULT-II
EC
E
PBIA8513J

Refer to EC-1277, "IDLE SPEED" . F
G
SEF058Y
I
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about J
1 minute.
Refer to EC-1277, "IDLE SPEED" . K
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4. M
1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 5.

>> GO TO 6.
EC-1273
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
2. GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.

Check the Following.
(PHASE)" .
(POS)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
2. GO TO 4.

>> GO TO 4.
EC-1274
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING A
Refer to EC-1277, "IGNITION TIMING" . EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END D
NG >> GO TO 11.
MBIB1331E
E
1. Stop engine.
F
>> GO TO 12. G

Perform EC-1279, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . H
>> GO TO 13.
I
Refer to EC-1279, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14. K
2. GO TO 4.
L
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. M
Without CONSULT-II

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
EC-1275
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
Refer to EC-1277, "IGNITION TIMING" .
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 16.
MBIB1331E

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-142, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.

(PHASE)" .
(POS)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
2. GO TO 4.

>> GO TO 4.
EC-1276
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check BBS004KR
IDLE SPEED A
With CONSULT-II
EC
SEF058Y
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check the idle speed by installing the pulse type tachometer clamp on the loop wire or on suitable high-tension
wire which installed between ignition coil No.4 and spark plug No.4. F
NOTE:
For the method of installing the tachometer, refer to EC-1277, "IGNITION TIMING" .
IGNITION TIMING G
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
H
1. Attach timing light A to loop wire (1) as shown.
● : Vehicle front
I
K
PBIB2955E

L
MBIB1331E
EC-1277
Method B
1. Remove ignition coil No. 4 (1).
● : Vehicle front
MBIB1457E
2. Connect ignition coil No. 4 (1) and spark plug No. 4 with suitable
high-tension wire A as shown, and attach timing light clamp B to
this wire.
MBIB1541E
SEF166Y

MBIB1331E
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning BBS004KS
DESCRIPTION
OPERATION PROCEDURE
EC-1278
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. A
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning BBS004KT
DESCRIPTION
EC
C
OPERATION PROCEDURE
2. Turn ignition switch ON. D
Idle Air Volume Learning BBS004KU
E
DESCRIPTION
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: F
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
G
PREPARATION
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. H
● PNP switch: ON I
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light J
only small lamps.
● Vehicle speed: Stopped K
– A/T models
• With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indi- L
cates less than 0.9V.
• Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
– M/T models M
• Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
EC-1279
SEF217Z
SEF454Y

dent by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Ignition timing A/T: 6 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) MBIB0238E
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
has a malfunction.
EC-1280
A
EC
PBIB0665E D
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
E
ITEM SPECIFICATION
F
Ignition timing A/T: 6 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried G
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: H
I
It is useful to perform EC-1597, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . J
● Engine stalls. K
● Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check BBS004KV L
With CONSULT-II
3. Start engine.
pressure.
SEF214Y
EC-1281
Without CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
sure.
MBIB0277E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
other purposes.
connector maintains sealability with O-rings inside.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/
C, etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes
in manifold vacuum.
NOTE:
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check B and fuel tube
adapter (KV10118400) D, then connect fuel pressure gauge A.
● : To quick connector
● : To fuel tube (engine side)
● C: Clamp
● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NIS-
SAN fuel hose without quick connector).
● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moder-
ately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
PBIB2982E
● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with dam-
age or cracks on it.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-120, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

4. Connect fuel hose for fuel pressure check (1) to fuel tube
(engine side) with clamp (2) as shown in the figure.
● No.2 spool (5)
ened with gasoline.
(3) and No.1 spool (4).
● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 PBIB2983E
N4710 or 16439 40U00).
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
EC-1282
● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in).
A
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13 in-lb)
5. Connect fuel tube adapter to quick connector. EC
● A: Fuel pressure gauge
● B: Fuel hose for fuel pressure check
6. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose C
7. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. D
E
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating.
PBIB2984E
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.

F
G
● Fuel filter for clogging H

● Fuel pump
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. I

EC-1283
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction BBS004KW
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
MEF036D

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-1285, "WORK FLOW" .
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
on EC-1289, "Worksheet Sample" should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
SEF234G
EC-1284
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
Overall Sequence A
EC
PBIB2267E
EC-1285
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Detailed Flow
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-1288, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1 .
– Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II.)
TION" .)
– Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?

results.
>> GO TO 5.

results.
>> GO TO 6.
EC-1286
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1 1
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC* , and then make sure that DTC* is detected
again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA EC
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-1290, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trou-
ble diagnosis order. C
NOTE:
● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This D
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this
check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirma- E
tion Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
F
Yes >> GO TO 10.
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION G

H
7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE I
With CONSULT-II
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F J
ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MON-
ITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-1326, "Inspection Procedure" .
Are they within the SP value? K
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8.
L
SEF601Z M

Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-1327, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.

>> GO TO 10.
EC-1287
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
Yes >> GO TO 11.
SULT-II. Refer to EC-1304, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" , EC-1321, "CONSULT-II Ref-
erence Value in Data Monitor" .

ment.
>> GO TO 12.
12. FINAL CHECK

When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
OK or NG
(Refer to EC-1267, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .)
2. INSPECTION END
Description
tomer complaint.
SEF907L
EC-1288
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Worksheet Sample
A
EC
MTBL0017
EC-1289
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC Inspection Priority Chart BBS004KX
chart.
NOTE:
1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
● P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0605 ECM
● P1610 - P1615 NATS
2 ● P0132 P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1
● P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P1065 ECM
● P1128 Throttle control motor
EC-1290
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Fail-Safe Chart BBS004KY
A
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC
P0103
C
P1121 Electric throttle control actu- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return D
ator spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
E
20 degrees or less.
F
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P (A/T), Neutral (M/T) position, and engine speed will G
not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
H
P1124 Throttle control relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a I
J
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
K
When accelerating Poor acceleration L
M
● When there is an open circuit on MI circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MI when there
is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MI circuit is open by
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MI circuit are detected and demands
EC-1291
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart BBS004KZ
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-1257
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-1262
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-1272
EC-1430,
EC-1433
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2 EC-1354
1
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3 EC-1361
3 EC-1373,
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit EC-1381 ,
1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-1549
EC-1367,
EC-1395 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-1467 ,
EC-1469 ,
2 2 EC-1511
EC-1471,
EC-1492 ,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-1501 ,
EC-1517
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-1401
EC-1420,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-1423
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-1425
cuit
EC-1292
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL E

PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-1479 F
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-1590
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-1528
G
ATC-20,
MTC-20
BRC-8, H
BRC-49
I
SYMPTOM
J

K

L
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
M
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel tank FL-19
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-14
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
—
line, Low octane)
EC-1293
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Air Air duct EM-118
Air cleaner EM-118
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-118
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-120
EM-120
Collector/Gasket
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-15
Signal plate 6 1 EM-189
MT-16, MT-
46 , AT-
PNP switch 4
105 , AT-
293
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-173
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-189
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
mecha-
Camshaft EM-151
nism
Intake valve
3 EM-173
Exhaust valve
Gasket EX-3, EM-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
124
Three way catalyst
EC-1294
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL E

Lubrica- EM-127, F
tion LU-16 ,
filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-19
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-16 G
Thermostat 5 CO-38
H
Water pump CO-36
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 CO-26
Cooling fan CO-31 I
Coolant level (Low)/Contami- 5
CO-27
nated coolant
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) 1 1 BL-215 J
EC-1295
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location BBS004L0
MBIB1542E
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor
and spark plug valve
4. Knock sensor 5. Fuel injector 6. Cooling fan motor
7. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 8. IPDM E/R 9. ECM
(with intake air temperature sensor) (with built-in throttle position sensor,
throttle control motor)
solenoid valve
EC-1296
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
PBIB2940E
: Vehicle front
4. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 5. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 6. Fuel injector
solenoid valve
EC-1297
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MBIB1543E
: Vehicle front
1. ECM harness connectors 2. ECM 3. IPDM E/R
4. Fuel pump fuse (15A) 5. Intake valve timing control solenoid 6. Knock sensor
valve
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor 8. PCV valve
EC-1298
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
PBIB2942E
I
PBIB2943E
: Vehicle front
1. Exhaust manifold 2. Heated oxygen sensor 1 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2 J
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 harness
connector
K
EC-1299
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
MBIB1544E
1. Cooling fan motor 2. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 3. Stop lamp switch
4. Brake pedal 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Accelerator pedal position sensor
harness connector
7. Accelerator pedal 8. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 9. Fuel pump and fuel filter
harness connector
10. Fuel pressure regulator 11. Fuel level sensor unit
EC-1300
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Vacuum Hose Drawing BBS004L1
EC
PBIB2946E
: Vehicle front : To EVAP canister

solenoid valve
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge hoses.
EC-1301
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram BBS004L2
MBWA1453E
EC-1302
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
MBWA1454E
EC-1303
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout BBS004L3
PBIA9221J
ECM Terminals and Reference Value BBS004L4
PREPARATION
1. ECM (1) is located in the engine room left side near battery.
● : Vehicle front
PBIB2959E

● When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen (A) it
– ECM (2)
– Fasten (B)


PBIB2947E

CAUTION:
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3.2V

1 P
PBIA8150J
Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE

supply (11 - 14V)
EC-1304
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
EC
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm C
3 Y
heater
PBIA8148J
D
E
Approximately 1.8V
[Ignition switch: ON] F

4 L
● Accelerator pedal: Fully released G
PBIA8149J
[Engine is running] Approximately 10V H

● Below 3,600 rpm after the following con-
ditions are met.
– Engine: After warming up I
Heated oxygen sensor 2 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
5 GR
heater idle for 1 minute under no load J
PBIA8148J

(11 - 14V)
K
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE L
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
M
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge vol-

9 LG PBIB0050E
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
EC-1305
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
3 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
PBIA8164J
13 L Tachometer signal
3 - 5V
[Engine is running]
PBIA8165J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
0 - 0.3V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
17 V Ignition signal No. 1 rpm at idle.
PBIA9265J
0.2 - 0.5V
[Engine is running]
PBIA9266J

● For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.0V
ON
23 R Fuel pump relay [Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON
EC-1306
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V) EC
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
rpm at idle.
29 O Fuel injector No. 3 PBIB0529E D
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm F
PBIA4943J
[Engine is running]
G
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay switch OFF H
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ignition switch OFF I
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V J
K
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed L
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) M
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
sensor
EC-1307
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
41 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: 1.0 - 4.0V
ON

44 B (Engine coolant temperature ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
Approximately 0.4V
● Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
46 V [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sensor
air temperature.

48 Y (Refrigerant pressure sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
met.
50 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 0 - Approximately 1.0V
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed

55 O (Intake air temperature sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
EC-1308
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 1.0V
● Idle speed
NOTE: C
rpm at idle.
MBIB1453E
61 Y D
(POS)
0 - 1.0V
F
MBIB1454E

62 W [Crankshaft position sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V G

63 B [Camshaft position sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V H
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running] I
● Idle speed
NOTE: J
rpm at idle.
MBIB1455E
65 R K
(PHASE)
0 - 1.0V
M
MBIB1456E

Park/Neutral position (PNP)
switch
Sensor power supply

EC-1309
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 10V
Intake valve timing control
73 LG
PBIA4937J
Sensor power supply

sensor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
(PHASE)]
83 Y CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.7 - 2.3V
84 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V
88 LG DATA link connector Approximately 2.7V
● CONSULT-II: Disconnected.
(11 - 14V)
Approximately 0V
Sensor power supply

102 BR (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 2)
103 G

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Sensor power supply
106 O (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EC-1310
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9V EC
110 W
● Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V C

D
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) E
EC-1311
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) BBS004L5
FUNCTION
Work support
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
Data monitor (SPEC)
other data monitor items can be read.
monitor
Active test

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
Item DATA
WORK 1 MONI- ACTIVE
DTC* FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TOR TEST
FRAME TOR
(SPEC)
DATA*2
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × × ×

INPUT

Knock sensor ×
Closed throttle position switch (accelerator
× ×
pedal position sensor signal)
Load signal × ×
EC-1312
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
Item DATA
WORK 1 MONI- ACTIVE
DTC* FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TOR TEST EC
FRAME TOR
(SPEC)
DATA*2
C
Throttle control motor × D
EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
× × × ×
OUTPUT
noid valve
E

F
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve × × × × G
X: Applicable
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data H
Refer to GI-36, "CONSULT-II Start Procedure" . I
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item J
ING IDLING. from fuel line K
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN L
ECM.
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value M
FICIENT.
ing
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

TION ITEMS" .
EC-1313
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Freeze frame data
Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
EC-1239, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX]
● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
COOLANT TEMP
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
[km/h] or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F]
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
ECM MAIN
Monitored item
[Unit]
SIGNALS NALS
● Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × signals of the crankshaft position sensor ● If the signal is interrupted while
(POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). the engine is running, an abnor-
mal value may be indicated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor ● When the engine is stopped, a
is displayed. certain value is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injec-
B/FUEL SCHDL
× tion pulse width programmed into ECM, prior
[msec]
to any learned on board correction.
● When the engine is stopped, a
certain value is indicated.
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × ● This data also includes the data
correction factor per cycle is indicated.
for the air-fuel ratio learning con-
trol.
EC-1314
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM MAIN
Monitored item
[Unit]
SIGNALS NALS
● When the engine coolant temper-
ature sensor is open or short- EC
● The engine coolant temperature (determined
COOLAN TEMP/S circuited, ECM enters fail-safe
× × by the signal voltage of the engine coolant
[°C] or [°F] mode. The engine coolant tem-
temperature sensor) is displayed.
perature determined by the ECM
is displayed. C
HO2S1 (B1) [V] × ×
sor 1 is displayed.
D
HO2S2 (B1) [V] ×
sor 2 is displayed.
● After turning ON the ignition
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal dur- switch, “RICH” is displayed until E
ing air-fuel ratio feedback control: air-fuel mixture ratio feedback
RICH: means the mixture became “rich”, and control begins.
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
× × control is being affected toward a leaner mix-
[RICH/LEAN] ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback F
ture.
LEAN: means the mixture became “lean”, and is clamped, the value just before
control is being affected toward a rich mixture. the clamping is displayed contin-
uously.
G
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● When the engine is stopped, a
× way catalyst is relatively small.
[RICH/LEAN] certain value is indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after H
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
× ×
[km/h] or [mph] speed signal is displayed. I
played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● ACCEL SEN 2 signal is con- J
● The accelerator pedal position sensor signal verted by ECM internally. Thus, it
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × voltage is displayed. differs from ECM terminal voltage
signal.
K
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● THRTL SEN 2 signal is con-
● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is verted by ECM internally. Thus, it
THRTL SEN 2 [V] × displayed. differs from ECM terminal voltage
signal. L
● The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE
× × signal voltage of the intake air temperature
[°C] or [°F]
sensor) is indicated. M
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] com- ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is
START SIGNAL
× × puted by the ECM according to the signals of displayed regardless of the
[ON/OFF]
engine speed and battery voltage. starter signal.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS
× × the ECM according to the accelerator pedal
[ON/OFF]
position sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condi-
AIR COND SIG
× × tioner switch as determined by the air condi-
[ON/OFF]
tioner signal.
× ×
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering sys-
PW/ST SIGNAL
× × tem (determined by the signal sent from EPS
[ON/OFF]
control unit) is indicated.
EC-1315
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM MAIN
Monitored item
[Unit]
SIGNALS NALS
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electri-
cal load signal.
LOAD SIGNAL ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/
× ×
[ON/OFF] or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and
lighting switch are OFF.
×
[ON/OFF] switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater
×
[ON/OFF] fan switch signal.
×
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width ● When the engine is stopped, a
INJ PULSE-B1
× compensated by ECM according to the input certain computed value is indi-
[msec]
signals. cated.
● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM ● When the engine is stopped, a
according to the input signals. certain value is indicated.
control solenoid valve control value computed
PURG VOL C/V [%] by the ECM according to the input signals.
increases.
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced
[°CA] angle.
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] according to the input signal) is indicated.
value increases
AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF]
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY
× determined by ECM according to the input sig-
[ON/OFF]
nals.
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay con-
THRTL RELAY
× trol condition determined by the ECM accord-
[ON/OFF]
ing to the input signals.
OFF: Stop
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF]
EC-1316
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM MAIN
Monitored item
[Unit]
SIGNALS NALS
● Display the condition of idle air volume learn-
ing EC
IDL A/V LEARN YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already
been performed successfully. C
● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
O2SEN HTR DTY
control value computed by the ECM according
[%]
to the input signals. D
I/P PULLY SPD ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the
×
[km/h] or [MPH] furbine revolution sensor signal.
● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pres- E
AC PRESS SEN [V] ×
sure sensor is displayed.
Voltage [V]
Frequency ● Only “#” is displayed if item is F
[msec], [Hz] or [%] unable to be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width ● Figures with “#”s are temporary
measured by the probe. ones. They are the same figures G
DUTY-LOW
as an actual piece of data which
PLS WIDTH-HI was just previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW H
NOTE:
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE I

Monitored Item
ECM
MAIN J
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the engine speed computed K
ENG SPEED [rpm] × ×
sensor (PHASE). L
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel M
×
rection.
NOTE:
EC-1317
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
● Fuel injector
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

trouble condition
ING CHECK ITEM.
CONSULT-II.
the engine.
● Compression
● A/C switch OFF
POWER BAL- ● Fuel injector
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Power transistor
(M/T)
● Spark plug
● Cut off each fuel injector signal

1
COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “LOW”, Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan relay
, *2 , *3 “MID”, “HI” and “OFF” with CON-
SULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor

stopped)
SULT-II.
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
*1: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
*2: With A/C: “OFF”, “LOW”, “MID” or “HI” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. But cooling fan operates at the same speed when “MID”
or “HI” is displayed.
*3: Without A/C: “OFF”, “LOW”, “MID” or “HI” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. But cooling fan operates at the same speed when an
item other than “OFF” is displayed.
EC-1318
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Description A
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): EC
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be C
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording D
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... E
PBIB1593E
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and F
UAL.
G
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though H
SEF707X
EC-1319
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure
to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
nents and harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/
1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS” in GI-25, "How to Perform
Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
PBIB0197E
EC-1320
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor BBS004L6
Remarks: A
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in EC
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as C
ENG SPEED
tion. the tachometer indication.
D
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-1326, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F) E
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm
1.0V
● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions F
are met.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1) – Engine: After warming up.
1.0V
– Keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute G
and idle for 1 minute under no load.
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
H
are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) – Engine: After warming up. LEAN ←→ RICH
I
J
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. the speedometer indication.
K
ACCEL SEN 1
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9V L

ACCEL SEN 2*1
THRTL SEN 1 Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V M
(Engine stopped)
1
THRTL SEN 2*
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
CLSD THL POS ● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
the engine ON
PW/ST SIGNAL
EC-1321
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or ON
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON Lighting switch: 2nd
Rear window defogger switch and
OFF
lighting switch: OFF
Heater fan: Operating. ON
Heater fan: Not operating OFF
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
(M/T)
● No load
IGN TIMING ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
(M/T)
● No load
PURG VOL C/V ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
2,000 rpm 0 - 50%
(M/T)
● No load
2,500 rpm Approx. 0° - 40°CA
(M/T)
● No load
2,500 rpm Approx. 0% - 90%
(M/T)
● No load
the engine ON
ON
OFF
(201°F) or less
the engine Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN
95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F) LOW*2
EC-1322
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
ON
EC
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and C
at idle for 1 minute under no load
Almost the same speed as D
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
the tachometer indication
O2SEN HTR DTY Approx. 30%
● Engine speed: below 3,600 rpm E
● Engine: Idle
● Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates)
F
HI depends on engine coolant temperature. G
EC-1323
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode BBS004L7
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera-
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with shift lever in D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
PBIB2445E
EC-1324
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
PBIB0668E
EC-1325
Description BBS004L8
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MI.
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition BBS004L9

● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
– A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
– M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
ahead.
Inspection Procedure BBS004LA
NOTE:
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-
B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
SEF601Z
EC-1326
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004LB
OVERALL SEQUENCE A
EC
PBIB2384E
EC-1327
PBIB3213E
EC-1328
DETAILED PROCEDURE
A
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-1326, "Testing Condition" . EC
and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
NOTE: C
even a little. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. E
PBIB2369E

make sure that the indication is within the SP value. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19. H
PBIB2332E
J
make sure that the indication is within the SP value. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6. L
PBIB2332E

1. Stop the engine.
3. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-1329
5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
NOTE:
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
dition.
>> INSPECTION END

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-1282, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-1282, "FUEL PRESSURE
CHECK" . GO TO 8.

– Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-1543, "FUEL PUMP" .)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-1282, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
>> GO TO 8.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.

speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
EC-1330
– Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-1537, "FUEL INJECTOR" .) EC
– Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-173, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .)
C
D
>> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” E

1. Start engine.
within the SP value. F
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12. G

H
I
during 10 seconds.
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
SEF820Y
L
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 and its circuit. Refer to EC-1381, "DTC P0134 HO2S1" . M
>> GO TO 14.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 15.
EC-1331
15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
>> GO TO 16.

1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-1292, "Symptom Matrix Chart"

OK or NG
PBIB2332E

– Engine oil level is too high
– Noise from engine
– Valve clearance malfunction

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
EC-1332
20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” A
OK or NG EC
C
21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.

D
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
E
>> GO TO 22.

F
1. Start engine.
within the SP value. G
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-1354, "DTC
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . H
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.
I
make sure that the indication is within the SP value. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and K
then GO TO 29.
PBIB2370E
M
24. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> GO TO 29.
EC-1333
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.

SP value.
OK or NG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and
then GO TO 30.
PBIB2370E

Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
● Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
● Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
parts
● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.

OK or NG
EC-1334
30. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” A
the SP value.
OK or NG EC
C
EC-1335
Description BBS004LC
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004LD
1. INSPECTION START
TION" .
>> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

TESTS”.
OK or NG
EC-1336
A
Wiring Diagram BBS004LE
EC
MBWA1455E
EC-1337
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch OFF
(11 - 14V)
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
105 G [Ignition switch: ON]
ECM (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004LF
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.

SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9561J
EC-1338
● 10A fuse
C
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS-1 D

2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. E
MBIB1550E

I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. J
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I K

Refer to Wiring Diagram. L

3. Also check harness for short to power. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-1339
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.
MBIB1353E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
11. PBIB3037E

SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIA9562J
EC-1340
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V A
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. D
11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI E

F
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

● Harness or connectors E59, F1 J
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
13. CHECK 20A FUSE

L
2. Check 20A fuse.
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 17.
EC-1341
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16.

● Harness or connectors F1, E59

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
Ground Inspection BBS004LG
EC-1342
● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. A
EC
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. C
PBIB1870E
EC-1343
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
Description BBS004LH
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004LI

Trouble diagnosis
name
U1000 ● ECM cannot communicate to other control
1000 units. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
U1001 line ● ECM cannot communicate for more than the shorted.)
1001 specified time.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004LJ

EC-1344
Wiring Diagram BBS004LK
EC
MBWA1456E
EC-1345
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004LL
EC-1346
A
Description BBS004LM
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004LN
The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis. D
U1010 E
CAN communication bus Initializing CAN communication bus is malfunctioning. ● ECM
1010
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004LO
WITH CONSULT-II F
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1348, "Diagnostic Proce- G
dure" .
SEF058Y
J
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. K
L
EC-1347
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004LP
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
5. Is the 1st trip DTC U1010 displayed again?
Without CONSULT-II
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to EC-1267, "HOW TO ERASE
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1348
A
Description BBS004LQ
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve C
D
MBIB1560E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake J
valve.
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid K
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004LR L
M
2,500 rpm Approx. 0° - 40°CA
(M/T)
● No load
2,500 rpm Approx. 0% - 90%
(M/T)
● No load
EC-1349
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004LS

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
P0011 Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
0011 control performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters in fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004LT
CAUTION:
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P1111. See EC-
1425, "DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" .
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
ture.
onds.
COOLANT TEMPS 60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F)
SEF174Y
A/T: P or N position
Shift lever
M/T: Neutral position
COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
EC-1350
A
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1352, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC
Overall Function Check BBS004LU
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the intake valve timing control system. During this check, a C
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. D
E
4. Set the tester probe between ECM terminal 73 (IVT control solenoid valve signal) and ground.
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions. F
Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
Conditions Voltage G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
At idle
(11 - 14V)
H
7V - 10V
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm I

PBIB3036E
J
PBIA4937J
7. If NG, go to EC-1352, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K
EC-1351
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004LV

1. Start engine.
nated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIA8559J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
PBIA9557J

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 7.
EC-1352
7. CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC

For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-1407, "Wiring Diagram" for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-1415, "Wiring Dia-
gram" for CMP sensor (PHASE). D
>> INSPECTION END

E
Component Inspection BBS004LW

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. F
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance G
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground H

If OK, go to next step. I
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid J

CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. K
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. L
NOTE:
M
Removal and Installation BBS004LX

EC-1353
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description BBS004LY
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004LZ

On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004M0

Trouble diagnosis
name
P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 circuit low input sent to ECM. ● Intake air leaks
P0103 Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 circuit high input sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
EC-1354
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004M1
A
NOTE:
EC
With CONSULT-II
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1357, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D
F
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. G
H
With CONSULT-II I
3. Wait at least 5 seconds. J
5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. K
L
SEF058Y
M
Without CONSULT-II
EC-1355
Wiring Diagram BBS004M2
MBWA1457E
EC-1356
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 1.0V
32 P D
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
E
Approximately 0.4V
● Engine stopped
[Engine is running] F
G
rpm increased to about 4,000 rpm.) H
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed I
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
J
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004M3
1. INSPECTION START
K
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2. L
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM M

● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-1357
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor (1) harness connector.
PBIB2948E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E

EC-1358
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 52. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. D
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
J
>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection BBS004M4

With CONSULT-II
M
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the follow-
ing conditions.
Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)
1.0 - 1.3
4,000 rpm.
PBIB2371E
EC-1359

8. Perform step 2 to 4 again.
Without CONSULT-II
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
1.0 - 1.3
4,000 rpm.
PBIA9564J

7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.
Removal and Installation BBS004M5

EC-1360
A
Component Description BBS004M6

SEF594K
E
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 G
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
CAUTION:
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004M7
J
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant tem- K
cuit low input
P0118
Engine coolant tem-
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
L
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.
or START.
Condition
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
EC-1361
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004M8
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1362
Wiring Diagram BBS004M9
EC
MBWA1459E
EC-1363
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004MA

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (1) har-
ness connector.
– : Vehicle front
PBIB2964E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0080E
EC-1364
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 44, TCM terminal 42 and ECT sensor terminal 2.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
E
F
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ECT sensor
● Harness for open or short between TCM and ECT sensor G
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 6.
J
>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection BBS004MB

terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. M
PBIB2005E
EC-1365
<Reference data>
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
Removal and Installation BBS004MC

EC-1366
A
Component Description BBS004MD

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004ME

F
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004MF

H

NOTE: I
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor ● Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen- ● Electric throttle control actuator K
0123 2 circuit high input sor 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
M
degrees.
EC-1367
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004MG
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1368
Wiring Diagram BBS004MH
EC
MBWA1460E
EC-1369
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004MI

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1370
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
tor.
D
PBIB2965E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9580J H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-1371
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004MJ

tions.


step.
Removal and Installation BBS004MK

EC-1372
DTC P0132 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS004ML

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004MM I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm. LEAN ←→ RICH
10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004MN
L
PBIB1848E
EC-1373
DTC P0132 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004MO
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF174Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1374
DTC P0132 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS004MP
EC
MBWA1461E
EC-1375
DTC P0132 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
3 Y
heater
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]

Diagnostic Procedure BBS004MQ

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1376
DTC P0132 HO2S1
● : Vehicle front
EC
C
>> GO TO 3.
D
PBIB2966E
3. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E

– : Vehicle front F
terminal 56. G
H
OK or NG PBIB2967E
OK >> GO TO 4. I

J
L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.

Check heated oxygen sensor 1 connector for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-1377
DTC P0132 HO2S1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1378
DTC P0132 HO2S1
Component Inspection BBS004MR

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
D
SEF646Y
F
onds.

I
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
M
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
EC-1379
DTC P0132 HO2S1
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V PBIA9566J
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS004MS

EC-1380
DTC P0134 HO2S1
A
Component Description BBS004MT

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004MU I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004MV
L
SEF237U
EC-1381
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Overall Function Check BBS004MW
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load.
4. Make sure that the indications do not remain in the range
between 0.2V to 0.4V.
SEF646Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
PBIA9566J
EC-1382
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS004MX
EC
MBWA1461E
EC-1383
DTC P0134 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
3 Y
heater
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004MY

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1384
DTC P0134 HO2S1
– : Vehicle front
EC
terminal 56.

OK or NG PBIB2967E
OK >> GO TO 3.

F
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5.
L
M
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004MZ

With CONSULT-II
II.
EC-1385
DTC P0134 HO2S1
ing steps.
SEF646Y

onds.
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V PBIA9566J
CAUTION:
EC-1386
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Cleaner tool and approved anti-seize lubricant. A
Removal and Installation BBS004N0

EC
EC-1387
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Component Description BBS004N1

tions.
SEF327R
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004N2

tions are met.
– Engine: After warming up.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004N3

the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB1848E
EC-1388
DTC P0138 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004N4
A
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II C
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. E
dure" .
F
G
SEF174Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. H
I
6. Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) with ECM. J
EC-1389
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS004N5
MBWA1463E
EC-1390
DTC P0138 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
tions are met. D
5 GR E

[Engine is running]
G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed J
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004N6

K
M
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1391
DTC P0138 HO2S2
terminal 59.
OK or NG PBIB2949E
OK >> GO TO 3.

1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 ECM terminal 50.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004N7

With CONSULT-II
EC-1392
DTC P0138 HO2S2
“HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A
EC
SEF662Y
D
PBIB0551E
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. H
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 I
Cleaner tool and approved anti-seize lubricant. J
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. K
L
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) M
procedure.
sary.
procedure.
CAUTION:
EC-1393
DTC P0138 HO2S2
Removal and Installation BBS004N8

EC-1394
A
Component Description BBS004N9

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004NA

F
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004NB

H

NOTE: I
P0222 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors
0222 1 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor ● Electric throttle control actuator K
0223 1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE L
M
degrees.
EC-1395
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004NC
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1396
Wiring Diagram BBS004ND
EC
MBWA1466E
EC-1397
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004NE

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1398
tor.
D
PBIB2965E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9580J H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-1399
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004NF

4. Set shift lever to D (A/T), 1st (M/T) position.
tions.


step.
Removal and Installation BBS004NG

EC-1400
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
A
Component Description BBS004NH
The knock sensor (1) is attached to the cylinder block. It senses

engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration EC
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pres-
sure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
● : Vehicle front C
PBIB2969E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004NI

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause F
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is G
● Knock sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004NJ

H
NOTE:
I
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II J
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. K
dure" .
L
M
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1401
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Wiring Diagram BBS004NK
MBWA1467E
EC-1402
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground D
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004NL

E
F
NOTE: G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. I
NG >> GO TO 2.

J
– : Vehicle front
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 37 and knock K
sensor terminal 1.
L
OK or NG M


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-1403
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body.
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

1. Reconnect knock sensor harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004NM
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
than 10 MΩ.
CAUTION:
SEF227W
Removal and Installation BBS004NN
KNOCK SENSOR
EC-1404
A
Component Description BBS004NO

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at EC
olution.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
change. D
changes.
PBIA9209J
E
PBIB2382E
I
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004NP

ENG SPEED
K
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004NQ
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not circuit is open or shorted.]
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of (Accelerator pedal position sensor
M
engine cranking. circuit is shorted.)
P0335 Crankshaft position ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit
0335 sensor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is is shorted.)
running. ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
● Refrigerant position sensor
● Signal plate
EC-1405
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004NR
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
onds at idle speed.
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1406
Wiring Diagram BBS004NS
EC
MBWA1468E
EC-1407
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
MBIB1453E
Crankshaft position
61 Y
sensor (POS)
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1454E

Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
EC-1408
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004NT

MBIB1550E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I H

1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) (1) harness
connector.
K
PBIB2970E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and L

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2609E
EC-1409
3. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK COMPONENTS
● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Refer to EC-1509, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
EC-1410
8. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. EC
9. CHECK GEAR TOOTH C

OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1411
Component Inspection BBS004NU

PBIA9210J

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIA9584J
Removal and Installation BBS004NV

EC-1412
A
Component Description BBS004NW
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of

camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position EC
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
signals.
PBIA9209J
change.
E
PBIB2382E
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004NX
NOTE:
If DTC P0340 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to J
K
for the first few seconds during engine ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
L
cranking. ● Camshaft (Intake)
● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-45, "START-
during engine running. ING SYSTEM" .)
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal M
● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-45,
pattern during engine running. "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
EC-1413
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004NY
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
onds at idle speed.
dure" .
onds.
dure" . SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
5. Start engine and maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
EC-1414
Wiring Diagram BBS004NZ
EC
MBWA1469E
EC-1415
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
at idle
MBIB1455E
65 R
(PHASE)
0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1456E
Sensor power supply

(PHASE)]
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004O0

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
EC-1416
E
MBIB1550E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) (1) har- H
ness connector.
– : Vehicle front
PBIB2971E
K


OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB2609E
EC-1417
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
PBIA9557J

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004O1

EC-1418
A
EC
PBIA9210J
D
E
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-) F
G
PBIA9584J
Removal and Installation BBS004O2
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) H

EC-1419
DTC P0605 ECM
Component Description BBS004O3

PBIA9222J
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004O4

P0605
0605
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Malfunction A
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004O5
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
With CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-1420
DTC P0605 ECM
A
With CONSULT-II
EC
ON.
C
dure" .
D
E
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. F
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1422, "Diagnostic Procedure" G

With CONSULT-II H
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn I
ON.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-1422, "Diagnostic Proce- J
dure" .
SEF058Y
L
Without CONSULT-II
M
3. Repeat step 1 to 2 for 32 times.
EC-1421
DTC P0605 ECM
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004O6
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory.
Refer to EC-1269, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1422
DTC P1065 ECM
A
Component Description BBS004O7
ECM has the memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio
feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Volume Learning EC
value memory, etc. even when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
PBIA9222J
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004O8
F
P1065* ECM back-up RAM system does not function
Engine control module ● ECM
1065 properly.
*: This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004O9
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. I
J
ON.
K
dure" .
L
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II M
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 for 4 times.
EC-1423
DTC P1065 ECM
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004OA
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
Refer to EC-1269, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)"
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1424
A
Component Description BBS004OB

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. EC
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle. C
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control D
position.
PBIB1842E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004OC

INT/V SOL (B1) ● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral G
2,500 rpm Approx. 0% - 90%
(M/T)
● No load
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004OD
I
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM ● Harness or connectors
P1111 Intake valve timing control (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
through intake valve timing control solenoid
valve. ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004OE
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and K
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II L
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. M
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1425
Wiring Diagram BBS004OF
MBWA1471E
EC-1426
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
D
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a few seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V) E
switch OFF
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) F
● Idle speed
7 - 10V
Intake valve timing control G
73 LG
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm H
PBIA4937J
BATTERY VOLTAGE I
(11 - 14V)
J
EC-1427
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004OG
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve (1) har-
ness connector.
MBIB1546E

valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0192E

3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-1428
Component Inspection BBS004OH
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C

valve as follows. D
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 6.7 - 7.7Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
E
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. F

G
CAUTION: H
timing control solenoid valve. I
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control J
Removal and Installation BBS004OI
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE K

EC-1429
Component Description BBS004OJ
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004OK

Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
1121 actuator B)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Malfunction A
Malfunction C The engine can restart in N or P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T) and engine speed will not exceed
1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004OL
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
least 3 seconds.
least 3 seconds.
9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn SEF058Y
ON.
EC-1430
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition witch ON and wait at least 1 second. A
2. Set shift lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds.
EC
6. Set shift lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds.
C
9. Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) with ECM. D
E
With CONSULT-II
F
least 3 seconds.
G
H
SEF058Y
I
Without CONSULT-II
2. Set shift lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds. J
K
7. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1431, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004OM

M
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing.
– : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2974E
EC-1431
>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation BBS004ON
EC-1432
A
Description BBS004OO
NOTE:
or P1126. Refer to EC-1430, "DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR" or EC-1439,
"DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY" .
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. C
response to driving condition. D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004OP
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. E

P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or F
1122 performance ate properly. shorted)
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
H
spring.
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004OQ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at J
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine K
is running.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. L
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-1435, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1433
Wiring Diagram BBS004OR
MBWA1472E
EC-1434
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V

1 P
E
PBIB1105E

0 - 14V

G
4 L
PBIB1104E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004OS

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1435
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIA9569J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

6. CHECK FUSE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
EC-1436
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

F
OK or NG
tor. K
– : Vehicle front
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. L
Electric throttle control M
actuator terminal
1 Should not exist
5 PBIB2965E
4 Should exist
1 Should exist
6
4 Should not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
EC-1437
and the housing.
– : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
PBIB2974E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004OT

step.
PBIB2909E
Removal and Installation BBS004OU

EC-1438
A
Component Description BBS004OV
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004OW

D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004OX

E

P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1124 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted) G
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is H
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
J
spring.
K
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004OY
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
M
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-1439
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-1440
Wiring Diagram BBS004OZ
EC
MBWA1473E
EC-1441
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

1 P
PBIB1105E

0 - 14V

4 L
(Close) ● Shift lever: D D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
PBIB1104E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004P0

SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9569J
EC-1442
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
NG >> GO TO 3.

F
4. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. I
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I J
1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 2 and ground under the

K
Battery voltage
L
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
EC-1443

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-1444
A
Component Description BBS004P1
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004P2 C
FAIL-SAFE MODE F
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004P3

H
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
K
SEF058Y
M
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1445
Wiring Diagram BBS004P4
MBWA1474E
EC-1446
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
0 - 14V

1 P
E
PBIB1105E

0 - 14V

G
4 L
(Close) ● Shift lever: D D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
PBIB1104E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004P5

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1447
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
tor.
– : Vehicle front
actuator terminal
1 Should not exist
5 PBIB2965E
4 Should exist
1 Should exist
6
4 Should not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1448
Component Inspection BBS004P6
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR A

EC
step. C
D
PBIB2909E
E
Removal and Installation BBS004P7

Refer to EM-120, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . F
EC-1449
Description BBS004PC
NOTE:
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004PD

ECM can not receive the information (The CAN communication line is open or
from “ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
1212 line
trol unit)” continuously. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004PE
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
dure" .
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004PF
EC-1450
A
System Description BBS004UV
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE: EC
Cooling Fan Control

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

control (Cooling fan relays)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature F
3
Air conditioner switch* Air conditioner ON signal*2

G
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*3: Models with air conditioner
H
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF] (Models with
A/C) or 2-step control [ON/OFF] (Models without A/C).
I
Cooling Fan Operation
Models with A/C
J
MBIB1451E
EC-1451
Models without A/C
MBIB1393E
Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
LO HI
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF
High (HI) OFF ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004UW

the engine ON
OFF
(207°F) or less
● Engine: After warming up, idle Engine coolant temperature is
COOLING FAN the engine between 98°C (208°F) and 99°C LOW*
● Air conditioner switch: OFF (210°F) or more
HIGH*
(212°F) or more
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004UX
is indicated.
EC-1452
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause A
shorted.)
EC
● Cooling fan
● IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)
● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
heat). ● Radiator hose C
● Cooling fan system does not operate properly ● Radiator
P1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat). ● Reservoir tank (M/T models with A/C)
1217 (Overheat) ● Engine coolant was not added to the system Reservoir tank cap (M/T models with
● D
using the proper filling method. A/C)
● Engine coolant is not within the specified ● Radiator cap (M/T models without A/C
range. and A/T models)
E
● Water pump
● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-1465, F
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-39, "Changing Engine G
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-45, "Changing Engine Oil" .
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-26, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio" . H
Overall Function Check BBS004UY
I
firmed.
WARNING: J
Never remove the reservoir tank cap (M/T models with A/C) or the radiator cap (M/T models without A/
C and A/T models) when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid
escaping from the reservoir tank or the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up K
WITH CONSULT-II
L
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-1458, M
EC-1462, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CON-
DITIONER" .
EC-1462, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CON- SEF621W
DITIONER" .
EC-1453
SULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-1458, "PROCEDURE FOR MOD-
ELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER" or EC-1462, "PROCEDURE
FOR MODELS WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONER" .
SEF646X
WITH GST
"PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER" .
"PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER" .
3. Start engine.
CAUTION:
4. Set temperature control switch to full cold position.

CAUTION:
If NG, go to EC-1458, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR
CONDITIONER" .
tor.
12. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector. MBIB0651E
CAUTION:
14. If NG, go to EC-1458, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR
CONDITIONER" .
SEF023R
EC-1454
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. A
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-1462, EC
.
C
.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec- SEF621W
D
tor.
5. Start engine and make that cooling fan operates. Be careful not E
to overheat engine.
6. If NG, go to EC-1462, "PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITHOUT
AIR CONDITIONER" . F
H
SEF023R
EC-1455
Wiring Diagram BBS004UZ
MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER
MBWA1475E
EC-1456
A
EC
MBWA1476E
EC-1457
PROCEDURE FOR MODELS WITH AIR CONDITIONER

1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
"PROCEDURE A" .)
SEF784Z

With CONSULT-II
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low
speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
"PROCEDURE A" .)
SEF785Z
EC-1458
4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC- D
MBIB0651E
F
Without CONSULT-II G
H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. J
SEF023R
L
Refer to CO-27, "ENGINE COOLANT" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Hose
● Radiator
● Reservoir tank
EC-1459
8. CHECK RESERVOIR TANK CAP (M/T MODELS) OR RADIATOR CAP (A/T MODELS)
Refer to CO-35, "Checking Reservoir Tank Cap (M/T with A/C Models)" or CO-34, "Checking Radiator Cap
(All Models Except M/T with A/C)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace reservoir tank cap (M/T models) or radiator cap (A/T models).
9. CHECK THERMOSTAT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

>> INSPECTION END

PROCEDURE A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1307E

EC-1460
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT A
– : Vehicle front
EC
ground. C
D

cooling fan motor terminal 1. E
F
7. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 3, 53 and ground.
G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
I
● Harness for open or short between resistor and IPDM E/R K
● Resistor E62
L
5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-1461
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO4.
"PROCEDURE B" .)
SEF784Z

Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan speed control circuit. (Go to EC-1463,
"PROCEDURE B" .)
SEF023R

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-1462
● Hose
● Radiator EC
C

D
Refer to CO-34, "Checking Radiator Cap (All Models Except M/T with A/C)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. E
7. CHECK THERMOSTAT F
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR H

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 9.
J
K
>> INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE B L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1307E
EC-1463

– : Vehicle front
ground.
5. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminals 3, 53

and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-1464
Main 12 Causes of Overheating BBS004V1
A
● Blocked condenser EC
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-26, "Engine C
in reservoir tank and radi- CHECK" . D
ator filler neck

(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Radiator Cap (All Models E
kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) Except M/T with A/C)" .

4*6 ● Reservoir tank cap ● Pressure tester Reservoir Tank Cap (M/T
cm2 , 12.8psi) with A/C Models)" .
F

CHECK" .
G
"RADIATOR" .
H
DTC P1217 (EC-1458,
"Diagnostic Procedure" ).
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative — I

gauge when driving J
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving See MA-39, "Changing
reservoir tank and idling Engine Coolant" .
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See CO-27, "LEVEL K
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-173, "CYLIN- L
gauge mum distortion (warping) DER HEAD" .
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-189, "CYLIN-
tons walls or piston DER BLOCK" .
M
*5: M/T models without A/C and A/T models.
*6: M/T models with A/C.
EC-1465
Component Inspection BBS004V2
COOLING FAN MOTOR

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
check operation.
Terminals
(+) (-)
MBIB0607E
EC-1466
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
A
Component Description BBS004PO

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004PP

F
P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- ● Electric throttle control actuator
1225 learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2) G
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004PQ
NOTE: H
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
dure" .
L
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1467
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004PR

and the housing.
– : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2974E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation BBS004PS

EC-1468
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
A
Component Description BBS004PT

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004PU

F
P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- ● Electric throttle control actuator
1226 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2) G
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004PV
NOTE: H
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
5. Repeat step 3 and 4 for 32 times.
dure" . L
M
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1469
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004PW

and the housing.
– : Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2974E

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation BBS004PX

EC-1470
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004PY

EC
Trouble diagnosis
name
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.) C
(Throttle position sensor circuit is shorted.)
[Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source for
1229 circuit short sensor is excessively low or high. shorted.] D
● Throttle position sensor
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) E
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up. F
G
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004PZ
H
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: I
WITH CONSULT-II
K
M
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1471
Wiring Diagram BBS004Q0
LHD MODELS
MBWA1477E
EC-1472
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
D
(PHASE)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
E
103 G F
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed H
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
sensor 1
J
K
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed L
EC-1473
RHD MODELS
MBWA1478E
EC-1474
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
D
(PHASE)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
E
103 G F
● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed H
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
sensor 1
J
K
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed L
EC-1475
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004Q1

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

connector (1).
PBIB2975E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J
EC-1476
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 106. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. D

Check the following. E
F
>> Repair open circuit. G

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. H

72 Throttle position sensor terminal 1 EC-1397, "Wiring Diagram" I
78 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 EC-1415, "Wiring Diagram"
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
K
6. CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following. L
● Throttle position sensor (Refer to EC-1400, "Component Inspection" .)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Refer to EC-1418, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-1477
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1478
A
Component Description BBS004Q2
When the shift lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004Q3

C
Shift lever: Except above OFF D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004Q4
E
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) ● Harness or connectors

P1706 (PNP switch circuit is open or shorted.)
Park/neutral position switch switch is not changed in the process of
1706
F
Overall Function Check BBS004Q6
G
WITH CONSULT-II H
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow- I
ing conditions.
N or P position (A/T) J
ON
Except above position OFF
K
SEF212Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II L
and ground under the following conditions. M
Condition (Gear position) Voltage (Known-good data)

P or N position (A/T)
Approx. 0
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except above position
(11 - 14V)

MBIB1397E
EC-1479
Wiring Diagram BBS004Q7
A/T MODELS
MBWA1479E
EC-1480
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(PNP) switch
EC-1481
M/T MODELS
MBWA1480E
EC-1482
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(PNP) switch
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004Q8

E
F
Shift lever position Voltage G
P or N (A/T models)
Battery voltage (11- 14V)
Neutral (M/T models)
Except above position Approximately 0V H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
I
EC-1483
4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 1 (A/T models), 2
(M/T models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MBIB0654E
MBIB0653E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● 10A fuse
EC-1484
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 31 and PNP switch terminal 2 (A/T models), 3 (M/T EC
models). Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. D
NG >> GO TO 5.

F
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and PNP switch
6. CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to AT-109, "Component Inspection" (A/T models) or MT-16, "Park/Neutral Position Switch" (M/T mod- H
els).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. I
NG >> Replace PNP switch.

K
>> INSPECTION END

L
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 3, 54 and ground. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
EC-1485
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-1486
A
Description BBS004Q9
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004QA

C
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004QB
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. E
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ● Harness or connectors F

Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is driv-
1805
FAIL-SAFE MODE BBS004QC

G
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and MI light up.
Engine operation condition in fail-fail safe mode H
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Vehicle condition Driving condition I
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004QD
WITH CONSULT-II
M
PBIB1952E
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Refer to EC-1269, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
EC-1487
Wiring Diagram BBS004QE
MBWA1481E
EC-1488
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF] C
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V) D
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004QF
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT E

F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

– Brake pedal (2)
J
L
PBIB2976E
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M
PBIB2284E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-1489
● 10A fuse
– Brake pedal (2)
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminal 2
and ECM terminal 99.
OK or NG PBIB2976E
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1490
Component Inspection BBS004QG
STOP LAMP SWITCH A

3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. EC
E
PBIB2285E
Condition Continuity F
Brake pedal: Fully released. Should not exist.
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Should exist.
G
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
EC-1491
Component Description BBS004QH

signals.
PBIB1741E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004QI


ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004QJ

NOTE:
shorted.)
(APP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-1492
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004QK
A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
D
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II G
3. Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) with ECM. H
EC-1493
Wiring Diagram BBS004QL
LHD MODELS
MBWA1482E
EC-1494
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
104 B
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
106 O
(APP sensor 1)
H
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground J
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1495
RHD MODELS
MBWA1483E
EC-1496
CAUTION: A
TER- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
104 B
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
106 O
(APP sensor 1)
H
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground J
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004QM

K
M
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1497
connector (1).
PBIB2975E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC-1498
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
F

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
I
J
>> INSPECTION END

L
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS004QN

EC-1499
conditions.

PBIA9572J

Removal and Installation BBS004QO
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-1500
A
Component Description BBS004QP

signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004QQ
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004QR J

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
shorted.) L
is shorted.]
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP shorted.) M
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-1501
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004QS
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1502
Wiring Diagram BBS004QT
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1484E
EC-1503
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1504
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1485E
EC-1505
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1506
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004QU

MBIB1550E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I H

connector (1).
J
K
PBIB2975E

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9607J
EC-1507
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK COMPONENTS
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-1508
● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models) EC
C
D
Continuity should exist. E

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G

● Harness connectors M201, M8 (RHD models) H
I
11. CHECK APP SENSOR J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
L
2. Perform EC-1278, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . M
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004QV

EC-1509
conditions.

PBIA9572J

Removal and Installation BBS004QW
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-1510
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
A
Component Description BBS004QX

PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004QY

F
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN 2* G
H
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004QZ

NOTE: I
If DTC P2135 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P2135 Throttle position sensor shorted.)
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 K
2135 circuit range/performance
and TP sensor 2. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
M
degrees.
EC-1511
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004R0
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1512
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram BBS004R1
EC
MBWA1486E
EC-1513
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004R2

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
EC-1514
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
tor.
: Vehicle front EC
D
PBIB2965E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9580J H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 33, elec-
tric throttle control actuator terminal 3 and ECM terminal 34.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-1515
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004R3

tions.


step.
Removal and Installation BBS004R4

EC-1516
A
Component Description BBS004R5

signals.
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004R6
F
G
ACCEL SEN 1

ACCEL SEN 2*

CLSD THL POS
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004R7 J

NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to K
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
M
is shorted.]
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2138 (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
tion sensor circuit compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
2138 shorted.)
range/performance and APP sensor 2.
EC-1517
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
DTC Confirmation Procedure BBS004R8
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-1518
Wiring Diagram BBS004R9
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1487E
EC-1519
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1520
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1488E
EC-1521
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
sor)
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2)
103 G
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1)
110 W
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
● Idle speed
EC-1522
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004RA

MBIB1550E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H

connector (1).
J
K
PBIB2975E

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9606J

EC-1523
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIA9607J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK COMPONENTS
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
EC-1524
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
E
● Harness connectors M201, M8 (RHD models) F
G
11. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 110 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 103 and
APP sensor terminal 6. I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. K
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L

● Harness connectors M1, E101 (RHD models) M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
EC-1525
4. Perform EC-1277, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" .
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1526
Component Inspection BBS004RB
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR A

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 110 (APP sensor 1 sig- EC
conditions.
C
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V D
sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.4V E
PBIA9572J

F
Removal and Installation BBS004RC G
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
H
EC-1527
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004RG

Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting
ON
switch is in 2nd position.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch
OFF
is OFF.
Heater fan is operating. ON
Heater fan is not operating. OFF
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004RH
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCITION-I

2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0103E

Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II under the following conditions.
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0103E

Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1995E
EC-1528
4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM A
".
EC
>> INSPECTION END
5. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM C

D
>> INSPECTION END
6. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM E

Refer to ATC-26, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (models with automatic air conditioner) or MTC-23, "TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS" (models with manual air conditioner).
F
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1529
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920
Description BBS004RI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


PBIA9215J
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004RJ

PURG VOL C/V (M/T)
2,000 rpm 0 - 50%
● No load
EC-1530
Wiring Diagram BBS004RK
EC
MBWA1496E
EC-1531
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge vol- PBIB0050E

9 LG
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
NOTE:
Voltage and Duty percent may vary.
PBIB0520E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
ECM relay OFF
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-1532
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004RL
With CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose (2) connected to the EVAP
canister (1).
C
– : Vehicle front
– Illustration shows the view from under the vehicle.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. D
MBIB1497E
F
4. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
G
6. Change the valve opening percentage with touching “Qu” or
“Qd” on CONSULT-II screen, and check for vacuum existence at
the EVAP purge hose under the following conditions.
H
Conditions
Vacuum
(PURG VOL CONT/V)
0% Should not exist. I
PBIB0569E
100% Should exist.
Without CONSULT-II J
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose (2) connected to the EVAP
canister (1). K
– : Vehicle front
– Illustration shows the view from under the vehicle.
L
4. Check for vacuum existence at the EVAP purge hose under the
following conditions.
M
Conditions Vacuum
At idle Should not exist. MBIB1497E
Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm Should exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Refer to EC-1260, "EVAP CANISTER" .
OK or NG
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
EC-1533
3. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-1258, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
CUIT
(1) harness connector.
– : Vehicle front
PBIB2972E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0148E

● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
EC-1534
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR- A
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2 and
ECM terminal 9.
OK or NG
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8. E

F
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine. G
valve opening. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8. I
J
PBIB0569E
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
M
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1535
Component Inspection BBS004RM

With CONSULT-II
100% Yes
0% No
PBIA9668J
Without CONSULT-II
Condition
between A and B
Yes
nals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIA9560J
Removal and Installation BBS004RN

EC-1536
FUEL INJECTOR
A
Component Description BBS004RO
engine fuel needs.
D
SEF375Z
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004RP

G
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
(M/T)
H
● No load
EC-1537
FUEL INJECTOR
Wiring Diagram BBS004RQ
MBWA1489E
EC-1538
FUEL INJECTOR
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm E
at idle
PBIB0529E
30 GR Fuel injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE F
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
G
H
PBIA4943J
I
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004RR
1. INSPECTION START
J
Yes or No K
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
L
EC-1539
FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB1986E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-1540
FUEL INJECTOR
– Ignition coil (1) EC
PBIB2968E
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
PBIB0582E

J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse K
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
EC-1541
FUEL INJECTOR
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004RS
FUEL INJECTOR
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation BBS004RT
FUEL INJECTOR
EC-1542
FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP PFP:17042
A
Description BBS004RU
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed*
D
Ignition switch is turned to ON Operates for 1 second F
Engine running and cranking Operates
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds
G
Except as shown above Stops
H
K
MBIB0291E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004RV

ON M
EC-1543
FUEL PUMP
Wiring Diagram BBS004RW
MBWA1490E
EC-1544
FUEL PUMP
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON
E
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004RX

G
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel
feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned
ON. H
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. I
PBIB2978E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I J


OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIA9573J
EC-1545
FUEL PUMP
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
5. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

nector.
MBIB0288E
5. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB3004E
EC-1546
FUEL PUMP
6. CHECK 15A FUSE A
3. Check 15A fuse. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse. C
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

D
nal 1. E
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 8. G

H
● Harness or connectors M1, E101
● Harness or connectors M72, B21 I
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair harness or connectors. J
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT

K
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
EC-1547
FUEL PUMP
Component Inspection BBS004RY
FUEL PUMP
terminals 1 and 3.
MBIB0311E
Removal and Installation BBS004RZ
FUEL PUMP
EC-1548
HO2S1
HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description BBS004S0

D
SEF463R
H
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004S1 I

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
10 seconds.
EC-1549
HO2S1
Wiring Diagram BBS004S2
MBWA1497E
EC-1550
HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 10V
3 Y E
heater
PBIA8148J

[Engine is running]
G
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I
EC-1551
HO2S1
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004S3

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
sure that the monitors fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more
than five times in 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN →RICH
SEF820Y
Without CONSULT-II
3. Set ECM in Diagnostic test mode - II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
Refer to EC-1269, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
sure that the MI comes ON more than five times in 10 seconds.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
SAT652J

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-1552
HO2S1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
● : Vehicle front
EC
C
>> GO TO 4.
D
PBIB2966E
4. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK E

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
F
I
SEC502D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. J
5. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. L
6. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M

– : Vehicle front
terminal 1.
OK or NG PBIB2967E
OK >> GO TO 7.
EC-1553
HO2S1
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK PCV VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1554
HO2S1
Component Inspection BBS004S4

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
D
SEF646Y
F
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.

I
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
M
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
EC-1555
HO2S1
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V PBIA9566J
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS004S5

EC-1556
HO2S1 HEATER
HO2S1 HEATER PFP:22690
A
Description BBS004S6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 1
Engine coolant tempera- heater control C
Engine coolant temperature sensor
ture
speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine D
is started.
OPERATION
E
Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after warming up ON F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004S7

ON H
O2SEN HTR DTY Approx. 30% I
EC-1557
HO2S1 HEATER
Wiring Diagram BBS004S8
MBWA1497E
EC-1558
HO2S1 HEATER
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
Approximately 10V
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm.
3 Y E
heater
PBIA8148J

● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm.
[Engine is running]
G
H
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I
EC-1559
HO2S1 HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004S9

4. Set tester prove between ECM terminal 3 (HO2S1 heater signal) and ground.
shown below.
Conditions Voltage
Approximately 7.0V
At idle
MBIB1394E
PBIB0519E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-1560
HO2S1 HEATER
– : Vehicle front
EC
D
MBIB1340E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. G
PBIA9576J
H

I
● 10A fuse
K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
EC-1561
HO2S1 HEATER
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004SA

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω

CAUTION:
PBIA9577J
Removal and Installation BBS004SB

EC-1562
HO2S2
HO2S2 PFP:226A0
A
Component Description BBS004SC

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
tions.
SEF327R
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004SD

● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following condi- 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1)
tions are met. 1.0V
– Engine: After warming up. G
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) – Keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute LEAN ←→ RICH
H
EC-1563
HO2S2
Wiring Diagram BBS004SE
MBWA1498E
EC-1564
HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
tions are met. D
5 GR E

[Engine is running]
G
50 B Heated oxygen sensor 2 – Engine: After warming up. 0 - Approximately 1.0V H
– Keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed J
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004SF

K
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION - I
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. L
M
6. Check the voltage while revving engine up to 4,000 rpm under
no load at least 10 times.
(Depress and release the accelerator pedal as quickly as possi-
ble.)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3000E
EC-1565
HO2S2
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION - II
Keep engine at idle for 10 minutes, then check the voltage between ECM terminal 50 (HO2S2 signal) and
ground, or check the voltage when coasting at 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position with OD “OFF” (A/T), 3rd gear
position (M/T).
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

terminal 59.
OK or NG PBIB2949E
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-1566
HO2S2
1. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 ECM terminal 50.
EC
C
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

I
Component Inspection BBS004SG

With CONSULT-II J
SEF662Y
EC-1567
HO2S2
PBIB0551E
CAUTION:
Without CONSULT-II
at least 10 times.
procedure.
sary.
procedure.
CAUTION:
Removal and Installation BBS004SH

EC-1568
HO2S2 HEATER
HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
A
Description BBS004SI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2 C
Engine coolant tempera- Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor heater control
ture
D
OPERATION E
Above 3,600 rpm OFF
F
ON
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004SJ
H
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF I
HO2S2 HTR (B1) – Engine: After warming up
ON
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute J
EC-1569
HO2S2 HEATER
Wiring Diagram BBS004SK
MBWA1498E
EC-1570
HO2S2 HEATER
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
C
lowing conditions are met. D
5 GR E

● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm.
[Engine is running]
G
minute under no load I
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed J
EC-1571
HO2S2 HEATER
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004SL

5. Set tester proves between ECM terminal 5 (HO2S2 heater signal) and ground.
shown below.
Conditions Voltage
Approximately 10V
At idle
MBIB1395E
PBIA8148J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-1572
HO2S2 HEATER
– Heated oxygen sensor 2 (1).
D
PBIB2949E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. G
PBIA9576J
H

I
● 10A fuse
K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
EC-1573
HO2S2 HEATER
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004SM

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω

CAUTION:
PBIA9577J
Removal and Installation BBS004SN

EC-1574
IAT SENSOR
IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description BBS004SO
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal EC
to the ECM.
PBIA9559J
E
<Reference data>
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359 G
CAUTION: H
EC-1575
IAT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram BBS004SP
MBWA1499E
EC-1576
IAT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004SQ

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 46 and ground with CON- EC
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 0 - 4.8V
C
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. D
MBIB1396E
E

F
G
J
MBIB1550E
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
L
EC-1577
IAT SENSOR
– : Vehicle front
PBIB2948E
4. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1169E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1578
IAT SENSOR
Component Inspection BBS004SR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5
and 6 under the following conditions.
EC
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature C
sensor).
D
PBIA9559J
SEF012P
H
Removal and Installation BBS004SS
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I

EC-1579
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description BBS004ST

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
coil (1) primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper
high voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
● Fuel injector (2)
PBIB2968E
EC-1580
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram BBS004SU
EC
MBWA1491E
EC-1581
IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
32 P
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-1582
IGNITION SIGNAL
EC
MBWA1492E
EC-1583
IGNITION SIGNAL
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.3V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
17 V Ignition signal No. 1 at idle
PBIA9265J
0.2 - 0.5V
[Engine is running]
PBIA9266J
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004SV

Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
speed drop.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0133E
EC-1584
IGNITION SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
EC
shown below. C
NOTE:
D
E
PBIA9567J
PBIA9265J
OK or NG F
NG >> GO TO 10.
G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-1337, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- J
CUIT" .
K
PBIA9575J
EC-1585
IGNITION SIGNAL
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect condenser (1) harness connector.
– : Vehicle front
MBIB1548E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 33 and condenser terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-1337, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
NG >> GO TO 7.

EC-1586
IGNITION SIGNAL
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D
9. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-1588, "Component Inspection" E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser. F
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

G
3. Disconnect ignition coil (1) harness connector. H
– Fuel injector (2)
I
PBIB2968E K

L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
SEF107S

● Harness connector F1
● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F1
EC-1587
IGNITION SIGNAL
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004SW

CAUTION:
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
EC-1588
IGNITION SIGNAL
NOTE: A
8. Start engine. EC
pressure.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be D

checked.
14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. E
as shown in the figure. F
portion. G
CAUTION:
H
becomes 20kV or more. I
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. J
CONDENSER
K
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. L
PBIB0794E
Removal and Installation BBS004SX

EC-1589
Component Description BBS004SY

the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
● : Vehicle front
PBIB2980E
PBIB2657E
EC-1590
Wiring Diagram BBS004SZ
EC
MBWA1493E
EC-1591
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Sensor power supply
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004T0

SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIA9574J

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
MBIB1550E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-1592
3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
– : Vehicle front
EC
D
PBIB2980E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. G
SEF479Y
H

I
● Harness for open or short between refrigerant pressure sensor and ECM J
K
L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-1593
7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.


OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
Removal and Installation BBS004T1

EC-1594
VSS
VSS PFP:32702
A
Description BBS004T2
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communi- EC
cation line.
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004T3
1. INSPECTION START C

Yes or No D
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
E
F
2. Lift up the vehicle.
4. Select “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with G
CONSULT-II.
5. Select “VHCL SPEED SE” indication when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position. H
“VHCL SPEED SE” indication should
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH).
OK or NG I
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0164E J
Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-49, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace. L
4. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION

M
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1595
Wiring Diagram BBS004T4
MBWA1494E
EC-1596
A
Fuel Pressure BBS004T5
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing BBS004T6
A/T No load* (in P or N position) 700 ± 50 rpm

Target idle speed C
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) 650 ± 50 rpm
A/T In P or N position 700 rpm or more
Air conditioner: ON
M/T In Neutral position 750 rpm or more D
A/T In P or N position
Ignition timing 6 ± 5° BTDC
M/T In Neutral position
E
F
Mass Air Flow Sensor BBS004T7
G
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle 1.0 - 1.3*V
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load. H
Intake Air Temperature Sensor BBS004T8
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ I

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 0.283 - 0.359
J
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor BBS004T9

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
K
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 L
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Approximately 530 – 590kΩ M

Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater BBS004TA
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater BBS004TB
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) BBS004TC

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) BBS004TD

Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve BBS00588
EC-1597
Throttle Control Motor BBS004TE
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Fuel Injector BBS004TF
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.5Ω
Fuel Pump BBS004TG
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω
EC-1598
INDEX FOR DTC
[K9K]
INDEX FOR DTC
[K9K] PFP:00024
A
DTC No. Index BBS003ZX
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
Items MI lighting up EC
DTC*1 *2 (CONSULT-II screen item)
Trip Reference page
Red Yellow
PC001 MULTIPLXD NETWORK 3 × EC-1705
P0016 COHERENCE CMSFT/SN 3 EC-1708
C
P0045 TURBO ACT CIRC 3 × EC-1710

P0070 AIR TEMP SEN CIRC 3 EC-1715 D
P0087 FLOW CAPACITY 3 × EC-1719
P0089 RAIL PRESS REGULTN 3 × EC-1721
P0100 AIR FLOW SEN CIRC 3 EC-1722 E
P0115 WATER TMP SEN CIRC 3 EC-1727
P0170 INJECTOR CODE PROG 3 EC-1731
F
P0180 FUEL TEMP SEN CIRC 3 EC-1732
P0190 RAIL/PRESS SEN CIR 3 × EC-1736
P0200 INJECTOR CTRL CIRC 3 × EC-1740 G
P0201 CYL 1 INJ CTRL CIR 3 × × EC-1745
H
P0225 PDL POTEN CIRC TK1 3 × EC-1751 I
P0231 L/PR ACTR CTRL CIR 3 × EC-1759
P0235 IN-MANI PRES CIRC 3 × EC-1763
J
P0263 MISFIRE ON CYL 1 3 × EC-1768
P0269 MISFIRE ON CYL 3 3 × EC-1768 K
P0325 ACCELEROMETER CIRC 3 EC-1770
P0335 ENGNE SPD SEN CIRC 3 × EC-1774 L
P0340 CAMSHAFT SEN CIRC 3 EC-1778
P0380 PRHT DGNSTC CNECT 3 EC-1784
M
P0382 PRHT UNIT CTRL CIR 3 EC-1788
P0400 EGR SOL/VLV CIRC 3 × × EC-1791
P0403 EGR COMMAND CIRC 3 × × EC-1795
P0409 EGR POIFTN SEN CIR 3 EC-1800
P0487 EGR POSITN OFFSET 3 × EC-1805
P0500 VEHL/SPD INF CIRC 3 EC-1810
P0513 ENGINE IMMOBILIZER 3 BL-215
P0530 REFRIGERNT SEN CIR 3 EC-1811
P0560 CPU SUPPLY VOLTAGE 3 × EC-1816
P0571 BRAKE SWITCH CIRC 3 EC-1820
P0604 ECU MEMORY 3 × EC-1825
P0606 COMPUTER(C/U) 3 × EC-1826
P062F MEMORY SAVED 3 × × EC-1828
EC-1599
INDEX FOR DTC
[K9K]
Items MI lighting up
DTC*1 *2 (CONSULT-II screen item)
Trip Reference page
Red Yellow
P0641 SEN SUPPLY N-1 VOL 3 × EC-1830
P0651 SEN SUPPLY N-2 VOL 3 × EC-1837
P0685 MAIN RLY CTRL CIRC 3 EC-1845
P0703 BRAKE INFORMATION 3 EC-1850
P2120 PDL POTEN CIRC TK2 3 × EC-1855
P2226 ATMOS PRES ASE CIR 3 EC-1863
*1: 1st trip DTC No. and 2nd trip DTC No. are the same as DTC No.
EC-1600
INDEX FOR DTC
[K9K]
Alphabetical Index BBS003ZW
X: Applicable —: Not applicable A
Items MI lighting up Reference page

(CONSULT-II screen item) DTC*1 *2 Trip
Red Yellow
EC
ACCELEROMETER CIRC P0325 3 EC-1770
AIR FLOW SEN CIRC P0100 3 EC-1722
AIR TEMP SEN CIRC P0070 3 EC-1715 C
ATMOS PRES ASE CIR P2226 3 EC-1863
BRAKE INFORMATION P0703 3 EC-1850
D
BRAKE SWITCH CIRC P0571 3 EC-1820
CAMSHAFT SEN CIRC P0340 3 EC-1778
COHERENCE CMSFT/SN P0016 3 EC-1708 E
COMPUTER(C/U) P0606 3 × EC-1826
CPU SUPPLY VOLTAGE P0560 3 × EC-1816
F
CYL 1 INJ CTRL CIR P0201 3 × × EC-1745
CYL 3 INJ CTRL CIR P0203 3 × × EC-1745 G
ECU MEMORY P0604 3 × EC-1825
EGR COMMAND CIRC P0403 3 × × EC-1795
H
EGR POIFTN SEN CIR P0409 3 EC-1800
EGR POSITN OFFSET P0487 3 × EC-1805
I
EGR SOL/VLV CIRC P0400 3 × × EC-1791
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER P0513 3 BL-215
ENGNE SPD SEN CIRC P0335 3 × EC-1774 J
FLOW CAPACITY P0087 3 × EC-1719
FUEL TEMP SEN CIRC P0180 3 EC-1732
K
INJECTOR CODE PROG P0170 3 EC-1731
INJECTOR CTRL CIRC P0200 3 × EC-1740
IN-MANI PRES CIRC P0235 3 × EC-1763 L
L/PR ACTR CTRL CIR P0231 3 × EC-1759
MAIN RLY CTRL CIRC P0685 3 EC-1845
M
MEMORY SAVED P062F 3 × × EC-1828
MISFIRE ON CYL 1 P0263 3 × EC-1768
MULTIPLXD NETWORK PC001 3 × EC-1705
PDL POTEN CIRC TK1 P0225 3 × EC-1751
PDL POTEN CIRC TK2 P2120 3 × EC-1855
PRHT DGNSTC CNECT P0380 3 EC-1784
PRHT UNIT CTRL CIR P0382 3 EC-1788
RAIL PRESS REGULTN P0089 3 × EC-1721
RAIL/PRESS SEN CIR P0190 3 × EC-1736
REFRIGERNT SEN CIR P0530 3 × EC-1811
EC-1601
INDEX FOR DTC
[K9K]
Items MI lighting up Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen item) DTC*1 *2 Trip
Red Yellow
SEN SUPPLY N-1 VOL P0641 3 × EC-1830
SEN SUPPLY N-2 VOL P0651 3 × EC-1837
TURBO ACT CIRC P0045 3 × EC-1710
VEHL/SPD INF CIRC P0500 3 × EC-1810
WATER TMP SEN CIRC P0115 3 × EC-1727
*1: 1st trip DTC No. and 2nd trip DTC No. are the same as DTC No.
EC-1602
PRECAUTIONS
[K9K]
A
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” BBS003ZY
WARNING:
Maintenance Information BBS005AU

RHD MODELS H
● ECM I
● IPDM E/R
J
LHD MODELS
● ECM
L
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine BBS003ZZ
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery negative cable before any
EC-1603
PRECAUTIONS
[K9K]
NESS CONNECTOR" .
may cause the MI to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM
Precautions BBS00400

running.
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
negative cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
disconnect battery negative cable.
SEF289H
MBIB1517E
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (A) it

securely with levers (1) as far as they will go as shown in
the figure.
– ECM (2)
– Loosen (B)
MBIB1518E
EC-1604
PRECAUTIONS
[K9K]
break).
EC
damage to IC's. C
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- SEF291H

operation of IC's, etc.
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. E
● Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents. F
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor, crankshaft position sensor.
G
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ H
the ground. I
● Do not disassemble fuel pump.
If NG, take proper action.
● Do not disassemble fuel injector. J
If NG, replace fuel injector.
M
SEF348N
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when staring.

● Immediately after staring, do not rev up engine unnecessar-
ily.
SEF709Y
EC-1605
PRECAUTIONS
[K9K]
control units.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave
radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
Cleanliness BBS004TI
CLEANLINESS INSTRUCTIONS WHICH MUST BE FOLLOWED WHEN WORKING ON THE

HIGH PRESSURE DIRECT INJECTION SYSTEM
Risks Relating to Contamination
The system is very sensitive to contamination. The risks caused by the introduction of contamination are:
● Damage or destruction of the high pressure injection system and the engine
● Seizing or leaking of a component
All After-Sales operations must be performed under very clean conditions. This means that no impurities (par-
ticles a few microns in size) get into the system during dismantling or into the circuits via the fuel unions.
The cleanliness principle must be applied from the filter to the fuel injectors.
WHAT ARE THE SOURCES OF CONTAMINATION?
Contamination is caused by:
● Metal or plastic chips
● Paint
● fibres:
– Boxes
– Brushes
– Paper
– Clothing
– Cloths
● Foreign bodies such as hair
● Ambient air
● etc
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to clean the engine using a high pressure washer because of the risk of dam-
aging connections. In addition, moisture may collect in the connectors and create electrical connection mal-
functions.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED BEFORE ANY WORK IS CARRIED OUT ON THE INJEC-
TION SYSTEM
● Ensure that you have the plugs for the unions to be opened (bag of plugs sold at the Parts Store - Nissan
part No.: 16830 BN700, Renault part No.: 77 01 206 804). Plugs are to be used once only. After use, they
must be thrown away (once used they are soiled and cleaning is not sufficient to make them reusable).
Unused plugs must be thrown away.
● Ensure that you have hermetically resealable plastic bags for storing removed parts. Stored parts will
therefore be less subject to the risk of impurities. The bags must be used only once, and after use they
must be thrown away.
● Lint-free towelettes to be used for injection pump related service purpose. The use of a normal cloth or
paper for cleaning purposes is forbidden. These are not lint-free and may contaminate the fuel circuit of
the system. Each lint-free cloth should only be used once.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED BEFORE OPENING THE FUEL CIRCUIT
● For each operation, use new thinner (used thinner contains impurities). Pour it into a clean receptacle.
● For each operation, use a clean brush which is in good condition (the brush must not shed its bristles).
EC-1606
PRECAUTIONS
[K9K]
● Use a brush and thinners to clean the connections to be opened.
● Blow compressed air over the cleaned parts (tools, cleaned the same way as the parts, connections and A
injection system zone). Check that no bristles remain adhered.
● Wash your hands before and during the operation if necessary.
● When wearing leather protective gloves, cover these with latex gloves. EC
INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED DURING THE OPERATION

● As soon as the circuit is open, all openings must be plugged to prevent impurities from entering the sys- C
tem. The plugs to be used are available from the Parts Stores - Nissan part No.: 16830 BN700, Renault
part No.: 77 01 206 804. They must not, under any circumstances, be reused.
● Close the hermetically sealed bag, even if it has to be reopened shortly afterwards. Ambient air carries
D
contamination.
● All components of the injection system that are removed must be stored in a hermetically sealed plastic
bag once the plugs have been inserted.
E
● The use of a brush, thinner, bellows, sponge or normal cloth is strictly forbidden once the circuit has been
opened. These items are likely to allow impurities to enter the system.
● A new component replacing an old one must not be removed from its packaging until it is to be fitted to the
vehicle. F
EC-1607
PRECAUTIONS
[K9K]
Instructions for Fitting The Plugs
Nissan part number: 16830 BN700
(Renault part number: 77 01 206 804)
MBIB0321E
CAUTION:
● The engine must not run with:
– Diesel containing more than 10% diester
– Gasoline, even in very small amounts.
● The system can inject the fuel into the engine at a pressure of up to 140,000 kPa (1,400 bar, 1,428
kg/cm2 , 20,300 psi). Before carrying out any work, check that the fuel rail is no longer pressurized
and that the fuel temperature is not too high.
● You must respect the cleaning and safety advice specified in this document for any work on the
high pressure injection system.
EC-1608
[K9K]
A
System Diagram BBS00403
EC
MBIB1473E
EC-1609
[K9K]
1. ECM 2. EGR volume control valve 3. Fuel rail pressure sensor
4. Fuel rail 5. Fuel pump temperature sensor 6. Fuel flow actuator (Fuel pressure
regulator)
7. Turbocharger boost sensor (63 kW 8. Charge air cooler 9. Fuel pump
engine models only)
10. Engine coolant temperature sensor 11. Crankshaft position sensor 12. Mass air flow sensor and intake air
temperature sensor
13. Air cleaner 14. Stop lamp switch 15. Accelerator pedal position sensor
16. Turbocharger 17. Turbocharger boost control actuator 18. Turbocharger boost control sole-
noid valve (63 kW engine models
only)
19. Vacuum side 20. Ambient side 21. Glow control unit
22. Exhaust gas 23. Catalyst 24. Camshaft position sensor
25. Battery 26. Ignition switch 27. Mlfunction indicator
28. Glow lamp 29. Glow plug 30. Fuel injector
31. Fuel return 32. EGR cooler 33. CAN communication
34. Intake mamifold
EC-1610
[K9K]
Vacuum Hose Drawing BBS00404
EC
MBIB1474E
1. Cylinder head 2. Turbocharger boost control 3. Vacuum pump

solenoid valve
4. Turbocharger 5. Turbocharger boost control actuator
NOTE: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose.
EC-1611
[K9K]
System Overview BBS004TJ
The DCM1.2 injection system used on the K9K engine is an electronically-controlled high-pressure injection
system. The fuel is compressed by a high-pressure pump and then stored in a fuel rail that feeds the fuel injec-
tors. Injection takes place when a current pulse applied to the fuel injector holder. The injection delivery is pro-
portional to the fuel rail pressure and the length of pulse applied, and the start of injection is synchronised with
the start of the pulse.
The circuit comprises two sub-systems that can be distinguished from one another by the pressure level of the
fuel:
● The low-pressure circuit comprises the reservoir, the fuel filter, the transfer pump and the fuel injector
holder return pipes
● The high-pressure circuit consists of the high-pressure pump, the fuel rail, the fuel injector holders and the
high-pressure tubes
Finally, there are a certain number of regulation sensors and actuators that allow command and control of the
system as a whole.
Fuel Injection Control BBS004TL
The high pressure injection system is intended to deliver a specific quantity of fuel to the engine at a specific
time.
● DELPHI DCM1.2 Common Rail injection system
Refer to EC-1609, "System Diagram" for details.
● The system consists of:
– Priming pump on the low pressure circuit
– Fuel filter
– High pressure pump incorporating a low pressure pump (transfer pump)
– Flow actuator (fuel pressure regulator) attached to the fuel pump
– Fuel rail
– Fuel rail pressure sensor located in the fuel rail
– Four fuel injectors
– Fuel pump temperature sensor
– Engine coolant temperature sensor
– Intake air temperature sensor
– Camshaft position sensor (cylinder reference sensor)
– Turbocharger boost sensor
– Knock sensor
– EGR volume control valve
– Accelerator pedal position sensor
– ECM
● The “common rail” direct high pressure injection system works sequentially.
● This new injection system reduces operating noise, reduces the volume of pollutant gases and particles
and produces high engine torque at low engine speeds thanks to a pre-injection procedure.
● The high pressure pump generates the high pressure sent to the fuel rail. The flow actuator on the pump
controls the quantity of fuel supplied according to the demand determined by the ECM. The fuel rail sup-
plies each fuel injector through a steel pipe.
● The ECM:
– Determines the value of injection pressure necessary for the engine to operate well and then controls the
pressure regulator. It checks that the pressure value is correct by analyzing the value transmitted by the
fuel rail pressure sensor located on the fuel rail.
– Determines the injection time necessary to deliver the right quantity of fuel and the moment when injection
should be started.
– Controls each fuel injector electrically and individually after determining these two values.
● The injected flow to the engine is determined by:
– The duration of fuel injector control
EC-1612
[K9K]
– The fuel injector opening and closing speed
– The needle travel (determined by a constant for the type of fuel injector) A
– The nominal hydraulic flow of the fuel injector (unique to each fuel injector)
– The fuel rail pressure controlled by the ECM
EC
● The ECM controls:
– The idle speed adjustment
– The exhaust gas flow reinjected into the intake manifold C
– The fuel supply control (advance, flow and fuel rail pressure)
– The cooling fan control
– The glow plug (pre/post heating) control D
● The high pressure pump is supplied at low pressure by an integrated low pressure pump (transfer pump).
It supplies the fuel rail whose pressure is controlled for charge by the flow actuator and for discharging by
the fuel injector valves. Falls in pressure can be compensated for in this way. The flow actuator allows the E
high pressure pump to provide just the amount of fuel necessary to maintain the pressure in the fuel rail.
Thanks to this element, heat generation is minimized and engine output improved.
In order to discharge the fuel rail using the fuel injector valves, the valves are controlled by short electrical
impulses: F
– Short enough not to open the fuel injector, (through the return circuit from the fuel injectors)
– Long enough to open the valves and discharge the fuel rail
G
● The ECM controls the cooling fans and the engine coolant temperature warning light on the instrument
panel.
IMPORTANT H
● The engine must not operate with:
– Fuel containing more than 10% diester
– Gasoline, even in tiny quantities I
● The system can inject the fuel into the engine at a pressure up to 1400 bars. Before carrying out any work,
check that the fuel rail is not under pressure and that the fuel temperature is not too high.
● You must respect the cleaning and safety advice specified in this document for any work on the high pres- J
sure injection system.
● Removal of the interior of the pump and fuel injectors is prohibited. Only the flow actuator, the fuel pump
temperature sensor and the venturi can be replaced. K
● For safety reasons, it is strictly forbidden to slacken a high pressure pipe union when the engine is run-
ning.
● It is not possible to remove the fuel rail pressure sensor from the fuel rail because this may cause circuit L
contamination malfunctions. If the fuel rail pressure sensor fails, the fuel rail pressure sensor, the fuel rail
and the five high pressure pipes must be replaced.
● It is strictly forbidden to remove any injection pump pulley marked number 070 575. If the pump is being M
replaced, the pulley must be replaced.
● It is forbidden to repair the wiring connecting the knock sensor and the crankshaft positon sensor. If the
wiring should malfunction, it has to be replaced with new wiring.
● Applying 12V directly to any component in the system is prohibited.
● Ultrasonic carbon removal and cleaning are prohibited.
● Never start the engine without the battery being connected correctly.
● Disconnect the injection system ECM when carrying out any welding work on the vehicle.
● It is essential to replace all the disconnected air intake plastic pipes.
Functions Performed BBS004TK
Function: Fuel supply management (advance, delivery and pressure).

Quantity of fuel injected and regulation of injection advance.
The injection control parameters are the quantities to be injected and their respective advances.
These are calculated by the ECM on the basis of information from the following signals:
● Engine speed (crankshaft + cam for synchronisation)
● Accelerator pedal position
EC-1613
[K9K]
● Charge air pressure
● Intake air temperature
● Charge air pressure
● Engine coolant temperature
● Fuel rail pressure
● Ambient barometric pressure
The quantities to be injected and their respective advances are converted into:
● Reference tooth
● Time between this tooth and the start of the pulse
● Time for which the fuel injector holder is fed
An electrical current (pulse) is sent to each fuel injector holder as a function of the previously calculated data.
The system performs between one and four injections (a pilot injection, a pre-injection, a main injection and a
post-injection). The general principle is to calculate a total delivery injected which will then be distributed
across the deliveries of the various injections to promote efficient combustion and a reduction in pollutant
emissions.
A knock sensor is used to control some of the deviations when the fuel is injected. This plays a number of
roles:
● Protection of the engine by detecting injection losses (disabled on the basic version)
● Checking of the pilot quantity by measurement of the deviations and dispersions
By modifying the duration on the one hand and the injection advance on the other, it is possible to readjust the
quantity of fuel injected and the instant of ignition of the mixture.
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE CONTROL
The quality of combustion is influenced by the size of the droplets atomised in the cylinder. In the combustion
chamber, smaller drops of fuel will have time to burn completely and not produce smoke or nonburned parti-
cles. To meet anti-pollution requirements it is necessary to reduce the size of the droplets and thus the injec-
tion holes.
The smaller these holes are, the less fuel can be introduced at a given pressure which limits the power. To
overcome this malfunction it is necessary to increase the quantity of fuel injected which in practice means
increasing the pressure (and the number of openings of the fuel injector nozzles). In the case of the Delphi
Common Rail, the pressure can reach 1600 bar in the fuel rail and must be permanently controlled. The mea-
surement circuit is comprised an active fuel rail pressure sensor on the fuel rail linked to an analogue port of
the ECM.
The high-pressure pump is fed at low pressure (5 bar) by an integral transfer pump. This feeds the fuel rail, the
pressure of which is controlled for the charging by the fuel flow actuator (fuel pressure regulator) and for dis-
charge by the fuel injector. This allows drops in pressure to be compensated. The fuel flow actuator (fuel pres-
sure regulator) allows the high-pressure pump to only supply the quantity of fuel necessary to maintain the
pressure in the fuel rail. Thanks to this device, the generation of heat is minimised and the efficiency of the
engine is improved.
In order to discharge the fuel rail using the fuel injectors, the fuel injectors are operated by means of small
electrical pulses:
● Sufficiently small not to open the fuel injector (the fuel passes through the return circuit from the fuel injec-
tors)
● Sufficiently long to open the valves and discharge the fuel rail
Surplus fuel is fed back to the fuel filter or to the reservoir according to its delivery. In the event of non-actua-
tion of the fuel flow actuator (fuel pressure regulator), the pressure in the fuel rail is limited by a pressure relief
valve fitted on the pump.
IDLING CONTROL
The ECM is responsible for idling control. In practice it has to take into account the instantaneous power level
to be delivered as a function of the following elements:
EC-1614
[K9K]
● Gear ratio selected
● Battery charge A
● Whether electrical loads (additional heating, climate control, engine ventilator set, rear window defogger,
etc.) are on or off
● System malfunctions detected EC
INDIVIDUAL FUEL INJECTOR CORRECTION

The fuel injectors of the DCM1.2 system must be calibrated with fuel injector adjusting values in order to accu- C
rately set their delivery. Calibration of each fuel injector is performed for various pressures on a test bed and
the characteristics are shown on a label attached to the fuel injector holder body. These fuel injector adjusting
values are then entered in the ECM memory thereby allowing it to operate the fuel injectors taking into account
their manufacturing variance. D
MEASUREMENT OF THE ANGULAR POSITION

Crankshaft position sensor (CKPS): E
Measurement of the angular position is performed by means of a magneto-inductive sensor that is excited by
machined into the flywheel of the crankshaft. This flywheel comprises sixty teeth with a spacing of six degrees,
less two missing teeth to form a notch.
Camshaft position sensor (CMPS): F
A second sensor (Hall effect) excited by a tooth machined in the drive pulley of the high-pressure pump (in
synch with the camshaft), rotates at half the speed of the engine and provides information on the operation of
the injection cycle. G
By comparing the signals from these two sensors, the angular position subsystem (APS) of the ECM is capa-
ble of providing the system as a whole with the following synchronisation information: the angular position of
the flywheel, the speed, the number of the active fuel injector and the advance in the injection cycle.
This module also provides the system with information on the speed of rotation. H
NEW PUMP HOUSING FUEL FLOW STRATEGY (PUMP FUEL FLOW)

Lubrication of the pump is by means of a fuel flow cycle during which the pump is filled and comes up to pres- I
sure before transferring the fuel to the fuel rail.
This lubrication is performed using a strategy known as “new pump housing fuel flow” which prevents starting
for around 10 seconds, which is the time needed for filling of the pump and starting.
For vehicles equipped with keys, if the key is released before this “first start-up” phase it is not necessary to J
perform a power latch before proceeding to restart the vehicle.
This strategy applies following an initial start-up in the factory and then whenever there is a change of ECM if
the fuel rail pressure parameters are not copied over to the new ECM, or also following reprogramming of the K
ECM.
VARIABLE LOW CAPACITY (VLC) FUNCTION
Due to the combination of a number of parameters such as the temperature of the fuel, wear of parts, clogging L
of the fuel filter, and so on, the system′s limit may be reached during its lifetime. In this case, the pressure in
the fuel rail cannot be maintained because of a lack of capacity of the pump. In the event of a lack of pump
capacity, therefore, this strategy will reduce the delivery required to a value that allows the pressure controller M
to re-check the pressure.
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OPERATION
The EGR system (exhaust gas recirculation) is comprised a direct current proportional EGR volume control
valve with integral potentiometer to read the position of the valve. The EGR volume control position is con-
trolled in a closed circuit via the potentiometer and/or the change in the estimated air deliver
AIR DELIVERY CALCULATION
The delivery of fresh air that enters the engine is indicated by a mass air flow sensor. This mass air flow sen-
sor allows management of the quantity of exhaust gas to be recirculated in order to guarantee the best recircu-
lation rates. An intake air temperature sensor is incorporated in the mass air flow sensor.
Measurement of the air delivery allows closed-circuit control via the EGR volume control valve.
TURBO CONTROL
K9K 63kw Engine:
The turbo system is comprised a solenoid valve that allows control of the waste gate in order to create a boost
pressure or a depression in the admission circuit.
EC-1615
[K9K]
K9K 50kw Engine:
The turbo system is self-regulating and does not need to be controlled by the ECM.
FUNCTION: STORED FUNCTIONS
Climate Control Management Assistance
With climate controlled models, the DCM1.2 system offers the possibility of deactivating the air conditioning
under certain usage conditions:
● Intentional interruption by the driver
● During the start-up phases
● In the event of overheating (in order to reduce the power to be supplied by the engine)
● When the speed is maintained at a very high level (protection of the compressor)
● For temporary periods (such as strong acceleration demands during overtaking, anti-stalling and moving
off). These conditions are only taken into account where they occur repeatedly, in order to avoid instability
of the system (untimely deactivations)
● When certain malfunctions arise
Cold Loop Climate Control
The climate control is the cold loop type and its management shared between a number of control units. The
ECM is responsible for:
● Managing the demand for cold as a function of the controls in the passenger compartment and the pres-
sure value
● Determining the power absorbed by the compressor from the pressure
● Determining the engine ventilator set commands as a function of the speed of the vehicle and the pres-
sure
The driver turns on the climate control from the instrument panel. The information is sent to the ECM via the
CAN system. This demand for cold is authorised or declined as a function of the measured pressure. If this
pressure is outside the operational limits, the cold loop strategy is not activated.
NOTE:
These demands for operation of the air cooling set can be made from the ECM but they pass via the CAN.
These demands are a function of the climate control, but also the engine coolant temperature and the speed
of the vehicle.
Passenger Compartment Climate Control
A direct injection engine is characterised by injection of the fuel directly into the combustion chamber. The
result is a reduction in heat losses from the upper part of the engine and consequently a smaller cylinder head
cooling circuit is needed.
The effect of this reduction is that the temperature of the water passing through is increased more slowly. This
water is then used by the passenger compartment heating system. During severe cold spells, therefore, it
becomes difficult to quickly reach a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment.
In order to limit the heating delay, air heating resistors are incorporated in the passenger compartment heating
circuit. The passenger compartment heating unit determines the need to operate the heating resistors, the
IPDM E/R physically controls the heating resistors and the ECM determines on the one hand as a function of
the alternator the operational power limits of the heating resistors and on the other when to disable the heating
resistors as a function of the engine speed, the load and the speed of the vehicle.
Idle Speed Control BBS004TM
The ECM takes over calculation of the idle speed to maintain the idle speed at the recommended level and to
compensate for any variation in the mechanical or electrical couple as regards:
● Battery voltage
● Gear selected on the transmission
● Electrical loads (climate control system, cooling fan assembly etc.)
● Any malfunctions found
At the normal operating temperature, without high electrical load, the idle speed is 800 ± 50 rpm.
EC-1616
[K9K]
IDLE SPEED CORRECTION ACCORDING TO ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
A
EC
MBIB1475E
X. Engine speed in rpm Y. Engine coolant temperature in °C G

SPEED ADJUSTMENT WHEN THERE IS AN ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR MAL-
FUNCTION
H
● If one or both terminals of the accelerator pedal position sensor are suspected, the ECM overrides the idle
speed to maintain it at 1100 rpm. This fail-safe mode limits performance. The orange malfunction indicator
lights up and flashes.
● If the accelerator pedal position sensor is blocked, is no longer being supplied, or is not transmitting an I
output signal, the ECM overrides the idle speed to maintain it at 1300 rpm. This mode limits performance.
The orange malfunction indicator lights up and flashes.
● In both cases, when the brake pedal is depressed, the idle speed is stabilised at the recommended speed. J
● If the information from the accelerator pedal position sensor and the brake switch information does not
correspond, the speed is changed to 1100 rpm.
K
IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT WHEN THERE IS AN FUEL INJECTOR CODE MALFUNCTION
When there is an fuel injector code malfunction, the ECM overrides the idle speed to maintain it at 1300 rpm.
This mode limits performance. The orange malfunction indicator lights up and flashes.
L
CORRECTION OF THE IDLING SPEED ACCORDING TO THE GEAR RATIOS
The idling speed is modified according to the gear selected in the transmission:
● in neutral, 1st and 2nd gear, the speed is (at the normal operating temperature) 850 rpm (graph A), M
● for the other gears, the speed is (at the normal operating temperature) 900 rpm (graph B).
EC-1617
[K9K]
MBIB1476E
X. Engine speed in rpm Y. Engine coolant temperature in °C
Air Conditioning Control BBS004TN
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL

The compressor is a variable displacement type.
The air conditioning relay is controlled by IPDM E/R.
COMPRESSOR OPERATION PROGRAMMING
During certain stages of operation, the ECM stops the compressor from functioning.
Engine Starting Program
The compressor is prevented from operating for 4 seconds after the engine has started.
Thermal Protection Program
The compressor is not engaged when the engine coolant temperature is higher than 115 °C (239 °F) or from
110 °C (230 °F) at high speed, 4500 rpm for more than 3 seconds.
Fan Motor Control Programming
At idling speed and also when driving, with the air conditioning activated, the speed of the fan motor is deter-
mined according to the refrigerant pressure and the vehicle speed.
Recovery of Performance
When pressure is applied to the accelerator pedal above 70%, the compressor is disengaged for 5 seconds.
Recovery of Output When The Vehicle Starts Moving
In order to help the vehicle move off, the air conditioning compressor is disengaged if the position of the accel-
erator pedal is above 35% and the idling speed less than 1250 rpm.
Anti-Stall Protection
The compressor is disengaged if the engine speed is lower than 750 rpm.
Engine Overspeed Timed Protection Program
The compressor is disengaged when the engine speed reaches 4500 rpm for more than 3 seconds.
NOTE:
The time between the compressor being disengaged twice is always greater than 10 seconds.
EC-1618
[K9K]
Pre/Postheating (Glow Plug) Control BBS004TO
A
The pre/postheating function is controlled by the glow control unit.
PRE/POSTHEATING (GLOW PLUG) OPERATING PRINCIPLE
“Preheating” at Ignition Switch ON EC
1. Variable preheating
The time period for the glow lamp to light up and the feed to heater plugs depends on the engine coolant
temperature and the battery voltage. C
MBIB1477E
I
X. Time in seconds Y. Temperature in °C
Whatever the situation, the preheating glow lamp cannot be lit for more than 10 seconds (except in the
event of an engine coolant temperature sensor malfunction). J
2. Fixed preheating
After the glow lamp goes out the plugs remain supplied for a fixed period of 5 seconds.
“Post Heating” With The Engine Running K
During this phase the plugs are supplied continuously according to engine coolant temperature.
For idle speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
L
MBIB1478E
X. Time in seconds Y. Engine coolant temperature in °C
EC-1619
[K9K]
Glow Plugs BBS004TP
The resistance of a glow plug is 0.6Ω.

TIGHTENING TORQUE
Glow plug: 1.5 N·m, 15 kg/cm, 13 in/lb
Plugs may be removed without having to open the high pressure circuit.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Unclip the plug connector.
3. Clean the outside of the plug to avoid any dirt entering the cylinder.
4. Loosen and remove the plugs.
MBIB1479E
To undo the plug on cylinder 4 use a 10 mm long radio socket attached to a universal joint. Once the plug is
loosened use a hose to unscrew it completely.
REFITTING
Proceed in the reverse order of removal.
Cooling Fan Control BBS004TQ
The cooling fan motor is controlled by the ECM.

COOLING FAN OPERATION WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING
The cooling fan motor is controlled:
● At slow speed if the engine coolant temperature exceeds 96 °C (205 °F) or if there is an engine coolant
temperature sensor malfunction, and is switched off when the temperature falls below 93 °C (199 °F).
● at high speed if the engine coolant temperature exceeds 99 °C (210 °F) or if there is a low speed malfunc-
tion, and is switched off when the temperature falls below 96 °C (205 °F).
The cooling fan motor low and high speeds are controlled when the air conditioning function is selected on the
instrument panel.
If the low speed setting is suspected, the high speed setting operates under the low speed conditions.
EC-1620
[K9K]
EC
MBIB1472E
OPERATION OF THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT

The engine coolant temperature warning light remains lit if the engine coolant temperature exceeds 114 °C
(237 °F). It goes out when the temperature falls below 111 °C (232 °F).
EC-1621
[K9K]
Oil Vapour Rebreathing BBS004TR
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MBIB1480E
1. Cylinder head cover 2. Oil vapour rebreathing duct 3. Oil vapour recirculation valve
4. Air inlet duct 5. Turbocharger
● A: When there is a low charge, the vacuum in the intake air duct is below the spring set point. The oil
vapours are extensively rebreathed by the vacuum in the intake air duct.
● B: When there is a medium or high charge, the pressure in the intake air duct exhausts the valve dia-
phragm, the oil vapours are breathed in small quantities via a calibrated hole.
CHECKING
To ensure the correct operation of the anti-pollution system, the oil vapour rebreathing circuit must be kept
clean and in good condition.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) BBS004TS
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MBIB1481E
1. Engine 2. Air filter unit 3. Air distributor

4. Exhaust manifold 5. EGR volume control valve 6. Turbocharger
7. ECM A. Air inlet B. Exhaust gas outlet
EC-1622
[K9K]
PURPOSE OF THE EGR SYSTEM
Exhaust gas recirculation is used to reduce the nitrogen oxide (NOx) content of the exhaust gases. A
The ECM authorises gas to pass by controlling an EGR volume control valve.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
EC
The valve is controlled by an RCO (Opening Cyclic Ratio) signal sent by the ECM. The RCO signal modulates
the opening of the valve and consequently the quantity of exhaust gas directed back to the intake manifold.
The ECM continuously carries out a test to detect the position of the EGR volume control valve.
NOTE: C
The position of the EGR volume control valve is determined by the calculation of the amount of air taken in by
the engine.
D
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The parameters which determine the activation of the EGR volume control valve are as follows:
● Engine coolant temperature E
● Intake air temperature
● Ambient barometric pressure
● Accelerator pedal position F
● Injected fuel flow
● Engine speed
Operating point for the EGR volume control valve test: G
The EGR volume control valve is activated when:
● Intake air temperature is > 15 °C (59 °F) and engine coolant temperature is > 70 °C (158 °F)
● Intake air temperature is > 50 °C (122 °F) and engine coolant temperature is > 40 °C (104 °F) H
● Engine speed is between 850 and 1,000 rpm
● Injected fuel flow is between 2 and 5 mg/stroke
I
● Ambient barometric pressure is between 980 and 1,000 mbar
In this case, the CONSULT-II can read an RCO value of the EGR volume control valve equals to 16%.
EGR function is disabled if: J
● Battery voltage is less than 9 V
● Engine speed is below 500 rpm
● Mapping (engine speed/load) exceeds a given threshold K
● Air conditioning compressor is activated
The EGR volume control valve is not supplied for 2 seconds after the engine starts.
L
If there is a malfunction in:
● EGR volume control valve
● Turbocharger boost sensor
M
the operation of the EGR volume control valve is cut.
MBIB1482E
1. Position sensor signal 2. Position sensor earth 3. Position sensor feed

(sensor signal) (sensor ground) (sensor power)
4. Valve earth control 5. Not used 6. Valve feed
(ground control) (power supply)
EC-1623
[K9K]
CAN Communication BBS0040B
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Unit" , about CAN communication for detail.
EC-1624
[K9K]
A
Fuel Filter BBS0040C
DESCRIPTION
A water draining cock is on the lower side and a priming pump for bleeding air is on the upper side. EC
AIR BLEEDING
After fuel filter is replaced and after fuel system components are removed/installed, bleed air from fuel line as
follows: C
1. Prime the circuit using the priming pump.
2. Perform engine cranking with repeating several times until engine starting.
CAUTION: D
● Crank engine until it starts. Do not crank engine for more than 30 seconds.
● Prepare a tray to collect fuel. Prevent fuel from adhering to rubber parts, especially the engine
mounting insulator. E
WATER DRAINING
1. Prepare a tray at the drain plug open end.
F
2. Loosen drain plug, and operate priming pump to drain water from fuel filter.
CAUTION:
● Water in filter is drained with fuel. Prepare larger capacity pan than fuel filter volume.
G
● Drained water is mixed with fuel. Prevent fuel from adhering to rubber parts such as engine
mounting insulator.
3. After draining, close drain plug by hand. H
CAUTION:
If drain plug is tightened excessively, it may be damaged and fuel will leak. Do not use tools to
tighten drain cock.
I
4. Bleed air in fuel piping. Refer to EC-1625, "AIR BLEEDING" .
5. Start engine and make sure there is no fuel leakage.
Injector Adjustment Value Registration BBS0040E J
There is a 16 digit code on the fuel injectors called injector adjustment value. This code is specific to each fuel
injector, and takes into account differences in manufacture and specifies the flow injected by each of them.
When a fuel injector is replaced, it is necessary to program the injector adjustment value of the new fuel injec- K
tor into the ECM.
When an ECM is replaced, it is necessary to program the injector adjustment values of the four fuel injectors.
There are two possibilities: L
● If it is possible to communicate with the ECM:
– Read out the data from the ECM using the “SAVE DATA FOR REPLACE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II. M
– Turn ignition switch OFF.
– Remove battery negative cable.
– Change the ECM.
– Reprogram the data from the “WRITE DATA AFTER REPLACE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II to the replaced ECM.
– After replacement, ensure that the ECM has not detected malfunctions relating to the injector adjustment
value and check that the MI is turned OFF.
● If it is not possible to communicate with the ECM:
– Turn ignition switch OFF.
– Remove battery negative cable.
– Change the ECM.
– Read the data on the fuel injectors.
– Enter the data in the ECM using the “ENTER INJCTR CALIB DATA” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II manually.
EC-1625
[K9K]
– Reconfigure the different elements such as the power-assisted steering pump assembly and the ther-
moplungers etc.
– Using CONSULT-II, ensure that the ECM has not detected malfunctions relating to the injector adjustment
value and check that the MI is turned OFF.
Tightening The High Pressure Pipes BBS004TX
All the high pressure pipe removed must be systematically replaced along with the clips.
NOTE:
Fit the pump/rail pipe before the rail/injector pipes.
RAIL-PUMP PIPE
● Undo the rail,
● Grease the threads of the high pressure pipe nuts,
● Insert the high pressure pipe olive into the taper of the high pressure pump outlet,
● Insert the high pressure pipe olive into the taper of the high pressure rail inlet.
● Move the nut into position by hand, on the rail side then the pump side,
● Tighten the rail,
● Tighten the high pressure pipe nuts on the rail side then on the
pump side.
MBIB1483E
RAIL/INJECTOR PIPES
● Undo the rail,
● Grease the threads of the high pressure pipe nuts,
● Insert the high pressure pipe olive into the taper of the high pressure injector inlet,
● Insert the high pressure pipe olive into the taper of the high pressure rail outlet,
● Move the nuts into position by hand, on the injector side then the rail side,
● Tighten the rail,
● Ensure that the new clip, supplied with the new high pressure pipe, is fitted,
● Tighten the nuts of the high pressure pipes on the injector side first and then on the fuel rail side.
NOTE:
Before fitting a new high pressure pipe, move back the nuts on the pipe then lightly lubricate the nut
threads with the oil from the sachet (1) provided in the parts kit.
Checking Sealing After Repair BBS004TY
After any operation, check that there are no fuel leaks.

Reprime the circuit using the priming pump.
Start the engine and allow to warm up at idle speed, visually inspecting for any fuel leaks.
Apply tracing fluid around the high pressure connections of the pipe that has been replaced.
Once the engine coolant temperature is above 50 °C and provided there are no malfunctions present, carry
out a road test, taking the engine speed up to 4,000 rpm at least once to check that there are no leaks.
Perform a visual inspection after the road test to make sure that there are no high pressure leaks.
Clean off the tracing fluid.
Replacing ECM BBS004TZ
The system can be reprogrammed using CONSULT-II.

Before an ECM is replaced in after-sales, the following must be done.
EC-1626
[K9K]
● Check the injector adjustment value using “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
● After replacing ECM, enter each injector adjustment value using “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- A
SULT-II.
● Also set the system configuration using “CONFIGURATION” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC
Replacing Fuel Injectors BBS004U0
NOTE:
Injector adjustment value is a factory calibration carried out on each fuel injector to adjust the flow of C
each one precisely, taking into account differences in manufacture.
The injector adjustment values are written on a label affixed to each fuel injector then entered in the ECM
which can then control each fuel injector by taking account of their differences in manufacture.
The system can be programmed “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. D
The injector adjustment values (16 digit code) must be replaced after replacing a fuel injector.
● Entering each injector adjustment value, when replacing the ECM.
E
EC-1627
[K9K]
Introduction BBS0040I
The ECM controls the display on the instrument panel of certain information relating to the operation of the
engine.
Four functions are involved here: The OBD malfunction indicator [MI(Yellow)] for the EOBD (European On
Board Diagnostics), the pre/post heating, the engine coolant temperature and engine malfunction [MI(Red)].
These four functions are represented by four lights given out by the ECM
PRE/POST HEATING LAMP
This lamp indicates that the pre-heating has been activated.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE LIGHT
This light is used as an indicator of engine overheating.
● In the event of overheating, it is up to the driver whether to stop the vehicle or not.
OBD LIGHT
The OBD malfunction indicator [MI(Yellow)] is used to alert the driver to the existence of engine control system
malfunctions involving excessive pollution or if the EOBD system is deactivated.
The ECM makes a request for lighting of the MI(Yellow) only where there is a malfunction present at the end of
three consecutive cycles.
The 3-second visual check upon powering up (automatic test procedure controlled by the IPDM E/R) is per-
formed by the ECM.
In the event of a confirmed OBD malfunction by lighting of the OBD light, no flashing of the light must be
observed following the lighting test.
DTCs Causing MI to Light
DTC Description Characterization Reference page
Cylinder 1 injector control circuit
CC EC-1745, "DTC P0201 - P0204
P0201 (Open circuit)
CO FUEL INJECTOR"
(Short circuit)
CC EC-1745, "DTC P0201 - P0204
CO FUEL INJECTOR"
(Short circuit)
CC EC-1745, "DTC P0201 - P0204
CO FUEL INJECTOR"
(Short circuit)
CC EC-1745, "DTC P0201 - P0204
CO FUEL INJECTOR"
(Short circuit)
EGR volume control valve EC-1791, "DTC P0400 EGR
P0400 4.DEF
(EGR volume control valve blocked open) FUNCTION"
EGR volume control valve EC-1795, "DTC P0403 EGR
P0403 CO.0
(Open circuit or short circuit to ground) VOLUME CONTROL VALVE"
EC-1805, "DTC P0487 EGR
EGR volume control valve control position sensor circuit
CO.0 VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
P0487 (Open circuit or short circuit to ground)
CC.1 CONTROL POSITION SEN-
(Short circuit to +12V)
SOR"
ECM
P062F 2.DEF EC-1828, "DTC P062F ECM"
(Reading to EEPROM memory)
ENGINE WARNING LIGHT

In the event of an engine malfunction, the ECM may request the display of an engine warning light [MI(Red)].
How to Erase DTC BBS004UN
With CONSULT-II
The DTC in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
EC-1628
[K9K]
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. A
2. Touch “ENGINE”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) EC
PBIB2452E H
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) BBS0040L
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in I

the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION””is displayed on
Refer to BL-215, "NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)" . J
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DAIG RESULTS” mode
with CONSULT-II. K
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and reg-
with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. SEF543X L
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.
Regarding the procedure of NATS initialization and all NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to
M
REPLACING THE ECM
This vehicle is fitted with an engine immobilizer system which is controlled by a key recognition system.
The ECM is supplied without a code but they must all be programmed with one.
If an ECM is replaced, it must be programmed with the code of the vehicle and the correct operation of the
engine immobilizer function must be checked.
WARNING:
These vehicles have a special ECM which does not function unless it is coded.
Consequently, it is strongly recommended that you do not carry out tests using ECMs borrowed from
the warehouse or on another vehicle to prevent coding and uncoding malfunctions which may leave
the ECM useless.
UNCODING PROCEDURE
If the ECM has learnt a code and must be returned to the workshop, it is imperative that you uncode it before
removing it.
EC-1629
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction BBS0040O
SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT

This document presents the trouble diagnosis method applicable to all ECMs with the following specifications:
Vehicle(s): E11 with K9K
DELPHI, DIRECT DIESEL INJECTION,
Function concerned:
COMMON RAIL MULTI INJECTION
Name of ECM: INJECTION DCM1.2
Program No.: 4D
VDIAG No.: 48
PREREQUISITES FOR TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

To begin trouble diagnosis, it is essential to have the following items available:
Documentation Type
Diagnostic procedures:
● Assisted with CONSULT-II, Service Manual.
● Wiring diagrams.
Special tool required PLUGGED RAIL tools
REMINDERS
Trouble Diagnosis:
There are present DTCs and stored DTCs (which appeared in a certain context and have since disappeared
or which are still present but have not had trouble diagnosis performed on them in the current context).
The “present” or “stored” status of DTCs must be considered when activating the diagnostic tool after power is
supplied to the ECM (without activating the system components).
Deal with present DTCs according to the procedure specified in the corresponding DTC trouble diagnosis.
For stored DTCs, note the DTCs displayed and follow the instructions in the Notes section.
If the DTC is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the malfunction is present. Deal
with the DTC.
If the DTC is not confirmed, check:
● Electrical lines which correspond to the malfunction
● Connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.)
● Resistance of the malfunction component
● Condition of the wires (melted or cut insulation, wear)
Conformity Check
The conformity check is designed to check the states and data monitor items which do not display any DTCs
on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent. This phase therefore allows:
● Diagnoses malfunctions that do not have a DTC display, and which may correspond to a customer com-
plaint.
● Checks that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a DTC reappearing after repairs.
This section gives the trouble diagnosis procedures for states and parameters and the conditions for checking
them.
If a state is not operating normally or a data monitor value is outside permitted tolerance values, you should
consult the corresponding trouble diagnosis page.
Customer Complaints - Trouble Diagnosis
If the test with the CONSULT-II is OK, but the customer complaint still present, the malfunction should be
treated by customer complaints.
A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is pro-
vided on the next page in the form of a flow chart.
EC-1630
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
A
EC
MBIB1484E
EC-1631
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Wiring Control
Diagnostics malfunctions
Removing the connectors and/or handling the wirings may temporarily remove the origin of a DTC. The mea-
surements of the electrical voltages, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially when the DTC
is not present at the time of the analysis (stored DTC).
Visual Check
Look for impacts under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment.
Perform a careful check of the protections, insulation and correct running of wirings.
Look for traces of oxidation.
Tactile Check
While manipulating the wirings, use the diagnostic tool to detect a change in DTC states from “stored” to
“present”.
Ensure that the connectors are correctly engaged.
Apply light stresses to the connectors.
Gently manipulate the wiring harness.
If a change of state occurs, try to isolate the origin of the incident.
Examination of Each Element
Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and blades and their crimping (no crimping
on the insulating part).
Check that the clips and blades are properly engaged in the receptacles.
Ensure that there is no rebounding of clips or blades at the time of connection.
Check the contact pressure of the clips using a suitable model blade.
Resistance Control
Test the continuity of the lines in their entirety, then section by section.
Try to create a short-circuit to earth, on the + 12 V or with another wire.
If a DTC is detected, repair or replace the wiring.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury:
● Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the ECM with a low charge.
● Use the proper tools.
Cleanliness instructions which must be followed when working on the high-pressure direct injection system:
Risks Relating to Contamination:
The system is very sensitive to contamination. The risks caused by the introduction of contamination are dam-
age to or destruction of the high-pressure injection system and the engine, seizing or incorrect sealing of a
component.
All After-Sales operations must be performed under very clean conditions. This means that no impurities (par-
ticles a few microns in size) get into the system during dismantling or into the circuits via the fuel unions.
The cleanliness guidelines must be applied from the filter through to the injectors.
● What are the sources of contamination?
Contamination is caused by:
– Metal or plastic chips
– Paint
– Fibres from cardboard, brushes, paper, clothing, cloths
– Foreign bodies such as hair
– Ambient atmosphere, etc.
WARNING:
Before working on the injection system, ensure that the system pressure is nearing 0 bar.
CAUTION:
it is not possible to clean the engine using a high-pressure washer because of the risk of damaging
the connections. In addition, moisture may collect in the connectors and cause electrical connection
malfunctions.
Instructions to Be Followed before Any Work is Carried Out on The Injection System:
● Ensure that you have the plugs for the unions to be opened (bag of plugs available from the Parts Stores,
NISSAN part No:16830 BN700, Renault part No: 77 01 206 804). Plugs are to be used once only. After
EC-1632
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
use, they must be thrown away (once used they are soiled and cleaning is not sufficient to make them
reusable). Unused plugs must be thrown away. A
● Ensure that you have hermetically resealable plastic bags for storing removed parts. There is less risk of
parts stored in this way being exposed to contamination. The bags must be used only once, and after use
they must be thrown away. EC
● Ensure that lint-free towelettes are used for injection pump related service purposes. The use of a normal
cloth or paper for cleaning purposes is prohibited. They are not lint-free and may contaminate the fuel cir-
cuit of the system. A lint-free cloth should only be used once.
C
Instructions to Be Followed before Opening The Fuel Circuit:
Use new thinner for each operation (used thinner contains impurities). Pour it into a clean receptacle.
For each operation, use a clean brush in good condition (the brush must not shed its bristles). D
Use a brush and thinners to clean the connections to be opened.
Blow compressed air over the cleaned parts (tools, cleaned the same way as the parts, connections and injec-
tion system zone). Check that no bristles remain adhering.
E
Wash your hands before and during the operation if necessary.
When wearing leather protective gloves, cover them with latex gloves.
Instructions to Be Followed During The Operation: F
As soon as the circuit is open, all openings must be plugged to prevent impurities from entering the system.
The plugs to be used are available from the Parts Stores. They must not, under any circumstances, be reused.
Close the resealable bag, even if it has to be reopened shortly afterwards. The ambient atmosphere carries
impurities. G
All components removed from the injection system must be stored in a hermetically sealed plastic bag once
the plugs have been inserted.
The use of a brush, thinner, bellows, sponge or normal cloth is strictly forbidden once the circuit has been H
opened.
These items are likely to allow contaminants to enter the system.
A new component replacing an old one must not be removed from its packaging until it is to be fitted to the
I
vehicle.
ECM REPLACEMENT, PROGRAMMING OR REPROGRAMMING OPERATION
Following items can be (re)programmed via the DLC using the CONSULT-II. J
● System configuration
● Injector adjustment value
Before replacing the ECM in after-sales operations, the following data must be readout using CONSULT-II: K
● The injector adjustment values to be noted to appropriate paper or CONSULT-II copying function.
NOTE:
The injector adjustment value for each fuel injector must be entered manually after the ECM has been L
replaced or (re)programmed by reading the injector adjustment value on each fuel injector.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to test an ECM from the parts stores because it cannot be fitted to any other
vehicle. M
REPLACING THE INJECTORS
NOTE:
The injector adjustment value is a calibration made on each fuel injector in the factory in order to adjust its flow
precisely.
These injector adjustment values are written on a label affixed to each fuel injector then entered into the ECM
which then controls each fuel injector taking into account its individual manufacturing variations.
When replacing one or more fuel injectors, the parameters of the fuel injector output concerned must be mod-
ified. The system can be configured using the CONSULT-II.
EC-1633
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Trouble Diagnosis - Symptom BBS004U2
NOTE:
Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the CONSULT-II.
Symptom Trouble diagnosis Reference page
No communication with the ECM CHART 1 EC-1635
The engine does not start CHART 2 EC-1636
Starting malfunction The engine starts with difficulty or starts then stalls CHART 3 EC-1638
Starting difficult with warm engine CHART 4 EC-1640
Rough idle speed (pumping) CHART 5 EC-1641
Idle speed malfunction
Idle speed too high or too low CHART 6 EC-1642
Unexpected acceleration/deceleration and engine stalling CHART 7 EC-1642
Response malfunction CHART 8 EC-1643
Engine stop (timing) CHART 9 EC-1644
Behavior while driving
Engine jerking CHART 10 EC-1646
Lack of power CHART 11 EC-1647
Too much power CHART 12 EC-1648
Excessive consumption CHART 13 EC-1649
Overspeed when lifting off accelerator or changing gear CHART 14 EC-1650
Road holding (continued)
Engine dies when pulling away CHART 15 EC-1651
The engine does not stop CHART 16 EC-1652
Clanking engine, noisy engine CHART 17 EC-1653
Squalling noise CHART 18 EC-1654
General mechanical noises CHART 19 EC-1654
Noise, odors or smoke Blue, white or black smoke CHART 20 EC-1656
Exhaust odors CHART 21 EC-1657
Diesel odors CHART 22 EC-1657
Smoke (blue, white or black) on acceleration CHART 23 EC-1658
EC-1634
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
CHART 1: NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE ECM
A
1. INSPECTION START
Ensure that CONSULT-II is not causing the malfunction by trying to establish dialogue with an ECM on another
vehicle. If the CONSULT-II is not at malfunction, and dialogue cannot be established with any other ECM on EC
the same vehicle, the cause could be a suspected ECM interfering on the CAN communication line.
Check the voltage of the battery and carry out the operations necessary to obtain a voltage which is to specifi-
cation (9.5 V < U battery < 17.5 V). C
>> GO TO 2.
D
2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION
Perform trouble diagnosis on the CAN communication line using CONSULT-II.
E
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ECM GROUND F
Check the ECM earth (ground) point on the side strut tower.
G
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK DLC CONNECTOR CIRCUIT H

Check the followings:
● Connection between the CONSULT-II and the DLC (wiring in good condition)
I
● Engine and passenger compartment fuses
>> GO TO 5. J
5. CHECK DLC CONNECTOR CIRCUIT
Check for the presence of 12 V on terminal 16 with ignition switch OFF, 12 V on terminal 8 with ignition switch K
ON and an earth (ground) on terminals 4 and 5 of the data link connector.
Repair if necessary.
L
>> GO TO 6.
EC-1635
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
6. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Connect the CONSULT-II and check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance of the
connections:
● ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 29
● ECM terminal 22 and fuse block M7
● ECM terminal 25 and ground
● ECM terminal 2 and DLC terminal 7
(Refer to EC-1698, "Wiring Diagram" .)
Repair if necessary.
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 2: THE ENGINE DOES NOT START
1. CHECK FUEL
Check that the fuel reservoir is correctly filled and with the right fuel.
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ENGINE OIL AND ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the engine oil and coolant levels.
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INLET AIR CIRCUIT

Check the inlet air circuit using TEST 5. Refer to EC-1663, "TEST 5: AIR INLET CIRCUIT CHECK" .
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Is the catalytic converter clogged or deteriorated?
Yes or No
Yes >> Replace the catalytic converter.
No >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

Check the electrical circuit using TEST 2. Refer to EC-1661, "TEST 2: ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT CHECK" .
>> GO TO 6.
EC-1636
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
6. CHECK DISTRIBUTION A
Is the distribution properly adjusted?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7. EC
No >> Perform the required repairs.
7. CHECK WIRING HARNESS C

Visually check the condition of the engine wiring harness.
D
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK STARTER E
Is the starter working properly (minimum engine speed of 200 rpm)?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 9. F
9. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE G

Are the compressions correct?
Yes or No
H
Yes >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK GLOW PLUG I
Check the condition of the glow plugs.

J
>> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK ENGINE PARAMETERS K

Check the engine parameters using TEST 4. Refer to EC-1663, "TEST 4: PARAMETER CHECK" .
L
>> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK FUEL RAIL PRESSURE

M
Does “RAIL PRESSURE” indicate less than 50 bar under + following contact?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 13.
No >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for FRP sensor. Refer to EC-1736, "DTC P0190 FRP SENSOR" .
13. CHECK LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT

Check the low pressure circuit using TEST 1. Refer to EC-1660, "TEST 1: LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT
CHECK" .
>> GO TO 14.
EC-1637
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
14. CHECK HIGH PRESSURE CIRCUIT
Visually check the high pressure circuit for leaks using TEST 8. Refer to EC-1665, "TEST 8: HIGH-PRES-
SURE CIRCUIT LEAK CHECK" .
>> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM

Check the high pressure system using TEST 7. Refer to EC-1664, "TEST 7: HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM
CHECK" .
>> GO TO 16.
16. CEHCK ECM

Check the ECM using TEST 6. Refer to EC-1664, "TEST 6: ECM CHECK" .
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 3: THE ENGINE STARTS WITH DIFFICULTY OR STARTS THEN STALLS
1. CHECK FUEL
>> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.

>> GO TO 4.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK DISTRIBUTION
Is the distribution properly adjusted?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 6.
EC-1638
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
6. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE A
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7. EC
7. CHECK GLOW PLUG C

D
>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK WIRING HARNESS E

>> GO TO 9. F

G
>> GO TO 10. H
10. CHECK ENGINE PARAMETERS
Check the engine parameters using TEST 4. Refer to EC-1663, "TEST 4: PARAMETER CHECK" . I
>> GO TO 11.
J
Check the low pressure circuit using TEST 1. Refer to EC-1660, "TEST 1: LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT K
CHECK" .
>> GO TO 12. L
Visually check the high pressure circuit for leaks using TEST 8. Refer to EC-1665, "TEST 8: HIGH-PRES- M
>> GO TO 13.

Check the high pressure system using TEST 7. Refer to EC-1664, "TEST 7: HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM
CHECK" .
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK ECM

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1639
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
CHART 4: STARTING DIFFICULT WITH WARM ENGINE
1. CHECK FUEL
>> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 5.

>> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS

>> GO TO 7.

CHECK" .
>> GO TO 8.

Operate the fuel injectors via ACTIVE TEST with CONSULT-II.
>> GO TO 9.
EC-1640
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
9. CHECK FUEL INECTORS A
Is movement of the valve audible 1 m away from the vehicle?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10. EC
No >> Perform TEST 11. Refer to EC-1666, "TEST 11: FUEL FILTER CHECK" . If TEST 11 is in order,
replace the malfunctioning fuel injector(s).
C
10. CHECK ECM
D
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 5: ROUGH IDLE SPEED (PUMPING) E
Check the low pressure circuit using TEST 1. Refer to EC-1660, "TEST 1: LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT F
CHECK" .
>> GO TO 2. G

H
>> GO TO 3.
I
Is the engine wiring harness cut off or jammed? J
Yes or No
Yes >> Carry out the required repairs.
No >> GO TO 4. K
4. CHECK FUEL PUMP

L
Is the high pressure actuator blocked?
Yes or No
M
No >> GO TO 5.

Check for leaks in the high pressure circuit using TEST 8. Refer to EC-1665, "TEST 8: HIGH-PRESSURE
CIRCUIT LEAK CHECK" .
>> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK GLOW PLUG

Check that the glow plugs are working properly.
Is the glow plug resistance above 1Ω?
Yes or No
Yes >> Replace the glow plugs.
No >> GO TO 7.
EC-1641
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> Carry out the required repairs.
8. CHECEK FUEL INJECTORS

Check the fuel injectors using TEST 3. Refer to EC-1662, "TEST 3: FUEL INJECTOR CHECK" .
>> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP

Check the high pressure pump using TEST 7. Refer to EC-1664, "TEST 7: HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM
CHECK" .
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 6: IDLE SPEED TOO HIGH/TOO LOW
>> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CLUTCH LINKAGE

Is the clutch linkage correct?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Carry out the required repairs
4. CHECK ECM
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 7: UNEXPECTED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AND ENGINE OVERCHARGING
>> GO TO 2.
EC-1642
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
2. CHECK INLET AIR CIRCUIT A
Check the air inlet circuit using TEST 5. Refer to EC-1663, "TEST 5: AIR INLET CIRCUIT CHECK" .
>> GO TO 3. EC

C
Is the engine wiring harness cut off or pinched?
Yes or No
Yes >> Carry out the required repairs. D
No >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL INJECTORS E

>> GO TO 5. F
5. CHECK ENGINE ASPIRATION

G
Check that the engine has not aspirated its oil (engine stalls).
Yes or No
Yes >> Carry out the required repairs. H
No >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK ECM I
>> INSPECTION END J
CHART 8: RESPONSE MALFUNCTION

1. CHECK INLET AIR CIRCUIT K
L
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE M

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.

>> GO TO 4.
EC-1643
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
4. CHECK TURBOCHARGER
Check that the turbocharger is working properly.
Is the turbocharger correct?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.

CHECK" .
>> GO TO 6.

>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 8.

>> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK ECM
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 9: ENGINE STOP/STALLING
1. CHECK FUEL
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ENGINE OIL AND ENGINE COOLANT

>> GO TO 3.
EC-1644
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
3. CEHCK ENGINE ASPIRATION A
Check that the engine has not aspirated its oil (engine racing).
>> GO TO 4. EC

C
>> GO TO 5. D

Is the catalytic converter clogged or deteriorated? E
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 6. F

G
>> GO TO 7. H
Check the electrical circuit using TEST 2. Refer to EC-1661, "TEST 2: ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT CHECK" . I
>> GO TO 8.
J
Check the engine parameters using TEST 4. Refer to EC-1663, "TEST 4: PARAMETER CHECK" . K
>> GO TO 9.
L
CHECK" . M
>> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK HIGH PRESSURE CURCUIT

Visually check the high pressure circuit for leaks using TEST 8. Refer to EC-1665, "TEST 8: HIGH-PRES-
>> GO TO 11.

Check the high pressure system using TEST 7. Refer to EC-1660, "Trouble Diagnosis - Basic Test Procedure"
.
>> GO TO 12.
EC-1645
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
12. CHECK ECM
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 10: ENGINE JERKING
1. CHECK FUEL
Check that the fuel tank is correctly filled and that the fuel type is suitable.
Is the fuel type suitable and the tank correctly filled?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Refill the fuel tank correctly.

CHECK" .
>> GO TO 3.

>> GO TO 4.

Is the engine wiring harness cut off or pinched?
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 5.
5. CEHCK GLOW PLUG

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 6.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK VALVE CLEARANCE

Is the valve clearance properly adjusted?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> Make the necessary adjustments.
EC-1646
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
8. CHECK FUEL PUMP A
Check the high pressure pump using TEST 7. Refer to EC-1664, "TEST 7: HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM
CHECK" .
EC
>> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK ECM C
D
>> INSPECTION END
CHART 11: LACK OF POWER
E
F
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INLET AIR CIRCUIT G
H
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL I

Is the engine oil level correct?
Yes or No
J
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Top up the oil.
4. CEHCK CATALYTIC CONVERTER K
Is the catalytic converter sealed off or damaged?

Yes or No L
No >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK TURBOCHARGER M

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK LOW PRESSURE CURCUIT

CHECK" .
>> GO TO 7.
EC-1647
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
>> GO TO 8.
8. CEHCK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 9.
9. CEHCK VALVE CLEARANCE

Yes or No
Yes >> INSPECTION END
CHART 12: TOO MUCH POWER
>> GO TO 2.
2. CEHCK INLET AIR CIRCUIT

>> GO TO 3.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.

>> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK ECM
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1648
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
CHART 13: EXCESSIVE CONSUMPTION
A
CHECK" . EC
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP
Is the high pressure actuator leaking? D
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 3. E
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Is the fuel pump temperature sensor leaking? F
Yes or No
Yes >> Replace the fuel pump temperature sensor.
No >> GO TO 4. G

H
CHECK" .
I
>> GO TO 5.

J
>> GO TO 6. K

L
M
>> GO TO 7.

>> GO TO 8.

>> GO TO 9.
EC-1649
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
9. CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.

Is the catalytic converter clogged or damaged?
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 11.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 12.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK ECM

>> INSPECTION END

CHART 14: OVERSPEED WHEN LIFTING OFF ACCELERATOR OR CHANGING GEAR
1. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Check that there is no obstacle obstructing the accelerator pedal travel (carpet, hard spot, etc.).
>> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.

Is the engine wiring harness cut or pinched?
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.
EC-1650
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
4. CHECK CLUTCH LINKAGE A
Is the clutch linkage properly adjusted?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5. EC
5. CHECK ENGINE ASPIRATION C

Yes or No
D
No >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK TURBOCHARGER E

Is the turbocharger correct? F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> Carry out the required repairs. G
7. CHECK INJECTORS
Check the injectors using TEST 3. Refer to EC-1662, "TEST 3: FUEL INJECTOR CHECK" . H
>> GO TO 8.
I
8. CHECK ECM
Check the ECM using TEST 6. Refer to EC-1664, "TEST 6: ECM CHECK" . J
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 15: ENGINE DIES ON PULLING AWAY K
1. CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL

L
Is the clutch pedal free travel correctly adjusted?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
M

>> GO TO 3.

>> GO TO 4.
EC-1651
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
4. CHECK CTALYTIC CONVETER
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 5.

CHECK" .
>> GO TO 6.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK ECM
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 16: ENGINE BACKFIRES, ENGINE NOISE
1. CHECK FUEL
>> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
EC-1652
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
4. CHECK GLOW PLUG A
>> GO TO 5. EC

C
>> GO TO 6. D

Check the inlet air circuit using TEST 5. Refer to EC-1663, "TEST 5: AIR INLET CIRCUIT CHECK" . E
>> GO TO 7.
F
7. CHECK LOW PRESSURE CURCUIT
Check the low pressure circuit using TEST 1. Refer to EC-1660, "TEST 1: LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT G
CHECK" .
>> GO TO 8. H
8. CHECK INJECTORS
Check the injectors using TEST 3. Refer to EC-1662, "TEST 3: FUEL INJECTOR CHECK" . I
>> INSPECTION END

J
CHART 17: CLANKING ENGINE, NOISY ENGINE
K
>> GO TO 2. L

Check the inlet air circuit using TEST 5. Refer to EC-1663, "TEST 5: AIR INLET CIRCUIT CHECK" . M
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK GLOW PLUG

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.
EC-1653
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.

CHECK" .
>> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK FUEL INECTORS

>> INSPECTION END

CHART 18: SQUALLING NOISE
>> GO TO 2.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK ECM
>> INSPECTION END

CHART 19: VARIOUS MECHANICAL NOISES
1. CHECK FUEL INJECOTR OPERATION
Check that the fuel injectors are not making a buzzing noise (injector discharge).
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 2.
EC-1654
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
2. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR INSTALLATION A
Are the mounting clips on the fuel injector pipes broken or missing?
Yes or No
Yes >> Carry out the required repairs. EC
No >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ENGINE PARAMETERS C

D
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK CATALYTIC CONVERTER E

Yes or No
Yes >> Replace the catalytic converter. F
No >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK INLET AIR CIRCUIT G

H
>> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK FUEL INJECTORS I

>> GO TO 7. J

K
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8. L
M
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 9.

Yes or No
Yes >> INSPECTION END
EC-1655
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
CHART 20: EXHAUST ODOURS
>> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 4.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK ENGINE OIL

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK CATALYTIC CONVETER

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 7.

>> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK ECM
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1656
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
CHART 21: DIESEL ODOURS
A
CHECK" . EC
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP
Is the high pressure actuator leaking? D
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 3. E
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Is the fuel pump temperature sensor leaking? F
Yes or No
Yes >> Replace the fuel temperature sensor.
No >> GO TO 4. G

H
>> GO TO 5.
I
Check for leaks in the high pressure circuit using TEST 8. Refer to EC-1665, "TEST 8: HIGH-PRESSURE J
>> INSPECTION END K

CHART 22: BLUE, WHITE OR BLACK SMOKE
1. CHECK FUEL L
M
>> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.

>> GO TO 4.
EC-1657
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK GLOW PLUG

>> GO TO 6.

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 7.

>> GO TO 8.

>> GO TO 9.

CHECK" .
>> GO TO 10.

>> INSPECTION END

CHART 23: SMOKE (BLUE, BLACK OR WHITE) ON ACCELERATING
1. CHECK FUEL
>> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.
EC-1658
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
3. CHECK ENGINE ASPIRATION A
>> GO TO 4. EC

C
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5. D
5. CHECK GLOW PLUG E

>> GO TO 6. F

G
Yes or No
Yes >> Replace the catalytic converter. H
No >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK INLET AIR CIRCUIT I

>> GO TO 8. J
K
Ensure that the turbo compressor is working correctly.
Is the turbo compressor in order?
Yes or No
L
Yes >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK WIRING HARNESS M
>> GO TO 9.

>> GO TO 11.
EC-1659
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
CHECK" .
>> GO TO 12.

>> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK ECM

>> INSPECTION END

Trouble Diagnosis - Basic Test Procedure BBS004U3
DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
Only consult the tests after following the diagnostic procedure chart.
Some specific checks are grouped under the “tests” heading and are used as required in different diagnostic
charts.
Basic test Trouble diagnosis Reference page
Low pressure circuit check TEST 1 EC-1660
Electrical circuit check TEST 2 EC-1661
Fuel injector check TEST 3 EC-1662
Parameter check TEST 4 EC-1663
Air inlet circuit check TEST 5 EC-1663
ECM check TEST 6 EC-1664
High pressure pump check TEST 7 EC-1664
High pressure circuit leak check TEST 8 EC-1665
Fuel injector leak check TEST 9 EC-1665
Fuel injector return flow in starting phase TEST 10 EC-1666
Fuel filter check TEST 11 EC-1666
TEST 1: LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT CHECK

1. CHECK CONFORMITY
Check the conformity of the low pressure connections.
Is the low pressure circuit connection correct?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR LEAK

Look for leaks on the unions.
Are there leaks in the hoses and unions?
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 3.
EC-1660
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
3. CHECK FUEL FILTER A
Check the correctness of the fuel filter.
Is the fuel filter correct?
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Replace the fuel filter with an original part.
C
4. CHECK FOR WATER
Check for water in the fuel filter.
Is there water in the fuel filter? D
Yes or No
Yes >> Drain the fuel filter.
No >> GO TO 5. E
5. CHECK FOR AIR BUBBLES

F
Check for air bubbles in the fuel filter.
Are there any air bubbles in the low pressure circuit?
Yes or No
G
Yes >> GO TO 6.
No >> GO TO 7.
6. BLEED AIR H
Bleed the low pressure circuit.

Place a container under the fuel filter: I
● Disconnect the return hose at the fuel filter and block the fuel filter.
● Pump using the vacuum pump until there is no air left.
● Reconnect the return hose immediately. J
>> INSPECTION END

K
7. INSPECTION END
Low pressure circuit OK. L
>> INSPECTION END

TEST 2: ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT CHECK M
1. CHECK BATTERY AND ALTERNATOR

Check the battery charge and ensure that the alternator is working properly.
Is the charge circuit correct?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FUSE
Check the fuses.
Are the fuses correct?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
EC-1661
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
3. CHECK ECM RELAY
Check that the ECM relay is in working order.
Is the ECM relay working properly?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Replace the relay.
4. CHECK ENGINE GROUND

Test the engine ground.
Is the engine ground correct?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5. INSPECTION END
The electrical circuit is OK.
>> INSPECTION END

TEST 3: FUEL INJECTOR CHECK
1. VISUALLY CHECK
Visually inspect the fuel injector wells.
Is there fuel in the fuel injector wells?
Yes or No
Yes >> Fuel injector ice leak, replace the fuel injector.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST

Perform “ACTIVE TEST”.
Can you hear the fuel injector valve moving?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Carry out test 11. If test 11 is OK, replace the fuel injector.
3. CHECK RETURN FLOW

Compare the return flow of the four fuel injectors when hot using a measuring cylinder. See TEST 9.
Does one of the four fuel injectors have a greater return flow than the others?
Yes or No
Yes >> Replace the fuel injector with an unusually high return flow (leak at the valve).
No >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK NO.1 CYLINDER

Disconnect cylinder No. 1 fuel injector.
Is there a noticeable change in engine noise?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Replace fuel injector No.1 with a new part.
EC-1662
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
5. CHECK ANOTHER CYLINDER A
Reconnect cylinder No. 1 fuel injector.
Carry out the same test on the other cylinders to identify a possible suspected fuel injector.
The injector is sound. EC
>> INSPECTION END

TEST 4: PARAMETER CHECK C
1. CHECK INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE

D
Use the CONSULT-II to check that injector adjustment value corresponds to the fuel injectors.
Is injector adjustment value correctly filled in?
Yes or No
E
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. ENTER INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE F
Use the CONSULT-II to program injector adjustment value into the memory, paying attention to the cylinder
numbers.
G
>> INSPECTION END

H
3. INSPECTION END
Check that the “DATA MONITOR” value (parameter) are consistent.
I
>> INSPECTION END

J
TEST 5: AIR INLET CIRCUIT CHECK
1. CHECK AIR LEAK
K
Check for the presence of a leak/intake of air.
Presence of a leak/intake of air.
Yes or No L
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK AIR FILTER M
Check the condition of the air filter.

Air filter OK.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Replace the air filter with a new part.
3. CHECK INTAKE MANIFOLD

Check that the intake manifold is not obstructed (dirty).
Is the intake manifold blocked?
Yes or No
Yes >> Clean the intake manifold.
No >> Air circuit OK.
EC-1663
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
TEST 6: ECM CHECK
1. CHECK ECM CONNECTOR
Check that the ECM connectors are locked correctly.
Are the connectors poorly locked?
Yes or No
Yes >> Lock the connectors correctly.
No >> Replace the ECM.
TEST 7: HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM CHECK
NOTE:
Certain malfunctions make it impossible to carry out this test, deal with them first.
It is useless and dangerous to engage the starter motor for more than 5 seconds.
1. CHECK FUEL PUMP
It is possible to check the high pressure supply pump capacity by carrying out the following procedure:
● Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the low pressure actuator from the fuel pump (IMV brown con-
nector) and connect a test adaptor (test IMV).
● Disconnect the 4 fuel injectors.
● Turn the ignition switch ON, connect CONSULT-II and select “RAIL PRESSURE” in DATA MONITOR
mode.
● Apply brake and start engine. The starter will cut out automatically after 5 seconds.
● Read “RAIL PRESSURE” indication and confirm that maximum value during the test.
Is the rail pressure greater than 1050 bar?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 2.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.

Repeat the test when cold. Engine coolant temperature = Intake air temperature.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 5.
4. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR SEALING

The pump can supply the operating pressure.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and reconnect the 4 fuel injectors and low pressure actuator electrically.
Turn the ignition switch ON, and erase DTCs using the CONSULT-II.
Carry out the trouble diagnosis on the fuel injectors by checking the return volume of the 4 fuel injectors (See
TEST 9 fuel injector sealing check).
EC-1664
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
5. CHECK STARTING CIRCUIT A
Make sure that the starting circuit is working correctly (minimum engine speed 200 rpm).
Turn the ignition switch OFF and reconnect the 4 fuel injectors and low pressure actuator electrically.
Turn the ignition switch ON, and erase the DTCs using CONSULT-II. EC
>> GO TO 6.
C
6. CHECK FUEL FILTER
Carry out TEST 11.
D
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR RETURN VOLUME E
Carry out the trouble diagnosis on the fuel injectors by checking the return volume of the 4 fuel injectors.
See TEST 9 or TEST 10 if the engine does not start. F
Is TEST 9 or TEST 10 correct?
Yes or No
Yes >> Replace the high pressure pump. G
No >> Replace the suspected fuel injector(s).
TEST 8: HIGH-PRESSURE CIRCUIT LEAK CHECK
NOTE: H
There is a command that performs a leak test on the high-pressure circuit when the engine is running.
This command can detect a leak on the high-pressure circuit if a union is improperly fitted or bolted, but cannot I
detect a small leak if a union is not torque tightened.
This command can only be used if the engine temperature is above 60°C.
Perform “HIGH PRESS CIRC LEAK T” in ACTIVE TEST mode, the engine will automatically carry out one
cycle of 4 accelerations to raise the pressure in the fuel rail and check whether there are leaks in the high J
pressure circuit.
Watch out for any objects (tools, etc.) on the sides of the engine housing during the four accelerations (vibra-
tions possible). K
TEST 9: FUEL INJECTOR LEAK CHECK
NOTE:
Certain malfunctions make it impossible to carry out this test, deal with them first. L
“HIGH PRESS CIRC LEAK T” in ACTIVE TEST mode also allows you to check the return volume of each fuel
injector to detect a leak inside the fuel injectors.
Tooling required: M
● It is essential to use 4 transparent pipes with an internal diameter of 4 mm and a length of approximately
50 cm.
● 4 graduated measuring cylinders.
PROCEDURE
● Check that the engine coolant temperature is above 60°C.
● Turn ignition switch OFF.
● Disconnect the return pipes from the 4 fuel injectors.
● Fit a plug in the pump venturi tube to prevent the low-pressure circuit from depriming.
● Connect the 4 transparent pipes with an internal diameter of 4 mm and a length of 50 cm in place of the
return pipes.
● Immerse these 4 pipes into 4 graduated measuring cylinders.
Having carried out these preparations, start the engine, then let it run for 2 minutes at idle speed.
● Perform “HIGH PRESS CIRC LEAK T” in ACTIVE TEST mode: the engine will automatically perform one
cycle of 4 accelerations to raise the pressure in the fuel rail and measure the leaks inside the fuel injectors
in these conditions.
EC-1665
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
● Once the cycle is complete, perform “HIGH PRESS CIRC LEAK T” in ACTIVE TEST mode again for the
correct reading of the return volume of each fuel injector.
At the end of both cycles, the return volume of each fuel injector should be 35 ml at maximum. If the return
volume of one of the fuel injectors is above 35 ml, replace the suspected fuel injector.
● Disconnect the 4 transparent pipes and reconnect the fuel injector return circuit.
Watch out for any objects (tools, etc.) at the sides of the engine housing during the four cycles (vibrations pos-
sible).
TEST 10: FUEL INJECTOR RETURN FLOW IN STARTING PHASE
NOTE:
It is useless and dangerous to engage the starter motor for more that 5 seconds.
In the event the engine does not start, only the static leak can be measured, that is the leak with the fuel injec-
tor closed, inactive and not subject to any high pressure.
Make sure that the starting circuit is working correctly (minimum speed 200 rpm).
Tooling required:
● It is essential to use four transparent pipes with an internal diameter of 4 mm and approximately 50 cm
long.
● A test adapter (TEST IMV)
PROCEDURE:
2. Disconnect the four fuel injector return pipes.
3. Fit a plug in the pump venturi tube to prevent the low-pressure circuit from depriming.
4. Connect the four transparent pipes with an internal diameter of 4 mm and a length of approximately 50
cm.
5. Disconnect the low pressure actuator from the pressure (brown IMV connector) and connect the test
adapter (test IMV).
6. Electrically disconnect the 4 fuel injectors.
7. Turn ignition switch ON, apply brake and start engine. The starter cuts in automatically after 5 seconds.
8. Measure the amount of fuel in each pipe.
Replace the fuel injector(s) whose leak return is greater than 10 cm.
Disconnect the four transparent fuel pipes and reconnect the fuel injector return circuit.
Disconnect the test IMV and reconnect the low pressure actuator to the pump.
TEST 11: FUEL FILTER CHECK
1. CEHCK FUEL FILTER
Check the conformity of the fuel filter.
Is the fuel filter correct?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Replace the fuel filter with an original part.

Turn ignition switch OFF, analyses the fuel in the fuel filter.
● Disconnect the fuel supply and return hoses from the fuel filter.
● Block the fuel filter inlets and outlets straight away with appropriate plugs.
● Remove the fuel filter from its holder and shake it well, keeping the caps in place and empty the contents
of the fuel filter into a glass container by lifting up a protective cap and undoing the bleed screw.
Can you see at the bottom of the container a deposit of black particles?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Fuel filter correct.
EC-1666
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
3. CHECK METAL PARTICLES A
Pass a magnet beneath the container to collect only all the metal particles. Take the magnet away from the
container.
Do the particles collected using the magnet cover a surface area greater than 1 cm2 ? EC
Yes or No
Yes >> Replace the entire injection system.
No >> Fuel filter correct. C
EC-1667
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Engine Control Component Parts Location BBS0040T
MBIB1516E
1. Fuel filter (LHD models) 2. Camshaft position sensor 3. Fuel pump

4. Knock sensor (Accelerometer) 5. Turbocharger boost control solenoid 6. Turbocharger boost sensor
valve (63kw engine models only)
7. Crankshaft position sensor 8. Engine coolant temperature sensor 9. Glow control unit
10. ECM 11. Mass air flow sensor 12. EGR volume control valve
13. Fuel injector 14. Fuel rail 15. Primimg pump
EC-1668
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
EC
MBIB1537E
: Vehicle front
1. Turbocharger boost sensor 2. Mass air flow sensor 3. EGR volume control valve
(63kw engine models only)
4. Engine coolant temperature sensor 5. Fuel injector 6. Crankshaft position sensor
7. Camshaft position sensor 8. Battery 9. ECM
EC-1669
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
MBIB1538E
: Vehicle front
1. Turbocharger boost control solenoid 2. Turbocharger boost sensor 3. EGR volume control valve
valve (63kw engine models only)
(63kw engine models only)
4. Engine oil filler cap 5. Accelerator pedal 6. Accelerator pedal position sensor
7. Refrigerant pressure sensor 8. Knock sensor (Accelerometer) 9. Fuel rail
EC-1670
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram — ECM — BBS0040U
EC
MBWA1546E
EC-1671
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
MBWA1570E
Refer to EC-21, "How to Check Vehicle Type" to confirm the engine type.
EC-1672
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout BBS0040V
EC
MBIB1485E D
ECM Terminals And Reference Value BBS0040W
PREPARATION E
1. ECM (1) is located in the engine room left side near battery (2).
H
MBIB1519E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connectors.

I
● When disconnecting ECM harness connectors, loosen (B) it
– ECM (2)
J
– Fasten (A)

K

MBIB1518E
L
EC-1673
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Remarks: Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
Approximately 2.6V
1 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch ON] Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
2 LG Data link connector Approximately 2.6V
● CONSULT-II is disconnected.
[Ignition switch OFF]
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE

6 L/R (Accelerator pedal position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V
Approximately 2.4V
7 Y CAN communication line [Ignition switch ON] Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
● Engine stopped Approximately 0.4V
12 L/W
sensor 2 [Ignition switch ON]
Sensor power supply
18 L (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 4.6V
sensor 2)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
22 O Ignition switch [Ignition switch ON]
(11 - 14V)
26 B ECM ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
27 B ● Idle speed

28 B (Accelerator pedal position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.24V
Sensor power supply
29 R (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5.0V
sensor 1)
30 W
EC-1674
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION A
NO.
[Engine is running]
32 B ECM ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V EC
● Idle speed
0 - 12.5V
C
D
● Idle speed
MBIB1504E
Turbocharger boost control
35 R E
solenoid valve
0 - 12.5V

F
G
MBIB1505E
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.1V H
● Idle speed
37 B EGR volume control valve
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.78V I
0 - 12.5V J
[Engine is running]
K
● Idle speed
39 P Fuel pump
MBIB1506E
L
0 - 12.5V
MBIB1507E
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.7 - 1.9
● Idle speed
40 W EGR volume control valve
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.5 - 1.9V

41 — Approximately 0.2V
(Knock sensor shield circuit) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EC-1675
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
Sensor ground
45 O [Engine is running] Approximately 0.3V
(Knock sensor)
Sensor power supply
47 L [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5.0V
(Fuel rail pressure sensor)
Sensor power supply
48 V [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5.0V
(Turbocharger boost sensor)
Sensor power supply
49 SB (EGR volume control valve [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5.0V
control position sensor)
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running] Approximately 0.3 - 5.0V

51 R Intake air temperature sensor Output voltage varies with intake
● Warm-up condition air temperature

53 P Output voltage varies with engine
sensor ● Warm-up condition coolant temperature

Fuel pump temperature sen-
54 P Output voltage varies with fuel
sor ● Warm-up condition pump temperature
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
MBIB1508E
55 R Crankshaft position sensor
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1509E
0 - 1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
rpm at idle.
MBIB1510E
56 Y Camshaft position sensor
0 - 1V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1511E
EC-1676
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.0V EC
● Idle speed
57 R Fuel rail pressure sensor
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.5V C
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
58 O Turbocharger boost sensor
[Engine is running] F
EGR volume control valve ● Idle speed
59 L
control position sensor [Engine is running] G
H
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0.36V
[Engine is running]
I
60 Y Mass air flow sensor ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 2.2V J

63 B (Engine coolant temperature ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.25V K

L
64 G (Fuel pump temperature sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V
sor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground M
65 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V
(Crankshaft position sensor)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
66 L ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V
(Camshaft position sensor)
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
68 G ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V
● Idle speed

69 P (EGR volume control valve ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.5V
control position sensor) ● Idle speed
EC-1677
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.

70 G (Mass air flow sensor/ Intake ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.5V
air temperature sensor) ● Idle speed
0 - 9V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
73 B/P Fuel injector No. 2 rpm at idle.
MBIB1512E
75 P/L Fuel injector No. 4
77 G Fuel injector No. 3
0 - 9V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1513E
5 - 10V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Fuel injector power supply NOTE:
74 O The pulse cycle changes depending on
No. 2
Fuel injector power supply rpm at idle.
76 V MBIB1514E
No. 4
Fuel injector power supply
78 R 5 - 10V
No. 3
80 P [Engine is running]
No. 1
MBIB1515E
Sensor power supply

83 W [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5.0V
[Engine is running]
89 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor Approximately 2.3V
● Both A/C switch and blower fan switch:
ON (Compressor operates)
Approximately 1.4V
104 P ECM relay (self-shutoff) switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ignition switch OFF
EC-1678
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NO.
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
107 Y ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V EC
● Idle speed
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch ON]
110 G (11 - 14V) C
EC-1679
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Conformity Check BBS004TH
ECM STATUS AND PARAMETERS

Test Condition: Engine Stopped and Ignition Switch ON
Parameter or status
Order Function Display and notes Trouble diagnosis
check or action
In the event of a malfunction,
1 Battery voltage PR074: BATTERY VOL 12 V < BATTERY VOL < 14.4 V perform the trouble diagnosis for
CHARGING SYSTEM.
Indicates the engine's rotational
2 Engine speed PR055: ENGINE SPEED perform the trouble diagnosis for
speed in rpm.
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR.
perform the trouble diagnosis for
Indicates the position of the
Accelerator pedal ACCEL/PDL POS APP SENSOR (DTC P0225,
3 PR030: accelerator pedal as a%.
position 0% P0651 and P2120) and DTC
ACCEL/PDL POS = 0%
P0641 SENSOR POWER SUP-
PLY.
Indicates the engine coolant In the event of a malfunction,
Enginr coolant tem- WATER TEMP
4 PR064: temperature in °C. perform the trouble diagnosis for
perature Warm: 90°C
Default value: 80°C DTC P0115 ETC SENSOR.
FUEL TEMP Indicates the fuel tank tempera-
Fuel tank tempera- Cold = WATER ture in °C. This value is given by
5 PR063: perform the trouble diagnosis for
ture TEMP the fuel tank temperature sensor.
DTC P0180 FTT SENSOR.
Warm: 50C Default value: 30°C.
Indicates the ambient baromet- If not consistent, check ATO-
PR035: ATOMOS PRESS ric pressure in mbar. The sensor MOS PRESS, INLET PRESS (in
is incorporated in the ECM. DATA MONITOR mode) and
6 Intake air pressure
local ambient barometric pres-
Indicates the pressure in the tur- sure, with the engine stopped
PR032: INLET PRESS
bocharger in mbar. and ignition switch ON.
RAIL PRESSURE Indicates the fuel rail pressure in
Warm or cold Bar. In the event of a malfunction,
7 Fuel rail pressure PR038: - 90 bar < RAIL This pressure is supplied by the perform the trouble diagnosis for
PRESSURE > 90 fuel rail pressure sensor. DTC P0190 FRP SENSOR.
bar Default value: 2000 Bar.
Indicates the current status of
the engine.
● + after ignition feed
● CRANKING
● RUNNING
MOTOR ● MAINTAINED SUPPLY: Sup-

8 Engine ET038: Engine ply maintained during the NONE.
+ after ignition feed power latch phase.
● Stalled: When the engine has
stalled.
● PROTECTED: When a level 2
malfunction appears or when
the engine speed is limited to
a certain engine speed.
EC-1680
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action A
Indicates the status of the immo-
bilizer system.
● INACTIVE: The ECM has rec- EC
ognized the immobilizer code
ENG IMMOBILIZ transmitted by the Intelligent If ACTIVE, perform the trouble
9 Immobilizer ET003:
INACTIVE Key unit or BCM. diagnosis for NATS.
C
● ACTIVE: The ECM does not
recognize the immobilizer
code transmitted by the Intelli-
gent Key unit or BCM. D
States whether the immobilizer
code has been programmed by
CODE PROGRAM the ECM or not. E
10 Code programmed ET006: If NO, replace ECM.
YES ● YES: Code programmed
● NO: Code not programmed by
the ECM. F
Indicates the vehicle speed in Perform the trouble diagnosis for
kph. This parameter is transmit- CAN communication line. Per-
ted by the “ABS actuator and form the trouble diagnosis for
11 Vehicle speed PR089: VEHICLE SPEED G
electric unit (control unit)” or “ABS actuator and electric unit
combination meter via CAN com- (control unit)” or combination
munication line. meter.
Test Condition: Engine at Idle H
Parameter or status
check or action
I
1 Battery voltage PR074: BATTERY VOL 12V < BATTERY VOL < 14.4V perform the trouble diagnosis for
CHARGING SYSTEM.
ENGINE SPEED In the event of a malfunction,
J
Indicates the engine's rota-
2 Engine speed PR055: Cold: 900 rpm perform the trouble diagnosis for
tional speed in rpm.
Warm: 805 rpm DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR.
In the event of a malfunction, K
Indicates the position of the
3 PR030: accelerator pedal as a%.
ACCEL/PDL POS = 0% L
PLY.
Engine coolant temper- WATER TEMP
4 PR064: temperature in °C. perform the trouble diagnosis for M
ature Warm: 90°C
Default value: 80°C. DTC P0115 ETC SENSOR.
Indicates the ambient air tem-
External air perature in °C. This informa-
5 PR061: EXT AIR TEMP perform the trouble diagnosis for
temperature tion is provided by BCM via
DTC P0100 MAF SENSOR.
CAN communication line.
Indicates the intake air tem-
INLET AIR TEMP
perature in °C. This informa- In the event of a malfunction,
Cold = EXT AIR
6 Inlet air temperature PR059: tion is provided by the IAT perform the trouble diagnosis for
TEMP
sensor. DTC P0070 IAT SENSOR.
Warm: 30°C
Default value: 20°C.
Indicates the fuel tank temper-
FUEL TEMP
ature in °C. This value is given In the event of a malfunction,
Cold = WATER
7 Fuel tank temperature PR063: by the fuel tank temperature perform the trouble diagnosis for
TEMP
sensor. DTC P0180 FTT SENSOR.
Warm: 50°C
EC-1681
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates the ambient baro-
metric pressure in mbar. The
sensor is incorporated in the
PR035: ATOMOS PRESS ECM. If not consistent, check ATOMOS
600 mbar < Cold < 1050 mbar PRESS, INLET PRESS (in DATA
600 mbar < Warm < 1050 MONITOR mode) and local
8 Intake air pressure
mbar ambient barometric pressure,
with the engine stopped and igni-
Indicates the pressure in the tion switch ON.
turbocharger in mbar.
PR032: INLET PRESS
INLET PRESS = local ambient
barometric pressure
Indicates the fuel rail pressure
RAIL PRESSURE in Bar. In the event of a malfunction,
9 Fuel rail pressure PR038: Cold: 260 Bar This pressure is supplied by perform the trouble diagnosis for
Warm: 230 Bar the fuel rail pressure sensor. DTC P0190 FRP SENSOR.
Default value: 2000 Bar.
START SUBFUNCTION
Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates that the ECM is sup- In the event of a malfunction,
ECM + after igni- C/U+AFTR IGN plied with a + after ignition feed. perform the trouble diagnosis for
1 ET001:
tion feed PRESENT ● Present DTC P0560 BATTERY VOLT-
● Absent AGE or P0685 ECM RELAY.
Indicates whether or not starting

has been authorized by the
ECM. If PROHIBITED perform the trou-
STARTING
2 Starting ET076: AUTHORISED: The ECM has ble diagnosis for preheating sys-
AUTHORISED
given starting authorisation. tem.
PROHIBITED: The ECM has not
given starting authorisation.
the engine.
● CRANKING
● RUNNING
MOTOR ● MAINTAINEDSUPPLY: Sup-
Engine ply maintained during the
3 Engine ET038: NONE.
+ after ignition power latch phase.
feed
● Stalled: When the engine has
stalled.
● Protected: When a malfunction
appears or when the engine
speed is limited to a certain
engine speed.
CHARGING SYSTEM.
EC-1682
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Test Condition: Engine at Idle
Parameter or status
A
check or action
Indicates that the ECM is sup-
plied with a + after ignition In the event of a malfunction, EC
Computer + after C/U+ AFTR IGN feed. perform the trouble diagnosis for
1 ET001:
ignition feed PRESENT DTC P0560 BATTERY VOLT-
● Present
AGE or P0685 ECM RELAY.
● Absent C
Indicates whether or not start-
ing has been authorized by
the ECM. D
If PROHIBITED perform the
STARTING AUTHORISED: The ECM has
2 Starting ET076: trouble diagnosis for preheating
AUTHORISED given starting authorisation.
system.
PROHIBITED: The ECM has
not given starting authorisa- E
tion.
the engine.
F
● CRANKING
● RUNNING G
● MAINTAINED
MOTOR SUPPLY: Supply main-
3 Engine ET038: Engine tained during the power NONE.
+ after ignition feed latch phase.
H
● Stalled: When the engine
has stalled.
● Protected: When a malfunc- I
tion appears or when the
engine speed is limited to a
certain engine speed. J
4 Battery voltage PR074: BATTERY VOL 13V < BATTERY VOL < 14V perform the trouble diagnosis for
CHARGING SYSTEM.
K
PROTECTION SUBFUNCTION
L
Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates the status of the immo-
bilizer system. M
● INACTIVE: The ECM has rec-
ognized the immobilizer code
ENG IMMOBILIZ transmitted by the Intelligent If ACTIVE, perform the trouble
1 Immobilizer ET003:
INACTIVE Key unit or BCM. diagnosis for NATS.
● ACTIVE: The ECM does not
recognize the immobilizer
code transmitted by the Intelli-
gent Key unit or BCM.
States whether the immobilizer
code has been programmed by
CODE PROGRAM the ECM or not.
YES ● YES: Code programmed
● NO: Code not programmed by
the ECM.
CHARGING SYSTEM.
EC-1683
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates the status of the
immobilizer system.
● INACTIVE: The ECM has
recognized the immobilizer
code transmitted by the
ENG IMMOBLIZ If ACTIVE, perform the trouble
1 Immobilizer ET003: Intelligent Key unit or BCM.
INACTIVE diagnosis for NATS.
● ACTIVE: The ECM does
not recognize the immobi-
lizer code transmitted by
the Intelligent Key unit or
BCM.
States whether the immobi-
lizer code has been pro-
grammed by the computer or
CODE PROGRAM not.
YES
● YES: Code programmed
● NO: Code not programmed
by the ECM.
3 Battery voltage PR074: BATTERY VOL 13V < BATTERY VOL < 14V perform the trouble diagnosis for
CHARGING SYSTEM.
SUB SYSTEM COLD LOOP

Parameter or status
check or action
States whether the vehicle is fit-
ted with air conditioning or not. If not consistent with the vehicle
Air conditioning PRSNC CLMTSTN ● YES: Air conditioning is equipment, perform the trouble
1 ET079:
present YES detected by the ECM. diagnosis for CAN communica-
● NO: Air conditioning is not tion line.
detected by the ECM.
The ECM requests the IPDM E/
R (via CAN communication) to
start the compressor
● ACTIVE: The CAN communi-
cation should not be sus-
pected on the Automatic
Transmission, IPDM E/R or
Intelligent Key unit or BCM
system.
The Intelligent Key unit or
Compressor DMND LNK COMP
2 ET088: BCM should request the ECM NONE.
engagement request INACTIVE
to be engaged.
The refrigerant pressure sen-
sor should not be suspected.
Satisfactory engine operating
conditions (engine coolant
temperature, engine load
etc.).
● INACTIVE: One of the above
conditions has not been ful-
filled.
EC-1684
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action A
Non operational information,
designed solely for trouble diag-
nosis purposes. EC
● YES: Satisfactory engine
operating conditions (engine
Air conditioning A/C AUTHOR
3 ET004: coolant temperature, engine NONE.
authorization YES
load etc.). The vehicle is not C
in a specific movement phase
(hill start or stop etc.).
● NO: One of the above condi- D
tions has not been fulfilled.
Indicates the value in Bar for
the refrigerant fluid in the sys- In the event of a malfunction, E
tem. perform the trouble diagnosis for
4 Refrigerant pressure PR037: RFRGERNT PRES
2 Bar < RFRGERNT PRES < 27 DTC P0530 REFRIGERANT
Bar PRESSURE SENSOR.
Default value: 0 Bar F
dtc P0335 CKP SENSOR. G
The Intelligent Key unit or BCM
requests fast idle speed to the
ECM.
In the event of a malfunction, H
● ABSENT: The Intelligent Key perform the trouble diagnosis for
Fast idle speed ACCEL IDL RQ
6 ET023: unit or BCM did not make the CAN communication line. Per-
request ABSENT
request form the trouble diagnosis for
● PRESENT: The Intelligent the Intelligent Key unit or BCM. I
Key unit or BCM has made a
request
Indicates the engine coolant In the event of a malfunction, J
Engine coolant tem- WATER TEMP
Indicates the vehicle speed in Perform the trouble diagnosis for K
kph. This parameter is transmit- CAN communication line.
ted by the “ABS actuator and Perform the trouble diagnosis for
8 Vehicle speed PR089: VEHICLE SPEED
combination meter via CAN (control unit)” or combination L
communication line. meter.
Power used by the PWR ABSOB A/C Indicates the power used by the
9 PR125: NONE.
AC compressor 0 WATT compressor M
EC-1685
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action
R to start the fan.
● INACTIVE: Engine speed = 0
rpm.
FAN UNIT LOW
10 Fan speed request* ET022: ● ACTIVE: Engine speed = idle NONE.
INACTIVE
speed, correct refrigerant
pressure and vehicle speed =
0 km/h or high engine coolant
temperature.
R to start the fans.
● INACTIVE: Engine speed = 0
rpm.
FAN UNIT HIGH
11 Fan speed request* ET021: ● ACTIVE: Engine speed = idle NONE.
INACTIVE
speed.
Refrigerant pressure > 15
Bar, vehicle speed = 0 km/h
or high coolant temperature.
*: When climate control is requested with the engine at idle speed and vehicle speed = 0 km/h, FAN UNIT LOW will always be “ACTIVE”
and FAN UNIT HIGH “INACTIVE” (except refrigerant pressure> 15 bar, vehicle speed = 0 km/h and high engine coolant temperature).
The fan is prevented from operating under certain engine coolant temperature conditions when driving.

Parameter or status
check or action
States whether the vehicle is fit-
ted with air conditioning or not. If not consistent with the vehicle
Air conditioning PRSNC CLMTSTN ● YES: Air conditioning is equipment, perform the trouble
1 ET079:
present YES detected by the ECM. diagnosis for CAN communica-
● NO: Air conditioning is not tion line.
detected by the ECM.
R (via CAN communication line)
to start the compressor
● ACTIVE: The CAN communi-
cation should not be sus-
pected on the Automatic
Transmission, IPDM E/R or
Intelligent Key unit or BCM
system.
The Intelligent Key unit or
BCM should request the ECM
Compressor DMND LNK COMP
2 ET088: to be engaged. NONE.
engagement request INACTIVE
The refrigerant pressure sen-
sor should not be suspected.
Satisfactory engine operating
conditions (engine coolant
temperature, engine load
etc.).
● INACTIVE: One of the above
conditions has not been ful-
filled or no request has been
made by the driver so A/C
AUTHOR = NO.
EC-1686
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action A
Non operational information,
designed solely for trouble diag-
nosis purposes. EC
● YES: Satisfactory engine
operating conditions (engine
coolant temperature, engine
Air conditioning autho- A/C AUTHOR load etc.). The vehicle is not in C
3 ET004: NONE.
rization YES a specific movement phase
(hill start or stop etc.).
● INACTIVE: One of the above D
conditions has not be fulfilled
or no request has been made
by the driver so DMND LNK
E
COMP = INACTIVE.
Indicates the value in Bar for the
refrigerant fluid in the system.
4 Refrigerant pressure PR037: RFRGERNT PRES 2 Bar < RFRGERNT PRES < 27 F
DTC P0530 REFRUGERANT
Bar
PRESSURE SENSOR.
ENGINE SPEED In the event of a malfunction, G
Indicates the engine's rotational
5 Engine speed PR055: Cold: 900 rpm perform the trouble diagnosis for
speed in rpm.
The Intelligent Key unit or BCM
H
requests fast idle speed from the
ECM.
● ABSENT: The Intelligent Key perform the trouble diagnosis for
Fast idle speed ACCEL IDL RQ I
6 ET023: unit or BCM did not make the CAN communication line. Per-
request ABSENT
request. form the trouble diagnosis for the
● PRESENT: The Intelligent Key Intelligent Key unit or BCM.
unit or BCM has made the J
request.
Engine coolant tem- WATER TEMP
Default value: 80°C. DTC P0115 ECT SENSOR.
K
Indicates the vehicle speed in Perform the trouble diagnosis for

kph. This parameter is transmit- CAN communication line.
ted by the “ABS actuator and Perform the trouble diagnosis for L
8 Vehicle speed PR089: VEHICLE SPEED
combination meter via CAN (control unit)” or combination
communication line. meter.
M
Power used by the AC PWR ABSOB A/C Indicates the power used by the
9 PR125: NONE.
compressor 0 WATT compressor
EC-1687
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action
R to start the fan.
● INACTIVE: The request is not
made by theECM because
DMND LNK COMP = INAC-
TIVE and A/C AUTHOR = NO.
FAN UNIT LOW ● ACTIVE: The request is made
ET022:
INACTIVE by the ECM.
DMND LNK COMP = ACTIVE
and A/C AUTHOR = YES.
(correct refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed = 0 km/h or
high engine coolant tempera-
10 Fan speed request* ture). NONE.
R to start the fan.
● INACTIVE: The request is not
made by the ECM because
DMND LNK COMP = INAC-
TIVE and A/C AUTHOR = NO.
FAN UNIT HIGH
ET021: ● ACTIVE: The request is made
INACTIVE
by the ECM.
DMND LNK COMP = ACTIVE
and A/C AUTHOR = YES.
Refrigerant pressure > 15 Bar,
vehicle speed = 0 km/h or high
engine coolant temperature.
*: When climate control is requested with the engine at idle speed and vehicle speed = 0 km/h, FAN UNIT LOW will always be “ACTIVE”
and FAN UNIT HIGH “INACTIVE” (except refrigerant pressure > 15 bar, vehicle speed = 0 km/ h and high engine coolant temperature).
The fan is prevented from operating under certain engine coolant temperature conditions when driving.
HEATING SUBFUNCTION
Parameter or status
check or action
ature Warm: 90°C

Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates the engine coolant
Engine coolant temper- WATER TEMP perform the trouble diagnosis
1 PR064: temperature in °C.
ature Warm: 90°C for DTC P0115 ECT SEN-
SOR.
EC-1688
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
FUEL CIRCUIT SUB FUNCTION
Test Condition: Engine Stopped and Ignition Switch ON A
Parameter or status
check or action
EC
FUEL TEMP
Indicates the fuel tank temper- In the event of a malfunction,
Cold = WATER
1 Fuel tank temperature RP063: ature in °C. perform the trouble diagnosis for
TEMP
Default value: 30°C. DTC P0180 FTT SENSOR.
Warm: 50°C C
Indicates the fuel flow injected
FUEL FLOW in mg/piston stroke for each
2 Fuel flow PR017: 0.0 mg/piston injector. NONE.
stroke FUEL FLOW = 0 mg/piston
D
stroke
RAIL PRESSURE Indicates the fuel rail pressure
Cold and warm: in Bar. In the event of a malfunction, E
3 Fuel rail pressure PR038: - 90 bar < RAIL This pressure is supplied by perform the trouble diagnosis for
PRESSURE < 90 the fuel rail pressure sensor. DTC P0190 FRP SENSOR.
bar Default value: 2000 Bar.
F
RAIL PRES SET
Indicates a theoretical pres-
375 bar (Engine
sure value for optimum engine
Fuel rail pressure set starting pressure
4 PR008: operation. NONE.
point instruction) G
300 bar < RAIL PRES SET <
Cold: 500 Bar
500 bar.
Warm: 300 Bar
Indicates the voltage delivered H
RAIL PRES S V by the ECM on the fuel rail
Fuel rail pressure sen-
5 PR080: Cold: 0.5V pressure sensor. NONE.
sor voltage
Cold: 4.5V 0.5V < RAIL PRES S V < 4.5V
Default value: 4.5V I
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR. J
Parameter or status
Order Function Display and notes Trouble diagnosis K
check or action
FUEL TEMP
Indicates the fuel tank temper- In the event of a malfunction,
Cold = WATER
1 Fuel tank temperature PR063: ature in °C. perform the trouble diagnosis for
TEMP L
Default value: 30°C. DTC P0180 FTT SENSOR.
Warm: 50°C
FUEL FLOW
10 < Cold < 2 mg/ Indicates the fuel flow injected M
2 Fuel flow PR017: piston stroke in mg/piston stroke for each NONE.
4 < Warm < 6 mg/ injector.
piston stroke
Indicates the fuel rail pressure
RAIL PRESSURE in Bar. In the event of a malfunction,
3 Fuel rail pressure PR038: Cold: 260 Bar This pressure is supplied by perform the trouble diagnosis for
Warm: 230 Bar the fuel rail pressure sensor. DTC P0190 FRP SENSOR.
RAIL PRES SET
375 bar. (Engine
Indicates a theoretical pres-
Fuel rail pressure set starting pressure
4 PR008: sure value for optimum engine NONE.
point specification).
operation.
Cold: 260 Bar
Warm: 230 Bar
EC-1689
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates the voltage delivered
by the ECM on the fuel rail
Fuel rail pressure sen-
5 PR080: RAIL PRES S V pressure sensor. NONE.
sor voltage
0.5 V (0 bar) < RAIL PRES S
V < 4.5 V (1600 bar)
6 Engine speed PR055: Cold: 900 rpm V perform the trouble diagnosis for
Warm: 805 rpm DTC P0115 ECT SENSOR.
PRE-HEATING/IGNITION SUBFUNCTION
Parameter or status
check or action
ature Warm: 90°C
INLET AIR TEMP
Cold = EXT AIR
2 Intake air temperature PR059: tion is provided by the IAT perform the trouble diagnosis for
TEMP
Warm: 30°C
CHARGING SYSTEM.

Parameter or status
check or action
ature Warm: 90°C
Indicates the ambient air tem-
External air perature in °C. This informa-
2 PR061: EXT AIR TEMP perform the trouble diagnosis for
temperature tion is provided by BCM via
DTC P0100 MAF SENSOR.
CAN communication line.
INLET AIR TEMP Indicates the intake air temper-
Cold = EXT AIR ature in °C. This information is
3 Intake air temperature PR059: perform the trouble diagnosis for
TEMP provided by the IAT sensor.
DTC P0070 IAT SENSOR.
Warm: 30°C Default value: 30°C.
4 Battery voltage PR074: BATTERY VOL 12 V < BATTERY VOL < 14.4V perform the trouble diagnosis for
CHARGING SYSTEM.
AIR CIRC SUBFUNCTION (TURBOCHARGING/INLET.)

Parameter or status
check or action
INLET AIR TEMP
Cold = EXT AIR
1 Intake air temperature PR059: tion is provided by the IAT perform the trouble diagnosis for
TEMP
Warm: 30°C
EC-1690
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action A
Indicates the ambient baro- If not consistent, check ATO-
metric pressure in mbar. The MOS PRESS, INLET PRESS (in
PR035: ATOMOS PRESS
sensor is incorporated in the DATA MONITOR mode) and EC
2 Intake air pressure ECM. local ambient barometric pres-
Indicates the pressure in the sure, with the engine stopped
PR032: INLET PRESS and ignition switch ON.
C
Mass air flow estimated by the
3 Air flow PR132: AIR FLOW NONE.
ECM.
Indicates the voltage delivered D
4 PR081: INLET TMP S V by the ECM to supply the NONE.
sensor voltage
intake air temperature sensor.
Indicates the engine's rota- E
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR.

F
Parameter or status
check or action
INLET AIR TEMP Indicates the intake air tem-
In the event of a malfunction, G
Cold = EXT AIR perature in °C. This informa-
1 Intake air temperature PR059: perform the trouble diagnosis for
TEMP tion is provided by the IAT
DTC P0070 IAT SENSOR.
Warm: 30°C sensor. Default value: 30°C.
Indicates the ambient baro- H
If not consistent, check ATO-
metric pressure in mbar. The MOS PRESS, INLET PRESS (in
PR035: ATOMOS PRESS
sensor is incorporated in the DATA MONITOR mode) and
2 Air circuit pressure ECM. local ambient barometric pres- I
Indicates the pressure in the sure, with the engine stopped
PR032: INLET PRESS and ignition switch ON.
AIR FLOW J
350 < Cold< 400
Air flow estimated by the
3 Air flow PR132: mg/piston stroke NONE.
ECM.
300 < Warm < 350
mg/piston stroke K
Indicates the voltage delivered
Intake temperature
4 PR081: INLET TMP S V by the computer to supply the NONE.
sensor voltage
inlet temperature sensor L
5 Engine speed PR055: Cold: 900 rpm V perform the trouble diagnosis for
M
ENGINE COOLING SUB FUNCTION
Parameter or status
check or action
ature Warm: 90°C
Default value: 80°C DTC P0115 ECT SENSOR.

Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates theengine coolant In the event of a malfunction,
ature Warm: 90°C
Default value: 80 °C. DTC P0115 ECT SENSOR.
EC-1691
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
DRIVER PARAMETERS SUB FUNCTION
Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates the percentage of the
accelerator pedal position
1 PR030: between no load and full load
position.
0% < ACCEL/PDL POS < 100%
PLY.
PL PTNMR T1 V In the event of a malfunction,
PR086: Indicates the voltage supply per-
16% perform the trouble diagnosis for
Accelerator pedal centage for the accelerator
APP SENSOR (DTC P0225,
2 position sensor volt- pedal position sensor 1 and 2.
PL PTNMR T2 V P0651 and P2120) and DTC
age PR088: 10% < PL PTNMR T1 V < 20%
7% P0641 SENSOR POWER SUP-
5% < PL PTNMR T2 V < 15%
PLY.

Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates the percentage of the
Accelerator pedal ACCEL/PDL POS
position 0%
position.
0% < ACCEL/PDL POS < 100%
PL PTNMR T1 V In the event of a malfunction,
PR086: Indicates the voltage supply
16% perform the trouble diagnosis for
Accelerator pedal percentage for the accelerator
APP SENSOR (DTC P0225,
2 position sensor volt- pedal position sensor 1 and 2.
PL PTNMR T2 V P0651 and P2120) and DTC
age PR088: 10% < PL PTNMR T1 V < 20%
7% P0641 SENSOR POWER SUP-
5% < PL PTNMR T2 V < 15%
PLY.
ANTIPOLLUTION/OBD SUBFUNCTION
Parameter or status
check or action
Indicates the condition of the
EGR volume control.
EGR SOL/V CNT ● INACTIVE: The valve is not
1 EGR volume control ET008: NONE.
INACTIVE controlled by the ECM.
● ACTIVE: The valve is con-
trolled by the ECM.
MOS PRESS, INLET PRESS (in
Indicates the ambient baromet-
Ambient barometric DATA MONITOR mode) and
2 PR035: ATOMOS PRESS ric pressure in mbar. The sen-
pressure local ambient barometric pres-
sor is incorporated in the ECM.
sure, with the engine stopped
and ignition switch ON.
3 Mass air flow PR132: AIR FLOW Air flow estimated by the ECM. NONE.
FUEL FLOW
Indicates the fuel flow out of the
4 Fuel flow PR017: 0.0 mg/piston NONE.
fuel pump in mg/piston stroke.
stroke
Indicates a theoretical EGR vol-
ume control valve opening
EGR/V OPN REF
EGR volume control value for optimum engine oper-
5 PR005: Warm or cold NOTE.
valve control ation.
= - 50
EGR/V OPN REF = EGR PO
RECOPY
EC-1692
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
check or action A
Indicates the actual value of the
EGR PO RECOPY EGR volume control valve posi-
EGR volume control
6 PR051: Warm or cold tion. NOTE. EC
valve position feedback
= - 50 EGR PO RECOPY = EGR/V
OPN REF
Indicates the EGR volume con-
trol valve control position sen-
C
sor voltage according to the
valve position.
EGR volume control
EGR POS SE VO ● INACTIVE: The valve is not D
7 valve control position PR077: NOTE.
1.09 V controlled by the ECM
sensor voltage
trolled by the ECM. E
0.5V < EGR POS SE VO <
4.8V
Indicates the percentage of the F
position.
ACCEL/PDL POS = 0% G
PLY.
ature Warm: 90°C H

Order
Parameter or status
Display and notes Trouble diagnosis I
check or action
Indicates the condition of the
EGR volume control. J
EGR SOL/V CNT ● INACTIVE: The valve is not
1 EGR volume control ET008: NONE.
INACTIVE controlled by the ECM.
K
trolled by the ECM.
Indicates the ambient baro- MOS PRESS, INLET PRESS (in
Ambient barometric metric pressure in mbar. The DATA MONITOR mode) and L
2 PR035: ATOMOS PRESS
pressure sensor is incorporated in the local ambient barometric pres-
ECM. sure, with the engine stopped
and ignition switch ON.
M
AIR FLOW
350 < Cold < 400
3 Air flow PR132: mg/piston stroke Air flow estimated by the ECM. NONE.
300 < Warm< 350
mg/piston stroke
FUEL FLOW
10 < Cold < 12 Indicates the fuel flow out of
4 Fuel flow PR017: mg/piston stroke the fuel pump in mg/piston NONE.
4 < Warm < 6 stroke.
mg/piston stroke
Indicates a theoretical EGR
EGR volume control EGR/V OPN REF volume control valve opening
5 PR005: NONE.
valve control Warm: 20% value for optimum engine
operation.
Indicates the actual value of
EGR volume control EGR PO RECOPY the EGR volume control valve
6 PR051: NONE.
valve position feedback Warm: approx. 20% position.
Default value: 30%
EC-1693
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
Parameter or status
Order Display and notes Trouble diagnosis
check or action
Indicates the EGR volume
control valve control position
sensor voltage according to
the valve position.
EGR volume control ● INACTIVE: The valve is not
7 valve control position PR077: EGR POS SE VO NONE.
controlled by the ECM.
sensor voltage
trolled by the ECM.
0.5 V < EGR POS SE VO <
4.8 V
Indicates the percentage of the perform the trouble diagnosis for
Accelerator pedal ACCEL/PDL POS pedal position between no APP SENSOR (DTC P0225,
8 PR030:
position 0% load and full load position P0651 and P2120) and DTC
0 < ACCEL/PDL POS < 100% P0641 SENSOR POWER SUP-
PLY.
ature Warm: 90°C
Remarks:
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer Almost the same speed as the
ENGINE SPEED
indication. tachometer indication
IDLE REG REF Approximately 800 rpm
● Shift lever: Neutral position
● No load
ACCEL/PDL POS Accelerator pedal: Fully released Approximately 0%
(Engine stopped)
WATER TEMP ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
FUEL TEMP ● Engine: After warming up More than 40°C (104°F)
BATTERY VOL ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
Altitude
Approx. 0m: Approx. 100.62 kPa
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2 , 14.59 psi)
Approx. 1,000 m: Approx. 88.95 kPa
ATMOS PRESS ● Ignition switch: ON (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2 , 12.90 psi)
(0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2 , 12.06 psi)
(0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2 , 11.36 psi)
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approximately 980 mbar
INLET PRESS
● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm Approximately 1,010 mbar
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approximately 200 mg/cp
AIR FLOW
● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm Approximately 270 mg/cp
● No load
EC-1694
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
A
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the Almost the same speed as the speed-
VEHICLE SPEED
speedometer indication ometer indication
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approximately 230 bar
EC
RAIL PRESSURE
● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm Approximately 450 bar
● No load
C
RAIL PRES SET
● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm Approximately 450 bar D
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approximately 4.9 mg/cp
FUEL FLOW
● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 mg/cp
● No load
F
EGR PO RECOPY Idle Approximately -50 %
G
● No load
● Air conditioner switch: OFF H
EGR/V OPN REEF Idle Approximately -50 %
● No load
● Engine: After warming up I
REFGERNT PRSS Idle Approximately 5.7 bar
● No load
J

PWR ABSOB A/C Idle Approximately 0 W K
● No load
● Ignition switch: ON L
PL PTNMR T1 V Accelerator pedal: Fully released Approximately 15 %
(Engine stopped)
(Engine stopped)
M
EGR POS SE VO Idle Approximately 3.56 V
● No load
INLET TMP S V Idle Approximately 1.6 V
● No load
EC-1695
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[K9K]
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approximately 1 V
RAIL PRES S V
● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm Approximately 1.5 V
● No load
H R ATHD MX P Idle Approximately 20 W
● No load
EC-1696
[K9K]
A
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the incident resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns
to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's com- EC
plaint often do not recur on DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent incidents
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indi-
cate the specific malfunctioning area. C
1. INSPECTION START D
Erase DTCs. Refer to EC-1628, "How to Erase DTC" .

E
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
H
TESTS”. I
OK or NG
J
EC-1697
[K9K]
MBWA1564E
EC-1698
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE C
(11 - 14V)
26 B ECM ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V D
27 B ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
32 B ECM ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch OFF] F
Approximately 1.4V
[Ignition switch OFF] G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
109 G BATTERY VOLTAGE H
110 G (11 - 14V)

I
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> GO TO 2. K

L
SULT-II or tester. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB1461E
EC-1699
[K9K]
● 10A fuse

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body.
– Body ground (1)
– Priming pump (2)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
MBIB1520E
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHOR

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 25, 26, 27, 32 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-1759, "DTC P0231 FUEL PUMP" .
NG >> GO TO 7.
MBIB1462E
EC-1700
[K9K]
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 109, 110 and ground EC
C
drop to approximately 0V.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more then a few seconds)>>GO TO E
11. MBIB1463E

F
CONSULT-II or tester. G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 11.
I
PBIB1171E
J
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
K
L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 10.

EC-1701
[K9K]
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 29 under the following con-
ditions.
MBIB1559E
CONDITION 1: Continuity should exist.

CONDITION 2: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

● Diode E64
13. CHECK 20A FUSE

1. Disconnect 20 A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
EC-1702
[K9K]
– Body ground (1)
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 15.
D
MBIB1520E
E
15. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 25, 26, 27, 32 and ground.
OK or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

OK or NG J
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
Ground Inspection BBS00416
L
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even M
EC-1703
[K9K]
PBIB1870E
EC-1704
DTC PC001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[K9K]
DTC PC001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:22693
A
Description BBS0041O
D
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Possible cause
MULTIPLEX NETWORK (CAN COMMUNICATION LINE)
PC001 (CAN communication line is open or
● 1.DEF: Carry out the multiplex network toruoble diagnosis E
shorted)
NOTE:
● Special notes: F
– Malfunction indicator (Red) lights up.
EC-1705
[K9K]
MBWA1568E
EC-1706
[K9K]
A
Go to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Unit" .
EC
EC-1707
DTC P0016 CKP - CMP CORRELATION
[K9K]
DTC P0016 CKP - CMP CORRELATION PFP:10328
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0041T

(CMP sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(CKP sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELA-
P0016 ● Camshaft position sensor
TION
● Crankshaft position sensor
● Timing belt
● Signal plate
NOTE:
● If DTC P0016 is displayed with DTC P0335 or P0340, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335
or P0340. Refer to EC-1774, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR" or EC-1778, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR" .
● Conditions for applying the diagnostic procedure to the stored DTCs:
The DTC is declared present when cranking the engine or at idle speed.
1. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor.
2. CHECK SPROCKET
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate or replace sprocket.
3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor.
4. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK TIMING BELT

Refer to EM-272, "TIMING BELT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace timing belt.
EC-1708
DTC P0016 CKP - CMP CORRELATION
[K9K]
EC-1709
DTC P0045 TC BOOST CONTROL SORENOID VALVE
[K9K]
DTC P0045 TC BOOST CONTROL SORENOID VALVE PFP:14956
Description BBS0041W
The turbocharger boost control solenoid valve controls vacuum sig-

nal to the turbocharger boost control actuator. By changing the vari-
able nozzle vane opening through the rods, the intake air volume is
adjusted.
MBIB1521E
The turbocharger boost control solenoid valve (1) is moved by ON/

OFF pulse from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the charge air
pressure rises.
MBIB1522E

(The solenoid valve circuit is open or
TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT shorted.)
P0045 ● C0.0: Open circuit oe short circuit to ground ● Turbocharger boost control solenoid valve
● CC.1: Short circuit to +12V ● Turbocharger
● Air inlet circuit
NOTE:
The DTC is declared present when ignition switch is in the ON position.
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, air flow regulation is cut, EGR voluime control valve is closed and turbocharger
boost pressure regulation is cut.
– Suspected injection message displayed on the instrument panel and reduced performance.
EC-1710
[K9K]
EC
MBWA1567E
EC-1711
[K9K]
Specification data are reference valves, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the
ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
0 - 12.5V

● Idle speed
MBIB1504E
Turbocharger boost control
35 R
solenoid valve
0 - 12.5V

MBIB1505E

Approximately 1.4V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
110 G (11 - 14V)
EC-1712
[K9K]
1. CHECK TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect turbocharger boost control solenoid valve (1) har- EC
ness connector.
C
MBIB1522E
E
4. Check voltage between turbocharger boost control solenoid

valve terminals 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
MBIB1101E
I
● Harness for open and short between turbocharger boost control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
K
3. CHECK TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR L
OPEN AND SHORT
M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and turbocharger boost control solenoid valve termi-
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace turbocharger boost control solenoid valve.
EC-1713
[K9K]
5. CHECK OTHER ITEMS
● Turbocharger
● Air inlet circuit (for obstructions, etc.)
● Turbocharger boost pressure sensor signal
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

1. Disconnect turbocharger boost control solenoid valve (1) har-
ness connector.
MBIB1522E
2. Check harness continuity between turbocharger boost control

solenoid valve terminals under the following conditions.
-30 (-22) 18.6 ± 1.8
23 (73) 21 ± 2.1
110 (230) 18 ± 1.8
If NG, replace turbocharger boost control solenoid valve.
MBIB1486E
EC-1714
DTC P0070 IAT SENSOR
[K9K]
DTC P0070 IAT SENSOR PFP:22693
A
The intake air temperature sensor (1) is built into mass air flow sen-
sor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal EC
to the ECM.
MBIB1523E
E

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors F
P0070 ● CO.1: Open circuit or short circuit to +12V (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● CC.1: Short circuit to ground ● Intake air temperature sensor
G
EC-1715
[K9K]
MBWA1547E
EC-1716
[K9K]

2. Loosen and retighten ground screw on the body. EC
– Body ground (1)
– Priming pump (2) C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. D
MBIB1520E
E

F
– : Vehicle front G
– Turbocharger boost sensor (1)
– EGR volume control valve (3)
2. Turn ignition switch ON. H
I
MBIB1524E

CONSULT-II or tester. J
Voltage: Approximately 5.0V

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
L
MBIB1464E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1717
[K9K]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 1 and
2 under the following conditions.
-40 (-40) 50,000 ± 6,800
-10 (14) 9,500 ± 900
25 (77) 2,051 ± 120
50 (122) 810 ± 47
80 (176) 310 ± 17
MBIB1487E
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).

EC-1718
DTC P0087 FUEL SYSTEM
[K9K]
DTC P0087 FUEL SYSTEM PFP:22693
A

EC
● Fuel pump
● Fuel injector
● Fuel rail pressure sensor
C
P0087 FUEL FLOW CAPACITY FUNCTION ● Fuel filter
● Air mixed with fuel
● Lack of fuel D
● Fuel line
NOTE:
● Special notes: E
F
1. CHECK FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-1664, "TEST 7: HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM CHECK" . G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace fuel rail. H

Refer to EC-1662, "TEST 3: FUEL INJECTOR CHECK" . I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. J
3. REPLACE FUEL INJECOR

K
1. Replace fuel injector of malfunctioning cylinder.
2. Perform Injector Adjustment Value Registration. Refer to EC-1625, "Injector Adjustment Value Registra-
tion" .
L
>> INSPECTION END
4. CHECK FUEL PUMP M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.

Refer to EC-1666, "TEST 11: FUEL FILTER CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace fuel filter.
EC-1719
DTC P0087 FUEL SYSTEM
[K9K]
6. CHECK FUEL LINE
Refer to EC-1660, "TEST 1: LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair fuel line.
7. PERFORM HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM CHECK

Refer to EC-1664, "TEST 7: HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM CHECK" .
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-266, "FUEL INJECTOR" .
FUEL PUMP
Refer to EM-268, "HIGH PRESSURE PUMP" .
EC-1720
DTC P0089 FUEL PUMP
[K9K]
DTC P0089 FUEL PUMP PFP:16700
A

EC
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE REGULATION FUNCTION
● 1.DEF: At minimum limit
● 2.DEF: At maximum limit
● Fuel pump C
● 3.DEF: Below minimum threshold
● Air mixed with fuel
P0089 ● 4.DEF: Above maximum threshold
● Lack of fuel
● 5.DEF: High flow current < minimum D
● 5.DEF: High flow current > maximum
● 7.DEF: Low flow current < minimum
● 8.DEF: Low flow current > maximum E
NOTE:
● Special notes:
F
1. CHECK FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace fuel rail.
I
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP
Perform EC-1762, "Component Inspection" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace Fuel pump.
K
Refer to EC-1666, "TEST 11: FUEL FILTER CHECK" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace fuel filter. M
4. CHECK FUEL LINE
Refer to EC-1665, "TEST 8: HIGH-PRESSURE CIRCUIT LEAK CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair fuel line.
5. PERFORM HIGH PRESSURE SYSTEM CHECK

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation BBS0042G
FUEL PUMP
EC-1721
DTC P0100 MAF SENSOR
[K9K]
DTC P0100 MAF SENSOR PFP:22693
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air.
● Intake air temperature sensor (1)
MBIB1523E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0042I

● Engine: After warming up Idle Approximately 200 mg/cp
AIR FLOW
● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm Approximately 270 mg/cp
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0042J

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR CIRCUIT
● 1.DEF: Parmanent low lebel ● Harness or connectors
● 2.DEF: Parmanent high lebel (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0100 ● 3.DEF: Below minimum threshold ● Mass air flow sensor
● 4.DEF: Above maximum threshold ● Air filter obstructed
● 5.DEF: Parmanent at minimum limit ● Intake air duct obstructed
● 6.DEF: Parmanent at maximum limit
NOTE:
● If DTC P0100 is displayed with DTC P0235, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0235. Refer to
EC-1763, "DTC P0235 TC BOOST SENSOR" .
The DTC is declared present with engine running.
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, mass air flow sensor function will stop and EGR voluime control valve is closed.
EC-1722
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0042L
EC
MBWA1548E
EC-1723
[K9K]
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
Sensor power supply
50 L [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5.0V
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0.36V
[Engine is running]
60 Y Mass air flow sensor ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,500 rpm.
[Engine is running]
Mass air flow sensor
ground
● Idle speed
Approximately 1.4V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
110 G (11 - 14V)
1. CHECK AIR FILTER

Check that air filter is not obsstructed.
Yes or No
Yes >> Repair.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR DUCT

Check that intake air duct is not obsstructed.
Yes or No
Yes >> Repair.
No >> GO TO 3.
EC-1724
[K9K]
– Body ground (1)
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 4.
D
MBIB1520E
E
4. CHECK MAFS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
F
– : Vehicle front
– Turbocharger boost sensor (1)
– EGR volume control valve (3) G
MBIB1524E
I
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminals 4, 5 and
J
Terminal Voltage
4: Battery voltage
5: Approximately 5.0V K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. L
MBIB1465E

EC-1725
[K9K]
6. CHECK MAFS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK MAFS INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END


signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
Engine speed: Idle Approx. 1.7
Engine speed: 2,500 rpm Approx. 2.2
4. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor.
SEC915C
Removal and Installation BBS0042O

EC-1726
DTC P0115 ECT SENSOR
[K9K]
DTC P0115 ECT SENSOR PFP:22693
A
Description BBS0042P
The engine coolant temperature sensor (1) is used to detect the

engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal EC
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine
coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is
sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of
the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. C
MBIB1525E
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0042Q

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors F
P0115 ● CC.0: Short circuit to ground (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● CO.1: Short circuit to +12V or open circuit ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
G
NOTE:
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, cooling fan motor is activated at low speed for vehicles fitted with air conditioning. H
EC-1727
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0042S
MBWA1549E
EC-1728
[K9K]
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0042T

– Body ground (1)
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1520E
E

F
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor (1) harness con-
nector.
G
I
MBIB1525E


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
L
MBIB1466E
M
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 63.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1729
[K9K]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0042U

-40 (-40) 76,000 ± 7,000
-10 (14) 12,500 ± 1,130
25 (77) 2,252 ± 112
50 (122) 810 ± 40
80 (176) 280 ± 8
110 (230) 115 ± 3 MBIB1488E
120 (248) 88 ± 2
Removal and Installation BBS0042V

EC-1730
DTC P0170 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE
[K9K]
DTC P0170 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE PFP:22693
A

● Injector Adjustment Value is not registered EC
P0170 INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE DATA ERROR
sufficiently
NOTE:
C
● If DTC P0170 is displayed with DTC P0200, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, first perform trouble diag-
nosis for other DTC. Refer to EC-1740, "DTC P0200 FUEL INJECTOR" or EC-1745, "DTC P0201 -
P0204 FUEL INJECTOR" .
D
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0042Z
1. PERFORM INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE REGISTRATION

E
Perform Injector Adjustment Value Registration. Refer to EC-1625, "Injector Adjustment Value Registration" .
>> INSPECTION END F
EC-1731
DTC P0180 FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR
[K9K]
DTC P0180 FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR PFP:22693
Fuel pump temperature sensor is built in the fuel pump. The sensor detects the fuel temperature in the fuel
pump and calibrates the fuel injection amount change by fuel temperature.

FUEL TEMP SEN ● Engine: After warming up More than 40°C (104°F)

FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors
P0180 ● CC.0: Short circuit to ground (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● CO.1: Short circuit to +12V or open circuit ● Fuel pump temperature sensor
EC-1732
[K9K]
EC
MBWA1550E
EC-1733
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.

Fuel pump temperature
54 P Output voltage varies with fuel
sensor ● Warm-up condition pump temperature
[Engine is running]
Fuel pump temperature
sensor ground
● Idle speed

– Body ground (1)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1520E
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect fuel pump temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Check voltage between fuel pump temperature sensor terminal
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2245E
EC-1734
[K9K]
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between fuel pump temperature sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 64. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
4. CHECK FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 5.

H
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection BBS004UO
FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR I

1. Check resistance between fuel pump temperature sensor termi-
nals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
J
Resistence: 2.2 kΩ at 25°C (77°F)
2. If NG, replace fuel pump.
K
L
PBIB0417E
Removal and Installation BBS00436 M

FUEL PUMP
EC-1735
DTC P0190 FRP SENSOR
[K9K]
DTC P0190 FRP SENSOR PFP:22693

MONITOR CONDITION SPECIFICATOIN
RAIL PRESSURE
● No load
RAIL PRES SET
● No load

FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
● 1.DEF: Inconsistency
● 2.DEF: Below minimum threshold ● Harness or connectors
P0190 ● 3.DEF: Above maximum threshold (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● 4.DEF: Value outside of tolerance ● Fuel rail pressure sensor
● CC.0: Short circuit to ground
● CO.1: Short circuit to +12V or open circuit
NOTE:
The DTC is declared present after the engine started.
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, engine stops and is impossible to restarted.
EC-1736
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0043B
EC
MBWA1551E
EC-1737
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
57 R Fuel rail pressure sensor
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0043C
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

– Body ground (1)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1520E
2. CHECK FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect fuel rail pressure sensor harness connector.
3. Check voltage between fuel rail pressure sensor terminal 3
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
MBIB1467E
EC-1738
[K9K]
3. CHECK FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between fuel rail pressure sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. D
4. CHECK FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 57 and fuel rail pressure sensor terminal 1.
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
H
5. CHECK FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace fuel rail.
J
>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection BBS0043D
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Reconnect harness connector disconnected.
M
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 57 (Fuel rail pressure
sensor signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Condition Voltage V
Idle Approximately 1.0
2,000 rpm Approximately 1.5
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect fuel rail pressure
sensor harness connector and connect it again. Then repeat
above check.
5. If NG, replace fuel rail. MBIB1539E
Removal and Installation BBS0043E
FUEL RAIL
Refer to EM-267, "INJECTOR RAIL" .
EC-1739
DTC P0200 FUEL INJECTOR
[K9K]
DTC P0200 FUEL INJECTOR PFP:16600
Component Description BBS004UP
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit,
the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to flow
through the fuel injector into the cylinder. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse
duration based on engine fuel needs.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004UQ

FUEL FLOW
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0043F

FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors
P0200 ● CC.0: Short circuit to ground (The fuel injector circuit is shorted.)
● CC.1: Short circuit to +12V ● Fuel injector
NOTE:
● If DTC P0200 is displayed with DTC P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, first perform trouble diagnosis
for other DTC. Refer to EC-1745, "DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR" .
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, the engine stops.
EC-1740
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS004TT
EC
MBWA1553E
EC-1741
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
0 - 9V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
73 B/P Fuel injector No. 2 idle.
MBIB1512E
0 - 9V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1513E
5 - 10V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
74 O The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
No. 2
Fuel injector power supply idle.
76 V
No. 4 MBIB1514E

78 R 5 - 10V
No. 3
No. 1
MBIB1515E
EC-1742
[K9K]
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0043H
1. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY FOR OPEN AND SHORT CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect fuel injector (1) harness connector. EC
Terminal
Cylinder
ECM Fuel injector D
74 1 No.2
76 1 No.4
E
78 1 No.3 MBIB1526E
80 1 No.1
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 2.
H
2. CHECK FUEL INJECOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Terminal
Cylinder
ECM Fuel injector J
73 2 No.2
75 2 No.4
77 2 No.3 K
79 2 No.1

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

tion" .
>> INSPECTION END

EC-1743
[K9K]
Removal and Installation BBS004TV
FUEL INJECTOR
EC-1744
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[K9K]
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR PFP:16600
A
Component Description BBS0043I
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit,
the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to flow EC
through the fuel injector into the cylinder. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse
duration based on engine fuel needs.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0043J

D
FUEL FLOW
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0043K

F

NO. 1 CYLINDER FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT G
● CO: Open circuit
P0201 ● CC: Short circuit
● 1.DEF: At minimum stop H
● 2.DEF: At maximum stop
NO. 2 CYLINDER FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT
I
● 1.DEF: At minimum stop
● Harness or connectors J
(The fuel injector circuit is open.)
● Fuel injector
● CO: Open circuit K
● 2.DEF: At maximum stop L
P0204 ● CC: Short circuit M
NOTE:
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, the idle speed is stuck at 1,000 rpm with engine noise, unstable engine speed,
reduced engine performance.
– Malfunction indicator (Yellow) lights up.
EC-1745
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0043M
MBWA1553E
EC-1746
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
C
0 - 9V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
73 B/P Fuel injector No. 2 idle. E
MBIB1512E
0 - 9V
F
[Engine is running]
MBIB1513E
H
5 - 10V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed I
74 O The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
No. 2
Fuel injector power supply idle. J
76 V
No. 4 MBIB1514E

78 R 5 - 10V
No. 3
Fuel injector power supply K
No. 1
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm L
MBIB1515E
M
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0043N
1. CHECK DTC
Make sure that which malfunction (DTC second line indication) is displayed.
A CO or CC
B 1.DEF or 2.DEF
A or B
A >> GO TO 2.
B >> GO TO 5.
EC-1747
[K9K]
2. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY FOR OPEN AND SHORT CIRCUIT
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals corre-
sponding to the malfunctioning cylinder.
Terminal
DTC Cylinder
ECM Fuel injector
P0201 80 1 No.1
P0202 74 1 No.2 MBIB1526E
P0203 78 1 No.3
P0204 76 1 No.4

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FUEL INJECOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between the following terminals corresponding to the malfunctioning cylinder.
Terminal
DTC Cylinder
ECM Fuel injector
P0201 79 2 No.1
P0202 73 2 No.2
P0203 77 2 No.3
P0204 75 2 No.4

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1748
[K9K]
4. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT A
Check harness continuity between the following terminals corresponding to the malfunctioning cylinder. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
EC
Terminal
DTC Cylinder
Fuel injector ECM
2 Except 79 C
P0201 No.1
1 Except 80
2 Except 73
P0202 No.2 D
1 Except 74
2 Except 77
P0203 No.3
1 Except 78 E
2 Except 75
P0204 No.4
1 Except 76
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
NG >> Repair circuit short in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE H

Make sure that all injector adjustment values are registered correctly.
Refer to EC-1625, "Injector Adjustment Value Registration" .
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform Injector Adjustment Value Registration. Refer to EC-1625, "Injector Adjustment Value
Registration" . J

K
Check knock sensor shield circuit for open and short.
Refer to EC-1771, "Wiring Diagram" .
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INSTALLATION M
Check that knock sensor is installed securely on the engine.

Refer to EM-282, "OVERHAUL" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
EC-1749
[K9K]
tion" .
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0043O
FUEL INJECTOR
3. If NG, replace fuel injector.
MBIB1253E
Removal and Installation BBS0043P
FUEL INJECTOR
EC-1750
[K9K]
A
Description BBS0043Q

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensors detect the accelera- EC
tor pedal position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the
signal to determine the amount of fuel to be injected.
C
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0043R

(Engine stopped)
● Ignition switch: ON G
(Engine stopped)

H
APP SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
● CO.0: Open circuit or short circuit to ground I
● CC.1: Short circuit to +12V (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0225
● 1.DEF: Inconsistency between APP sensors 1 and 2 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) J
● 2.DEF: No signal
● 3.DEF: Blocked component
NOTE: K
● Special notes: L
– If this DTC is present, the engine speed is maintained above 1,000 rpm, the engine performance is
reduced, and malfuction indicator (Red) lights up.
– If this DTC is present with DTC P2120, the engine speed is fixed at 1,800 rpm, the engine performance is M
reduced, and malfuction indicator (Red) lights up.
EC-1751
[K9K]
LHD MODELS
MBWA1554E
EC-1752
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
Sensor ground [Engine is running] C

[Ignition switch ON] D
12 L/W E
F
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
[Engine is running]
G
Sensor ground
H
Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
I
30 W J
K
EC-1753
[K9K]
RHD MODELS
MBWA1555E
EC-1754
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.

12 L/W E
F
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
[Engine is running]
G
Sensor ground
H
Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
I
30 W J
K
1. CHCEK GROUND CONNECTIONS L

– Body ground (1)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1520E
EC-1755
[K9K]
connector (1).
MBIB1345E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB1468E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC-1756
[K9K]
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
F

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
I
J
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0043W K
1. Disconnect APP sensor harness connector (1).
● Accelerator pedal position sensor (2) L
● Accelerator pedal (3)
MBIB1345E
EC-1757
[K9K]
2. Check resistance between the APP sensor terminals 2 and 4, 1
and 5.
Terminals Resistance
2 and 4: 1.7 ± 0.9 kΩ
1 and 5: 2.4 ± 1.2 kΩ
3. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly.
MBIB1489E
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-1758
DTC P0231 FUEL PUMP
[K9K]
DTC P0231 FUEL PUMP PFP:22693
A
To control the amount of the fuel inhalation of the fuel pump, a plunger is built into the fuel pump. When the
amount of the fuel inhalation of fuel increases, the fuel pump raises the fuel exhalation pressure. As a result, EC
the fuel injection pressure is raised. When the load of the engine increases, the ECM sends a signal to the fuel
pump to raise the injection pressure.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0043Z C
D
FUEL FLOW
● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 mg/cp E
● No load

F
FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors
P0231 ● CO.0: Open circuit or short circuit to ground (The fuel pump circuit is open or shorted.) G
● CC.1: Short circuit to +12V ● Fuel pump
NOTE: H
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, the fuel pump is fully opened and the engine is stopped to prevent it from revving.
– Malfuction indicator (Red) lights up. I
EC-1759
DTC P0231 FUEL PUMP
[K9K]
MBWA1556E
EC-1760
DTC P0231 FUEL PUMP
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
C
0 - 12.5V
● Idle speed
E
MBIB1506E
39 P Fuel pump
0 - 12.5V
F
[Engine is running]
MBIB1507E
H
Approximately 1.4V
104 P ECM relay (self-shutoff) switch OFF I
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF J
110 G (11 - 14V)
K
1. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L

2. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector. M
4. Check voltage between fuel pump terminal 2 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB2605E
EC-1761
DTC P0231 FUEL PUMP
[K9K]
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump and IPDM E/R
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 39 and fuel pump terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END

FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel pump terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: 5.3 ± 0.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
3. If NG, replace fuel pump.
PBIB0417E
FUEL PUMP
EC-1762
DTC P0235 TC BOOST SENSOR
[K9K]
DTC P0235 TC BOOST SENSOR PFP:22693
A
The turbocharger boost sensor detects pressure in the exit side of

the charge air cooler. The sensor output voltage to the ECM EC
increases as pressure increases.
MBIB1527E
E

● Engine: After warming up Idle Approximately 980 mbar
INLET PRESS G
● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm Approximately 1,010 mbar
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS00448 H

TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR CIRCUIT
I
● 1.DEF: Parmanent low lebel
● 2.DEF: Parmanent high lebel
● 3.DEF: Below minimum threshold J
P0235 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● 4.DEF: Above maximum threshold
● 6.DEF: Parmanent at maximum limit K
● 7.DEF: Parmanent at minimum limit
NOTE:
L
● Special notes:
M
EC-1763
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0044A
MBWA1557E
EC-1764
[K9K]
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may damage the
ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 1.6V D
● Idle speed
58 O Turbocharger boost sensor
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 2.0V E
[Engine is running]
68 G
Sensor ground
● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V F
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0044B G

– Body ground (1) I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. J
K
MBIB1520E
EC-1765
[K9K]
2. CHECK TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect turbocharge boost sensor (1) harness connector.
MBIB1528E
3. Check voltage between turbocharge boost sensor terminal 1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
MBIB1469E
3. CHECK TURBOCHAGER BOOST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between turbocharger boost sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 68.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK TURBOCHAGER BOOST SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 58 and turbocharger boost sensor terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> Replace turbocharger boost sensor.
EC-1766
[K9K]
Removal and Installation BBS0044D
TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR A

Refer to EM-247, "CHARGE AIR COOLER" .
EC
EC-1767
DTC P0263, P0266, P0269, P0272 NO.1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[K9K]
DTC P0263, P0266, P0269, P0272 NO.1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE PFP:22693
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0044T

● Insufficient compression
● Incorrect valve clearance
P0263 NO. 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE
P0266 NO. 2 CYLINDER MISFIRE ● Intake air leak
P0269 NO. 3 CYLINDER MISFIRE ● EGR volume control valve
P0272 NO. 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
● The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
● Fuel injector
NOTE:
● If DTC P0263, P0266, P0269 or P0272 is displayed with DTC P0201, P0202, P0203 or P0204, first
perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0201, P0202, P0203 or P00204. Refer to EC-1745, "DTC
P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR" .
● If DTC P0263, P0266, P0269 or P0272 is displayed with DTC P0089, first perform the trouble diag-
nosis for DTC P0089. Refer to EC-1721, "DTC P0089 FUEL PUMP" .
The DTC is declared present when the engine speed is at idle speed.
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, the engine is maintained at 1,000 rpm and engine performance is reduced.
– Malfuction indicator (Red) lights up.
EC-1768
DTC P0263, P0266, P0269, P0272 NO.1 - 4 CYLINDER MISFIRE
[K9K]
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK A
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.

2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. C
2. CHECK FOR EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

D
1. Stop engine.
2. Visually check EGR volume comtrol valve.
Refer to EM-251, "EGR UNIT" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. F
Refer to EC-1750, "Component Inspection" . G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. H

I
tion" .
J
>> INSPECTION END

K
Check compression pressure.
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair.
M
Check valve clearance.
Refer to EM-292, "Valve Clearance" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1769
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
[K9K]
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) PFP:22060
Component Description BBS0044W
The knock sensor (1) is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric ele-
ment. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is con-
verted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
● Fuel rail (2)
MBIB1529E
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name Possible Cause
P0325 KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Knock sensor
NOTE:
● If DTC P0325 is displayed with DTC P0115, P0180 or P2226, first perform the trouble diagnosis for
DTC P0115, P0180 or P22264. Refer to EC-1727, "DTC P0115 ECT SENSOR" , EC-1732, "DTC P0180
FUEL PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR" or EC-1863, "DTC P2226 BARO SENSOR" .
A malfunction for these sensors could lead to an incorrect touble diagnosis on the knock sensor.
The DTC is declared present when the engine speed is at idle speed.
EC-1770
[K9K]
EC
MBWA1558E
EC-1771
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

41 — Approximately 0.2V
(Knock sensor shield circuit) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
45 O ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V
(Knock sensor)
● Idle speed

– Body ground (1)
– Primimg pump (2)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1520E
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

– Fuel rail (2)
3. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 1 and
ECM terminal 45. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG

3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 44.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1772
[K9K]
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR A
Check continuity between knock sensor terminals 1 and 2.
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
C
>> INSPECTION END

E
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-282, "OVERHAUL" .
F
EC-1773
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR
[K9K]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR PFP:23731
Description BBS0044E
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate.
The ECM receives the voltage signal from crankshaft position sensor
and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
MBIB1530E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0044F

● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer Almost the same speed as the
ENGINE SPEED
indication. tachometer indication

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
● 2.DEF: No signal ● Harness or connectors
P0335 ● 3.DEF: Too many additional teeth (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● 4.DEF: Teeth missing ● Crankshaft position sensor
● 5.DEF: Additional teeth
● 6.DEF: Too many teeth missing
NOTE:
The DTC is declared present with the engine cranking or idling.
● Special notes:
– If this DTC (with 1.DEF, 2.DEF, 3.DEF, 6.DEF) is present, the engine stops and malfunction indicator
(Red) lights up.
– If this DTC (with 4.DEF, 5.DEF) is present, the engine performance is reduced and malfunction indicator
(Red) will not light up.
EC-1774
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0044I
EC
MBWA1559E
EC-1775
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
MBIB1508E
55 R Crankshaft position sensor
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1509E
[Engine is running]
ground
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0044J

– Body ground (1)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1520E
EC-1776
[K9K]
2. CHECK CKP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (1) harness con-
nector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 65 and CKP
sensor terminal 2.
4. Also check harness for and short to ground and short to power. D
OK or NG
MBIB1531E
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CKP SENSOR INPUT SIGNALCIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 55 and CKP sensor terminal 1. F
G
2. Also check harness for and short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
4. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR I

OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor.
5. CHECK GEAR TOOTH K
Visually check for chipping flywheel gear tooth.

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace signal plate.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS0044K
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor harness connector.
2. Check resistance between crankshaft positon sensor terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: 760 Ω
3. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor.
Removal and Installation BBS0044L
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EM-257, "OIL PAN" .
EC-1777
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR
[K9K]
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR PFP:23731
Description BBS0044M
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor senses the retraction with cam-
shaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position (CMP)
sensor senses the piston position.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
change.
changes.
MBIB1532E

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
P0340 ● Camshaft position sensor
● 1.DEF: Signal absent
● Timing belt
● Signal plate
NOTE:
The DTC is declared present with the engine cranking or idling.
EC-1778
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0044P
EC
MBWA1560E
EC-1779
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
0 - 1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
MBIB1510E
56 Y Camshaft position sensor
0 - 1V
[Engine is running]
MBIB1511E
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
66 L ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V
(Camshaft position sensor)
● Idle speed
Approximately 1.4V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
110 G (11 - 14V)

– Body ground (1)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1520E
EC-1780
[K9K]
2. CHECK CMP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (1) harness con-
nector.
D
MBIB1533E
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor terminal 3 and ground with E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
MBIB1010E
H

I
● Harness continuity between camshaft position sensor and IPDM E/R J
K
4. CHECK CMP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and CMP sensor terminal 1.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 56 and CMP sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-1781
[K9K]
6. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor.
7. CHECK SPROCKET
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace sprocket.
8. CHECK TIMING BELT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace timing belt.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1782
[K9K]
Component Inspection BBS0044R
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A

3. Measure the voltage signal between ECM terminal 56 and EC
ground with CONSULT-II or tester under the followng conditions.
DATA
CONDITION C
(DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
0 - 1V
[Engine is running]
D
● Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on E
MBIB1540E
rpm at idle.
MBIB1510E
0 - 1V F
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition G
MBIB1511E
H
4. If NG, replace camshaft position sensor.
Removal and Installation BBS0044S I
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
J
EC-1783
DTC P0380 GLOW CONTROL UNIT
[K9K]
DTC P0380 GLOW CONTROL UNIT PFP:22693

P0380 GLOW PLUG DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTION (The glow control unit circuit is open.)
● Glow control unit
EC-1784
[K9K]
EC
MBWA1561E
EC-1785
[K9K]
1. CHECK GLOW CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect glow control unit harness connecetor.
3. Check voltage between glow control unit terminal 3 and ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1470E

● Harness for open and short between glow control unit and battery
3. CHECK GLOW CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 90 and glow control unit terminal 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK GLOW CONTROL UNIT INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-1786
[K9K]
5. CHECK GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT A
1. Disconnect glow plug harness connectors.
2. Check harness continuity between glow control unit terminals 1, 2, 6, 7 and glow plug teminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

Refer to EC-1697, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . E
OK or NG
OK >> Replace glow control unit
NG >> Repair or replace. F
EC-1787
[K9K]
DTC P0382 GLOW CONTROL UNIT PFP:22693

GLOW CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors
P0382 ● CC.1: Short circuit to +12V (The glow control unit circuit is open or shorted.)
● CO.0: Open circuit or short circuit to ground ● Glow control unit
NOTE:
● Special note:
– If this DTC is present, engine starting is difficult (or impossible when cold).
– If this DTC (with CO.0) is present, continuous operation of the glow plugs permanently controlled with risk
of being damaged and risk of damaging the engine.
EC-1788
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0045A
EC
MBWA1561E
EC-1789
[K9K]
1. CHECK GLOW CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect glow control unit harness connecetor.
3. Check voltage between glow control unit terminal 3 and ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1470E

● Harness for open and short between glow control unit and battery
3. CHECK GLOW CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK GLOW CONTROL UNIT INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> Replace glow control unit
EC-1790
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION
[K9K]
DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION PFP:14710
A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0045E

EGR PO ● Air conditioner switch: OFF
RECOPY
Idle Approximately -50 % C
● No load
● Engine: After warming up D
EGR/V OPN ● Air conditioner switch: OFF
Idle Approximately -50 %
REEF ● Shift lever: Neutral position
● No load E
● Shift lever: Neutral position F
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0045F

G
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors

(The EGR volume control valve circuit is open H
● 1.DEF: Parameter at minimum level
or shorted.)
● 2.DEF: Parameter at maximum level
P0400 ● EGR volume control valve stuck
● 3.DEF: Inconsistency I
● EGR volume control valve control position
● 4.DEF: Valve jammed sensor
● 5.DEF: Valve clogged ● EGR passage clogged
J
NOTE:
K
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, the engine will be unsteady, with popssible stalling. Starting malfunctions, or even
impossible when cold.
L
M
EC-1791
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0045H
MBWA1562E
EC-1792
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
● Idle speed
E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
40 W EGR volume control valve F
[Engine is running]
G
Sensor power supply
H
[Engine is running]
59 L I
control position sensor [Engine is running]
● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm J
control position sensor) ● Idle speed K
EC-1793
[K9K]
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0045I
1. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect EGR volume control valve (1) harness connector.
– Brake fluid reservoir (2)
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR vol-
ume control valve terminals as follows.
ECM terminal EGR volume control valve terminal
37 2
40 6 MBIB1535E
49 1
59 5
69 3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve.
3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK EGR PASSAGE

Check the following for clogging and cracks.
● EGR tube
● EGR hose
● EGR cooler
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace EGR passage.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1794
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
[K9K]
DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE PFP:14710
A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0045M

RECOPY
Idle Approximately -50 % C
● No load
● Engine: After warming up D
● No load E
● Shift lever: Neutral position F
● No load

G
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors

(The EGR volume control valve circuit is open H
● CC.1: Short circuit to +12V
or shorted.)
P0403 ● CO.0: Open circuit or short circuit to ground
● EGR volume control valve stuck closed
● CO: Open circuit I
● EGR volume control valve control positiom
● 1.DEF: Overheat detection sensor
NOTE:
J
The DTC is declared present with engine running at idle speed.
● Special notes:
K
– If this DTC is present, the engine is difficult to start, or even impossible when cold.
– Malfunction indicator (Yellow) lights up. L
EC-1795
[K9K]
MBWA1562E
EC-1796
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
● Idle speed
E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
G
Sensor power supply
H
[Engine is running]
59 L I
EC-1797
[K9K]

37 2
40 6 MBIB1535E
49 1
59 5
69 3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

● EGR tube
● EGR hose
● EGR cooler
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1798
[K9K]
Component Inspection BBS0045R
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE A

● Brake fluid reservoir (2)
2. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminals EC

2 and 6.
Resistance: 8 ± 2.3 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
C
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.
D
MBIB1535E
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

E
2. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminals F

1 and 3.
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve. G
H
MBIB1535E
Removal and Installation BBS0045S
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE I

Refer to EM-251, "EGR UNIT" .
EC-1799
DTC P0409 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
[K9K]
PFP:22693
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0047K

RECOPY ● Shift lever: Neutral position
● No load
● No load
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0047L
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Possible Cause

EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION
(The EGR volume control valve control position
SENSOR CIRCUIT
P0409 sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● 1.DEF: Above maximum threshold
● EGR volume control valve control position sensor
● 1.DEF: Below minimum threshold
● EGR volume control valve stuck
NOTE:
● If this DTC is displayed with DTC P0641, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0641. Refer
to EC-1830, "DTC P0641 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
EC-1800
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0047N
EC
MBWA1562E
EC-1801
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
40 W EGR volume control valve
[Engine is running]
Sensor power supply
[Engine is running]
59 L

control position sensor) ● Idle speed
EC-1802
[K9K]
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0047O
1. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect EGR volume control valve (1) harness connector. EC
C
D
37 2
40 6 MBIB1535E
E
49 1
59 5
F
69 3

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. H
2. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE I

OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION SENSOR K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK EGR PASSAGE M

● EGR tube
● EGR hose
● EGR cooler
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1803
[K9K]
Component Inspection BBS004UR
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

2. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminals

2 and 6.
MBIB1535E

2. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminals

1 and 3.
MBIB1535E
Removal and Installation BBS004US
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

EC-1804
[K9K]
PFP:22693 A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS0047R
Specification data are reference values. EC

EGR PO ● Air conditioner switch: OFF C
RECOPY ● Shift lever: Neutral position
● No load
D

E
● No load
● Air conditioner switch: OFF F
● No load
G
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Possible Cause

● Harness or connectors H
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE CONTROL POSITION
(The EGR volume control valve control position
SENSOR CIRCUIT
P0487 sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● CO.0: Short circuit to ground or open circuit
● EGR volume control valve control position sensor I
● CC.1: Short circuit to +12V
● EGR volume control valve stuck
NOTE:
● If this DTC is displayed with DTC P0641, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0641. Refer J
to EC-1830, "DTC P0641 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
● Special notes:
– Malfunction indicator (Yellow) lights up. K
EC-1805
[K9K]
MBWA1562E
EC-1806
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
● Idle speed
E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
G
Sensor power supply
H
[Engine is running]
59 L I
EC-1807
[K9K]

37 2
40 6 MBIB1535E
49 1
59 5
69 3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

● EGR tube
● EGR hose
● EGR cooler
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1808
[K9K]
Component Inspection BBS004UT
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE A

2. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminals EC

2 and 6.
C
D
MBIB1535E

E
2. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminals F

1 and 3.
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve. G
H
MBIB1535E
Removal and Installation BBS004UU
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE I

EC-1809
DTC P0500 VSS
[K9K]
Description BBS0045T
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communi-
cation line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0045U

(The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
P0500 VEHICLE SPEED INFORMATION (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted)
● Wheel sensor
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0045X
Refer to BRC-8, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-49, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1810
DTC P0530 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[K9K]
DTC P0530 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22693
A

C
MBIB1536E
E

REFGERNT PRSS Idle Approximately 5.7 bar G
● No load
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS00460 H

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors I
P0530 ● CO.1: Short circuit to +12V or open circuit (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● CC.0: Short circuit to ground ● Refrigerant pressure sensor
J
NOTE:
● If DTC P0530 is displayed with DTC P0641, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.1
K
EC-1811
[K9K]
MBWA1563E
EC-1812
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
83 W [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5.0V
[Engine is running]
89 BR Refrigerant pressure sensor Approximately 2.3V
Sensor ground
107 Y ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.3V
● Idle speed
F

G
H
– Body ground (1)
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 2.
J
MBIB1520E
EC-1813
[K9K]
MBIB1536E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB1471E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC-1814
[K9K]
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
F

G
OK or NG

J
EC-1815
DTC P0560 BATTERY VOLTAGE
[K9K]
DTC P0560 BATTERY VOLTAGE PFP:22693

● Battery
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Battery terminal
P0560 ● 1.DEF: Above maximum threshold
● Alternator
● 2.DEF: Below threshold
● Incorrect jump starting
NOTE:
The DTC is declared present when the engine is running at above 1,000 rpm.
● Special notes:
EC-1816
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS004U4
EC
MBWA1571E
EC-1817
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
1. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE

2. Check battery voltage.
Voltage: Above 11V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Recharge the battery.
2. CHECK BATTERY TERMINALS

2. Check battery terminals condition.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair the battery terminals.
3. CHECK BATTERY AND ALTERNATOR

Check that the proper type of battery and type of alternator are installed.
Refer to, SC-5, "BATTERY" and SC-15, "CHARGING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace with a proper one.
4. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 22 and groound with
Voltage: Above 11V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
MBIB1461E
EC-1818
[K9K]
● 10A fuse EC
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse block (J/B)
C
6. CHECK ELECTRICAL PARTS DAMAGE D
Check the following for damage.

● Wiring harness and harness connectors for burn E
● Fuses for short
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END F
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
EC-1819
[K9K]
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0046A

BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors
P0571 ● CO.0: Open circuit or short circuit to ground (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
● 1.DEF: Signal absent ● Stop lamp switch
NOTE:
The DTC is declared present when the ignition switch is turned ON, when deceleratig or when the brake
pedal is depressed.
EC-1820
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0046C
EC
MBWA1565E
EC-1821
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0046D

– Brake pedal (2)
MBIB1346E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1558E

● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E7
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and IPDM E/R
EC-1822
[K9K]
3. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 5 and stop lamp switch terminal 4. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. D
NG >> GO TO 4.

F
G
5. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. I

K
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1823
[K9K]
Component Inspection BBS0046E
STOP LAMP SWITCH

● Brake pedal (2)
MBIB1346E

Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,

"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.
PBIB2103E
EC-1824
DTC P0604 ECM
[K9K]
A
Description BBS0046F

MBIB1517E
E

P0604 ECM MEMORY ● ECM F
NOTE:
G
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, it is impossible to stop and restart the engine. H
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0046I
1. CHECK INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE I
Check that all injector adjustment values are resistered correctly.

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Enter all injector adjustment values correctly. Refer to EC-1625, "Injector Adjustment Value Regis-
tration" . K
2. REPLACE ECM
L
1. Replace ECM.
M
tion" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1825
DTC P0606 ECM
[K9K]
Description BBS0046J

MBIB1517E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0046K

ECM
● 1.DEF: Analogue/digital converter
● 2.DEF: Injection calibration data
P0606 ● 3.DEF: Memory self-test ● ECM
● 4.DEF: Non refreshed watchdog
● 5.DEF: Interference on the injector control line
● 6.DEF: Watachdog activation
NOTE:
● Special note:
– If this DTC is present, the engine speed is set to 1,300 rpm, alouder sound is heard comimg from the
engine and malfunction indiocator (Red) lights up.
– When engine is stopped, malfunction indicator (Red) lights up.
1. CHECK DTC
Make sure that which malfunction (DTC second line indication) is displayed.
A 1.DEF, 3.DEF, 4.DEF or 6.DEF
B 2.DEF
C 5.DEF
A, B or C
A >> GO TO 2.
B >> GO TO 3.
C >> GO TO 5.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
tion" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1826
DTC P0606 ECM
[K9K]
3. CHECK INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT VALUE A
Check that all injector adjustment values are resistered correctly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. EC
NG >> Enter all injector adjustment values correctly. Refer to EC-1625, "Injector Adjustment Value Regis-
tration" .
C
4. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
D
tion" . E
>> INSPECTION END

F
5. CHECK INJECTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
Check injector control circuit for open and short. G
Refer to EC-1741, "Wiring Diagram" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. H
6. REPLACE ECM I
1. Replace ECM.
Re-communicating Function" . J
tion" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1827
DTC P062F ECM
[K9K]
DTC P062F ECM PFP:22693
Description BBS004UK

MBIB1517E
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004UL

ECM EEPROM MEMORY
P062F ● 1.DEF: Writing to EEPROM memory ● ECM
● 1.DEF: Reading to EEPROM memory
NOTE:
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, it is impossible to stop and restart the engine.
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004UM
1. CHECK BATTERY CABLE

Check the battery cable for damage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK BATTERY VALTAGE

Check the battery voltage.
Voltage: Above 11V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the ECM power supply and ground circuit. Perform EC-1699, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-1828
DTC P062F ECM
[K9K]
4. REPLACE ECM A
1. Replace ECM.
Re-communicating Function" . EC
tion" .
C
>> INSPECTION END
EC-1829
[K9K]

(The APP sensor 1 power supply circuit is shorted.)
(Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Turbosharger boost sensor circuit is shorted.)
(EGR volume control valve control position sensor circuit
is shorted.)
(Mass air flow sensor circuit is shorted.)
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
P0641 ● 1.DEF: Parameter at minimum level
● 2.DEF: Parameter at maximum level (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
● Turbosharger boost sensor
● EGR volume control valve control position sensor
NOTE:
● If DTC P0641 is displayed with DTC P0100, P0190, P0225, P0235, P0409, P0487, P0530, P0651,
P2120, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0641.
● Special notes:
– If this DTC is present, the engine stops immediately and cannnot be restarted.
– Malfuction indicator (Red) lights up.
EC-1830
[K9K]
LHD MODELS A
EC
MBWA1573E
EC-1831
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.

12 L/W
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)

Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
30 W
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
position sensor)
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
EC-1832
[K9K]
RHD MODELS
A
EC
MBWA1574E
EC-1833
[K9K]
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.

12 L/W
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)

Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
30 W
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
position sensor)
Sensor power supply
Sensor power supply
EC-1834
[K9K]

– Body ground (1)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1520E
E

F
connector (1).
G
H
I
MBIB1345E


OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
MBIB1468E
M
2. Disconnect ECM harness connecor.
Refe to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
EC-1835
[K9K]

Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
47 Fuel rail pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-1737
48 Turbocharger boost sensor terminal 1 EC-1764
49 EGR volume control valve control position sensor terminal 1 EC-1801
50 Mass air flow sensor terminal 5 EC-1723
83 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-1812
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK COMPONENTS
● Fuel rail pressure sensor (Refer to EC-1739, "Component Inspection" .)
● Turbocharger boost sensor (Refer to EC-1765, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
● EGR volume control valve control position sensor (Refer to EC-1799, "Component Inspection" .)
● Mass air flow sensor (Refer to EC-1726, "Component Inspection" .)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-85, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" or MTC-51, "COMPO-
NENT INSPECTION" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-1836
[K9K]
A
Description BBS004U5

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensors detect the accelera- EC
tor pedal position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the
signal to determine the amount of fuel to be injected.
C
PBIB1741E
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BBS004U6

(Engine stopped)
● Ignition switch: ON G
(Engine stopped)
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS004U7

H
APP SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors

(The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) I
P0651 ● CO.1: Open circuit or short circuit to +12V
● CC.0: Short circuit to ground
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
J
NOTE:
● Special notes: K
– If this DTC is present, the engine idle speed is set to 1,000 rpm, the engine performance is reduced, and
L
EC-1837
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS004U8
LHD MODELS
MBWA1554E
EC-1838
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.

12 L/W E
F
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
[Engine is running]
G
Sensor ground
H
Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
I
30 W J
K
EC-1839
[K9K]
RHD MODELS
MBWA1555E
EC-1840
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.

12 L/W E
F
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
[Engine is running]
G
Sensor ground
H
Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
I
30 W J
K
Diagnostic Procedure BBS004U9
1. CHCEK GROUND CONNECTIONS L

– Body ground (1)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
MBIB1520E
EC-1841
[K9K]
connector (1).
MBIB1345E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1597E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC-1842
[K9K]
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
D
F

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 9.
I
J
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection BBS004UA K
1. Disconnect APP sensor harness connector (1).
● Accelerator pedal position sensor (2) L
● Accelerator pedal (3)
MBIB1345E
EC-1843
[K9K]
2. Check resistance between the APP sensor terminals 2 and 4, 1
and 5.
Terminals Resistance
2 and 4: 1.7 ± 0.9 kΩ
1 and 5: 2.4 ± 1.2 kΩ
3. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly.
MBIB1489E
Removal and Installation BBS004UB
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-1844
DTC P0685 ECM RELAY
[K9K]
DTC P0685 ECM RELAY PFP:22693
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic BBS0046V

ECM RELAY CIRCUIT EC
P0685 ● 1.DEF: Permanent low signal (The ECM relay circuit is shorted.)
● 2.DEF: Permanent high signal ● ECM relay
C
EC-1845
DTC P0685 ECM RELAY
[K9K]
Wiring Diagram BBS0046X
MBWA1572E
EC-1846
DTC P0685 ECM RELAY
[K9K]
CAUTION: A
TERMI- EC
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
[Ignition switch ON] C
Approximately 1.4V
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
E
110 G (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure BBS0046Y F

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
with CONSULT-II or tester. H
drop to approximately 0V. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. J
NG (Battery voltage does not exist)>>GO TO 2.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more then a few seconds)>>GO TO
5. MBIB1463E
K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1171E
EC-1847
DTC P0685 ECM RELAY
[K9K]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 4.


3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 29 under the following con-
ditions.
MBIB1559E
CONDITION 1: Continuity should exist.

CONDITION 2: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Diode E64
EC-1848
DTC P0685 ECM RELAY
[K9K]
7. CHECK 20A FUSE A
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse.
2. Check 20A fuse
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 8.
C
D
OK or NG
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" . E

F
>> INSPECTION END G
EC-1849
[K9K]
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.

BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT ● Harness or connectors
P0703 ● 1.DEF: Signal absent (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
● 2.DEF: Inconsistency ● Stop lamp switch
NOTE:
The DTC is declared present when the ignition switch is ON, when decelerating or when the brake pedal
is depressed.
EC-1850
DTC P0703

Manual Hr15 Nissan

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Manual Hr15 Nissan

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

APPLICATION NOTICE PFP:00000

CR ENGINE AND HR ENGINE

DTC No. Index BBS002TA

If any of following part is replaced, always replace with new* one.

On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine BBS002TD

● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. E

● Do not disassemble ECM.

● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. H

● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors G

Tool name Description

Quick connector Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads

Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2

Two types of systems are used.

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Input/Output Signal Chart BBS003ZD

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

: Vehicle front : To previous page

FUEL CHECK VALVE E

2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.

This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of ISO 15031-5

Misfire (Possible three way catalyst

Emission-related Diagnostic Information BBS002TX

EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

SRT Set Timing

*1 EC-50 *2 EC-54 *3 EC-54

How to Set SRT Code

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

MI (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)

<Driving Pattern C>

Basic Inspection BBS002U4

– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING M

5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.

7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If

Fuel Pressure Check BBS002TU

1 EC-50 2 EC-54 *3 EC-54